MCWP 3-16.1

Artillery Operations

U.S. Marine Corps 

PCN 143 000093 00 
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

Headquarters United States Marine Corps

Washington, DC 20380-1775

29 May 2002

FOREWORD

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-16.1, Artillery Operations, provides

an overview of fundamentals, organization, support requirements, and tactical considerations used by Marine artillery regiments, battalions, and batteries in support of Marine

air-ground task force (MAGTF) operations.

This publication standardizes artillery procedures and provides guidelines for field artillery commanders and their staffs at all echelons of command for the efficient and effective exercise of artillery operations throughout the MAGTF. MCWP 3-16.1 also provides

guidance for the assignment of artillery missions, organization for combat, fire planning,

and tactical employment of artillery weapons. MCWP 3-16.1 embodies the Marine

Corps’ warfighting philosophy as established in Marine Corps Doctrinal Publication

(MCDP) 1, Warfighting, and MCDP 1-0, Marine Corps Operations, to establish a

dynamic, operational infrastructure that provides artillery support to Marine forces.

MCWP 3-16.1 supersedes Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM) 6-9, Marine Artillery

Support, dated 29 June 1993.

Reviewed and approved this date.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

EDWARD HANLON, JR.

Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps

Commanding General

Marine Corps Combat Development Command

Publication Control Number: 143 000093 00
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Fundamentals and Organization

Mission of Marine Artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Tactical Employment Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Combat Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Artillery Fire Support System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Organization for Combat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Supporting Commander’s Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Command Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Organic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Command Relationship Communications Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Senior to Subordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Adjacent Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Supporting to Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Reinforcing to Reinforced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Attached Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Tactical Missions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Direct Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Reinforcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

General Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

General Support-Reinforcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Nonstandard Tactical Missions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

On-Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Decentralized/Centralized Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Organization for Combat for MAGTF Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Chapter 2 Regiment Operations

Section I Regiment Organizational Structure

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Functions and Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Combat Service Support Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

General Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Health Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Messing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Survey and Meteorology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
iv _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Duties And Responsibilities of Regiment Operations Personnel . . . . . . . 2-3

Regiment Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Assistant Fire Support Coordinator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Regiment Operations Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Regiment Assistant Operations Officer/Fire Direction Officer/

Watch Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Target Information Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Fires Tactical Systems Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Regiment Operations Chief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Regiment Assistant Operations Chief/Watch Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Tactical Precepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Tactical Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Section II Command and Control Agencies

Fire Support Coordination Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Regiment Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Main Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Forward Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Administrative and Logistics Operation Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Alternate Division Command Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Alternate Regiment Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Continuity of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Alternate Division Command Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Alternate Regiment Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Actions upon Assumption of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Regiment Planning Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Regiment Fire Direction Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Fire Direction Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Tactical Fire Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Targeting and Counterfire Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Movement and Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Clearance to Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Request for Reinforcing Fires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Forms, Records, and Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Other Functions of the Regiment Fire Direction Center. . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Section III Regiment Survey

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Duties of the Regiment Survey Officer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Duties of the Survey Chief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Duties of the Chief of Party (Conventional and Position and 

Azimuth Determing System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Duties of the Survey Recorder/Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Duties of the Instrument Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Artillery Operations _______________________________________________________________________________________________ v 

Survey Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Regiment Survey Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Section IV Regiment Meteorology

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Ballistic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Fallout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Limited Source Observation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Duties of the Regiment Meteorology Officer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Duties of the Regiment Meteorology Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Coordination of Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Meteorological Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Meteorological Site Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Tactical Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Coordination of Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Supported Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Supporting Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Measuring Atmospheric Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Requirements and Dissemination of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Section V Counterbattery Radar Platoon

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

AN/TPQ-46A Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

AN/TPQ-37 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Radar Team Employment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Offensive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Defensive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Cueing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Zone Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Command and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Counterfire Headquarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Target Processing Center Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Target Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Target Selection Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Target Production Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Information Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Battle Damage Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Quickfire Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
vi _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Chapter 3 Movement and Positioning of the Regiment

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Reconnaissance Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Map Reconnaissance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Air Reconnaissance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Ground Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Reconnaissance for Movement of the Regiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Battalion Position Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Regiment Headquarters Echelons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Counterbattery Radar Platoon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Meteorology Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Route Reconnaissance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Route Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Selecting the Position (Advance Party Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Site Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Actions Prior to Occupation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Organizing the Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Occupying the Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Actions Upon Arrival of the Forward Combat Operations Center . . 3-4

Passage of Command and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Actions Upon Arrival of Main Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Chapter 4 The Artillery Defense Plan

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Combat Operations Center Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Evaluate the Threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Avoid Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Use Camouflage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Reduce Electronics Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Maintain Light and Noise Discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Reduce Weapons Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Establish a Track Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Use Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Practice Communications Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Displace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Conduct Terrain Analysis Using KOCOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Key Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Observation and Fields of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cover and Concealment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Obstacles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Avenues of Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ vii 

Provide Early Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Sentinel Posts and Listening Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Patrols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Monitoring the Tactical Situation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Other Measures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Make Defensive Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Organizing the Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Defensive Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Range Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Fortifications and Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Hardening of Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Reaction Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Coordinate with Adjacent Units for Mutual Support . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Execute Defensive Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Active and Passive Defensive Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Defense Against Air Attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

NBC Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Ground Attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Reconstituting the Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Special Considerations for Command Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Chapter 5 Battalion Operations

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Functions and Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Duties and Responsibilities of Battalion Operations Personnel . . . . . . . . 5-1

Battalion Commander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Battalion Liaison Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Battalion Operations Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Battalion Assistant Operations Officer/Fire Direction Officer/

Watch Officer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Battalion Operations Chief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Battalion Assistant Operations Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Tactical Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Battalion Combat Operations Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Battalion Fire Direction Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Centralized Tactical Fire Directoin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Decentralized Tactical Fire Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Provision for Continuous Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Fire Missions from Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Reinforcing Artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Movement and Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Other Battalion Fire Direction Center Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Special Missions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
viii ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Battalion Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Battalion Survey Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Survey Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Chief of Party (Conventional and Position and Azimuth 

Determining System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Survey Recorder/Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Battalion Survey Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Station Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Firing Position Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Priority of Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Reconnaissance for Movement of the Battalion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Planning the Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Movement Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Battalion Reconnaissance Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Battalion Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Battery Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Additional Positioning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Chapter 6 Firing Battery Operations

Section I Fundamentals

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Functions and Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Duties Of Firing Battery Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Battery Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Executive Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Liaison Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fire Direction Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Assistant Executive Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

First Sergeant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Battery Gunnery Sergeant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Operations Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Assistant Operations Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Motor Transport Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Ammunition Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Local Security Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Communications Chief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Howitzer Section Chief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Section II Fire Direction

Fire Battery Procedures with the Battery Computer System . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Gunnery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fire Direction Center Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fire Direction Center Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Artillery Operations ______________________________________________________________________________________________ ix 

Section III Battery Operations Center

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Passage of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Passing Control Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Section IV Gun Line Procedures

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Special Missions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Priority Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Final Protective Fires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Fire Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Direct Fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Out of Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Section V Movement and Positioning of the Firing Battery

Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Reconnaissance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Selecting the New Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Firing Position Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Types of Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Advance Party. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Assembly of the Advance Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Firing Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 10

Advance Party Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Organizing the New Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Movement of the Main Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Planning the Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Other Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Conducting the Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Occupying the Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Deliberate Occupation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Hasty Occupation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Night Occupation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Emergency Occupation (Hip Shoot). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Local Security and Patrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Hasty Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Emergency Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Chapter 7 Force Artillery

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Concept of Employment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Command Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Liaison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Force Artillery Intelligence Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
x ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Target Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Counterfire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Meteorological Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Survey Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Logistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Chapter 8 Artillery Communications 

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Forms of Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Means of Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Communications System Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Communication Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Artillery Regiment Communication Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Division Command Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Division Tactical Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Division Artillery Air Spot Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Division Fire Support Coordination Net 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Division Fire Support Coordination Net 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Division Communication Coordination Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Division Intelligence Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Artillery Regiment Command Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Artillery Regiment Tactical Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Artillery Regiment Fire Direction Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Artillery Regiment Survey/Met Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Artillery Regiment Radar Telling Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Regiment Communication Coordination Net . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Battalion Communication Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Battalion Command Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Battalion Fire Direction Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Conduct of Fire Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Artillery Battery Communication Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Artillery Battery Command Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Artillery Conduct of Fire Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

DS Artillery Battalion Communication Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Alternate Uses of Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Chapter 9 Artillery Tactical Logistics

Section I Fundamentals

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Logistics Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Artillery Operations ______________________________________________________________________________________________ xi 

Artillery S-4 Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Supervising the Ammunition Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Maintaining Ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Recording and Disseminating Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Coordinating Transportation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Supervising Management Maintenance Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Concept of Support and Logistic Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Organic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

External Combat Service Support Organizations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Section II Planning

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

MAGTF Artillery Officer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Artillery Commander and Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

METT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Enemy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Terrain and Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Troops and Support Available-Time Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Evaluating Logistic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Class I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Class II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Class III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Class IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Class V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Class VII. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Class VIII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Class IX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Class X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Embarkation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Helicopter Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Fixed-Wing Air Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Movement by Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Motor Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Supply Support Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Maintenance Contact Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Recovery and Evacuation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Health Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
xii _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Section III Execution

Battalion Logistic Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Decentralized Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Centralized Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Unit Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Point Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Supply Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Pull System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Push System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Organization of Logistic Trains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Battalion Trains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Regiment Trains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Positioning Trains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Conducting Train Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Refueling Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ammunition Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

CSSE Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Artillery Battalion Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Pre-positioned Ammunition Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Unit Ammunition Supply Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Ammunition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Maintenance Site Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Recovery and Salvage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Captured Materiel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Equipment Destruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Cannabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Engineer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Battery Position Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Vehicle Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Weapon Emplacements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Ammunition Shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Chapter 10 Developing the Artillery Fire Plan

Section I Essential Fire Support Tasks and

Essential Field Artillery Tasks Relationship

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Essential Fire Support Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Essential Field Artillery Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ xiii 

Section II The Marine Corps Planning Process as it

Applies to the Artillery Fire Plan

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Mission Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Analyze Higher Headquarter’s Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Conduct the Initial Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace . . . . 10-4

Determine Specified, Implied, and Essential Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Review Available Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Determine Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Identify Critical Facts and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Determine Initial Commander’s Critical Information

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Determine the Initial Reconnaissance Annex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Plan Use of Available Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Write the Restated Mission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Conduct a Mission Analysis Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Develop the Initial Commander’s Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Issue the Commander’s Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Issue a Warning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Review Facts and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Course of Action Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Array Friendly Forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Assess Relative Combat Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Refine Center of Gravity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Develop Initial Courses of Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Course of Action Graphic and Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Course of Action Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Prepare Course of Action Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Select/Modify Courses of Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Course of Action Wargaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Step 1: Consider the Commander’s Wargaming Guidance

and Evaluation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Step 2: Gather the Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Step 3: List Friendly Force List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Step 4: List Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Step 5: List and Graphically Display Known Critical Events

and Decision Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Step 6: Select the War Game Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Step 7: Select Method to Record and Display Results. . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Step 8: Wargame the Battle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Step 9: Refine Staff Estimates and Contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Step 10: Prepare Course of Action War Game Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
xiv ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Course of Action Comparison and Decision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Course of Action Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Course of Action Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Commander’s Decision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Prepare Concept of Artillery Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Issue the Warning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Orders Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Preparation of the Order or Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Order Reconciliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Orders Crosswalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Commander’s Approval of Order or Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Orders Brief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Rehearsals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Section III Artillery and the Intelligence Preparation

of the Battlespace Process

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Pre-Battle Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Threat Maneuver Force Doctrine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Threat Artillery Doctrine and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Threat Air Defense Artillery Doctrine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Terrain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Soil Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Mobility Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Intervisibility Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Avenues of Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Key and Decisive Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Position Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

The Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay and

Course of Action Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Situation Templating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Threat Artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Threat Maneuver Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Threat Avenues of Approach and Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Threat Chemical Strikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Rear Area Threats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Integrating the Situation Template into Course of Action

Development and Wargaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Event Templating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Decision Support Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Section IV Sample Artillery Fire Plan

Tab B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C

(Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ xv 

Chapter 11 Special Operational Environments

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Mountain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Desert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Jungle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Riverine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

River Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Expeditionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Helicopterborne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Urban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Artillery Raid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Fire Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Appendixes

A Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

B Artillery Weapons and Munitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

C Passage of Command and Control/Watch Officer’s Checklist. . . . . . C-1

D Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

E Logistic Planning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

F Heliborne Artillery Raids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

G Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

H References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

Figures

1-1 Tactical Missions (Inherent Responsibilities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2-1 Artillery Regiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-2 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-3 Example Regiment COC Site Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-4 Example FDC/COC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2-5 Example Request for Reinforcing Fires Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2-6 Attack Guidance Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

5-1 Artillery Battalion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-2 Example Battalion COC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6-1 Firing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-2 Example Battery FDC Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6-3 Advance Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6-4 Example Battery Commander’s Position Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

8-1 Example Artillery Regiment Guard Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8-2 Example Direct Support Artillery Battalion Guard Chart . . . . . . . . 8-7

8-3 Example General Support Artillery Battalion Guard Chart . . . . . . . 8-8
xvi ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Figures (Continued)

8-4 Example General Support-Reinforcing Artillery

Battalion Guard Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8-5 Example Artillery Regiment Communication Structure . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8-6 Example Direct Support Artillery Battalion

Communications Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

9-1 CSS Map Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9-2 Replenishment and Repair Point Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

10-1 Essential Fire Support Tasks and Essential Field

Artillery Tasks Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10-2 Example Essential Field Artillery Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-3 Steps in the Marine Corps Planning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-4 Mission Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

10-5 Commander’s Critical Information Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10-6 Example Mission Analysis Briefing Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

10-7 Mission Analysis Briefing Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

10-8 Orders Process for Mission Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

10-9 Course of Action Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

10-10 Artillery Scheme of Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

10-11 Course of Action Wargaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

10-12 Wargaming Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

10-13 Sample COA Synchronization Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

10-14 Staff Contributions to Wargaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

10-15 Course of Action Comparison and Decision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

10-16 Advantages and Disadvantages Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

10-17 Comparison Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

10-18 Orders Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

10-19 Example Format of the Artillery Fire Plan Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

10-20 Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

10-21 Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay with

Restricted and Severely Restricted Terrain Marked . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

10-22 Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay with 

Intervisibility Lines Identified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

10-23 Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay Depicting Mobility

Corridors, Avenues of Approach, Key Terrain, and

Possible Position Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

10-24 Overlay Depicting Critical Targets and Range Fans . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

10-25 Decision Support Template and Execution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

10-26 Fire Planning Using the MCPP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ xvii 

Figures (Continued)

ENCLOSURE 1 (Artillery Target List) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan)

to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations)

to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

ENCLOSURE 2 (Artillery Synchronization Matrix) to TAB B

(Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to

ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . 10-41

ENCLOSURE 3 (Artillery Target Overlay) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan)

to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations)

to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

ENCLOSURE 4 (Schedule of Fire) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan)

to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations)

to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target Acquisition) to TAB B (Artillery Fire 

Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations)

to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

EXHIBIT 1 (Visibility Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

EXHIBIT 2 (Capabilities Overlay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

EXHIBIT 3 (Radar Deployment Order). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

ENCLOSURE 6 (Survey/Met Plan) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan)

to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations)

to Operation Order (Number) (U). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

D-1 Fire Capabilities Report (FIRECAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D-2 Displacement Report (DISREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D-3 Command Post Report (CPREP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D-4 Movement Order Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

D-5 Situation Report (SITREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

D-6 Rapid Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

D-7 Radar Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D-8 SPOTREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

D-9 Shelling Report (SHELLREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

D-10 Size, Activity, Location, Unit, Time, and

Equipment (SALUTE) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

D-11 Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

F-1 Example Raid Execution Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16

F-2 Example Planning Considerations Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-17

F-3 Example Raid Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-18

F-4 Helicopter Landing Zone Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20

F-5 Example Artillery Raid Landing Zone Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20

F-6 Example Howitzer Pick-Up Point Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20
xviii ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Tables

2-1 Target Acquisition Radar Planning Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2-2 AN/TPQ-37 CEP Accuracies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

5-1 Battle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

9-1 Environmental Impacts on CSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9-2 Classes of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9-3 Planning Data for Rations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9-4 Water Planning Data for Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-5 Transportation Planning Data for Drummed Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-6 Estimates of Daily Fuel Usage Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-7 Consumption Rates and Capacities for Vehicles/Equipment . . . . . . 9-9

9-8 Class IV Transportation Planning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-9 Ammunition-Carrying Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

9-10 Notional Composition of Battalion Trains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

9-11 Artillery Vehicle Position Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

B-1 Fuzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B-2 Characteristics of Selected Artillery Weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B-3 Projectiles and Propelling Charges (M198/M109A5/A6) . . . . . . . . B-7

B-4 Projectiles and Propelling Charges (M109A2/A3/A4) . . . . . . . . . . B-8

E-1 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment, Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E-2 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment,

Selected Major Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E-3 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment, Class V

Small Arms Combat Planning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2

E-4 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E-5 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, 

Selected Major Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

E-6 Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, Class V

Small Arms Combat Planning Rates Composite Threat . . . . . . . . . E-4

E-7 M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E-8 M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Selected Major Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E-9 M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Class V 

Small Arms Combat Planning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

E-10 M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Class V Artillery

Ammunition Combat Planning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

E-11 Artillery Battalion, Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E-12 Artillery Battalion, Selected Major Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

E-13 Artillery Battalion, Class V Small Arms Combat Planning Rates. E-9

E-14 Artillery Battalion, Class V Artillery 

Ammunition Combat Planning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

E-15 Ammunition Packing Dimensions, Artillery Ammunition . . . . . . E-11

E-16 Ammunition Packing Dimensions, Small Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ xix 

Tables (Continued)

F-1 Notional Artillery Battery Lift (Advanced Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

F-2 Helicopter Life Capacity Planning Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F-3 Cargo Net Capacity Planning Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F-4 Example Artillery Raid Ammunition Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

F-5 Example Artillery Raid Task Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

F-6 Helicopter Lift Requirement Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13

F-7 Example Helicopter Wave and Serial Assignment Table . . . . . . . . F-14
CHAPTER 1

FUNDAMENTALS AND ORGANIZATION

Mission of Marine Artillery

The mission of artillery is to furnish close and

continuous fire support by neutralizing, destroying

or suppressing targets that threaten the success of

the supported unit. To accomplish its mission,

artillery has the following responsibilities:

l Provide timely, close, accurate, and continuous

fire support.

l Provide depth to combat by attacking hostile

reserves, restricting movement, providing longrange support for reconnaissance forces, and disrupting threat command and control (C2) systems

and logistics installations; i.e., shaping the battlespace.

l Deliver counterfire within the range of the

weapon systems to ensure freedom of action of

the ground forces.

Tactical Employment Considerations

Basic considerations for the tactical employment

of artillery are as follows:

l Fire support requirement.

l Ability to mass.

l Exploitation of weapon capability.

l Facilitate future operations.

l Exploitation of mobility.

Combat Tasks

Artillery has the following combat tasks:

l Coordinate artillery support.

l Acquire targets.

l Deliver lethal and nonlethal munitions.

l Survive.

l Communicate.

l Maneuver (move).

l Maintain and resupply.

l Maintain trained and ready personnel.

Artillery Fire Support System

Artillery has three components that function

together to create an effective fire support system:

target acquisition, weapon systems, and C2

systems. Target acquisition is detecting, identifying, and locating a target in sufficient detail to

effectively employ munitions. The weapon

systems provide the means to engage the target.

The C2 systems provide the required facilities,

equipment, communications, and personnel that

enable the commander to plan, direct, and control

fires. See MCWP 3-16, Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element, for detailed

information on the artillery fire support system and

its individual components. See appendix A for

detailed Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data

System (AFATDS) information. See appendix B

for artillery weapons and munitions information. 

Organization for Combat

Artillery is allocated through a process called

organization for combat. Organization for combat

places an artillery unit within an organization; i.e.,

establishes a command relationship and assigns the

unit a tactical mission. The supported force

commander uses this process to allocate artillery

assets to meet the needs of the force as a whole

and the needs of the force’s subordinate units. 
1-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

The supported force commander receives

guidance from the supporting artillery

commander. Organization for combat is established in the planning phase and is in consonance

with the supported commander’s concept of

operations. It changes as the tactical situation

dictates, but it will address the following:

l Adequate support for the committed maneuver

elements.

l Adequate weight to support the main effort or

to strengthen the most vulnerable area.

l Immediately available artillery for the commander to influence the battlespace.

l Ability to respond to unforeseen events, transition from one mission to another, and facilitate

future operations.

l Ability to maintain the maximum central control.

Supporting Commander’s Role

The artillery commander must know, understand,

and anticipate the supported commander’s actions

and fire support requirements. When artillery is

attached to a supported unit, the artillery

commander is a subordinate commander and a

special staff officer of the supported unit

commander. The artillery commander must understand the scheme of maneuver and provide artillery fire support to the maneuver commander. The

artillery commander provides fire support expertise to the supported commander and the force

fires coordination center (FFCC)/fire support

coordination center (FSCC). He does this by direct

personal contact, through liaison officers, and by

encouraging staff liaison.

Command Relationships

Command relationships define the degree of

authority exercised by one commander over

another. They are primarily based on the factors of

mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and

support available-time available (METT-T). The

ground combat element (GCE) commander

exercises control of artillery in his organization

through the commander of the artillery unit. For

example, the decision to employ an artillery unit for

a specific mission is made by the GCE commander;

selecting the specific artillery unit to perform the

mission is made by the artillery commander. The

command relationship given (or inherent) to an

artillery unit may be organic or attached.

Organic

An organic relationship occurs when an artillery

unit is assigned to and forms an essential part of a

larger military organization. For example, the artillery regiment is organic to the Marine division.

Attached

In an attached relationship, units or personnel are

placed in an organization temporarily to augment

tactical objectives. This is often referred to as tactical tailoring. The higher artillery commander will

lose some capabilities to meet his fire support

requirements by attachment. The commander

receiving the attachment exercises the same degree

of C2 over attachments as exercised over the units

and personnel organic to his command, subject to

the limitations stated in the attachment order. An

attachment order should specify supply and

maintenance requirements in terms of what the

receiving unit and parent unit will provide. The

parent formation, unit or organization will

normally retain the responsibility for transfer and

promotion of personnel. Although attachment

places the artillery unit within the organization, the

artillery unit must still be assigned a tactical

mission. There are several types of attachments:

attached to a supported unit, attached to a

reinforced unit, groupment, and task-organized.

Attached to a Supported Unit

Artillery is attached to a supported unit when artillery requirements cannot be adequately provided

by the parent artillery organization and control
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 1-3 

requirements compel establishing a command

relationship between the supported and supporting

commander. Artillery units are normally not

attached to battalion-sized or smaller maneuver

units unless distance, communications or other

factors do not allow the parent artillery headquarters to exercise adequate control over the artillery

unit. An example is an artillery battery attached to

the GCE of a Marine Expeditionary Unit (MEU).

Attached to a Reinforced Unit

Artillery may be attached to another artillery unit

for reinforcement. For example, an artillery battalion supporting a reinforced infantry regiment may

have attached firing batteries or counterbattery

radar (CBR) platoon detachments.

Groupment

Groupment occurs when a suitable artillery

headquarters is unavailable; an artillery battalion

or battery may be attached to another of like size to

form an artillery groupment. Artillery groupments

are temporary formations used when one unit must

exercise greater administrative and logistical

control over another unit than is inherent in a

reinforcing mission. The senior commander of the

two units is the groupment commander, who

assigns missions to the subordinate unit. The

groupment uses the standing operating procedures

(SOPs) of the groupment commander. The groupment also carries the numerical designation of the

headquarters of the groupment commander; e.g.,

1st Battalion Group, 11th Marines.

Task-Organized

Artillery may be task-organized to accomplish a

specific task or mission. Task organization can

occur during certain phases or a given duration of

an operation. This may include designating an

operating force, support staff or logistics package

of specific size and composition. Some considerations for task-organizing include—but are not

limited to—training, experience, equipment,

sustainability, operating environment, the threat,

and mobility. 

Support

A support relationship is established by a senior

commander between subordinate commanders

when one organization should aid, protect,

complement or sustain another force while still

under the command of its parent headquarters. For

example, force artillery has a support relationship

with the Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF).

Command Relationship Communications 

Responsibilities

Senior to Subordinate

Communications between a supporting and a

supported unit is the responsibility of the

senior commander.

Adjacent Units

Communications between adjacent units is the

responsibility of the senior commander. 

Supporting to Supported

Communications between a supporting and a

supported unit is the responsibility of the supporting unit commander.

Reinforcing to Reinforced

Communications between a reinforcing and a

reinforced unit is the responsibility of the reinforcing unit commander. 

Attached Units

Communications between a unit and an attached

unit is the responsibility of the commander of the

unit to which the attachment is made.

Tactical Missions

A tactical mission defines the inherent fire support

responsibilities of an artillery unit, normally a
1-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

battalion, to a supported unit or to another artillery

unit. All Marine cannon battalions can perform any

of the four tactical missions: direct support (DS),

reinforcing (R), general support (GS), and general

support-reinforcing (GS-R). An artillery unit

assigned a tactical mission remains under the

command of the higher artillery commander. Inherent responsibilities for each type of tactical mission

help provide clear, concise instructions to a supporting artillery unit. See figure 1-1.

Direct Support 

The DS mission requires a unit to furnish close and

continuous fires to a single supported unit,

normally a regiment or separate maneuver battalion. The artillery unit commander with a DS

mission will position his firing units to deliver fires

in the zone of action/sector of the supported unit,

plan fires, and maintain continuous communications with the liaison team and forward observer

(FO) teams located with the supported unit. He is

responsible for immediate replacements for

casualty losses of the liaison section.

The fires of a DS unit can be requested for

other purposes. However, if these fires conflict

with the delivery of fires to the supported unit,

the supported unit will have priority. Normally,

one artillery battalion is considered minimum

adequate support for an infantry regiment. Calls

for fire are answered in two methods based on

the needs of the supported unit: autonomous

and centralized.

Arty Unit

with Tactical

Mission of...

Answers

Calls for

Fire in

Priority

From...

Has As Its

Zone of

Fire...

Furnishes

Forward

Observers...

Establishes

Liaison

With...

Establishes

Comm 

With...

Is

Positioned

By...

Has Its

Fires

Planned By...

DIRECT 

SUPPORT

1. Supported unit.

2. Own observers.

3. Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Zone of 

supported unit.

To each 

company-sized 

maneuver 

element of 

supported unit.

Supported unit

(down to battalion level).

Supported 

unit.

Unit commander as 

deemed necessary or

ordered by higher 

artillery 

headquarters.

Develops own 

fire plan.

REINFORCING 1. Reinforced unit.

2. Own observers.

3. Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Zone of fire of 

reinforced unit.

No requirement. Reinforced 

unit.

Reinforced 

unit.

Reinforced unit or 

ordered by higher 

artillery 

headquarters.

Reinforced unit.

GENERAL 

SUPPORT

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Zone of 

supported unit.

No inherent 

responsibility.

No inherent 

responsibility.

No inherent 

responsibility.

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

GENERAL 

SUPPORTREINFORCING

1. Higher artillery 

headquarters.

2. Reinforced unit.

3. Own observers.

Zone of 

supported unit to 

include zone of 

fire of reinforced 

unit.

No requirement. Reinforced 

unit.

Reinforced 

unit.

Higher artillery 

headquarters or 

reinforced unit 

subject to prior 

approval by higher 

artillery 

headquarters.

Higher artillery 

headquarters.

Figure 1-1. Tactical Missions (Inherent Responsibilities).
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 1-5 

Autonomous

Each firing battery may have its own conduct of

fire (COF) net, and each net is monitored by the

battalion fire direction center (FDC).

Centralized

The battalion FDC may establish multiple COF

nets, with firing batteries directed to respond to

calls for fire received on a designated net and to

fire missions assigned by the battalion FDC.

Reinforcing 

An R mission requires a unit to respond directly

to requests for fire from another artillery unit.

This mission is used to reinforce the fires of a

unit with a DS mission. More than one reinforcing unit can reinforce a DS unit; however, a

reinforcing unit can only reinforce one DS unit at

a time. Reinforcing artillery receives its zone of

fire and fire missions from the reinforced DS

unit. The reinforcing unit commander positions

his firing units in the position areas (PAs) identified by the reinforced unit or as ordered by higher

artillery headquarters.

General Support 

The GS mission requires a unit to support the force

as a whole and be prepared to support any subordinate element. The higher artillery headquarters

controls the fires of a unit in GS. The zone of fire

may be the zone of action/sector of the force as a

whole or a specific portion. GS units provide the

GCE immediately available firepower to influence

the battle or to allocate to subordinate commands

to influence widely separated actions.

General Support-Reinforcing 

The GS-R mission has distinct and separate parts.

An artillery unit with this mission will conduct

operations in a GS role and support the force as a

whole; or the artillery unit will take on the

reinforcing role and answer calls for fire from a

designated artillery unit in DS. The GS tactical

mission takes priority over the reinforcing mission.

To increase responsiveness, a designated net

(quick-fire channel) may be established between

the GS-R unit and the reinforced DS unit. This

tactical mission is considered the most flexible

standard tactical mission.

Nonstandard Tactical Missions

When fire support requirements cannot be met or

conveyed by one of the standard tactical

missions, a nonstandard tactical mission may be

assigned. A nonstandard mission changes or

limits one or more of the inherent responsibilities

of a standard tactical mission. The stipulations

should not degrade the ability of a unit to accomplish the other inherent responsibilities of the

standard mission. The DS mission should not be

modified. The following is an example of a

nonstandard tactical mission:

First battalion (Bn) is GS to the division and will

fire missions to support the division commanding

general (CG) first, but second priority in calls for

fire (PCFF) is to light armored reconnaissance

battalion (LAR Bn). Positioning and communications of the battalion are initially established to

support LAR Bn as the main effort.

On-Order

The on-order (O/O) mission serves as a warning

order to alert a unit of an anticipated change to its

tactical mission. This allows artillery commanders to plan and initiate the preparation for transition to the new mission. Assignment of an O/O

1st Bn, 10th Mar (155, T):GS, 2d PCFF LAR Bn 

until 031600 AUG
1-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

mission must consider the positioning and

ammunition requirements for that mission. Often,

the O/O mission has a nonstandard stipulation;

e.g., do not expend more than a specified amount

of ammunition. The higher artillery commander

gives his subordinate commanders as much

warning as possible of the new mission’s anticipated time of execution. The following is an

example of an O/O mission:

Decentralized/Centralized Control

When organizing artillery for combat, the most

effective control is centralized at the highest level

consistent with the fire support capabilities and

requirements for the overall mission. Centralized

control permits flexibility in providing artillery

support to the force as a whole and to its subordinate units. Centralized control is accomplished

through GS and GS-R missions and centralized

fire control. Decentralized control makes artillery

responsive to the needs of the frontline. Decentralized control is accomplished by the DS mission

and decentralized fire control. The optimum

degree of control varies with the tactical situation.

The following guidelines may be used when

allocating tactical missions to artillery units:

l Decentralized in the offense: more DS and R

than GS and GS-R.

l Centralized in the defense: more GS and GS-R

than DS and R.

Organization for Combat for 

MAGTF Operations

Artillery support for the MEU is normally found in

the GCE. It is provided to the battalion landing

team (BLT) and is typically a firing battery

employed with towed howitzers and attached

support; e.g., communications, maintenance, and a

survey and manual meteorology capability. The

M198 has the range, lethality, and ammunition

variety suitable to sustain operations ashore. The

MEU command element (CE) has artillery officers serving as the target information officer and as

the fire support officer (FSO).

Marine Expeditionary Brigade (MEB) artillery

support is normally that support provided to the

regimental landing team (RLT). It typically

consists of an artillery battalion employed with

towed howitzers and attached support; e.g.,

communications, maintenance, and a survey and

manual meteorology capability. The artillery

battalion commander is the fire support coordinator (FSC) for the RLT.

MEF artillery support is normally that support

provided to the division. However, it can be

augmented by additional artillery support, usually in

the form of force artillery, attachment of a United

States Marine Corps Reserve (USMCR) battalion,

artillery from other Marine divisions or artillery

from other external sources, i.e., Army units or

coalition forces. The MEF commander will designate a force fires coordinator (FFC). The MEF CE

has two artillery officers serving as assistant FFCs.

1st Bn, 14th Mar (155, T):R 2d Bn, 14th Mar (155, T)
CHAPTER 2

REGIMENT OPERATIONS

SECTION I. REGIMENT

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

Mission

The mission of the artillery regiment is to furnish

close and continuous fire support by neutralizing, destroying or suppressing targets that

threaten the success of the division.

Functions and Employment

Each MAGTF’s GCE has an artillery component.

At division level, artillery is organized into an

artillery regiment. The artillery regiment and its

elements can employ with and support the GCE of

any MAGTF. Artillery supports the operations of

other MAGTF elements as required.

The standard artillery regiment will have a

headquarters battery and four artillery battalions

to support the GCE of a MEF. See figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1. Artillery Regiment.

The headquarters battery has functional staff

groupings to assist the regiment commander

control operations and provide combat service

support (CSS) and administrative support of the

regiment. See figure 2-2 on page 2-2. Headquarters battery provides the equipment and personnel

for the regiment’s command echelons. It also

provides personnel and equipment to the division

FSCC. Headquarters battery personnel may be

employed to augment an artillery battalion

operating independently of the regiment.

The regiment headquarters may be employed in

two echelons: a main echelon, which has the staff

and equipment to direct tactical operations; and

the rear echelon, which has the staff and equipment to direct sustainment operations. A forward

echelon may be formed from the staff and equipment of the main echelon for incremental

displacement of the main echelon. Combat operations centers (COCs) are formed at each echelon

to plan, direct, control, and coordinate assigned

functions for the commander. The regiment

commander positions himself where he can best

exercise C2 of the regiment and function as both

the division artillery officer and FSC. 

The regiment commander organizes for combat

based on the GCE commander’s guidance. Each

artillery battalion is then assigned a tactical

mission, which defines its inherent fire support

responsibilities. The regiment main COC

performs tactical fire direction, targeting, and

counterfire functions. The hub of artillery operations is the FDC, normally located at the main or

forward COC. Communications are established

with subordinate units and higher/supported unit

headquarters. Normally, one of the artillery

battalion COCs will be designated as the alternate

regiment command post (CP). A regiment COC,
2-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

with personnel and/or equipment augmentation,

may be used as the alternate division CP for a

limited period.

Combat Service Support Capabilities

The CSS capability of the regiment is the sum of

the capabilities of the regiment headquarters

battery and its battalions. 

Maintenance

Maintenance is a continual, concentrated effort by

all personnel in an artillery unit on a wide

spectrum of equipment. Artillery battalions

perform organizational maintenance on all equipment except fire control. The regiment performs

intermediate maintenance (field) on electronics

systems within the command and provides maintenance contact teams (MCTs) to support subordinate units. Intermediate field maintenance

Figure 2-2. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment. 
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-3 

exceeding the capability of the regiment is

obtained from maintenance support teams (MSTs)

or maintenance facilities of the force service

support group (FSSG).

Supply

The regiment headquarters battery and each

battalion perform all supply functions to some

degree. Particular emphasis is on Class I, III, V,

and IX supply. External supply support is

obtained from the FSSG. When artillery is

attached to another unit, artillery may obtain

supplies from the unit to which attached within

that unit’s capability.

Transportation

Artillery units can move their personnel, equipment, and limited supplies using organic assets.

External support may be required to supplement

such tasks as hauling Class V (ammunition)

supplies. Artillery units can be transported by

landing craft, transport aircraft, and, to a limited

extent, by helicopter.

General Engineering

The regiment has significant organic engineering

capabilities. Organic equipment includes utilities

equipment (3 to 60 kilowatt generators) and earth

moving equipment (bulldozers). The regiment

engineer equipment platoon also has forklifts and

decontamination equipment. The regiment

commander distributes engineer assets to support

artillery operations. The division combat engineer

battalion and the FSSG engineer support battalion

provide additional support, as required.

Health Services

Artillery units render limited routine treatment,

first aid, and emergency medical care. Each firing

battery has corpsmen assigned; battalions and

regiments have aid stations. The regiment

medical section supports the regiment headquarters and provides technical supervision and

coordination of all medical activities within the

regiment. The FSSG provides medical care

exceeding the capability of the aid stations and

also provides dental care.

Services

Artillery units receive services such as postal,

disbursing, law enforcement, legal, graves registration, civil affairs, exchange, and information

systems from the FSSG. Control over these

services is decentralized. The artillery unit has

limited enemy prisoner of war (EPW) and civil

internee handling capability consisting of collecting and evacuating personnel to the FSSG. When

a qualified interrogator is unavailable, EPWs,

foreign nationals, refugees, and repatriates may

be questioned by artillery intelligence personnel

for information of immediate tactical value.

Messing

Messing capability (preparing and cooking

rations) exists at regiment and battalion levels.

Survey and Meteorology

Survey and meteorology (met) data are necessary for accurate artillery fires. Artillery

regiments and battalions maintain survey capabilities. The regiment headquarters battery has a met

section that provides electronic and visual met

data to support artillery operations.

Duties and Responsibilities of 

Regiment Operations Personnel

Regiment Commander

The regiment commander controls the operations

of his regiment. He also functions as the division

artillery officer and division FSC.

As the division artillery officer, the regiment

commander advises the division commander and

his staff. He determines the requirements for
2-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

artillery support and recommends the organization for combat. The regiment commander is also

concerned with artillery ammunition, target

acquisition, met, survey, and training. He

maintains situational awareness of the threat. 

As the division FSC, the regiment commander

advises the division commander and his staff on

fire support coordination, including fire support

coordination training. He is also responsible for

the operations of the division FSCC, and has two

assistant fire support coordinators (AFSCs). 

Assistant Fire Support Coordinator

AFSCs provide artillery representation to the

division FSCC. These special staff officers have

individual responsibilities and access to the

division commander and his staff. Their specific

duties include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Advise the commander on fire support.

l Coordinate the preparation of estimates of

supportability.

l Incorporate the targeting process into fire

support planning. 

l Provide clearance on requests for fire missions

and air strikes.

l Disseminate target information.

l Execute the attack of targets from the targeting

process according to attack guidance. 

Regiment Operations Officer

In addition to fighting the regiment, duties are—

l Recommend artillery organization for combat.

l Recommend attack guidance.

l Guide the survey, met, and radar efforts of the

regiment.

l Develop the artillery estimate of supportability.

l Plan future operations.

Regiment Assistant Operations 

Officer/Fire Direction Officer/Watch Officer

Two assistant operations officers/fire direction

officers (FDOs) are assigned to the regiment. They

divide the watch based on operational requirements to permit continuous operations. Duties

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Prepare Tab B (Artillery Fire Plan) to Appendix 19 (Fire Support) to Annex C (Operations)

of the division operation order (OPORD).

l Develop and execute the artillery execution matrix.

l Coordinate plans and positioning with maneuver

units.

l Supervise all COC functions.

l Perform tactical fire direction.

l Execute current operations.

l Maintain the plans map.

l Brief the commanding officer (CO), S-3,

oncoming watch officers, and others using the

watch officer’s checklist.

Target Information Officer 

The regiment target information officer is a

special staff officer responsible for all targeting

matters. He assists the regiment commander in

his duties as the division FSC on intelligence

preparation of the battlespace (IPB) and developing targeting products used by the division FSCC.

Further responsibilities include the following: 

l Produce high-value target (HVT) list, target

selection standards, high pay-off target (HPT)

list, and the attack guidance matrix.

l Coordinate with the G-2 and target intelligence

officer (TIO) during the execution of the

intelligence collection process to synchronize

target acquisition agencies (radar, unmanned

aerial vehicle (UAV), etc.).

l Ensure the identification, dissemination, and

engagement of targets to support the maneuver

commander.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-5 

l Report to higher and subordinate elements

battle damage assessment (BDA) and

munitions effectiveness.

Fires Tactical Systems Officer 

The regiment fire tactical systems officer (FTSO)

is responsible for tactical and technical information flow in a digital environment. He should

have detailed knowledge of all fire support tactical systems (AFATDS, interim fire support

automated system [IFSAS], tactical combat

operations [TCO], theater battle management

core system [TBMCS], etc.). He advises and

recommends to the commander how to use these

tactical data systems. His duties include, but are

not limited to, the following:

l Coordinate with the division target information

office on producing target selection standards,

attack guidance matrix, and HPT list.

l Assist the S-3 in developing the Artillery Fire

Plan based on information from the target

information officer.

l Assist the division FSCC with producing Tab E

(Fire Support Communications/Marine Corps

Fire Support System [MCFSS] Plan) of

Appendix 19, Annex C.

l Develop criteria to implement targeting products in digital systems.

l Ensure dissemination of fire support information to appropriate agencies.

Regiment Operations Chief

The regiment operations chief is the principal

assistant to the operations officer. His duties

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Assist the operations officer in planning.

l Coordinate survey, met, and radar support.

l Coordinate and provide information for the

Fire Support Communications/MCFSS Plan of

the division operation order to the division fire

support/liaison chief with the division FSCC.

Regiment Assistant Operations 

Chief/Watch Chief

The regiment assistant operations chief/watch

chief is the principal assistant to the FDO/watch

officer. His specific duties include, but are not

limited to, the following:

l Supervise FDC enlisted personnel.

l Ensure required reports are received and

processed.

l Ensure the situation map (SITMAP) and all

status boards are current and accurate.

l Ensure the journal and missions fire log are

properly maintained.

Tactical Precepts

The following artillery precepts will be followed

when supporting operations:

l Mass fire on deep targets to prevent reinforcement of threat positions.

l Weight the main attack in the offense/focus of

effort in the defense. Position artillery well forward to exploit range capability and facilitate

exploitation.

l Provide counterfire. Employ air assets to conduct counterfire when feasible (quick-fire

channel with radar).

l Configure the regiment main COC to move the

forward (FWD) COC and maintain independent operations for a limited time. Position the

main COC 2 to 4 kilometers forward of the

division main COC or as dictated by terrain and

tactical considerations.

Tactical Planning Considerations 

The tactics, techniques, and procedures in this

chapter apply in a digitized environment. Digital

tactical and technical fire direction and command,

control, and communications (C3) should be emphasized while maintaining a voice backup capability.
2-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Expect and anticipate execution of hasty and

informal fire plans.

l Plan and provide for long range communications

through retransmission sites and relay stations.

l Decentralize met support.

l Collocate nuclear, biological, and chemical

(NBC) control center operations with the

regiment main COC.

l Maintain integrity of prescribed mobile loads

of ammunition for rapid movement in the

exploitation phase of the offensive.

l Disseminate universal time by using the

precision lightweight global positioning system

receiver (PLGR) time feature or via shortwave

radio tones on the 5, 10, 15, and 20 megahertz

high frequency (HF) bands.

SECTION II. COMMAND AND CONTROL AGENCIES

Fire Support Coordination Center

An FSCC exists at each echelon of the GCE from

division to battalion levels. The FSC organizes

and supervises the FSCC under the staff cognizance of the G-3/S-3. The number of personnel

and amount of equipment vary with the level of

command and responsibility, the size and

complexity of the forces involved, the degree of

planning and coordination required, and the

desires of the commander. 

Regiment Combat Operations Center

Throughout this publication, COC is used as the

generic command cell. It is important to understand

that the only difference between a COC and CP is

the presence of the commander. See figure 2-3.

Main Combat Operations Center

The main COC provides C2 for the regiment,

conducts liaison with adjacent units, and receives

direction from higher headquarters. The main COC

command group normally consists of the following:

l S-1 representative.

l S-2.

l S-3 or S-3A.

l S-4 representative.

l Regiment communications officer or assistant

communications officer.

l Regiment survey chief.

l CBR officer.

l Liaison officers as assigned.

l Regiment met officer.

l Regiment NBC defense officer.

l Headquarters battery support elements.

Forward Combat Operations Center 

The FWD COC is highly mobile, yet can be taskorganized for self-sustainment and specific missions.

It is activated for displacement of the main COC or

to weight a particular zone within the battle area to

provide fluid C2 during rapid maneuver scenarios.

See figure 2-4 on page 2-8. The FWD COC

command group normally consists of the following:

l Regiment commander.

l S-2 representative.

l S-3 or S-3A.

l S-4 representative, if necessary.

l Regiment communications officer or assistant

communications officer.

l Regiment survey officer, if necessary.

l Liaison officers as assigned.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-7 

l NBC defense representative.

l Headquarters battery commander (occupies main

COC once established).

Administrative and Logistics 

Operation Center 

The administrative and logistics operation center

(ALOC) is composed of elements from headquarters battery and representatives of subordinate

units to provide administrative, medical, messing,

and maintenance facilities. The ALOC possesses

communications to C2 the logistics mission of the

regiment. The ALOC is located in the rear of the

regiment operating area, near a main supply route

(MSR), and in a position to provide rapid logistical

support and effectively coordinate operations with

combat service support elements (CSSEs).

Alternate Division Command Post

The regiment main COC is the designated alternate division CP when severe degradation or

catastrophic loss of C3 occurs within the division

CP. This alternate CP provides short term C3 to

the division. Ideally, the alternate division CP

will dissolve within 36 hours and the division

main COC/FSCC will reconstitute. The capability

Figure 2-3. Example Regiment COC Site Layout.
2-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

exists with normal succession of command to

function for longer periods if necessary.

Alternate Regiment Combat

Operations Center

An alternate regiment COC will be designated to

provide continuity of command when the

regiment COC sustains significant degradation in

C3 capability. Operation plans and orders will

designate the alternate regiment COC. This is

normally a GS battalion; however, all battalions

must be prepared to serve as the alternate

regiment COC. 

Continuity of Operations 

The regiment main COC is responsible for C2 of

the regiment and must be prepared to serve as the

alternate division CP when severe degradation or

catastrophic loss of C3 occurs within the division

CP. Each battalion FDC must be prepared to

tactically control the fires of the regiment. They

must also be able to serve as the alternate

regiment COC simultaneously with tactically

controlling fires of the battalion, should the

regiment COC sustain significant degradation in

C3 capability or while it serves as the alternate

division CP. 

Alternate Division Command Post

When activated, the regiment assumes responsibilities as the alternate division CP. Simultaneously,

the regiment FWD COC prepares to assume C2 of

the artillery regiment. The regiment FWD COC

maintains C3 with existing personnel, facilities,

and equipment. The alternate division CP monitors

the division tactical situation to exercise control of

Figure 2-4. Example FDC/COC.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-9 

the division if control is passed. The alternate

division CP provides a COC and FSCC capability.

C3 will continually be enhanced as remaining

division assets are reassembled and operations

reconstituted. C3 will be passed back to the

division main as quickly as possible and generally

upon obtaining a capability equal to that of the

alternate division CP. Operations will be generally

conducted in three phases:

l Phase I—the regiment assumes control of

division operations.

l Phase II—surviving members of the division

staff arrive at the alternate division CP and

receive briefs and updates from the regiment

commander and staff. The division staff begins

to reconstitute operations in expeditionary

facilities provided by the regiment (tents, maps,

status charts, double-remoted communications

nets, etc.).

l Phase III—the division staff assumes C3

internally and the FWD regiment COC

assumes C2 from the main COC (either

internally or externally).

Security and Administration

The headquarters commandant (headquarters

battery commander) of the alternate division CP

coordinates local security and administrative

requirements with the regiment COC. The

regiment provides personnel and communications to establish control for the division when

command is transferred.

Personnel

Upon activation, all staff sections will augment

the regiment COC to establish C3 of the division

while maintaining C2 of the regiment.

Administrative and Logistical Support

The regiment will provide limited administrative

and logistical support for the alternate division CP

until headquarters battalion, division can resume

these functions.

At a minimum, the regiment will provide the

following alternate division CP facilities: tent,

power, lights, maps, and remoted communications.

SITMAPs and overlays passed to the division

will be in the scale used by division (most

commonly 1:100,000).

Assumptions

Due to the limited resources of communications

platoon, single-channel radio (SCR) will be the

primary means of communications. The direct air

support center (DASC) will remain operational or

will be established using assets supplied by the

supporting Marine aircraft wing (MAW). These

nets will include—

l Tactical Air Request/Helicopter Request HF.

l Tactical Air Direction 1 ultrahigh frequency

(UHF).

l Tactical Air Direction 2 UHF.

l Tactical Air Traffic Control UHF

l Tactical Air Traffic Control HF.

Alternate Regiment Combat 

Operations Center

The alternate CP will assume control when—

l Directed by the regiment commander.

l The regiment headquarters cannot be contacted by

any communication means from any subordinate

battalion for a specified period of time.

Actions upon Assumption of Control

Notification of assumption of regiment control by

a battalion will be made to division headquarters,

all battalions within the regiment, adjacent artillery headquarters, and any attached unit

headquarters. Any assistance from other units

will be requested at this time. 
2-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Regiment Planning Cell

The regiment planning cell will be established as

required by the artillery regiment. The senior

Marine from the survey information center (SIC)

is responsible for the establishment, operation,

and displacement of the planning cell. The

planning cell will focus on future operations,

requiring close and continuous operation with the

division CP and FSCC.

Regiment Fire Direction Center

The regiment FDC is composed of personnel from

the operations platoon. The typical regiment FDC

will have watch sections consisting of the FDO/

watch officer, operations chief, and fire control

men. The regiment communications platoon

provides a communications watch supervisor and

sufficient personnel to man the radio terminals in

the FDC. Functions of the regiment FDC during

operations include targeting and counterfire activities, tactical fire direction, and movement and

positioning of units. The FDC, target processing

center (TPC), intelligence section, and other

headquarters sections compose the main echelon

COC. Appendix C is a checklist for passage of C2

watch officers to aid them in their duties. 

Fire Direction Objectives

Fire direction involves tactical decisions and

computing technical firing data. Fire direction

objectives are as follows:

l Continuous, accurate, and timely fire support

under all conditions of weather, visibility, and

terrain.

l Flexibility to engage targets over a wide area.

l Prompt massing of fires of all available units in

any area within range.

l Rapid delivery of fires within the zone of the

supported unit.

l Control of artillery through orders, policies,

priorities, and by means of adequate liaison

and communications.

l Implementation of safety measures.

l Gaining/exchanging target information.

l Coordination of subordinate unit’s fires and

integration of the artillery fire plan with other

supporting arms.

Organization 

The FDC is organized to meet the requirements

and conditions existing at the artillery headquarters. Its configuration may vary with the mode of

operation and tactical situation; e.g, degree of

permanence. FDCs may be established in tents,

buildings or vehicles. In the typical regiment and

battalion FDC, operations and intelligence sections

are collocated. The arrangement must allow for the

rapid determination of fire direction (tactical or

technical) and exchange of information between

personnel. Maps and charts should be positioned to

facilitate sharing of information. Radios must be

positioned to allow for monitoring and the rapid

access by commanders and staffs. Space must be

allowed for liaison officers (LNOs) or representatives of attached elements; e.g., TPC. Only essential personnel should be in the FDC. In the

regiment and battalion FDCs, a watch officer/FDO

supervises the operation of the FDC, under the

cognizance of the S-3. The S-3 positions himself

where he can best perform his duties. In the battery

FDC, the battery FDO supervises the operations of

the FDC.

Tactical Fire Direction

The regiment FDC exercises tactical fire direction of organic artillery battalions and attached

artillery units; e.g., attached multiple launch

rocket system (MLRS). It exercises tactical fire

direction to the degree consistent with the

communications capability, positioning of units,

and range capability. The regiment FDC receives

fire missions from several sources, including the

division FSCC and its own observers; e.g.,

survey, weapons-locating radars, etc. It also

receives requests for reinforcing fires from artillery battalions. The regiment assigns fire

missions to a battalion or attached unit. To avoid
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-11 

diverting DS artillery from its primary mission,

artillery units in GS are normally tasked first. The

regiment FDC directs the massing of artillery

battalions on targets worthy of such attack.

Targeting and Counterfire Activities

The regiment FDC works closely with the

division FSCC and division G-2 section to

manage targeting. The artillery regiment

commander, as division FSC, ensures the coordination of all targeting and counterfire activities.

The regiment S-3 and S-2 interface with their

counterparts in the artillery battalions and with

the CBR platoon commander for targeting.

Specific emphasis is on counterfire targets.

Movement and Positioning

The regiment FDC monitors the location of artillery battalions, attached artillery units, and

weapons-locating radars.

The artillery battalion commander in DS will

position his batteries to best support the

supported unit. He keeps the regiment FDC

informed on the positions of his units. The DS

artillery commander keeps the regiment FDC

informed of all displacements directed by the DS

battalion to include the reinforcing artillery

battalion. When required, the artillery regiment

commander or S-3 may assign a PA to a DS or

reinforcing battalion. This is normally done for a

future mission assignment. Such assignment must

not preclude the battalion from accomplishing its

current mission.

The regiment commander or S-3 directs the

positioning of GS and GS-R units and radars

operating under regiment control. These units are

positioned to ensure adequate coverage of the

division, provide mutual support, support the

division as a whole, and facilitate future mission

assignments. The positions of DS and R units are

considered when positioning GS and GS-R units

within the division FSCC. 

Clearance to Fire

Calls for Fire

The FDC is responsible for ensuring clearance to

fire has been received for artillery fires. Artillery

fires on targets beyond an established coordinated

fire line (CFL), by definition, can be delivered

without clearance from the unit in whose zone of

action the fires will impact. Fires on targets short

of the CFL, however, require some method of

clearance. Based on the commander’s rules of

engagement (ROE), the procedure for clearing

these calls for fire will be specified in operation

orders or unit SOPs as positive clearance or

passive clearance. Artillery COF nets are

monitored by artillery LNOs in battalion FSCCs.

After coordinating the monitored call for fire as

discussed in MCWP 3-16, the LNO (on behalf of

the FSC) approves or denies the request for clearance to engage the target and the use of artillery on

the target (type and volume of fire requested).

Under positive clearance procedures, each call for

fire on targets short of the CFL must be specifically cleared by a voice or digital transmission

from the FSCC of the unit in whose zone of action

the fires will impact. This may require FSCCs

monitoring calls for fire from its observers to seek

clearance from other FSCCs. Under passive clearance procedures, the FSCC monitors the call for

fire transmission. It remains silent if the fire

mission is cleared (silence is consent). It interjects

by voice or digital transmission if the fire mission

is not cleared or if more time is required to clear

the fire mission; e.g., with another FSCC. For

further discussion, see MCWP 3-16.

Adjustments

Cumulative corrections in the adjustment phase

of a fire mission must be followed for possible

interference or danger to friendly units.
2-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Fires beyond the Fire Support Coordination Line 

Units firing on targets beyond the fire support

coordination line (FSCL) must inform all other

affected units in sufficient time to allow reaction to

avoid friendly casualties and unnecessary duplication. The MAGTF FFCC or senior FSCC will establish procedures for exchanging this information.

Other Clearance

Based on the maneuver commander’s guidance,

clearance may have to be obtained before use of

those munitions that can cause danger or affect

operations of the supported or other units. Examples

are smoke, illumination, improved conventional

munitions (ICM), and family of scatterable mines

(FASCAM). See MCWP 3-16.

Request for Reinforcing Fires

The request for reinforcing fires form (see figure

2-5) is designed to assist FDCs in recording,

properly formatting, and transmitting technical

fire direction information. It uses procedures and

doctrinal formats found in MCWP 3-16.4,

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field

Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery. The following procedures will be used with the request for

reinforcing fires form.

Mass Fire Collective Call Sign

Each regiment will develop a collective call sign

to be used on all missions directed to or initiated

by the regiment COC.

Readback

Readback of all tactical fire direction information will be performed by the designated

readback station. All other units will acknowledge receipt of the fire order in battalion numerical sequence subsequent to the readback.

Reporting Ready and Time of Flight

Firing units will only report “Ready” and “Time of

Flight” on fire missions where the time of opening

fire is designated as “At My Command,” and short

countdown time on targets (TOTs). These reports

are unnecessary for time interval TOTs (firing

units will only report to the controlling element

when they are unable to meet the TOT).

Reporting

During a mass fire mission, all required reports—

shot, rounds complete, etc.—will be sent to the

controlling element.

Reporting During Schedule of Fires

When a schedule of fires is initiated, firing units

will report “Shot” at the beginning of the schedule of fires and “Rounds Complete” at the end of

the schedule of fires. When a firing unit fails to

meet the scheduled ammunition expenditure for

individual targets within a schedule, it will be

reported immediately to the controlling element.

This will afford the agency initiating the schedule to decide if a repeat of the mission or attack

by another fire support means is required to meet

the commander’s attack guidance. Also, if a

firing unit anticipates missing a specific time line

in the schedule of fires, it will report this to

higher headquarters immediately. This will afford

higher headquarters the opportunity to deconflict

with the establishing agency.

Forms, Records, and Charts 

The FDC must maintain the necessary forms,

records, and charts to conduct fire direction.

MCWP 3-16.4 discusses the requirements for

technical fire direction. For tactical fire direction, some of the requirements are discussed in

the following paragraphs.

Situation Map

The SITMAP is actively sought and maintained

by FDCs for adequate fire support and safety to

friendly forces. 
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-13 

Figure 2-5. Example Request for Reinforcing Fires Form.
2-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

The SITMAP shows battery positions, artillery

headquarters echelon positions, supported unit

headquarters echelons, fire capabilities overlay

depicting the range and traverse limits of the

firing units, target overlay, and radar capabilities

overlay, as required.

The supported unit SITMAP shows the scheme

of maneuver overlay, fire support coordinating

measure (FSCM) overlay, check points and route

overlay, FO positions (firing battery), and maneuver unit positions.

The threat SITMAP is maintained by the intelligence section. Emphasis is on plotting high

payoff targets.

S-3 Journal

The S-3 journal is used to record all incidents and

messages with an entry describing the action

taken, if any. Copies of messages and orders sent

and received and records of fire missions should

be maintained. At specific intervals, the journal is

closed and becomes part of the unit journal

maintained by the regiment S-3.

Miscellaneous Forms, Records, and Charts

Examples of these are fire order standards and

ammunition and communications status.

Reporting

FDCs exchange reports with each other and their

supported units. These reports assist in tactical fire

direction and fire support coordination. See appendix D for formats. The artillery, as prescribed in

the operation order or SOPs, may submit other

reports. Unnecessary reports or reports that duplicate data submitted in other reports should be

avoided. Also see MCRP 3-37.2A, Chemical and

Biological Contamination Avoidance.

Ammunition Report 

The ammunition report (AMREP) is used to

maintain an accurate ammunition status of firing

units. It facilitates ammunition resupply and the

forecasting of consumption rates. The AMREP

is submitted frequently enough to allow operational and resupply decisions. The frequency for

submission is often specified in unit SOPs or in

operation orders. Submit the report to the higher

artillery headquarters. The artillery LNO with

the supported unit’s FSCC is kept abreast of the

artillery’s ammunition status.

Displacement Report 

The displacement report (DISREP) is used to

report the displacement of a firing battery or

element. The DISREP is submitted when the unit

can no longer fire from its present position due to

displacement. The report is submitted to the higher

artillery headquarters and to the supported unit.

Fire Capabilities Report 

The fire capability report (FIRECAP) is used to

report the firing status of an artillery battery or

element. The report is made when a unit occupies

a new firing position and is ready to fire or when

a change occurs in the number of weapons available; e.g., a gun out of action due to threat action

or mechanical malfunction. The FIRECAP is sent

to the higher artillery headquarters and the

supported unit.

Command Post Report 

The command post report (CPREP) is used to

report the time of opening and closing of a

headquarters echelon and the location of the new

echelon. The report is submitted to the higher

artillery headquarters and the supported unit.

Flash Report/Spot Report/Target Report 

These reports are submitted after significant

incidents such as contact with the threat, incoming fires, receipt of friendly casualties, damage

to friendly equipment, findings of significant

intelligence value or initiation/completion of

tactical operations. The target report (TAREP),

used to pass target data, is submitted when a

significant target is detected or after the attack
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-15 

of a significant target or target on the target list.

Submit these reports to the higher headquarters

and the supported unit.

Radar Report

The radar report is used by the artillery to control

and coordinate the use of CBR platoon radars.

The CBR platoon and the controlling artillery

unit use the report.

Firing Report 

The firing report (FIREP) is used to report the

firing on a major target. Major targets are normally

specified in the operation order or SOP. The report

is submitted to the higher artillery headquarters

and/or supported unit.

Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Reports

NBC reports are used to report NBC contamination and conditions as determined by friendly

units. They are sent as directed by established

SOPs, operation orders or fragmentary orders. 

Other Reports

Other reports may be submitted by the artillery as

prescribed in the operation order or SOPs. Avoid

unnecessary reports or duplicate reports. 

Other Functions of the Regiment 

Fire Direction Center

l Ammunition management.

l Muzzle velocity management.

l Coordinate CBR platoon employment.

l Arrange survey and met support.

l Coordinate electronic warfare (EW) support.

l Coordinate engineer support.

l Interface with supported unit’s FSCC on

artillery.

l Disseminate FSCMs, attack guidance, and

other information received from supported

unit.

l Prepare the artillery fire plan.

l Disseminate firing restrictions and safety

guidelines.

l Coordinate NBC defense and operations.

SECTION III. REGIMENT SURVEY

Mission

The mission of regiment survey is to provide a

common grid over the division area. This includes

establishing initial control, densification of existing

control, and conversion to common control over

stations not in the division network. The survey section

normally performs fourth order surveys for massing of

fires, delivery of surprise observed fires, delivery of

effective unobserved fires, and transmission of target

data from one unit to another to aggressively neutralize

and destroy threat targets. Establishing a common grid

is a command responsibility.

Duties of the Regiment Survey Officer

The regiment survey officer is a member of the

regiment special staff. His duties include, but are

not limited to, the following:

l Accompany the regiment commander or his

representative on reconnaissance of the new

position.

l Advise the commander of the capabilities and

limitations of the survey section.

l Formulate and implement the regiment survey

plan.
2-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Maintain close liaison with the battalion survey

officers and coordinate survey operations

within the regiment.

l Establish, coordinate, and supervise the activities of the SIC.

Duties of the Survey Chief

The survey chief is the principal assistant to the

survey officer. His duties include, but are not

limited to, the following:

l Perform, when directed, any or all of the duties

of the regiment survey officer.

l Ensure all survey data is correctly derived,

transmitted, and filed at the SIC.

l Supervise and train surveyors in conducting

operations and maintaining survey equipment.

Duties of the Chief of Party (Conventional and 

Position and Azimuth Determining System)

l Train his survey party.

l Supervise and coordinate field operations of

his survey team.

l Maintain and be accountable for his equipment.

Duties of the Survey Recorder/Computer

l Maintain the required forms for computations

of survey.

l Perform independent computations with a

survey computer system.

l Maintain the survey section’s computer systems.

l Perform chief of party’s duties in his absence.

Duties of the Instrument Operator

The instrument operator operates and performs

preventive maintenance checks and services on

the team’s survey equipment.

Survey Information Center 

The SIC will be established by the regiment

survey officer in the regiment COC.

The SIC is organic to the regiment survey section

and is the only section authorized to compile,

maintain, and issue changes to a trigonometric list

pending approval from the CO. The SIC will

maintain a file of survey control points (SCPs)

applicable to the area of operations (AOs).

The SIC will disseminate survey information to

all interested parties of the regiment and division.

This information can be in the form of trigonometric lists, SCP listings, survey assistance,

computations or points of contact with higher

agencies such as the National Imagery and

Mapping Agency (NIMA).

The SIC will maintain a combination operation/

SITMAP, which will depict, at a minimum—

l Friendly situation.

l SCPs.

l Present and proposed artillery positions, observation posts (OPs), met and radar sites, and other

pertinent information.

Regiment Survey Methods

All regiment survey sections will accomplish

field work procedures and computations involved

in global positioning system (GPS) surveying,

traverse, intersection, resection, hasty survey, and

astronomic observation techniques in accordance

with MCWP 3-16.7. The regiment survey section

is the only unit permitted to establish permanent

SCPs. See MCWP 3-16.7 for more information

on starting control; distance determination; angle

measurement; recorder’s notes/closure of survey;

computations; station marking; and priority of

survey. 
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-17 

All station marking will be in accordance with

MCWP 3-16.7. If a station must be placed in a

roadway, the location will be marked by a nail

driven through a piece of colored flagging and

a witness stake will be placed near the edge of

the road.

Stations will be tagged with the name of the

station, order or accuracy, the surveyor’s unit,

and date of survey. 

The regiment is the only unit authorized to select

a fourth order station for enclosure in a trigonometric list and to monument it in concrete or

other permanent marker.

SCPs are considered public domain and are not to

be used as staging areas, rally points, CPs or targets.

FOs may temporarily occupy suitable SCPs to

conduct height of burst (HOB)/mean point of

impact (MPI) registrations, but must depart the

station upon completion. Survey equipment found

on top of a station must not be disrupted, due to the

possibility that survey operations may be in

progress. For priority of survey—

l Establish SCPs for the battalions.

l Extend control to CBR sites.

l Establish declination stations.

l Extend control to met stations.

l Perform target area survey that is outside a

battalion’s area of responsibility (AOR).

l Assist battalion survey sections and other units

(mortars, position location reporting system

[PLRS], EW, etc.).

SECTION IV. REGIMENT METEOROLOGY

Mission

Atmospheric conditions affect the accuracy of

artillery fires. To increase the possibility of target

neutralization from first round fire for effect, and

to support the artillery in accomplishing its

mission, the met section must provide timely and

accurate met messages. This will allow artillery

units to correct for all nonstandard weather conditions and ensure effects on target. The mission of

the artillery is to provide the following types of

electronic met messages.

Computer

Computer met messages are used to apply met

corrections to the computer solution of the gunnery

problem and for use in the AN/TPQ-36 radar.

Ballistic

Ballistic met messages are used to apply met

corrections to the manual solution of the gunnery

problem and the backup computer systemreplacement (BUCS-R).

Fallout

Fallout met messages are used by NBC sections

to determine the downwind hazards caused by an

NBC agent attack.

Target Acquisition

Target acquisition met messages are used to

apply met corrections to AN/TPQ-37 CBRs

(relative humidity is used by the Q-37 to correct

for refraction).

Limited Source Observation

Although these messages provide limited weather

conditions for a small portion of the battlefield,

they can provide the theater commander an

accurate weather picture for the entire AO when

combined. This met message is also given to the
2-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

NBC defense officer for use in projecting chemical downwind hazard areas.

Duties of the Regiment Meteorology Officer

The met officer is a member of the regiment

special staff. He is responsible for making recommendations and advising the regiment

commander and his staff on all artillery met

matters. His duties include, but are not limited to,

the following:

l Select positions for the met stations.

l Coordinate with adjacent met sections and

supported units concerning met schedules.

l Ensure all met data disseminated is verified in

accordance with MCWP 3-16.5, Field Artillery

Meteorology.

Duties of the Regiment Meteorology Chief

The regiment met chief acts as the principal assistant to the met officer and, when directed,

performs duties of the met officer. His duties

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Supervise the operation of the met station.

l Direct the emplacement of the met section

equipment.

Coordination of Assets

It is the responsibility of the artillery regiment/

battalion commander to recommend the position

of the met assets assigned to his organization. It

is the met officer’s responsibility to determine the

exact location of the met assets. The met team

leader will determine the exact location of the

met equipment within the met site. In many

instances, the met section chief will act in the

capacity of the met officer and must be technically qualified to perform those duties.

Meteorological Operations

The regiment met station will be employed where

it can best support the artillery regiment. It is

possible for met messages to be available from

more than one source. When messages from more

than one met section are available, the following

selection criteria will be used:

l First Preference—select the met message

from a section within 20 kilometers of the

projectile midpoint trajectory and less than

2 hours old.

l Second Preference—select the met message

from a section within 20 kilometers of the projectile midpoint trajectory and more than 2 hours

old. A met message may be considered valid

from 1 to 4 hours depending on the time of day

and patterned atmospheric conditions.

l Third Preference—select the met message

from a section within 80 kilometers of the

projectile midpoint trajectory and less than

2 hours old.

Meteorological Site Selection

The primary consideration in site selection is the

ability of the met section to accomplish its

assigned mission. The commander’s mission

order and his intent must be understood and

carried out. Before a site is selected, the requirements of the supported unit, types of met support

required (electronic/visual), and units requiring

the support must be considered.

Tactical Situation

The commander must provide a situation statement prior to selecting a site. The statement must

consider both the threat and friendly situations,

with particular emphasis on how they relate to the

assigned mission. It is critical that the met officer

know the friendly scheme of maneuver and the

anticipated threat course of action (COA).
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-19 

Coordination of Assets

Coordination with adjacent units is essential to

ensure that multiple flights are not flown when a

single flight would suffice if it were disseminated properly. It is the responsibility of the met

officer to inform the commander of the necessity

for this type of liaison. The met chief should

coordinate all liaison activities with adjacent

units.When determining met validity, the size of

the area that must be covered and the type of

terrain are essential data. Consideration must also

be made for the operating frequency of the radiosondes to prevent met sections from tracking the

wrong radiosonde.

Communications

The site must facilitate the transmission and

receipt of communications from the headquarters

element and the using unit. In the site selection

process, the met team chief must plan for radio or

wire, voice and digital communications. The type

of met equipment to be used is critical when

considering communications. The AN/TMQ-41

metereological measuring system (MMS) is

capable of both digital and voice communication

by either wire or radio. When visual met pilot

balloon (PIBAL) systems are used, communications are restricted to only voice communications.

Supported Units

Not only must the met sections be able to

communicate with the units requiring met

support, they must also be positioned where they

can provide the most accurate met data to the

largest number of units possible. Positioning

must be as efficient as possible. A clear and open

area is necessary for establishing a met site and

emplacing the AN/TMQ-41 MMS. Consideration should also be given to the possibility of

signal interference from high powered communication assets. The met station should be located

where it can best support the artillery, yet be

tactically survivable. Also, the met station must

know the primary direction of fire and the

prevailing winds.

Supporting Unit

The met section can only transport a 7-day supply

on their vehicle assets. The supporting unit

should maintain a 14-day supply on hand for all

three met sections.

Measuring Atmospheric Conditions

Met personnel are responsible for measuring,

computing, and reporting the current atmospheric

conditions as they relate to the artillery. Met

sections employ two methods of measuring

atmospheric conditions: electronic and visual

PIBAL.

The electronic method is the most accurate and the

preferred measuring method. The AN/TMQ-41

MMS is the primary means for determining

electronic met data. The MMS has the capability

for digital interface with the battery computer

system (BCS), interim fire support automated

system, and AFATDS. The system can digitally

communicate via wire and radio. The MMS does

not emit signals as it tracks a radiosonde. The

MMS also has a remote launch capability, which

enables the system to track a radiosonde launched

from as far as 20 kilometers from the MMS site.

Also, a mobile mode enables the MMS to march

order while a flight is still in progress and continues to track it until the MMS vehicle arrives at the

next position, at which time the message is disseminated. 

Visual met is determining upper air conditions

from PIBAL observation. Visual met is an alternative or backup to electronic met. Visual met is the

primary method of measuring atmospheric conditions for independently deployed firing batteries

when distance and met validity are considerable

and electronic means cannot be used.
2-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Requirements and Dissemination of Data

To ensure the best support possible, the following

information is required for met support:

l Type of message required.

l Maximum ordinate expected.

l Dates required.

l Delivery times (local standard time).

l Method of delivery to include frequency and

call signs.

Mets will be flown as scheduled by the met

officer based on guidance from the regiment S-3

and patterned atmospheric conditions for the AO.

Additional mets, modifications to the schedule or

special requirements should be coordinated with

the regiment S-3.

Met messages will normally be transmitted

digitally to the COC for redistribution/dissemination to subordinate units or, in the case of a direct

support battalion, directly to the battalion COC. In

all cases the best method for transmission will be

employed. Met messages will be distributed in

accordance with the current SOP for communications or per current operation order.

Battalions with a DS tactical mission requesting

met support must coordinate with the regiment

S -3 and met officer. Once a met team is attached,

the met team chief is responsible to the battalion

S-3 for the positioning and the operation of the

met station. Logistical support (fuel, local

security, communications, and messing) will be

provided by the unit being supported. Tactical

guidance will be provided by the battalion S-3.

The unit supported must provide survey reconnaissance support.

Units receiving a met message will verify its

validity in accordance with MCWP 3-16.4. If the

validity of the met message is questionable, the

unit will contact the regiment FDC, battalion

FDC or met team for resolution.

SECTION V. COUNTERBATTERY RADAR PLATOON

Mission

The primary mission of the CBR platoon is to

locate threat rocket, mortar, and artillery

weapons and process all acquired threat

locations in a timely manner for counterfire and

intelligence purposes. Secondary missions that

can be assigned by the supported artillery unit

are adjusting or registering artillery. When a

radar is used for a secondary mission, it cannot

perform its primary mission.

AN/TPQ-46A Capabilities 

The AN/TPQ-46A firefinder radar can determine accurate first round locations of threat

rocket, mortar, and artillery weapons firing

either high or low angle from 750 to 24,000

meters. The radar is normally employed to

electronically scan a sector of 1600 mils in the

hostile mode of operation. However, the radar

can search an area of up to 6400 mils by using

the extended azimuth function. In this

function, the designated search area is divided

into 1600-mil sections and the radar automatically searches each sector for the amount of

time assigned by the operator. If a sector has

not been programmed for search, the antenna

may be reprogrammed and operational within

20 seconds. The radar detects, verifies, and

tracks projectiles in flight. The radar has two

modes of operation: hostile and friendly. See

table 2-1.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-21 

In-flight tracking data determines the hostile

weapon location and the predicted impact point.

The radar can simultaneously track up to 10

projectiles and store 200 targets in memory while

searching for new targets. Special procedures

allow for averaging of closely grouped weapons,

elimination of repeated weapon locations, and

weapon-location height adjustment. Weapon

location can be determined to an accuracy of 50

meters. Impact predictions are accurate to approximately 100 meters. The radar sections transmit

data digitally or by voice to the TPC and to a firing

unit, if assigned.

The radar can register and adjust friendly indirect

fire. For this use, firing batteries are linked either

digitally by BCS or voice to a radar section. If

voice, the preferred method is wire. Impacts are

determined to an accuracy of 50 meters.

AN/TPQ-37 Capabilities

When operating in joint environments, it is likely

that employment of AN/TPQ-37 radars will affect

Marine Corps operations. The AN/TPQ-37 is

optimized to locate longer-range, low-angle, higher

velocity weapons such as long range artillery and

rockets. However, it will also locate short-range,

high-angle, lower velocity weapons complementing the AN/TPQ-46A. The AN/TPQ-37 has a

minimum range of 3 kilometers and a maximum

range of 50 kilometers. For artillery, the higher

Table 2-1. Target Acquisition Radar Planning Table.

Weapons-Locating Radars

Characteristics AN/TPQ-46A AN/TPQ-37

Planning Ranges

Artillery and Mortars

Rockets

12,000m

24,000m

30,000m

50,000m

Azimuth Search Sector Coverage

1600 mils (6400 in extended 

azimuth mode) 1600 mils

Accuracy FFE Accuracy FFE Accuracy

Traverse 6400 mils 6400 mils

Elevation 15 to 30 mils Screen Crest 5 to 15 mils Screen Crest

Emplacement Time 20 min 30 min

Fording Capability 16 in 30 in

Travel Weight Trailer 4,400 lbs

Shelter 2,780 lbs

Trailer 17,780 lbs

Shelter 2,780 lbs

Dimensions (length, width, and 

height) Trailer

170.75 x 84.5 x 94 in 234.75 x 96 x 134 in

Shelter on 2-1/2 Ton Truck 264.25 x 97.75 x 123.75 in 234.24 x 97.75 x 123.75 in

5-Ton Truck with 60 KW Generator N/A 323.25 x 96 x 119.75 in

Shelter (alone) 109.25 x 81.5 x 79.75 in 109.25 x 81.5 x 79.75 in

60 KW Generator without Truck N/A 156 x 86.5 x 63.75 in

Q-37 Antenna and Transceiver Group 

without Trailer

N/A 163.5 x 96 x 91.25 in

AN/MJQ-25 Generator with Trailer 171.12 x 82 x 98 in

Air Transport External

CH-47D, UH-60, CH-53E

Internal C-130

External

CH-47D

Internal C-141

Type of Targets Mortars, Artillery, Rockets Mortars, Artillery, Rockets

Normal Distance from Forward

Line of Troops

3 to 6 km 8 to 12 km
2-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

probability of detection is approximately 30

kilometers. Minimum and maximum detection

ranges can be established for the AN/TPQ-37

provided they are separated by at least 900 meters

(same requirement as the AN/TPQ-46A).

The AN/TPQ-37 sector of search is from 300 mils

(minimum) to 1600 mils (maximum). Although the

AN/TPQ-37 is not equipped with the extended

azimuth search function like the AN/TPQ-46A, the

antenna maintains a 6400-mil traverse capability.

The antenna may be reprogrammed to search a new

sector and operational within 20 seconds. The AN/

TPQ-37 can be emplaced and operational within 30

minutes and march-ordered within 15 minutes

during daylight hours. Although actual capabilities

of this radar are classified, it can determine locations

with fire for effect (FFE) accuracy. See table 2-2. 

Radar Team Employment

In MEF operations, the CBR platoon is normally

employed as a unit and controlled by the artillery

regiment commander. The TPC is established in

the artillery regiment main COC or collocated

with the FSC at the division COC. The CBR

platoon commander works under the cognizance

of the regiment S-2. He works closely with the

regiment S-2 and S-3 to ensure that all CBR

assets are optimally used and that all counterfire

and intelligence data generated by those assets

are processed correctly. If the MEF is operating

over a wide area or in rough terrain, it may be

necessary to divide the platoon into detachments

to provide optimum support. In this situation,

each detachment will be task- organized with

control either retained by the artillery regiment

commander or passed to designated artillery

battalion commanders (either DS or GS). Such

decentralization can enhance timely target

engagement.

The CBR platoon commander coordinates the

employment of radars operating under regiment

control. The S-2 and S-3 provide guidance as

deduced from the plan of observation. The S-3

designates the areas that will receive radar coverage. Based on this guidance, the CBR platoon

commander selects a sector of search and general

PA for each radar section. The radar section chief

selects the actual site for the radar. The general

PA should provide sufficient space for the radar

section chief to locate a site to meet technical

consideration.

The battalion S-2 coordinates the employment of

radars placed under battalion control. The CBR

detachment commander recommends the general

PA to the battalion S-3. The radar section chief

selects the actual radar site. The radar provides

targets to the battalion FDC, where the information

is acted on and sent to the regiment FDC. If the

battalion cannot achieve the desired effects on a

target or is unable to engage the target, reinforcing

fires are requested. This will usually occur when

the battalion is too involved with close support to

engage a counterfire target. The regiment provides

guidance on positioning, coverage zones, cueing,

and frequencies. The regiment can reallocate radar

assets across the division front as dictated by the

situation.

Offensive Operations

Positioning authority of radar teams remains with

the regiment based on division G-2/G-3 guidance

and coordination with the maneuver commander.

Radar teams may be attached to DS battalions.

The following planning considerations apply

regardless of radar’s tactical mission:

l The regiment will position radars to maximize

coverage and reduce zonal overlap.

Table 2-2. AN/TPQ-37 CEP Accuracies.

Weapon CEP Accuracy (Whichever is Greater)

Mortar 50% 35m or 0.35% of range

Mortar 90% 90m or 0.90% of range

Artillery 50% 35m or 0.35% of range

Artillery 90% 90m or 0.90% of range

Rocket 50% 70m or 0.70% of range

Rocket 90% 175m or 1.0% of range
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-23 

l DS battalions may be tasked with providing

survey support for radars in their zone of fire;

however, the AN/TPQ-46A possesses the

Modular Azimuth Positioning System (MAPS)

for self-survey support.

l DS battalions may be tasked with clearing PAs

within their zone of fire.

l DS battalions should establish a link with the

radars and their supported unit’s zone to facilitate

counterbattery fires in their zone of fire.

Defensive Operations

Radar employment will be centralized to the

maximum extent. The regiment will position radars

to maximize coverage and reduce zonal overlap.

Positioning

Tactically, the radar is positioned to provide

coverage of the zone of action of the supported

unit and to provide overlap coverage with other

radars. Generally, the radar is positioned 3 to 6

kilometers behind the forward line of own troops

(FLOT). Radars should be positioned at least

1,000 meters apart and not face each other. Alternate positions are always selected. The CBR

section uses two systems to identify positions:

l Fire Finder Position Analysis System

(FFPAS)—Software used during planning to

identify optimal locations for radar positions. The

software incorporates digital terrain elevation

data (DTED), radar parameters, and threat indirect fire capabilities to maximize hostile weapon

detection and radar section survivability.

l Modular Azimuth Positioning System

(MAPS)—the Q-46A is equipped with its own

survey capability that provides for positional and

directional control. 

The radar site should be flat. The slope of the

ground must be less than 120 mils for the radar

antenna to be leveled for proper functioning. The

optimum radar site will have terrain that gently

slopes downward in the direction of search for a

distance of at least 200 meters and then rises

sharply to form a screening crest (a hill mass). A

screening crest between the radar and the threat

will protect the radar from the threat’s EW, direct

observation, and direct fire. The screening crest

should be located within 300 to 1,000 meters of

the radar site and in friendly territory. The screening crest must protect the radar site without

degrading radar operation. The ideal screening

crest angle for the AN/TPQ-46A radar is 15 to 30

mils or less. The radar can function with a screening crest of up to 100 mils, but accuracy and detection decrease as screening crest height increases.

The radar site should provide cover and concealment but the cover should not interfere with

visual or electronic line of sight (LOS).

Electronic LOS is a straight path from the transmitting antenna to a reflecting object (projectile)

or a receiving antenna unobstructed by terrain or

other objects. Care must be also taken to ensure

that the area in front of the antenna does not

absorb or attenuate radar emissions. Reflections

will cause multipath errors that produce false

targets in the radar’s computer. Optimally, the

site will be surrounded on three sides with tall

vegetation to provide a tunneling effect of radar

emissions and to reduce the amount of side lobe

radiation escaping from the radar site.

Probability of detecting projectiles is a prime

consideration in the positioning of radars. In the

hostile fire mode, the radar should be positioned

to sight the projectile while it ascends and

approaches the radar. The probability of detection

varies with the horizontal (aspect) angle formed

at the hostile weapon position between the direction of the hostile projectile and the direction of

the radar position. In the friendly fire mode, the

radar must be able to sight the projectile as it

descends and travels away from the radar. The

aspect angle for friendly fire is 1000 mils.

The radar must be positioned for good communications to the TPC. If possible, the radar position

should be near a firing battery to facilitate survey
2-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

and logistical support, and to take advantage of

any existing defensive perimeters. The position

must be accessible and provide adequate space

for dispersion of four high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicles (HMMWVs), tents for

personnel, generators, remoted antennae, and

other equipment.

Cueing

The radar emits a very high powered beam of

energy especially vulnerable to detection. To

minimize its vulnerability, a system of cueing

(external actions or inputs that cause a surveillance or target acquisition device to turn on and

search a suspect area) must be established for the

radar to radiate appropriately in hostile and

friendly modes. The CBR platoon commander and

S-2 coordinate cueing schedules and instructions

based on all intelligence information and the

commander’s guidance. Cueing instructions will

vary with the threat, terrain, and mode of operation. Alternate cueing methods should be planned. 

In the hostile mode, the radar is oriented and

activated on a suspected weapons location as

determined by information and intelligence

sources. The radar is cued only when threat

indirect fire weapons are active. FOs, OPs, and

air crews are sources that can cue radars. The

radar can radiate for 15 minutes or more without

being located by threat ground-based EW if

optimum conditions are met. These conditions are

a minimum search sector, screening crest, and a

tunneling effect created by vegetation. If the site

has a screening crest but no vegetation for a

tunneling effect, radiation must be limited to 8

minutes. If a screening crest is either not available or inadequate, radiation time must be limited

to 2 minutes. If the radar radiates for more than 2

minutes, then it must displace immediately to

prevent detection.

In the friendly mode, the operator will initiate

radiating when the firing unit announces “Shot”

and will cease radiating when the radar console

signals “Display next location,” or 15 seconds

after the firing unit announces “Splash,” whichever occurs first.

Regardless of the merits of the radar site or threat

EW capability, the EW threat, as well as friendly

EW missions conducted, must be constantly

evaluated and updated for maximum radar

efficiency and survivability. Radiating times of

over 2 minutes should be carefully considered

before implementation.

Zone Management

The radar employment officer will establish radar

search fans based on guidance from the G-2/G-3

and S-2/S-3. He will establish common sensor

boundaries (CSBs) to reduce multiple target

generation. For planning purposes, the CSB will

be established at the maximum range of the AN/

TPQ-46A coverage that will become the

minimum search range for the AN/TPQ-37.

Measures should be taken to provide a specific

area of overlap based on the tactical situation. 

The radar officer will establish call for fire zones

(CFFZs), critical friendly zones (CFZs), artillery

target intelligence zones (ATIZs) and censor

zones (CZs) based on guidance from the G-2/G-3

and S-2/S-3.

l CFFZ—An area in threat territory that the

maneuver commander considers extremely

important to neutralize fires from immediate

counterfire.

l CFZ—An area where friendly units or units

that the maneuver commander designates as

critical are located.

l ATIZ—An area in threat territory that the

maneuver commander wants to monitor

closely. Weapon locations in this zone will be

reported immediately. Their priority is

exceeded only by targets in a critical friendly

zone or a CFFZ.

l CZ—An area from which the commander

wishes to ignore all target detections. CZs must
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-25 

be used judiciously, since the computer does

not report a round originating from a CZ to the

operator. A CZ may be used to ignore a

friendly artillery position that, because of its

aspect angle to the radar, could be detected as

threat artillery. This situation could occur when

an uneven FLOT exists or when friendly units

are in threat territory.

Command and Control

The CBR platoon is employed as a unit or taskorganized detachments for responsiveness.

Depending on the situation, radars can be

centrally controlled by the artillery regiment and

the CBR platoon assigned a GS mission.

Some radar sections can be attached to or placed

under the operational control of a battalion when

the situation dictates. Attachment is favorable for

logistics or survey reasons, for widely-separated

operations, and for the initial phases of an

expeditionary assault or expeditionary landing. A

detachment normally contains one to three radar

sections, a TPC, and support personnel and

equipment, i.e., maintenance, service, and survey

support. The detachment commander, normally

the radar employment chief or a designated

individual, serves as a special staff officer to the

supported artillery unit’s commander. The

supported artillery commander controls the

detachment through the detachment commander. 

Counterfire Headquarters

See chapter 7. 

Target Processing Center Employment 

TPC is a detachment of the CBR platoon. It aids in

processing all counterfire related targets and is a

liaison between the supported unit and the radars.

The TPC operates in accordance with the decide,

detect, deliver, and assess (D3A) methodology

outlined in MCWP 3-16A. Usually, the TPC will

be located with the division FSCC to take advantage of readily available intelligence to clear

counterfires, and ready access to the division air

officer to request aircraft for attack of counterfire

targets. The TPC can move by echelon with the

division main CP and the division FWD CP. The

TPC may also be located at the regiment COC.

Close coordination with the division G-2, G-3 and

FSCC is required in this situation.

Integration 

When an artillery organization is being supported

by the CBR platoon, it is critical for the TPC to

be fully integrated into that unit’s COC. To effectively function, the TPC should be located near

the S-2 and close enough to the S-3 to exchange

information quickly. The TPC must route all

counterfire and intelligence data obtained by the

radar through the S-2 for collation and analysis,

prior to it being passed to the S-3. The TPC must

keep the S-3 informed of all relevant information

pertaining to the CBR platoon, such as when the

radars are moving, where the radars are moving

to, the status of friendly fire missions, and the

operational status of the radars. The S-2 and S-3

must keep the TPC informed of changes to threat

and friendly situations, anticipated movements,

and other information that could be important to

the effective employment of the CBR assets. It is

important for the TPC to be included in the FWD

and main command groups for constant communication between the supported units and the

radars. The CBR platoon/detachment commander

and the TPC chief must maintain close liaison

with the supported communications officer so he

is aware of the communications requirements of

the TPC, and that TPC radio and communications

equipment is incorporated into the communications plan.

Target Production

Target production by the TPC varies from simple

to complex and is based on commander’s intent
2-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

and commander’s criteria. In its simplest form,

target production is the mere passing of target data

acquired from a reliable source to the fire control

element for prosecution. Complex target production involves the collation of data from one or

more sources for analysis so a decision can be

determined to fire at the target or to file the target

until more information can be accumulated.

Target Selection Standards

Although targeting data is collected continuously, targets will be produced according to the

commander’s criteria. This set of guidelines will

determine the difference between incoming data

that will be collated for future use, and incoming

data that will generate an immediate fire mission.

Target Production Map

The TPC maintains a target production map as an

aid for producing valid targets and for displaying

required information for intelligence purposes.

The target production map consists of a map of

the AOs with four overlays. 

l Friendly situation overlay—maintains the

positions and activities of all friendly units in

the AOs.

l Geometry/control features overlay—contains

all FSCMs, battlefield geometry, and radar

search zones (i.e., call for fire, critical friendly,

artillery target intelligence (ATI), sensor).

l Radar overlay—contains current radar locations and sectors of search; i.e., radar fans.

l Target/target indicator overlay—displays threat

activity and target intelligence provided by all target acquisition assets.

Information Flow

Information enters the TPC via several communication nodes. Information processing and distribution within the TPC depends on the type of

data received. Targets received from radars are

processed rapidly and forwarded to the G-2. Data

considered as a target indicator or data that needs

to be collated for future use is plotted and stored

until the collated data is sufficient to upgrade a

target indicator to target status.

The division intelligence net and digital voice

secure telephone (DVST) are the primary means

of communication between the G-2 and regiment

S-2. The local area network (LAN), facsimile

(FAX) machine, and couriers should be used to

send pertinent traffic to the G-2.

Hostile weapons locations enter the TPC from

CBR communication nodes. When a threat

weapon location is transmitted from the radar to

the TPC, the following sequence of events will

occur:

l The TPC computer operator enters the data

sent from the radar into the target file. All

information sent by the radar is written in the

target log.

l Once the computer operator has compiled all of

the data for a particular target location, he

immediately passes the printout to the S-2 and

the plotter. The plotter plots the hostile weapon

location on the target and target indicator

overlays of the target production map.

l The S-2 determines if the target should be

assigned a high priority for counterfire purposes (based on the guidance of the maneuver

commander) or be targeted as intelligence

information. The S-2 should use the impact

predict location and the threat weapon location

to assist in assigning priorities to the target.

Once the S-2 determines the priority, he either

passes the printout back to the TPC for collation or presents the information to the S-3 with

recommendations. If the target is to be fired

on, the target is transmitted to the S-3 computer operator from the TPC.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-27 

l Once action has been taken on a target or target

indicator by the S-3, that information flows

back to the TPC for file management.

l A significant amount of target traffic enters the

COC via the FDC. Reports from battalion S-2s

and FOs arrive over the regiment intelligence

or FDC nets.

Battle Damage Assessment 

BDA is a critical step in the targeting process.

BDA reports from FOs are critical since a

target may still present a threat after it has been

fired upon. BDA received by DS artillery

battalions should be sent to higher headquarters

via the supported infantry regiment. The artillery regiment S-2 should report BDA of GS

artillery fire missions and regiment mass

missions to higher headquarters/supported

maneuver commanders.

The TPC must coordinate with the S-3 on the

commander’s attack guidance matrix. See figure

2-6. Highest priority targets must be brought to

the FDC’s attention immediately.

Target selection standards information must be

considered when making a confirmed/suspected

target determination. Targets are carefully

analyzed to prevent firing on dummy targets and

old positions. Considerations to be examined

include the following:

l Is the threat using deception measures?

l How effective are the threat’s deception

measures?

l What are the threat’s artillery tactics?

Quickfire Operations

Quickfire is a tactic involving CBR and a fire

support asset to destroy threat artillery. First,

the target is located by primarily using the

CBR. Once it is determined that the target

cannot be eliminated by friendly artillery, it is

handed over to another fire support asset for

attack. The alternate method is to pass the

target information to the division FSCC. The

division FSCC then assigns the target to a fire

support asset for attack.

HPT WHEN HOW EFFECT REMARKS

Command OPs P Arty N Plan in initial preparation

RSTA and OPs P Arty N Plan in initial preparation

2S1 and 2S3 I CAS (fixed) N Plan in initial preparation

2S6, SA-9, SA-13 P Arty S SEAD for CAS

Regt CP A EW/Arty EW/N

Coordinate with electronic 

attack prior to neutralizing

Reserve Bn P CAS (fixed) D

Intent to attack reserve bn in 

engagement area Hot

LEGEND: A = AS ACQUIRED N = NEUTRALIZE

D = DESTROY P = PLANNED

EW = JAMMING OR OTHER OFFENSIVE EW S = SUPPRESS

I = IMMEDIATE

Figure 2-6. Attack Guidance Matrix.
CHAPTER 3

MOVEMENT AND POSITIONING OF THE REGIMENT

General

The artillery commander positions his unit to

render effective support to maneuver units and

enhance survivability. Artillery units conduct

movement and positioning by a procedure called

reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of

position (RSOP). The purpose of RSOP is to assist

the rapid and orderly movement of the artillery

from a PA, assembly area or a march column into

a position from where it can deliver the fire

support required to accomplish its mission. See

MCWP 3-16.3 for additional information.

Reconnaissance Methods

Reconnaissance is the continuous examination of

terrain to determine its suitability for use in accomplishing the mission. Routes and positions for

cannons, support installations, and OPs are reconnoitered. There are three methods of reconnaissance—

map, air, and ground. The best reconnaissance uses a

combination of all three methods.

Map Reconnaissance

Map reconnaissance involves studying and analyzing a map to become familiar with the terrain and

determine the location of potential PAs and routes.

This method is fast and should be the first step in

any reconnaissance. Unsuitable PAs and routes

can be eliminated immediately. However, map

reconnaissance will not reveal terrain or other

features that may have changed, e.g., the existence

or utility of a bridge, surface conditions or the

presence of friendly or threat forces in positions

and along routes. When available, aerial photographs can provide a current, detailed picture of

the terrain.

Air Reconnaissance

Air reconnaissance is a quick way to reconnoiter

large areas. It is especially useful for checking

routes and for getting a general indication of the

terrain and PA availability. However, detail of the

area may be difficult to determine. From the air,

true surface conditions may be undistinguishable

or distorted. Also, the ground may appear flatter

than in reality. The preferred aircraft for air reconnaissance is the helicopter. Space aboard the

aircraft may not allow key staff members to

accompany the commander. When planning air

reconnaissance, caution must be exercised to

preclude the flight plan from compromising the

route or positions.

Ground Reconnaissance

Ground is the best method of reconnaissance and

is ideally suited for defensive operations.

However, it involves time to physically examine

the terrain for suitability and risk. Because caution

must be exercised to avoid the risk of revealing the

position to the threat, ground reconnaissance is

best performed during daylight.

Reconnaissance for Movement

of the Regiment

Reconnaissance is conducted to prepare for the

movement and positioning of the regiment. The

regiment is moved and positioned to ensure

coverage to the supported force, to weight the

main effort, to facilitate future operations, and to

enhance artillery operations; e.g., mass fires,

counterfire, survivability, communications, and

CSS. The regiment commander may conduct

limited reconnaissance due to his role as division

artillery officer and FSC. The regiment

commander and/or his S-3 direct the movement
3-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

and positioning of artillery battalions and other

units with GS and GS-R missions and, when

required, battalions with DS and R missions. To

plan and execute the movement plan, an artillery

execution/position matrix may be prepared. 

Battalion Position Areas

Positioning of the regiment is accomplished by

assigning battalion PAs. Position areas do not

constitute a rigid restrictive area for the battalion

or its batteries. The PAs should be considered only

as guides to be followed as closely as the mission,

terrain, and tactical situation permit. Battalion

commanders conduct reconnaissance to find PAs

to meet their assigned mission requirements and

follow the guidance of the regiment commander.

Regiment Headquarters Echelons

The commander positions his headquarters’

echelons to enhance control and support of his

battalions and coordination with the division. The

commander locates himself where he can best

obtain the information critical to his situational

awareness and command the regiment. The COC

of the echelon where the commander is located is

designated the regiment CP.

The regiment commander selects the general PA

for the main echelon, with the S-3’s recommendation. Selection is made by map, ground, or air

reconnaissance. In consultation with the S-6, the

regiment headquarters’ battery commander

conducts a reconnaissance to determine the

specific positions of the main echelon and the

location for the COC within that position. During

displacement, the main echelon’s personnel,

vehicles, and equipment moving to and occupying

the new position are temporarily designated the

FWD echelon until control of operations has been

assumed from the main echelon.

The S-3 selects the general position for the rear

echelon, with the S-4’s recommendation. The S-4

or his representative conducts a reconnaissance to

determine the specific location of the rear echelon.

Counterbattery Radar Platoon

The CBR platoon commander moves and positions

radars operating under the regiment control for

coverage of the areas designated by the S-3. The

CBR platoon commander conducts reconnaissance for PAs. The radar chief selects the actual

site for the radar.

Meteorology Station

The regiment met officer normally conducts reconnaissance and selects the PA for the met station.

The met chief selects the actual site. The S-3

makes recommendations for positioning and

movement of the station.

Route Reconnaissance

All units conduct route reconnaissance continuously. Route reconnaissance facilitates the

movement and CSS of artillery units. This is

essential in certain types of environments; e.g.,

mountains, jungles, and arctic areas. Routes are

selected to maximize trafficability and minimize

detection and attack by the threat. The strength

and condition of bridges and the location of

obstacles must be determined and routes and

lanes marked. Roads may require improvement

by engineers. Information about routes is disseminated to all units.

Route Priorities

The regiment S-3 establishes priorities for the use

of the MSR. He coordinates the movement of artillery units with the division G-3 and G-4 and regiment S-2 and S-4, and issues movement orders.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 3-3 

Selecting the Position 

(Advance Party Operations)

The headquarters battery advance party

typically consists of the battery commander, the

regiment S-6, an S-3 representative, a communications vehicle with personnel as designated

by the S-6 officer (wire, multichannel, etc.),

and security personnel. If the personnel are

available, a representative from each section

should accompany the advance party. The

specific configuration of the advance party is

mission and personnel dependent. Therefore, it

may change throughout combat operations.

Every effort should be made to maintain continuity among advanced party personnel to

maintain a high level of proficiency.

Site Selection

The advance party should designate locations for

the COC/FDC, radio antennae, vehicle dispersal,

and, as applicable, for medical, supply, maintenance, and ammunition. A position should provide

suitable cover and concealment. A position in

defilade minimizes visual and radar observations

by the threat. Heavily wooded areas provide good

concealment, but may hamper communications. In

open terrain, the main echelon should be well

dispersed. The position should be located on

defensible terrain and allow mutual protection with

other units, if possible. Selecting a new COC

location must be conducive to tactical operations

as well as C2. The following paragraph provides

some considerations and techniques:

l The most important consideration is the ability

to communicate with higher and supported

units from the new site.

l Potential headquarters battery PAs as

designated by the S-3.

l The headquarters battery commander and S-6

conduct a thorough map reconnaissance of

potential PAs.

l Routes are selected based on METT-T and

information provided by the S-2.

l The headquarters battery commander or S-6

conducts ground reconnaissance of potential

PAs. 

l Final site selection is based on S-6/headquarters battery commander concurrence and presented to the S-3 for approval.

l Once the site is designated, advance party

personnel typically depart 30 to 45 minutes

ahead of the FWD COC. This time is adjusted

based on the current tactical situation and

METT-T.

l The route is verified by advance party and predesignated checkpoints are reported back to the

main COC along with any essential

information that could affect the FWD COC’s

movement.

l A CPREP is transmitted from the COC to the

main COC upon displacement from the current

position.

Actions Prior to Occupation

The COC site is the first site selected. The rest

of the position orients off the projected front of

the vehicle.

One technique for orienting all vehicles and cells

in the new position is for the FWD COC vehicle to

orient on 12 o’clock. All remaining vehicles and

cells emplace and orient off this vehicle.

Wire personnel must run wire from the COC to the

antenna farm. Antenna farm personnel continue to

establish communications. FD and FSC nets are

established in the COC. The generator site and

pick-up point are selected. The battery commander

must select individual vehicle positions based on

terrain for the FWD and main COCs.

Organizing the Position

Organizing the position depends on the size of the

area, the technique of positioning, the guidance of
3-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

the commander and his staff, and the requirements

for coordination between sections.

Traffic within the position should be held to a

minimum and controlled. Vehicles should be

stopped at a dismount point and directed to a

vehicle dispersal area. Foot traffic should be

restricted to prescribed trails or paths. A local

telephone should be connected from the dismount

area to the switchboard.

The COC (FDC, TPC and intelligence section)

should be located in an area outside the normal

traffic flow of other activities. The COC should be

marked for “authorized entry only.”

The message center should be at the entrance of

the position accessible to incoming messengers.

A switchboard should be located to install wire.

It should be in a covered area, away from noise

and interference, and must be protected from

threat attack.

The aid station should be near a road or trail for

rapid reception and evacuation of patients.

Sleeping areas should be established by section.

The messing facility must be easily accessible

within the position. It should be near a road to

facilitate supply.

Occupying the Position

The objective of the occupation phase of RSOP

is to prepare to deliver fire. Individual units of

the regiment are extremely vulnerable during this

phase. Thus, the occupation must be rapid,

orderly, and quiet. Occupations are enhanced by

a well-established SOP, training, and a wellprepared position.

Actions Upon Arrival of the Forward Combat 

Operations Center

l A guide is sent to a prearranged pick-up point

to guide the FWD COC into position. The

guide should possess a radio tuned to the

convoy frequency—typically the battery

command net.

l As the FWD COC passes through the pick-up

point, the guide will lead the first FWD vehicle

to the COC site where it will be placed in position by the S-3 advance party representative.

l Other FWD vehicles will be met at the pick-up

point by the headquarters battery commander

and communication Marines to guide the

remaining vehicles to their respective positions. Precautions must be exercised to prevent a choke-point resulting in a lucrative

target for the threat.

l Focus of effort is establishing an operational

COC. All personnel must share this understanding and assist in this endeavor.

l The headquarters battery commander completes

individual vehicle positioning.

Passage of Command and Control

Once an operational COC has been established,

the S-3A or S-3 at the FWD COC will initiate

the passage of C2 from the main COC to the

FWD CP.

At a minimum, the following nets will be established by the FWD COC before passage of C2:

l Division Fire Support Coordination—Div FSC

(very high frequency [VHF]).

l Artillery Regiment Fire Direction—Arty Regt

FD (VHF).

l Artillery Regiment Tactical—Arty Regt TAC

(VHF).

The following is one technique for passage of C2:

(FWD) “__the Marines, This is __th Marines

FWD, over”

(Main) “This is __th Marines, Roger, over”

(FWD) “Are there any updates at this time?

over”

(Main) “Updates are as follows...”)
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 3-5 

* Call signs change, making passage of C2 “invisible” to supported units.

Actions Upon Arrival of Main Body

l A guide is sent to the pick-up point to facilitate

a rapid, orderly occupation by the main COC.

l Representatives from every section meet their

respective vehicles to guide them into position.

l The planning cell is established.

l Position improvement is continuous.

l Several tactical procedures may be used for a

rapid passage of C2 back to the main COC. One

way is the main COC collocates with the FWD

COC. This eliminates establishing extra communications nets and structural reorganization.

Displacement

Artillery displaces to provide continuous support,

maintain communications, and enhance survivability. Considerations include security requirements,

threat activity, time available to move, distance to be

covered, the scheme of maneuver, and the availability of artillery. The terrain and tactical situation influence the distance and frequency of displacements.

Generally, the distance of displacements is at least

one-third the maximum range of the howitzer.

However, survivability moves may be a shorter

distance. The route and timing of displacement must

conform to the operation or the supported or

reinforced unit. The movement may be deliberate or

hasty. Artillery can displace by ground or helicopter.

When two or more artillery battalions displace

over the same route, the higher artillery headquarters coordinates the movement. When artillery

must displace on a route used by other units, the

maneuver commander coordinates the movement

and establishes route precedence. DS units have

route precedence over all other artillery.

During displacement, reliance is on radio communications. Displacements and the daily change of

call signs/frequencies should be coordinated to

prevent interference between the two actions.

Arrangements for transfer of fire support responsibility are made as early as possible. Priority targets

must be covered during displacements.

Execution

A unit in DS displaces when deemed necessary by

the artillery unit commander based on the operations of the supported unit or when ordered by

higher artillery headquarters. The artillery

commander coordinates the time of movement,

route, method of displacement, and the new PA

with the supported unit.

An artillery unit with a reinforcing mission

displaces on request of the reinforced artillery

unit or when ordered by higher artillery

headquarters. The reinforcing unit notifies the

higher artillery headquarters of the method of

displacement, completion of displacement, and

new position location.

An artillery unit with a GS or GS-R mission

displaces when ordered by the artillery regiment.

The unit commander recommends to the regiment

the PA, route, method of displacement, and time of

displacement. For GS-R artillery, the regiment

may assign the GS-R mission to another unit while

the displacement is in progress.

Methods

The methods of displacement are based on the

tactical situation and the requirement to continuously control subordinate units. The main

echelon may displace as a unit when detailed

control is not required. When continuous

detailed control is required, the main echelon

(FWD) “Roger, I am prepared to assume

control, over”

(Main) “Roger, __th Marines FWD, out”*

(FWD) “__th Marines, out”*
3-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

will displace in increments. Regardless of the

method, communications must be continuously

maintained with the supported unit, reinforcing

artillery, higher artillery headquarters, and

between headquarters’ echelons. In extreme

situations during displacement, control of the

regiment may be transferred to one of the battalions, or control of the battalion may be transferred to one of the firing batteries.

Unit Displacement

The battalions displace with all elements moving

at once. Unit displacement is fast and can be easily

controlled since no firing is required. This method

is useful when a battalion is supporting a unit not

presently in contact; when a battalion is making a

long move; and when a reinforcing unit is available to deliver fires to the supported unit while the

DS battalion is displacing. Considerations include

the size of the convoy, traffic conditions, and the

loss of flexibility once the movement has started.

When the regiment COC must displace by unit,

regiment control will be passed to one of the

battalion’s FDCs. Passing control to a battalion

with a DS tactical mission should be avoided

whenever possible.

Echelon Displacement

Battalions displace one or two firing batteries, an

increment of the headquarters, and some CSSEs in

one echelon while the rest of the battalion stays in

position. When the first echelon is in position and

ready to fire, the second echelon displaces. This

method provides continuous but degraded support

to the supported unit, and facilitates and reduces

C2 convoy size. It is useful when the supported

unit is expecting/encountering light resistance. The

commander’s flexibility is limited. The

commander normally goes with the first echelon;

the executive officer (XO) stays with the second.

Echelon displacement is the preferred method as it

provides continuous C3. The headquarters element

will displace on order of the regiment commander.

Displacement should be invisible to subordinate

and supported units. The FWD COC will move to

the new COC site while the main COC retains

control of the regiment. Once established, the

FWD COC assumes control of the regiment and

the main COC moves to the new COC location. 

Prior to displacement, the communications officer

will coordinate communications plan changes with

higher, subordinate, and adjacent commands. Each

COC will maintain the capability to man the

minimum required radio nets during displacement. 

Passage of C2 forward will be kept as simple as

possible, especially when encrypted communication equipment is used. The FWD COC will

remain off the fire direction and tactical nets until

ready to assume control. Updates of essential

information will be passed forward from the main

CP prior to relinquishing control.

Typically, the S-3A displaces with the FWD COC

while the S-3 remains with the main CP. Specific

configuration and manning is mission-dependent

and at the discretion of the regiment commander.

Battery Displacement

Each battery moves only after the preceding

battery has completed its move and is prepared to

fire. This method provides maximum continuous

fire support and centralized C2, but is slow and

difficult to control over any distance. It is used

primarily by a battalion supporting a unit in

contact and is normally accomplished in a series of

short moves.

Hasty Displacement

The tactical situation may require the unit to

displace with little warning or preparation time.

The battery conducts a hasty displacement when it

has enough time to expeditiously organize and

conduct the displacement. This situation may arise

because of imminent threat attack or a change in

the friendly situation. The senior man in the

position must quickly assess the situation and

signal the hasty displacement by audible and visual

means. An advance party is rapidly assembled and
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 3-7 

departs to the new position. A limited-time preparation of the new position may be required. Firing

elements and a fire direction element depart after

the advance party leaves. Remaining elements

close to the new position as soon as possible.

Emergency Displacement

The tactical situation may require a battery to

displace immediately. An emergency displacement is conducted when a battery must urgently

leave its position to avoid casualties and damage to

equipment. This situation normally occurs as a

result of threat attack. 

Time is not available for organization for the

displacement. Unit SOP, training, and small unit

leadership guide the displacement. A reconnaissance party with minimum essential personnel,

equipment, and vehicles meets at a predetermined

point as rapidly as possible and departs to the new

position. A limited-time preparation of the position

is made. Mission-essential equipment and equipment of value to the threat are loaded as rapidly as

possible and moved to the rally point. Missionessential equipment includes prime movers, howitzers, FDC and COC, and enough communications, ammunition, and other assets to begin firing

at the next position. Non-essential equipment is

left in the position and recovered after the attack

and the unit is reassembled. 

The senior man in position must rapidly assess

the situation when deciding to signal an

emergency displacement. He must consider the

exposure of personnel and equipment in executing the displacement; i.e., the unit’s vulnerability

may increase. During position improvement, a

unit can enhance its capability to conduct an

emergency displacement by practicing the

following measures:

l Position vehicles close; e.g., near gun line or

FDC but with adequate dispersion to ensure

single artillery or mortar round will not disable both systems.

l Operate with only mission-essential equipment and personnel.

l Download equipment/supplies only as necessary.

l Prepare positions for rapid exit; e.g., suspend

camouflage nets overhead with an exit readily

accessible; use radio vehicles and field expedient antennae for communications.
CHAPTER 4

THE ARTILLERY DEFENSE PLAN

General

When conducting ground combat operations,

units must be prepared to defend themselves

against various threats, including air and ground

attacks. A responsibility of artillery is to deliver

timely, accurate fire. Traditionally, artillery

continues its mission and repels/sustains the

attack. The artillery commander has the difficult

task of planning a defense that provides adequate

security for his unit without needlessly reducing

its ability to deliver timely, accurate fire. 

Combat Operations Center Security

Provisions for security and installation of an

adequate defense for the COC promote the

accomplishment of the overall mission of the

regiment. Preparations will be made to counter

any form of attack. The COC can defend itself

without outside aid. COC defense will be developed, as permitted, by available time, situation,

and necessity. The headquarters battery

commander will develop detailed procedures for

planning, preparing, and executing COC defense. 

The defense of the COC will be maintained by

assigning primary, secondary, and contingent

sectors of responsibility to each security position.

This includes positioning automatic weapons and

rocket launchers to cover all avenues of

approach, and forming a reaction platoon from

organic personnel. Sectors of responsibility for

all weapons will be assigned and coordinated to

ensure complete coverage of the COC perimeter.

Each Marine will be assigned a definite fighting

position in the event of attack. 

Evaluate the Threat

Knowledge of the threat capability allows the

commander to focus on those tactics and

techniques that reduce vulnerability. Unit

positioning, organization of position, formation,

dispersion, camouflage, employment of weapons

and early warning assets, and the order of work

are geared to the threat. This does not imply that

the commander disregards other threats as the

battlefield threat will change rapidly. The

commander may be faced with multiple threats.

The S-2 can provide valuable information on the

threat’s ability to acquire and attack targets.

Threats should be prioritized and sound tactical

decisions made to counter them. The commander

assesses the threats and focuses his efforts to

maximize his available time and assets. Important

considerations include the following:

l Target Acquisition Capabilities:

m Radio direction finding.

m Counterfire radar.

m Flash/sound ranging.

m Visual detection from air or ground.

m Photographic and thermal detection devices.

m Night observation devices.

l Means of Attack:

m Fire by artillery or mortars.

m Air attack by fixed- or rotary-wing aircraft.

m Infantry assault.

m Mechanized assault.

m Infiltration and sabotage.

m Jamming and imitative deception.
4-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Avoid Detection

The unit’s best defense is not to be detected. A unit

that is concealed or that cannot be recognized has

greatly increased its survivability. The commander

employs various tactics and techniques to avoid

detection and enhance survivability should the unit

be detected. Units must practice deception.

Use Camouflage

The unit avoids detection by camouflaging the

six factors of recognition: position, color, shape,

shadow, texture, and movement.

Artificial camouflage is used to avoid detection.

Pattern painting of equipment and a lightweight

screening system (nets) are artificial camouflage

techniques. Nets are erected to break up the shape

of the equipment and should not restrict firing

capability of weapons or exit from the position.

Vehicle wheels/tracks are not painted and are

easily detected without camouflage.

Natural camouflage blends the unit in with the

environment. This is achieved, in part, by positioning and using contours, trees, buildings, debris, and

other surroundings. Artillery units are positioned in

micro terrain; i.e., ravines and gullies, increasing

survivability by decreasing the chance of the threat

targeting the unit by map analysis.

Reduce Electronic Signature

Electronic equipment must be properly sited. All

battery equipment is positioned to decrease

exposure. Directional antennae, remote antennae,

and wire are used to avoid detection.

Maintain Light and Noise Discipline

This includes personnel and equipment; i.e.,

vehicle engines and generators. For reduced detection and increased survivability, noise-producing

equipment is positioned and hardened. 

Reduce Weapons Signature

The muzzle flash of a howitzer can be seen at

great distances, particularly in open terrain. To

avoid detection, defilade positions, propellant

flash reducers, and gunnery techniques are used;

i.e., massing fires, low trajectories, and fires

without adjustment.

Establish a Track Plan

Available existing roads and trails should be used

whenever possible. Roads and trails can be

created with heavy vehicles to give the appearance that a unit has moved through the area.

Roads and trails must have logical starting and

ending points. Soil, debris, and movement can

degrade camouflage.

Use Dispersion

In terms of time and effort, dispersion is the least

expensive method of avoiding detection and

increasing survivability. Dispersion of equipment

and installations minimizes the effect of an air or

counterfire attack. Grouping differing assets in

proximity should be avoided as this will only

increase the unit’s chance of detection. For

example, if the antenna farm is detected by EW

and located near a howitzer position, the artillery

section’s chances for survival are decreased. The

degree of dispersion depends on the terrain, threat,

and the degree of C2 required. As a guide, a

battery should be dispersed with howitzers at least

100 meters apart. The FDC should be placed

according to METT-T (either near one of the flank

howitzers or in the center of the battery position)

following the same dispersion rules. However, less

dispersion is recommended if the threat is an infiltration-based ground attack.

Practice Communications Security

Signal, information, and physical security practices

degrade the threat’s ability to detect a unit. Short

radio transmissions (less than 25 seconds), low

power transmissions, and secure transmissions are

recommended. 
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4-3 

Displace

When possible, displacing should occur in

reduced visibility. Survivability moves are

conducted, when required.

Conduct Terrain Analysis Using KOCOA

Terrain is analyzed to maximize its advantage

while reducing vulnerability. Military aspects of

terrain are analyzed using KOCOA: key terrain;

observation and fields of fire; cover and concealment; obstacles; and avenues of approach. 

Key Terrain

Terrain that will afford an advantage over the

threat should be physically occupied or controlled.

The essential characteristic of terrain is that it

permits the unit to accomplish its mission. Operations should not be delayed by seeking a perfect

position and should—

l Allow all weapons to deliver fire for maximum

coverage of the supported unit.

l Afford defilade and concealment from ground

observation. Flash defilade of 10 meters is

sought for medium artillery. Too much defilade may limit the field of fire of the weapons

in close defense of the position against ground

attack or may restrict low angle fires.

l Be free of obstructions that affect the firing

capability of a howitzer; i.e. a cliff, building or

high tree to the flank.

l Allow for 6400-mil firing capability.

l Be accessible and have separate routes for

entrance and exit, preferably in the rear. The

position should not be on a threat high speed

avenue of approach. Concealed routes to and

from the unit are desirable, particularly if the

position will be occupied and resupplied during daylight.

l Be on relatively level, firm ground. Very rocky,

swampy, sandy or uneven ground will slow the

occupation of the position or prevent the effective operation of howitzers. The position should

be trafficable by all vehicles in the unit. The current and anticipated weather should both be considered; i.e., rain, flash floods or snow.

l Establish positions in small trees, brush,

isolated open spaces or irregular clearings in

vegetated terrain. Good positions can often be

found along the edge of a road or trail, but

away from crossroads or junctions that may

attract hostile harassment and interdiction fire.

Also, the unit should not be along the edge of a

primary route for supply. Positions located at

the forward edge of tree lines, in small clumps

of woods or under a solitary line of trees, are

easily spotted by the threat.

l Be away from prominent landmarks when

positioned in open terrain. The unit should be

randomly dispersed over the ground, making

good use of contours and artificial camouflage.

l Be in quarries, in ruins or under the roofs of

buildings in a town.

l Allow for good communications, preferably by

wire, with the supported unit and higher headquarters.

l Be large enough for dispersal of weapons and

other installations if there is an air or counterbattery threat.

l Be in a compact, easily defended position in

mountains or heavily wooded areas, when

friendly forces have air superiority, or when

the battery is threatened by guerrilla or infiltration tactics. The unit position should be away

from threat-concealed routes of approach.

l Allow for shelter and comfort of unit personnel.

l Have survey control established or survey available in a short time. Hasty survey may be

required.

l Consider the unit’s future mission or displacement.

Observation and Fields of Fire

Continuous surveillance is established and

maintained in all directions through use of OPs

and listening posts (LPs). Deny the threat the
4-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

advantage of surprise. Properly site weapons to

allow clear fields of fire. Ensure fire and observation covers all likely avenues of approach.

Cover and Concealment

Maximize use of available cover and concealment when positioning the unit and establishing

defensive positions. All vehicles, howitzers, and

equipment should be properly camouflaged with

netting or indigenous vegetation. Use protection

afforded by defilade. Deny use of cover and

concealment to the threat. Identify dead spaces

and cover these areas with observation and fire.

Obstacles

Identify all obstacles in the area, both natural and

man-made, which could impede movement. If

possible, utilize these obstacles in support of

unit’s defense plan.

Avenues of Approach

Identify all avenues of approach the threat may use.

Determine if each is suitable for mechanized or

dismounted infantry attacks. Based on this determination, emplace appropriate defensive mechanisms.

Provide Early Warning

Early warning increases a unit’s survivability and its

capability to respond to an attack. Emphasis on this

aspect of artillery defense must be continuous. Early

warning is obtained from all available sources

organic (sentinel and LPs, OPs, patrols) and other

measures (adjacent units, monitoring communication nets and higher headquarters).

Sentinel Posts and Listening Posts

These posts are situated on terrain that provides

coverage of all routes of approach into the unit’s

position. The number of sentinel and LPs

depends on the terrain, visibility, and communications capability. Sentinel and LPs coverage

should interlock with each other, with obstacles,

and with nearby units to prevent gaps. They

should be far enough from the unit’s defensive

perimeter that the warning of attack allows time

for implementing the defensive plan; i.e., the

reaction force. This distance will vary with

terrain, visibility, likely threats, and unit reaction

time. At night, these posts should consist of at

least two-man teams with small arms and

antitank weapons, dug in, have good cover and

concealment, protected by obstacles (i.e., barbed

wire), have good fields of fire, and covered by

fire from within the position.

Sentinel and LPs should be augmented with night

observation and intrusion devices. A continuous

wire circuit (hot loop) should be established

between all posts and the unit. Alternate

methods—such as sound devices, pyrotechnics,

and runners—should be ready. These posts are

withdrawn on attack using planned withdrawal

routes.

Patrols

Avenues of approach and areas that may provide

cover and concealment for threat forces should be

patrolled or kept under surveillance. Patrolling

should be irregular but, at a minimum, conducted

at dusk and dawn. The patrol route should intersect areas covered by sentinel/LPs and should be

coordinated with adjacent units. The patrol

composition will vary. See MCWP 3-11.3, Scouting and Patrolling, for more information.

The patrol leader (PL) will coordinate with the

commanding officer (CO)/XO and the local

security chief. The CO/XO or security chief will

coordinate with friendly units immediately

affected by the patrol’s actions; e.g., movement

within friendly areas, departure/reentry of friendly

lines, and fire support.

The PL will ensure that all Marines in the patrol

know the patrol’s chain of command and responsibilities of each member. If the patrol locates a
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4-5 

threat force, it should not engage the threat

(unless necessary) but continue surveillance and

notify the unit.

The local security chief will control the departure

and reentry of patrols in and out of the unit position. 

Monitoring the Tactical Situation

By monitoring the tactical nets of the supported

unit, artillery can keep abreast of potential threats.

As the threat becomes increasingly more defined,

the artillery can then appropriately increase the

manning of its defensive perimeter.

Other Measures

The unit employs detection systems and guards

as required; i.e., NBC detection and monitoring

teams, air sentries, and entrance points for control

access into the position.

Make Defensive Preparations

The unit must prepare to defend itself. The unit

establishes fortifications, obstacles, and a reaction

force. The unit must be prepared to occupy its

alternate position, if required. As time permits,

defensive plans are made for alternate and supplementary positions.

Organizing the Defense

The local security chief organizes the unit’s

defensive preparation under the guidance of the

commander. In developing the plan, the local

security chief walks the surrounding area and

determines how the unit might be attacked. He

can then develop his plan with emphasis on

avenues of approach. Organization of the defense

includes the following:

l Defining the perimeter, designating primary

and supplementary fighting positions and sectors of fire.

l For firing batteries, assigning supplementary

positions to howitzers. When possible, howitzers are employed in pairs for continuous

engagement and increased probability of hit.

Consider how howitzers and ammunition will

be moved to their supplementary position

(route or prime mover).

l Positioning weapons at key locations with

good cover, concealment, mutual support, and

overlapping fields of fire. Machine guns are

given primary and alternate positions. Principle

direction of fires (PDFs) and final protective

lines (FPLs) are designated.

l Positioning tank-killer teams with antitank

weapons and in well-concealed and hardened

positions. These positions are covered by fire

from other weapons. Primary and alternate

positions are assigned to cover avenues of

approach into the position. The ranges to likely

engagement points are determined.

l Covering gaps by obstacles, barriers, observation, and mutual support of adjacent units,

when possible.

l Planning defensive fires on avenues of

approach to delay the threat attack. These fires

can be delivered by other units or the threatened unit.

l Assigning air sentries sectors to scan and rotating them periodically to enhance alertness. If

low altitude air defense (LAAD) teams are

available, they should be positioned in depth.

l Considering the coordination of infantry support (or attachment) to protect artillery against

a severe ground threat.

l Arranging for ammunition distribution, communications, and signals.

l Providing protection of ammunition, personnel, and equipment from blast and small arms.

l Coordinating a manning requirement for an adequate degree of security, but not degrading the

ability to deliver fire. Minimal but adequate personnel may be employed in perimeter security and

reinforced when a threat develops. The perimeter

may also be reinforced in reduced visibility. The

key to such a defense is responsiveness.
4-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Ensuring all personnel know the defensive plan

and rehearsing the plan as time permits. Each

individual must know his responsibility and be

ready to react rapidly to a threat. A defensive

diagram is prepared to depict the defense.

l Ensuring the unit is prepared for triage, first

aid, and evacuation of casualties to the aid station, if required.

l Designating reaction forces.

Defensive Diagram

To assist in organizing the defense, the local

security chief prepares a defensive diagram. The

defensive diagram is a graphic depiction of the

position, surrounding terrain incidental to the

defense, the positioning of weapons and other

defensive resources (such as mines), the location

of early warning assets, planned fires, and key

installations. MCWP 3-11.3 provides detailed

instructions for constructing a defensive diagram

to scale.

Range Cards

After sectors of fire are assigned, a range card is

prepared (in duplicate) for each direct fire weapon

(howitzer and crew-served weapons). The range

card has a sketch of the sector of fire and necessary

data for the engagement of targets. The local

security chief collects completed range cards and

uses them to construct sectors of fire on the defensive diagram. Partially completed range cards are

prepared for alternate and supplementary positions

and completed as time permits. Range cards

should be revised continually throughout the

occupation of the position. When possible, a laser

range finder is used to determine accurate ranges

to targets. MCWP 3-11.3 provides in depth

instruction on how to construct a range card.

Range cards should depict the following:

l Location of weapon.

l Left/right sector limits with azimuth.

l Key terrain.

l Identifiable targets in sector.

l Dead space.

l FPL or PDF.

l List of targets with firing data.

Fortifications and Obstacles

As time and resources permit, obstacles should be

constructed to delay, stop, divert or canalize an

attack. Barbed and concertina wire, tank ditches,

barricades, trip flares, booby traps, and mines

(when authorized) may be employed to supplement natural obstacles. These must be covered by

observation and fire for effectiveness and

employed beyond hand grenade range of

protected installations.

Hardening of Positions

Hardening is protection to ensure that a unit can

function during and after a threat attack. Hardening can be achieved by digging in; using cover

such as sandbags, timber or rubble; or emplacing

berms (parapets). The degree of protection

depends on time, material, manpower available,

and the amount of equipment and personnel to be

protected. As a minimum, hardening consists of

digging fighting positions on the perimeter,

burying wire, sandbagging sensitive equipment

(such as collimators and tires), and protecting

propellants. As time permits, howitzers, the FDC,

battery operations center (BOC), and projectiles

are protected. Engineer assets and/or local civilian earth-moving equipment can be used in the

hardening efforts.

Reaction Force

A group of unit personnel is designated as a

reaction force that can react immediately to any

threat within and around the position. Group size

varies with the threat but normally has approximately 25 personnel from the unit’s sections. The
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4-7 

reaction force mans normal working stations.

When signaled, they muster at a pre-designated

location (FDC, COC, etc.) and repel a threat

attack and/or reinforce the perimeter. The

reaction force counters the threat at a sufficient

distance outward to allow a buffer for the unit

perimeter to be fully manned or to gain time for

the unit to conduct a hasty or emergency

displacement. The reaction force should be

capable of employing in two teams and should

not pursue the threat if the attack is repelled. The

reaction force conducts day and night rehearsals

for responsiveness and familiarization with the

defensive area.

The local security platoon is organized and

employed by the local security chief under direct

control of the headquarters battery commander.

Responsibilities of the local security chief are to—

l Assist the headquarters battery commander in

controlling the operation of the security platoon and the reaction force.

l Position security points both inside and outside

the COC.

l Ensure required signaling devices are installed

and operable and procedures are established

for their proper use.

l Conduct small unit patrols as required.

l Assign personnel to machine gun positions.

l Perform other duties as directed by the headquarters battery commander.

l Construct defensive diagrams.

Coordinate with Adjacent Units 

for Mutual Support

Coordination with all adjacent units greatly

enhances the defensive plan. By sharing information and incorporating elements from other units

(patrols, air defense weapons, indirect fires, final

protective fires (FPFs), etc.), each unit involved

can take advantage of a defense which, as a

whole, is better than the part. Also, to prevent

fratricide, coordination is critical so that each unit

is aware of all friendly patrols operating nearby.

Execute Defensive Action

When an attack occurs, the commander or senior

man in position quickly assesses the situation and

determines a COA. He considers the strength of

the threat and its effect on the unit’s operational

capability. Depending on this analysis, the

commander determines one of the following

courses of action:

l The unit can repel and/or sustain the attack.

Actions are taken to counter the threat.

l The unit cannot repel and/or sustain the attack.

The unit executes a hasty displacement. The

unit notifies its higher headquarters and proceeds to its alternate position. Preplanned fires/

smoke to assist disengagement are considered,

if required.

Active and Passive Defense Measures

Active defense measures consist of the use of all

organic and attached weapons with the aggressive

employment of all personnel to repel an attack.

Individual arms, automatic weapons, machine guns,

and antipersonnel/antitank mines will be employed.

Passive defense measures consist of measures

taken to conceal or disguise the COC by providing protection for weapons, together with preparing obstacles to slow the threat and establishing a

warning system to alert the unit. COC concealment

involves careful selection of a position that takes

advantage of the natural terrain. Camouflage of the

position consists of measures using materiel,

objects, and simulation devices. All tents, vehicles,

and other major equipment will be camouflaged.

Generators should be positioned to muffle sound.
4-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Reversing slopes from the threat using foliage or

digging holes can assist in this effort.

Signals

Although commanders will designate specific

signals to correspond to various threats or conditions, the following three signals are standard.

Defense Against Air Attack

Low level strafing and bombing attacks usually

occur during daylight hours. Upon the sounding

of the air attack signal, personnel will assume air

defense positions and all weapons systems will

engage the aircraft.

NBC Defense

The signal for an NBC attack will be continuous

banging of metal on metal. When the alarm is

sounded, all personnel will immediately don and

clear their field protective masks and remain

masked until the “all clear” signal is sounded.

Ground Attack

Upon the sounding of the ground attack signal, the

reaction force will assemble at the rally point with

their assigned gear. Primary watch standers remain

in place and all other non-essential personnel

report to their assigned fighting positions.

Reconstituting the Unit

If a unit becomes ineffective as a result of threat

action, specific actions must be taken to reconstitute the unit or return it to a desired level of

operational readiness. Cross training and an SOP

facilitate reconstitution. The following actions

are taken:

l Report the situation to higher headquarters.

l Render first aid and evacuate casualties.

l Assess damage, repair equipment, when possible, and redistribute assets, as required.

l If attacked by NBC, decontaminate personnel

and material.

Special Considerations for

Command Elements

CPs and logistics areas are particularly vulnerable

to threat attack due to a lack of organic firepower

and susceptibility to target acquisition threats.

Proper communications security and operations

security techniques are essential to mask a CP’s

signature. Vehicle traffic in and out of the

position should be limited and strictly controlled.

All sections of a headquarters battery must plan

to man local security posts even if this effort

degrades certain operational capabilities.

If the threat of air attack or artillery fire is minimal,

CEs may consider collocating with other units to

enhance survivability and common defense. For

example, a battalion FDC may occupy a position in

the vicinity of its supported infantry regiment COC.

Similarly, logistic elements may consolidate defensive responsibilities with their supporting combat

service support detachment (CSSD) in a low threat

environment. This arrangement would be undesirable in a high threat environment where tactical

dispersion would be maximized to enhance survivability.

Because the sections in the headquarters battery

will seldom be collocated, it is imperative that all

elements are identified with respect to size, capabilities, and position on the battlefield. At a minimum,
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4-9 

local security must be considered and planned for

the FWD COC, main COC, and logistical trains.

Determine the following for each element:

l Mission and tasks assigned.

l Personnel located at each site.

l Vehicles and other section equipment needed

to support its mission.

l Crew-served weapons required to provide adequate protection.

l Fire support available.

l Will this element operate independently, be

attached to another unit or be collocated with

another unit?

l Who is in charge?

Once these requirements have been determined,

the artillery defense plan must be tailored to

meet the specific needs of each element.The

plan must consider that the threat may be different to each element.
CHAPTER 5

BATTALION OPERATIONS

Mission 

The mission of the battalion is to provide close

and continuous artillery support to MAGTF

operations. This support includes accurate and

responsive fires in support of maneuver, longrange fire to establish operational depth, counterfire to defeat threat fire support systems, and

assistance in integrating all fire support assets

into combat operations.

Organization

An artillery battalion consists of a headquarters

battery and, normally, three firing batteries. See

figure 5-1 on page 5-2. The headquarters battery

provides the equipment and personnel to assist

the battalion commander control and support his

battalion, and establish an FSCC for the

supported maneuver regiment. Like the regiment,

the battalion headquarters may employ in a main

and rear echelon configuration to best support the

requirements of higher or supported units. The

artillery battalion commander will be located

where he can best control and plan fires. When

assigned the supporting relationship of DS, he

serves as the infantry regiment FSC.

Functions and Employment

The artillery battalion is the basic tactical fighting

unit. It has enough firing units to effectively mass

its fires and engage several targets simultaneously. The battalion normally employs as a unit

to meet fire support requirements defined by its

assigned tactical mission. The battalion maintains

communications with its batteries and any attachments, the supported/reinforced unit, and the artillery regiment, as appropriate. When a battalion

deploys independently, it receives augmentation

from the artillery regiment; e.g., met support.

When possible, an artillery battalion is associated through training and liaison with an infantry

regiment. On deployments, battalions normally

support the GCE by providing artillery liaison

officers, FOs, and shore fire control parties to

these regiments, as required. Artillery and naval

gunfire (NGF) personnel may also be provided to

separate maneuver battalions or other units as

dictated by the tactical situation and the mission

assigned to an artillery unit.

Duties and Responsibilities of

Battalion Operations Personnel

Battalion Commander 

The artillery battalion commander executes the

fire support responsibilities inherent to his

assigned tactical mission. He is responsible for

the training, morale, and discipline of battalion

personnel. During operations, the commander

reconnoiters routes, PAs, and observation sites.

He guides his staff and subordinate commanders

in fire direction, fire planning, and CSS. When

assigned the tactical mission of DS, the artillery

battalion commander is normally assigned to duty

as regiment FSC. He maintains liaison with the

supported or reinforced unit commander. He also

provides expertise and advice on fire support

coordination to the supported commander.
5-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Battalion Liaison Officer

The battalion LNO provides artillery representation in the regiment FSCC. He monitors artillery

regiment fire direction nets to maintain situational

awareness and keep abreast of artillery fire

planning and significant artillery missions. He also

ensures the S-2 and/or TIO are advised of all target

information received through artillery channels.

Specific duties are outlined in MCWP 3-16.

Battalion Operations Officer

l Prepare artillery OPORDs, letters of instruction, and operational reports.

l Supervise the operation of the main COC.

l Interpret commander’s guidance and incorporates it into the artillery fire plan.

l Coordinate movement of the FWD COC.

l Develop a scheme of positioning, displacing,

and moving units under the battalion’s control.

Figure 5-1. Artillery Battalion.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 5-3 

l Coordinate use of attached assets.

l Coordinate the delivery of artillery support;

stay abreast of the supported unit’s tactical situation for adequate and safe artillery support;

keep others informed of the artillery situation,

such as ammunition status.

l Employ operational security and EW in artillery operations.

l Work closely with commanders, other staff officers, and the staffs of higher, lower, reinforcing,

reinforced, and supported units on artillery;

keep the S-2 informed of all targets attacked or

planned for attack and advise on changes in

observation and intelligence requirements.

l Coordinate the activities of LNOs.

l Work with the S-4 and S-6 to keep them situationally aware of the current ammunition status

and communication requirements, respectively.

l Coordinate survey activities.

Battalion Assistant Operations Officer/

Fire Direction Officer/Watch Officer

The assistant operations officer executes the fire

plan and manages the assets under the battalion’s

control. In the absence of the S-3, he executes the

responsibilities of the S-3. In addition, he has the

following responsibilities:

l Supervise the operation of the FDC.

l Ensure dissemination of information to subordinate units.

l Perform tactical fire direction.

l Brief COC watch officer in accordance with

appendix E.

l Perform tactical fire direction to coordinate the

attack of targets generated by the intelligence

section, higher headquarters, and attached units.

l Review schedules of fire to alleviate unnecessary duplication and to execute as appropriate.

l The battalion FDO, assisted by battalion fire

direction personnel, trains battery FDC personnel

and ensures battery FDCs manage muzzle velocity variances (MVVs), weapons information, and

ammunition.

Battalion Operations Chief

The battalion operations chief is the principal

assistant to the operations officer. His duties

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Perform tactical/technical fire direction.

l Supervise operation of the COC.

l Ensure a COC journal is continuously maintained.

l Ensure all SITMAPs and overlays are current

and applicable.

l Supervise the COC’s establishment and displacement.

l Establish a watch schedule.

l Maintain accountability of all COC personnel.

l Assist the S-3 and watch officer in their duties.

Battalion Assistant Operations Chief

The battalion assistant operations chief is the

principal assistant to the assistant operations

officer/FDO/watch officer. His duties include, but

are not limited to, the following:

l Supervise inventories and loading of equipment.

l Supervise vehicle maintenance.

l Prepare COC supply requisitions.

l Assist in fire planning.

l Assist the operations chief in his duties and

responsibilities.

Tactical Policies 

Tactical policies for the artillery battalion are the

same as the artillery regiment.
5-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Battalion Combat Operations Center 

The battalion COC is composed of similar personnel with respect to the regiment COC. See figure

5-2. The battalion COC structure is similar to the

regiment and employs the following agencies:

l Main COC.

l FWD COC.

l ALOC.

l Alternate regiment COC.

The battalion main COC is responsible for C2 of

the battalion and must be prepared to serve as the

alternate regiment COC when severe degradation

or catastrophic loss of C3 occurs within the

regiment COC. Each battery FDC must be

prepared to tactically control the battalion’s fires

and serve as the alternate battalion COC. The

alternate COC for the battalion will be designated in the applicable operation or fragmentary

order. Assumption of control and passage of C2

will follow the procedures in chapter 2.

Figure 5-2. Example Battalion COC Configuration.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 5-5 

Battalion Fire Direction Center 

The battalion FDC is composed of personnel from

the operations platoon. Watch sections operate

similarly to the regiment FDC. The battalion

communications platoon provides equipment and

personnel to the FDC. Functions of the battalion

FDC during operations include fire direction and

movement and positioning of batteries.

The tactics, techniques, and procedures in this

chapter apply in a digitized environment. 

The battalion FDC has primary responsibility for

tactical fire direction in the battalion. The extent

that tactical fire direction is exercised is situational-dependent. In some situations, the battalion

FDO may make all tactical fire direction

decisions. In other situations, tactical fire direction may be decentralized; e.g., when a battery is

operating independently; when the battalion is

unable to maintain communications with a

battery; or when batteries are widely dispersed.

Every effort is made to exercise control over the

batteries before decentralizing tactical fire direction. Regardless of the degree of centralization,

the battalion FDC works closely with battery

FDCs. The battalion FDC can provide valuable

guidance on techniques for engaging targets.

Centralized Tactical Fire Direction

Centralized tactical fire direction equates to

authority to make decisions regarding fire

missions, how fire control is executed, and how

calls for fire are answered. The degree of control

may be that the battalion controls all fire missions

directly or it intercedes, as necessary. The degree

of centralization is dictated by the tactical situation, communications, and the FDC’s personnel

strength, training, and expertise.

Normally, the battalion FDC answers all calls for

fire, makes all tactical fire direction decisions,

and assumes control of fire missions on the nets.

Fire orders are then transmitted to firing batteries,

as appropriate.

Decentralized Tactical Fire Direction

Fire missions can be transmitted on artillery COF

nets established by the battalion. For responsiveness, calls for fire are sent to a firing battery

assigned to a specific artillery COF net, each

controlled by the battalion. Battery and battalion

FDOs concurrently analyze the fire mission. The

battery FDO determines how to attack the target;

the battalion FDO provides guidance and intercedes, as necessary. Considerations include the

nature of the target, recommendation of the

requester, attack guidance, commander’s guidance,

firing restrictions, ammunition status, accuracy,

gun-target line, survivability, and FSCMs. Call for

fire procedures are as follows:

l Call for fire is received by the battery.

l The battery FDO transmits a request for

additional support to the battalion FDC, if

required. If the battery FDO determines his

battery can adequately meet the mission

requirements, he issues a fire order and

monitors the transmission of the message to

observer (MTO).

l After monitoring the call for fire or battery

FDO’s MTO, the battalion FDO intercedes as

necessary. He may decide to mass the

battalion, request R fires, give the mission to R

artillery or another firing battery, use a

different shell fuze combination or volume of

fire, assign aimpoints for engagement of large

targets or pass the request to the FSCC to

assign the target to another supporting arm.

The battalion FDO announces his decision

using a fire order. If the battalion FDO decides

to mass the battalion, the battalion FDC may

assume control of the fire mission.

l FSCC approves.
5-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

When required by the situation, the battery FDO

may make his own tactical fire direction decisions.

Each battery will establish a separate artillery COF

net and will act as net control. The net is monitored

by the battalion FDC as communications allow.

The battalion FDC responds to requests from the

batteries and assists where applicable. 

See appendix A for fire direction procedures

when operating with AFATDS.

Provision for Continuous Support

An artillery battalion in DS must provide continuous support, even during displacement. To

accomplish this, the battalion may identify an

artillery COF net for use by a maneuver battalion

and assign a firing battery to guard the net. When

a battery cannot fire, the battalion FDC may

assign another battery to guard the artillery COF

net or the battalion FDC may guard it, assume

control of fire missions on the net, and issue

appropriate fire orders.

Fire Missions from Other Sources

An artillery battalion with a DS mission may

receive fire missions from other sources than its

FOs; e.g., the battalion FDC may initiate fire

missions. An artillery battalion with an R or a GS

mission may receive fire missions originated by

the reinforced battalion, as appropriate, or the

artillery regiment. For these fire missions, the

battalion FDO/watch officer makes the appropriate tactical fire direction decisions and issues fire

orders to the batteries. After the mission terminates, the battalion FDO sends a FIREP to the

unit that originated the mission.

Reinforcing Artillery

The FDO will assign a unit to reinforce another

for a particular fire mission. The reinforced unit

will provide replot data of the target to its R unit.

Communications between units will be on the

artillery battalion fire direction net. If positive

communications cannot be established between

them, the battalion FDC will act as relay. After

the fire mission, R units will resume normal

operational status.

R artillery will establish communications with

reinforced artillery over the higher artillery

regiment fire direction net or the reinforced unit’s

fire direction net. Fire missions will be directed by

battalion fire order or as described in the preceding

paragraph “Fire Missions from Other Sources.”

Movement and Positioning

The artillery battalion S-3 directs the positioning

and movement of the firing batteries and other

artillery units operating under the battalion’s

control. In the DS mission, the battalion S-3

coordinates the movement and positioning of the

DS battalion and any reinforcing artillery. The

regiment S-3 coordinates for GS and GS-R battalions. The battalion S-3 coordinates the movement

with the battalion S-2 and S-4 and issues

movement orders to the batteries. Batteries submit

DISREPs and FIRECAPs to the battalion. The

battalion commander directs the movement and

positioning of the headquarters battery.

Other Battalion Fire Direction

Center Functions

Other battalion FDC functions are similar to those

performed by the artillery regiment FDC. For

ammunition, the S-3 identifies the type, quantity,

location/unit, and required time/date for ammunition resupply. The battalion FDC maintains an

accurate ammunition status of the battalion. The

battalion S-3 assigns firing batteries to priority

targets and assigns priority of fires. He also establishes battalion fire order standards and coordinates the assignment of FOs and LNOs. Targeting

is conducted in concert with the regiment.

Special Missions

When firing special missions, it is vital that all

procedures for the battalion are clearly understood by all subordinate units. Special missions

include priority targets, final protective fires

(FPFs), immediate suppression, continuous
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 5-7 

suppression, immediate smoke, quick smoke,

danger close, scheduled fires, FASCAM, and

suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD). Unit

SOPs should address these special missions and

provide standard engagement information.

Battalion Survey 

The mission of battalion survey is to provide a

common grid over the battalion AO. The battalion survey section normally performs fifth order

level surveys to provide control to all units

organic or attached to the battalion. In some

cases, the battalion survey section may be tasked

to provide control to units requiring survey that

are unattached to the battalion, but operate within

the battalion’s area.

Battalion Survey Officer

The battalion survey officer is a member of the

battalion special staff. His duties include, but are

not limited to, the following:

l Accompany the battalion commander or his

representative on reconnaissance of the new

position.

l Advise the commander of the capabilities and

limitations of survey, radar, and met.

l Formulate and implement the battalion survey

plan.

l Maintain close liaison with the battery commanders and coordinate survey operations within the

battalion.

Survey Chief

The survey chief is the principal assistant to the

survey officer. His duties include, but are not

limited to, the following:

l Perform, when directed, any or all battalion

survey officer duties.

l Ensure all survey data is correctly derived,

transmitted, and filed. 

l Supervise and train surveyors in operations and

maintenance of survey equipment.

Chief of Party (Conventional and Position and 

Azimuth Determining System)

l Train his survey party.

l Supervise and coordinate field operations of

his survey team.

l Responsible for the maintenance and accountability of his equipment.

Survey Recorder/Computer

l Maintain the required forms for survey computations.

l Perform independent computations with a survey computer system.

l Maintain the survey section’s computer systems.

l Perform the duties of chief of party in his

absence.

Instrument Operator

Operate and perform preventive maintenance

checks and services on team survey equipment.

Battalion Survey Methods

All battalion survey sections will accomplish

field work procedures and computations involved

in GPS surveying, traverse, intersection, resection, hasty survey, and astronomic observation

techniques in accordance with MCWP 3-16.7.

MCWP 3-16.7 contains information on the

following survey topics:

l Starting control.

l Distance determination.

l Angle measurement. 

l Recorder’s notes/closure of survey. 

l Computations. 
5-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Station Marking

All stations surveyed by battalion teams will

consist of a standard surveyor’s hub driven

almost flush with the ground with a surveyor’s

tack in the center indicating the plumbing point.

Each battalion will be allotted a block of

numbers, by regiment, to designate firing points.

Adjustments will be made, if necessary, to

accommodate attached survey sections.

The orienting station (OS) hub will have a tag

affixed with the following information:

l Date established.

l Station name.

l Direction to end of orienting line (EOL).

l Instructions.

The EOL hub will be tagged with the following:

l Date established.

l Station name.

l Instructions.

The OS will be witnessed by a yellow stake. The

EOL will be witnessed by a yellow and red stake.

Witness stakes are not required to be tagged.

Firing Position Data Card

Battalion survey officers will give a firing

position data card to the battery commander or

his representative with the following information:

l Grid to OS (grid to EOL is optional for use

when 6400-mil capability is required).

l Azimuth and distance from OS to EOL.

Priority of Survey

l Establish OS/EOL for the batteries.

l Establish declination stations.

l Extend control to CBR sites.

l Extend control to met stations.

l Perform target area surveys.

l Assist other units (mortars, PLRS, EW, etc.), as

required.

Reconnaissance for Movement

of the Battalion 

The artillery commander initiates reconnaissance

based on his knowledge of the tactical situation

or as a result of a change in mission. Movement

and positioning are driven by fire support

requirements, the tactical situation, communications, and survivability. The artillery battalion

commander selects positions that allow the battalion to accomplish its mission. 

Although earlier paragraphs establish the

precepts for displacement and advance party

operations, it is important to distinguish between

regiment and battalion operations. Battalions

operate at a higher tempo and must synchronize

their movement with the supported maneuver

unit, reinforced artillery unit or higher regiment

headquarters, depending on their assigned tactical mission. These movements must also support

the artillery regiment’s concept of operations.

Planning the Reconnaissance

Effective reconnaissance must be planned to anticipate the needs of the higher artillery unit and the

supported unit. Planning varies with the mission,

time available, and method of reconnaissance.

The commander plans and coordinates the reconnaissance. He analyzes the tactical situation to

identify positioning requirements. By map reconnaissance, he identifies a potential PA. He coordinates potential areas with the supported/reinforced

unit and higher artillery headquarters, as appropriate. The commander determines the presence of

other units (or their planned occupation of

positions in the vicinity of the area) and routes to

be reconnoitered. Provisions may be required to
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 5-9 

bypass friendly units along the route. The

commander considers the distance and route to the

new area and availability of personnel and equipment. He then determines how to conduct the

reconnaissance, composition of the reconnaissance party, reconnaissance routes, and time available. He develops his plan, plans fires, and issues

orders for execution.

The S-2 provides information to help the

commander plan and execute his reconnaissance.

Information includes the threat, camouflage,

visibility and trafficability, weather, and obstacles.

Some information sources are other unit’s reports,

air observers, FOs, and LNOs.

The S-3 recommends to the commander the

movement and positioning of the unit. The S-3

considers the coverage to the supported/

reinforced unit; the ability to mass fires; terrain

and weather; and the threat. If necessary, nuclear/

chemical dosage rates and levels of contamination are considered. 

The S-3 ensures that positions can be supported by

communications and CSS, and that new PAs meet

survivability requirements. Based on the

commander’s decision and guidance, the S-3

makes PA assignments, designates azimuths of fire

(AoFs) or aimpoints (such as grid intersection);

arranges for route precedence; and issues warning

and/or movement orders. 

The S-3 directs survey operations to support the

positioning plan. Close coordination is required

among the S-3, the survey officer, and battery

commanders. The survey party may precede the

battery commander to a firing position designated

by the S-3; link up with the battery commander

during RSOP; or extend survey to the position after

the selection by the battery but before occupation.

The S-4 plans CSS for movement and positioning of the unit. He coordinates engineer support

and arranges for CSS to displacing units; i.e.,

repair and replenishment point (RRP). 

Movement Briefing

The artillery commander assembles and briefs

key personnel on his reconnaissance plan. A

general format for this brief follows:

Situation

l Threat situation, including known or likely

ground or air activity, obstacles, etc.

l Friendly situation, including locations of

friendly units along routes and in the position

areas, obstacles, etc.

l Mission, what is to be accomplished from the

new position.

Execution

l The commander points out, on the ground or

on a map, positions and locations (or tentative

locations) of installations within the position.

For the battery, the commander also identifies

the AoF.

l The commander traces routes to be used during

the movement. He identifies potential trouble

points along the route; e.g., likely ambush

points or obstacles.

l Order of march.

l Potential emergency firing positions (during

displacement).

l Convoy control measures. 

l Time of movement.

l Security measures, including immediate actions

and planned fires.

l Mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP)

status and areas of known chemical or nuclear

contamination.

l Any special instructions.

Administration and Logistics

Includes administrative logistical information; e.g.,

vehicle recovery, rations, water or fuel.

Command and Signal

l Prearranged codes and signals for the movement.
5-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Convoy communications; e.g., frequencies or

net control restrictions.

l Location of key personnel in the convoy; e.g.,

commander or corpsman.

Battalion Reconnaissance Party

The battalion commander (or his designated

representative) assembles personnel and equipment for the reconnaissance. Reconnaissance

party composition varies with the mission and

any restrictions that may apply. Normally, the

party includes the S-3, S-6, and survey officer.

The S-2 may accompany the commander to

analyze security requirements or identify PAs for

radars, OPs, etc. In some situations, battery

commanders, survey personnel, wiremen, the

ammunition noncommissioned officer (NCO),

and a medical representative may accompany the

battalion commander.

Actions Prior to Departure

Before leaving on the reconnaissance, the

commander gives his XO as much information as

he can to allow the battalion to continue operations

and to prepare for movement during his absence.

He may provide instructions for the issuance of the

battalion order following the reconnaissance.

Reconnaissance Party in March Column

During a march with the supported unit, artillery

reconnaissance parties usually precede artillery

units and march with the advanced elements of the

supported unit in column. The artillery commander

can reconnoiter positions along the route, as necessary. If time is limited, the commander may have

to proceed to the PA, conduct reconnaissance,

select the position, and coordinate survey while the

unit is on the march.

Conducting the Reconnaissance

The battalion commander normally assigns

reconnaissance tasks to members of the party. On

arrival at the potential PA, members accomplish

their assigned tasks and reassemble at a specified

time and place. Tasks performed include selecting positions for the battalion headquarters

echelons, routes, and communications sites. The

battalion commander may identify battery PAs

and battalion PAs for any reinforcing artillery.

Alternately, he may give guidance and authorize

subordinate commanders to select their PAs. He

orients the units by assigning AoF or aimpoints.

The battalion commander may also identify PAs

for other artillery units under battalion control;

e.g., CBR detachment. Following the selection of

PAs, the battalion commander determines the

method and order of movement.

Battalion Positioning

Based on the tactical situation and the position

selection factors, the commander/S-3 may use the

following positioning techniques.

Battalion Perimeter

Firing batteries are positioned near each other

with the headquarters battery main echelon

positioned central to firing batteries to form a

battalion perimeter. This technique favors C3,

coordination, survey, CSS, and local security.

This technique is desirable when the threat has

minimum detection and counterfire capability, in

close terrain, and on a relatively static battlefield.

The battalion is vulnerable to counterfire, radio

and radar direction finding, artillery barrages, air

strikes, and nuclear/chemical attack. Displacement of the battalion may be necessary if the

position is discovered.

Battery Perimeter

Firing batteries are positioned in separate perimeters with the headquarters battery main echelon

positioned where it can best control the battalion. C3, coordination, survey, CSS, and local

security become proportionally more difficult

with dispersion. Increasing dispersion is desirable when the threat has acquisition and

counterfire capability, in open terrain, and on a

relatively dynamic battlefield. The battalion as a

whole is less susceptible to threat detection and
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 5-11 

less vulnerable to threat attack. For short

periods, a control cell (S-3, S-2, and essential

equipment) may be required to extend the battalion’s capability to maintain control.

Firing Positions Outside the Perimeter

A battery may also prepare firing positions

outside its perimeter. The battery occupies the

supplementary firing position with only the

necessary personnel, equipment, and supplies for

a specific mission; e.g. limited artillery raid,

registration to the rear or offset registration.

Following the mission, the battery or those

elements conducting the mission return to their

primary position. This technique can extend the

range of the battery and reduce the threat’s

counterfire effectiveness. C2, CSS, and security

are simplified since the elements of the battalion

are usually together. However, the battalion’s

ability to deliver massed or sustained fire may be

degraded when units are not outside the battalion

position conducting other missions. Additional

positions and routes, time, survey, and communications are required. The vulnerability of the

battery while displacing must be considered.

Battery Positioning

Like battalion PAs, battery PAs are general in

nature. Battery commanders reconnoiter their

assigned PAs as part of the battalion commander’s

party or they may plan and execute their reconnaissance. When required, the battalion may assign

a battery a position to occupy. In contrast to the

battalion PA, the battery position is the specific

location occupied or to be occupied by the battery;

i.e., grid coordinates. This may occur when the

battalion desires to positively control the positioning of artillery. Several factors affect selecting

battery PAs as follows. 

Control and Coordination

Disposition of the battalion on the ground will

affect its overall capability to meet its fire support

requirements and its survivability.

Supported Unit’s Mission and Plans

Battery PAs should not interfere with other troops

or installations. For example, in a movement to

contact, areas should be positioned near roads to

allow artillery to keep up with the fluidity and

speed of the battle. 

Firing Capability

Battery positions should be mutually supporting with at least 3,000 meters overlap in their

firing capability fans. Other considerations

include gun-target line, firing range, and

capability to mass. Positioning that requires a

battery to fire directly overhead of another

battery should be avoided.

Threat Capability

Positioning will be influenced by the threat’s

capability and means to detect and attack artillery. Table 5-1 contains battery positioning

techniques that correspond to threat types. 

Additional Positioning Considerations

Terrain

Terrain can limit availability of suitable firing

positions as well as minimize detection and

vulnerability to the threat’s attack. A position can

be selected against an embankment to afford

Table 5-1. Battle Positioning.

Threat Battery Positioning 

Radio direction-finding Laterally to degrade this 

capability.

Counterfire Minimum of 1,000 meters apart.

NBC To minimize the effects and 

exposure to these weapons.

Air Randomly and dispersed.

Ground To take advantage of existing 

security of other units; for 

mutual support; outside range 

of threat long-range direct fire 

weapons.
5-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

protection from air attack; a battery can be placed

in a PA that has restricted armored vehicle access.

Combat Service Support

Artillery PAs should be road-accessible.

Communications

Communications within the battalion, as well

as with the supported unit, should be considered when selecting PAs. When possible, the

capability for wire communications should be

made available.

Radar

When feasible, a radar should be positioned near

one of the firing batteries to ease security and

support. Generally, radars are positioned at least

1,000 meters from another unit to avoid increasing

the vulnerability of the unit by the radar signal and

vice versa.

Battalion Headquarters Echelons

The battalion headquarters echelons are located to

allow effective C2 of the firing batteries and, at the

same time, communications with the supported/

reinforced unit. The battalion commander is

located where he can best command the battalion.

The COC of the echelon where the commander is

located is designated the battalion CP.

Main Echelon

The battalion commander selects the general PA

for the battalion’s main echelon, with the S-3’s

recommendation. Selection is made by map

reconnaissance or, when possible, ground and/or

air reconnaissance. This positioning is influenced by the positions of the firing batteries and

the supported unit headquarters. The headquarters battery commander conducts a reconnaissance to determine the specific position of the

main echelon and the location of the COC

within that position. During displacement, main

echelon personnel, vehicles, and equipment

moving to and occupying the new position are

temporarily designated the FWD echelon until

control of operations has been assumed from the

main echelon.

Rear Echelon

The S-3 selects the general PA for the rear

echelon, RRPs, etc., based on the S-4’s recommendation. The S-4, or his designated representative,

conducts a reconnaissance to determine the

specific position for the rear echelon.
CHAPTER 6

FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS

SECTION I. FUNDAMENTALS

Mission

The mission of the artillery firing battery is to

provide timely, accurate fires for the artillery

battalion in support of expeditionary/land-based

MAGTF operations. In MEU operations, the

artillery firing battery provides timely, accurate

fires in support of the GCE.

Organization

The firing battery is the firing unit of the artillery

battalion. It possesses personnel and equipment

necessary to shoot, move, and communicate. Its

organization includes a battery headquarters and

one firing platoon. Figure 6-1 on page 6-2 depicts

the sections within the battery. The table of organization (T/O) includes sufficient fire direction

personnel to establish an FDC and a BOC. Each

artillery cannon section has one howitzer, a prime

mover, and crew.

Functions and Employment

Firing batteries normally operate as integral parts of

the battalion. The firing battery is not normally

assigned a tactical mission unless operating

independent of the battalion. The firing battery can

deploy independently when augmented with appropriate CSS personnel and when supported by the

infantry battalion to which attached. It can also

function as a provisional rifle company, if required.

Battery operations are normally conducted from a

single firing position. The firing position includes

the firing platoon and sections of the battery

headquarters, as required. The firing battery is

capable of the following:

l C2 through the FDC and BOC.

l Providing artillery liaison personnel, FOs, and

equipment to a supported unit.

l Performing limited maintenance support within

the position.

l Maintaining ammunition and supply for sustained

operations.

Duties of Firing Battery Personnel

Battery Commander

Under the guidance of the battalion commander,

battery commanders will direct battery operations with responsibilities including, but not

limited to, the following:

l Leading the advance party and conducting RSOP

in accordance with MCWP 3-16.3. 

l Ensuring coordination for survey requirements

with higher headquarters or establishing hasty

survey as required by the tactical situation or

organizational structure.

l Directing the layout of positions.

l Ensuring survivability and advising the maneuver commander on all matters concerning the

employment of artillery fires at this MEU (special operations capable [SOC]) level.

Executive Officer

The XO commands the firing platoon. He should

be fully capable of assuming control of the battery
6-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

at any moment and should conduct RSOP for the

battery whenever the battery commander is not

available. In addition to being positioned where he

can best control battery operations, the XO duties

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Supervise and coordinate logistical and maintenance efforts, including the distribution of all

classes of supply.

l Act as liaison between the battery and logistical support agencies.

l Verify the lay of the battery. 

l Ensure the accurate computation of XO’s minimum quadrant. 

l Establish and supervise the plan for battery

defense.

l Direct howitzer operations and consult with the

FDO on ammunition management.

l Lead the main body to the next firing position.

See MCWP 3-16.3 for more information.

Figure 6-1. Firing Battery.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-3 

Liaison Officer

The LNO serves as the battery CO’s representative

and artillery/fire support advisor to the supported

maneuver battalion. Primary duties include keeping

the artillery battalion/battery informed of the

maneuver battalion’s plans and monitoring/controlling the FO teams. He also participates in fire

support planning and must constantly be aware of

the location and situation of the artillery battalion

and batteries. See MCWP 3-16 and MCWP 3-16.6,

Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter, and Controller, for more information.

Fire Direction Officer

The FDO is responsible for the training and

supervision of the fire direction personnel. The

FDO is responsible for the following: 

l Ensuring the accurate computation of firing

data for the engagement of targets based on

commander’s guidance, attack criteria, and the

tactical situation.

l Maintaining a SITMAP to reflect battlefield

geometry and the current threat situation. 

l Eliminating the potential of fratricide by clearing intermediate crests along the gun-target

line. 

See MCWPs 3-16.3 and 3-16.4 for more information.

Assistant Executive Officer

The assistant executive officer (AXO) assists the

CO during RSOP and advance party operations.

The AXO is responsible for setting up and orienting the lay circle using the most preferred method

available. In the absence of the CO, the AXO

selects the location for the BOC. Once the battery

occupies and has been laid by the XO, the AXO

assists the XO in the general supervision of the

battery position. The AXO serves as the FDO in

the BOC. See MCWP 3-16.3 for more information. 

First Sergeant

The first sergeant is the senior enlisted advisor to

the CO on administrative matters and the enlisted

members of the battery. The first sergeant is

guided in the performance of his duties by

MCWP 3.16.3

Battery Gunnery Sergeant

The battery gunnery sergeant is the primary expert

on artillery matters. He should be prepared to

assume the duties of the XO if required. He assists

the XO in the overall establishment and supervision of the plan for battery defense. The battery

gunnery sergeant is guided by the duties assigned

to the chief of firing battery in MCWP 3-16.3.

Operations Chief

The operations chief is the technical expert and

trainer within the FDC. He ensures that all equipment is on hand and operational, maintains appropriate records, and supervises the computation of

all firing data. He is responsible for the fire control

map including the current location of friendly units

and FSCMs. He ensures the smooth performance

of the FDC and functions as the FDO in his

absence. See MCWP 3-16.3 for more information.

Assistant Operations Chief

The assistant operations chief is the technical

expert within the BOC. He ensures a technical fire

direction method is available and in concert with

the FDC’s method (met, residuals, MVVs, etc.)

before the BOC departs for the new position. He

ensures equipment is on hand and operational,

appropriate records are maintained, and supervises

the computation of all firing data within the BOC.

Motor Transport Chief

The motor transport chief is responsible for

vehicle support and maintenance for the battery.
6-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

He advises the CO/XO on convoy formations and

procedures. Whenever possible, he develops strip

maps to orient drivers and key personnel before

movement. Additionally, he ensures vehicles are

operational and receive routine maintenance.

Ammunition Chief

The ammunition chief reports directly to the XO

for guidance. He is responsible for ensuring the

correct amount of ammunition is received and

delivered to howitzer sections as directed. He

works in concert with the XO to ensure adequate

ammunition is available and projects future requirements based on the current operational tempo.

Local Security Chief

The local security chief is responsible for recommending the local security efforts of the battery.

He trains and supervises personnel in the employment of crew-served weapons. He accompanies

the CO on RSOP and leads security sweeps by

the advance party. When in position, he generates the battery defensive diagram and ensures it

is reviewed by the XO and forwarded to the

battalion for integration with battalion defensive

plans. See MCWP 3-16.3 for more information. 

Communications Chief

The communications chief is the principal advisor

to the CO for all communications matters. He is

responsible for establishing and maintaining

battery wire diagrams and radio communications.

He provides a representative for the advance party

who is proficient in advising the CO on communications sites. He also trains communications

personnel on establishing, protecting, repairing,

and recovering internal battery and section wire.

Howitzer Section Chief

The howitzer section chief is responsible for maintenance, training, and safe operation of the howitzer

section. He is an expert in the safe operation and

employment of the howitzer including maintenance, handling of ammunition, local security,

convoy operations, navigation, direct fire including

the M-2 and M240G machine guns, MK-19, and

emergency actions including the emergency

destruction of his howitzer and prime mover. See

MCWP 3-16.3 and the appropriate technical manual

(TM) for more information on the duties and

responsibilities of howitzer section chiefs.

SECTION II. FIRE DIRECTION

Firing Battery Procedures with

the Battery Computer System

The FDC operates with the BCS as the primary

means for technical fire direction and maintains a

back-up capability. To the extent possible, the

gun display units (GDUs) will be used by all

howitzers to receive fire commands from the

FDC; voice commands will be used as back up.

In conjunction with the digital wire link established

between the BCS and the howitzer GDUs, a

separate voice wire link will be established between

the FDC, the howitzers, and the BOC. An additional

voice wire link will be established solely between

the FDC and BOC. Before transmitting digital or

voice firing data to the gun line, all firing data will

be verified before firing. The howitzer section

chiefs, BOC representative, and FDO will ensure

constant monitoring of the wire link. See figure 6-2. 

Gunnery

All techniques listed in MCWP 3-16.4 will be

adhered to.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-5 

Fire Direction Center Functions

l Prevent fratricide.

l Determine residuals and graphic firing table

settings.

l Respond to all communications directed to the

battery.

l Compute technical data for firing element.

l Perform tactical fire direction, as required.

l Execute fire plans.

l Receive fire order standards from the battalion,

when required.

l Establish fire order/command standards for the

battery.

l Respond to fire orders from battalion.

l Process requests for fire from supported units.

l Submit requests for reinforcing fires to battalion, when required.

l Designate ammunition lots if not designated by

higher headquarters.

l Issue fire commands to howitzer sections.

l Assign priority targets/FPF to firing battery.

l Submit reports to battalion.

l Maintain an FDC journal.

l Maintain a fire control map to keep track of

friendly and threat positions, tactical control

measures, FSCMs, and zone of fire/target area

in the respective AOR.

l Be prepared to assume control as the alternate

battalion FDC, if designated.

Figure 6-2. Example Battery FDC Configuration.
6-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Fire Direction Center Journal

An FDC journal will be maintained in each FDC

to record pertinent data to include the following:

l FSCMs.

l Summary of tactical situation.

l Future plans, if known.

l Current ammunition status and lot designations.

l Current fire order/fire command standards.

l Fire plans to include target lists and schedules.

l ROE.

l Applicable reports; e.g., DISREP, CPREP or

NBC.

l Current residuals and graphical firing table

settings.

l Met messages.

l Important messages.

Standards

Fire order standards and fire command standards

are established by the respective FDO based on

commander’s guidance, tactical situation, and

attack criteria.

SECTION III. BATTERY OPERATIONS CENTER

Purpose

The BOC is designed to send a fully mission

capable sub-unit of the battery forward with the

advance party to rapidly achieve fire capability

upon arrival of the firing element at a new

position. The BOC also serves as an alternate FDC

in the firing position in the event the battery FDC

experiences severe degradation or catastrophic loss

of C3 or possibly when the battery FDC assumes

control of the battalion FDC.

Passage of Control

The passage of control from the FDC to the BOC

will follow the procedures outlined in chapter 2

similar to forward and main at the regiment and

battalion level.

The FDO transmits an updated FIRECAP to

battalion accounting for the number of guns

displacing with the advance party/BOC. During

the road march, the BOC monitors battalion fire

direction and battery command nets.

Once the howitzers with the advanced party are

fire capable, the BOC requests passage of control

from the battery FDC. The FDC transmits a

DISREP to the battalion FDC upon displacement

of the main body.

The BOC transmits a FIRECAP to the battalion

FDC once passage of control from the battery FDC

to the BOC is complete. This is due to the change

in the number of howitzers now fire-capable. 

Passing Control Back

Passing control back to the FDC uses the same

procedures. If howitzers become fire-capable

prior to the battery FDC assuming control back

from the BOC, the BOC transmits an updated

FIRECAP to the battalion FDC illustrating a

change in weapon strength. Control from the

BOC to the FDC is conducted via the most

efficient means (wire or battery command).
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-7 

SECTION IV. GUN LINE PROCEDURES

Purpose

Proper gun line procedures are essential to provide

timely, accurate artillery fires in support of the

maneuver element. The following paragraphs

contain common techniques and procedures.

Special Missions

When firing special missions, it is vital that all

procedures on the gun line are clearly understood

and followed.

Priority Target 

l Lay on priority target data at the end of each

mission.

l Prepare, segregate, and identify designated

ammunition and powder.

Final Protective Fires

l The gun line will lay on FPF data at the end of

each mission.

l Preferred ammunition for the FPF is high

explosive/fuse quick (HE/Q) unless otherwise

dictated by the FDC.

l Howitzers will be fired at their maximum rate of

fire for 3 minutes followed by their sustained

rate of fire until the command “cease loading”

or all prescribed ammunition is expended.

Fire Plans

When operating in an automated environment, fire

plans will be transmitted via GDUs. If time permits,

a dry-fire rehearsal will be conducted prior to the

actual schedule of fires being initiated. If GDUs are

not operational or when conducting degraded operations, the following are proven practices:

l The operations chief or FDO records all fire

commands on a 5” x 7” card by line number

and submits to each section chief.

l The operations chief or FDO talks directly to

the section chiefs via the voice wire link and

passes the aforementioned data so it may be

recorded by the gun line.

Regardless of the method used, section chiefs will

ensure designated ammunition and powder are

prepared and segregated by fire plan/series name.

Direct Fire

Direct fire is fire delivered on a target by use of

direct-laying techniques. Direct fire is usually in

conjunction with an emergency displacement,

taking only essential gear.

Out of Traverse

See applicable weapon’s TM.
6-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

SECTION V. MOVEMENT AND POSITIONING 

OF THE FIRING BATTERY

Reconnaissance

After receiving a warning order or movement

order by the battalion, or on his own initiative, the

battery commander reconnoiters new firing

positions. He plans the reconnaissance; conducts a

preliminary map, ground, or air reconnaissance of

the PA; returns to the battery, preferably on an

alternate route; and briefs key battery personnel;

e.g., the battery XO, first sergeant, battery gunnery

sergeant or local security chief. The first sergeant

assembles the reconnaissance party. In some situations, the battery commander may decide to bring

an advanced party on his reconnaissance. If the

battery commander is conducting the reconnaissance as part of the battalion commander’s reconnaissance party, the battery commander (and his

reconnaissance party) will meet the battalion

commander at the appointed place and time.

Reconnaissance Tasks

The battery commander leads the reconnaissance

party (and advanced party) to the new position.

He selects locations for battery installations,

formulates the occupation plan, issues orders, and

supervises the execution of the plan. During the

reconnaissance, the commander may sketch the

route and general layout of the position. The

sketch is useful for briefing key personnel on the

movement and helps orient personnel on arrival

at the position, especially at night. Navigation

can be aided by annotating the route with mileage

and time marks. Tasks performed during the

reconnaissance include the following:

l Route suitability, primary and alternate.

l Trafficability of the route and position, bridge

classifications.

l Obstacles and possible ambush sites.

l Positions for emergency occupation (hip shoot).

l Security along route and defensibility of position.

l Control measures to facilitate movement.

l Battery positions and AoF.

l NBC contamination.

l Availability/accuracy of survey using an aiming circle or compass to check the grid azimuth

to the EOL.

l Time and distance requirements.

l The order of march.

l Battery CSS area for ammunition and maintenance, if necessary.

l Cover and concealment.

Selecting the New Position

The battery commander selects the firing position

and, if needed, a separate battery CSS area. If

assigned a battery PA by the battalion, the battery

commander reconnoiters the area to locate

suitable positions for his battery. If a battery PA

is not assigned, the battery commander positions

the battery to meet the following considerations.

Firing Position Characteristics

The essential characteristic of a firing position is

that it permits the unit to accomplish its mission.

Operations should not be delayed by seeking a

perfect position. A desirable firing position

should do the following:

l Allow all weapons to deliver fire for maximum

coverage of the supported unit.

l Afford defilade and concealment from ground

observation. Minimize observation of muzzle

flash by defilade. Too much defilade may limit

the field of fire of the weapons in close defense

of the position against ground attack or may

restrict low angle fires.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-9 

l Be free of obstructions which affect the firing

capability of a howitzer; e.g., a cliff, building

or high tree to the flank.

l Allow for 6400-mil firing capability.

l Be accessible and have separate routes for

entrance and exit, preferably in the rear. The

position should not be on a threat high speed

avenue of approach. Concealed routes to and

from the battery are desirable, particularly if

the position will be occupied and resupplied

during daylight. Close proximity of a

helicopter landing zone (LZ) is also desirable.

l Be on relatively level, firm ground. Very

rocky, swampy, sandy or uneven ground will

slow the occupation of the position or prevent

the effective operation of the weapon. The

position should be trafficable by all vehicles in

the battery. Current and anticipated weather,

e.g., rain, flash floods, snow, should be

considered.

l Be in small trees, in brush or in isolated open

spaces or irregular clearings in vegetated

terrain. Good positions can often be found

along the edge of a road or trail, but away from

crossroads or junctions that may attract hostile

artillery fire. Also, the battery should not be

along the edge of a primary route for supply.

Positions at the forward edge of a treeline, in

small clumps of woods or under a solitary line

of trees are easily spotted by the threat.

l Be away from prominent landmarks when

positioned in open terrain. The unit should be

randomly dispersed over the ground, making

good use of contours.

l Be in quarries, in ruins or under the roofs of

buildings in a town.

l Allow for good communications, preferably by

wire, with the supported unit and higher

headquarters.

l Be large enough for dispersal of weapons and

other installations if there is an air or counterbattery threat.

l Be in a compact, easily defended position in

mountains or heavily wooded areas; when

friendly forces have air superiority; or when

the battery is threatened by guerrilla or infiltration tactics. The battery position should be

away from threat-concealed routes of

approach.

l Allow for shelter and comfort of the battery

personnel.

l Have survey control established or survey

available in a short time. Hasty survey may be

required.

l Be selected in consideration of the battery’s

future mission or displacement.

Types of Positions

The battery commander selects primary, alternate, and supplementary positions. These

positions are selected to support the planned

operation of the supported unit. However, the

battery must remain flexible and ready to

displace in any direction in case the operation,

mission or tactical situation changes.

Primary

A primary position is the position from which the

unit will accomplish its assigned tactical mission.

Alternate

An alternate position is the position to which the

unit will move and accomplish its assigned

mission should the primary position become

untenable. The alternate position should be

generally 800 to 1,300 meters away from the

primary position. This separation allows the unit

to escape the effects of threat indirect fire on the

primary position, but close enough for rapid

displacement. An alternate position should be

selected for each primary position. The alternate

position must have the same characteristics as the
6-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

primary position. It should be reconnoitered and

prepared for occupation as time permits. Each

section chief must know the route to the alternate

position because movement to that position may

be by section.

Supplementary

A supplementary position is a position selected

for the conduct of a specific mission, such as an

offset registration, a special fire mission, adjustment with a roving gun or defense of the primary

position. Supplementary positions for howitzers

should be selected to cover likely threat avenues

of approach in the battery defense. Positions for

offset registrations and roving guns should be far

enough away that counterfire will not affect the

primary positions.

Advance Party

An advance party is a group of unit representatives dispatched to a planned new position in

advance of the main body to prepare the position

for the arrival of the unit and its equipment. A

good advance party is critical to timely and orderly

occupation of positions. Personnel in the advanced

party should be trained, competent, and capable of

accomplishing assigned tasks with little or no

supervision. When possible, the advance party

should have regularly assigned personnel for continuity and consistency in advance party operations.

Composition

Composition of the advance party is usually stated

in the unit SOP and is changed based on the tactical situation and assets available. Figure 6-3 lists

minimal assets for an advance party.

Assembly of the Advance Party

The battery gunnery sergeant or local security

chief assembles the required personnel and equipment for the advance party and ensures equipment

is operational. He coordinates security for the

movement and for occupation of the new position.

The commander briefs key personnel of the

advance party. The unit SOP should have a prearranged signal or procedure that will specify the

personnel, equipment, vehicles, their sequence in

the march column, and the place of assembly.

Firing Capability

Depending on the mission and tactical situation,

the commander may take a howitzer section with

the advance party. 

Taking a firing capability forward confuses threat

moving-target-locating radars, as part of the infiltration plan. It also confirms suitability of the route

and firing position when conditions are doubtful,

Personnel Equipment

Battery commander,

first sergeant, and driver

Vehicle with radio, map, compass, 

chemical, and nuclear detection 

equipment.

Local security chief Map and materials for preparing 

defensive diagram, aiming circle, and 

necessary wire-communications 

equipment.

Battery operations center Fire direction and communications 

equipment as necessary.

Gun guides Compass, wire-communications 

equipment, and section gear necessary to 

prepare howitzer position.

Communications 

personnel

Necessary equipment to establish initial 

communications.

Figure 6-3. Advance Party.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-11 

and allows for conduct of a registration or an offset

registration if use of BCS or BUCS-R is lost.

Advance Party Tasks

On arrival at the new position, the advance party halts

and security personnel sweep and secure the battery

position under the supervision of the local security

chief. Security personnel move through the position

and the surrounding terrain to ensure the area is clear

of threat personnel, boobytraps, mines, and NBC

hazards. As the sweep is completed, personnel begin

preparing the position for occupation. The extent of

the preparation is time-dependent; as much work as

possible is done before the arrival of the main body.

As tasks are completed, a hasty local security is

established. Vehicle ground guides await the arrival

of the battery at the pickup point. Advance party

operations tasks include the following:

l Conduct a security sweep of the new position

to secure outside perimeter.

l Concurrently position MK-19’s along the most

likely high speed avenue of approach and

position an M2 machine gun along the long

axis covering the new position.

l Once the position is secure, the CO, with assistance of the local security chief, selects positions

for each howitzer, the FDC, the antennae farm,

and the battery’s logistics elements.

The battery commander—

l Designates the azimuth of fire, if necessary.

l Selects positions for howitzers, aiming circles,

FDC, BOC, and other installations.

l Provides guidance to the local security chief on

the plan of defense. 

l Provides instructions on preparing the position

to the guns platoon sergeant.

l As time permits, reconnoiters alternate and

supplementary positions. 

l Supervises the preparation and occupation of

the position. 

See figure 6-4 on page 6-12 for an example of a

battery commander’s position checklist.

The assistant executive officer assists the battery

commander in organizing the battery position and

establishes the BOC. Duties include the following:

l Set up and orients the aiming circle.

l Determine initial deflections, subtense, and vertical angles (VAs) from the aiming circle to the

guns.

l Supervise the establishment of wire communications with each howitzer position, FDC, and

BOC.

l Lay howitzers, if applicable, and prepare the

XO’s report.

l Provide a vehicle guide to guide FDC vehicles of

the main body into position.

The battery local security chief plans the battery

defense. Duties include the following:

l Establish the track plan and vehicle dispersal

area.

l Plan and rehearse the occupation with vehicle

ground guides.

l Begin constructing a defensive diagram.

The acronym SPEARR may be used to assist in the

conduct of the advance party.

l Security—A security sweep of the position is

conducted.

l Position—Positioning of the battery’s assets will be

determined by the CO or local security chief. Gun

guides will tape and stake their firing positions and

ensure howitzer marking stakes are placed appropriately (with M14 Pantel light on at night).

l Establish Communications—Wire communications are established within the position using

DR-8s and H-200s. Hand-and-arm communications or radio communications may be used as a

back-up.

l AoF/initial deflection, subtense, and VA—Once

communication is established, howitzer ground

guides report to the aiming circle to receive initial

deflection.

l Record—Ground guides record initial deflection.

l Reconnaissance—Ground guides walk their track

plan from howitzer position to pick-up/release

point and await main body arrival.
6-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Mission Accomplishment.

r

r

Can the battery provide support from the selected position? (This must be the overriding factor in determining position suitability.) 

Designate alternate and supplementary positions.

Size of Area.

r Is the selected position large enough to allow all battery equipment to be adequately dispersed?

Terrain Considerations.

Defilade Concealment

r

r

r

r

Protection from ground observation

Protection from direct fire

Protection from indirect fire

Terrain masking for antennae

r

r

r

Natural

Supplemental (man-made)

Disposal of empty canisters/dunnage

Trafficability Access Routes

r

r

Suitability of road surfaces

Inclement weather plan

r

r

Concealed, preferably from rear of position

Dual routes

Survivability. Use combination of all methods to ensure maximum survivability.

Threat. Prioritize most likely enemy threat to battery based on the S-2’s analysis of enemy weapons and target acquisition capabilities.

r

r

r

Ground attack

Air attack

Counterfire

Dispersion

r

r

Maximum feasible distance (based on threat analysis and terrain). Goal of 100 meters between howitzers in a high counterfire threat 

environment. Disperse both laterally and in-depth.

FDC/antennae remoted to maximum feasible distance. Goal of 750 meters in a high EW threat environment.

Hardening

r

r

Something is better than nothing.

Minimum. Protection for personnel (fighting holes) and ammunition.

Survivability Moves

r

r

Must be completed as quickly as possible to reduce out of action time.

Move at least 1,000 meters.

Defensibility

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

Likely ground avenues of approach identified.

LPs/OPs and engagement areas established along likely avenues of approach (should be far enough to permit hasty 

displacement to supplemental or alternate positions).

Indirect fires planned from mutually supporting positions on likely ground avenues of approach.

Defense diagram prepared integrating all crew-served weapons, howitzers, individual weapons, and LPs/OPs.

Supplemental direct fire positions identified.

Range cards prepared for all howitzers and crew-served weapons.

Patrols established and coordinated.

Reaction force established and mustering point identified.

Emergency signals established.

Miscellaneous

r

r

r

r

Distant aiming point identified and referred deflections recorded (at least 1,500m, preferably to the flank, and visible at night).

Verify BCS/BUCS-R computed howitzer locations with PLGR or Map Spot.

Utilize hasty astro or simo to confirm directional control.

Verify ammunition lots and coordinate emplacement of M94 chronograph with FDC.

Figure 6-4. Example Battery Commander’s Position Checklist.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-13 

Establishing communications should not delay this

procedure. Voice or hand-and-arm signals are used

as a back up.

Organizing the New Position

Organizing the new position consists of those

actions necessary to allow the battery to deliver

fire. Organization is a continuous process that

begins during RSOP and ends when the position

is vacated. During RSOP, the advance party

conducts those actions necessary for the immediate delivery of fire. When the battery’s main

body arrives, actions are taken for the delivery of

continuous fire and the position improved. The

longer a unit remains in a position, the more the

position is improved.

Movement of the Main Body

Displacements may be directed by higher headquarters or by the battery commander, depending

upon whether control is centralized or decentralized. In all cases, the battery must promptly submit

a DISREP to its immediate, higher headquarters

when displacing. Units must develop and rehearse

procedures for control measures, immediate

action, and signals to improve tactical march techniques. See MCWP 3-16.3 and MCRP 4-11.3F,

Convoy Operations Handbook.

Planning the Move

The CO must determine which of the four methods

of march to use, based on the tactical situation:

l Open column.

l Closed column.

l Infiltration.

l Terrain march.

The XO gives his movement order brief to the

FDO, gunnery sergeant, section chiefs, motor

transport chief, communications chief, ammunition chief, and all remaining vehicle operators.

Adequate security measures for movement

include, but are not limited to, the following:

l Concealment along the route.

l Air sentries posted. The convoy’s direction of

movement will be established as 12 o’clock.

Assistant drivers will be responsible for the 10 to

2 o’clock sector. The two Marines located at the

rear of each vehicle will cover the 2 to 6 and 6 to

10 o’clock sectors. With 5-ton trucks equipped

with a mounted M2 machine gun or MK-19, the

assistant driver will cover a 360- degree sector.

l Distribution of machine guns and ring mounts

throughout the convoy.

l NBC detecting and monitoring equipment is

located with the lead howitzer section. 

l Night vision goggle distribution and functioning.

l Convoy maintaining appropriate dispersion.

Other Considerations

Key personnel should be dispersed throughout

the convoy with radios for adequate control and

to provide enhanced survivability.

The motor transport chief, a mechanic, and a

truck without a towed load will be posted at the

rear of the column.

Normally, a corpsman will be located in the convoy

(typically the battery gunnery sergeant’s vehicle).

Conducting the Move

These specific checks should be conducted before

the move:

l Ensure the order of march is known by everyone.

l Ensure vehicles are operationally safe and have

adequate fuel. 

l Establish communications on battery command/convoy frequency.

l Employ vehicle guides to lead vehicles through

terrain, occupied positions or when backing up.
6-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Upon the XO announcing “close station march

order” (CSMO), battery sections will—

l Strike nets.

l Load all section equipment onto the section

vehicles.

l Check vehicles for proper operation.

l Account for all personnel, section equipment,

and weapons.

l Prepare for movement. Movement will be initiated by the XO’s vehicle departing the position. All vehicles will follow, in the prescribed

march order, from their individual locations

within the position.

l Enforce march discipline.

m Keep moving.

m Relay all signals.

m Practice light/noise discipline.

m Maintain convoy speed.

m Maintain vehicle interval.

m Keep alert with weapons outboard.

m Wear helmet/flak jackets.

l Continually estimate location while on the

move by using odometer, terrain features, route

markers, check points, PLGR, etc.

Occupying the Position

The objective of the occupation phase of RSOP is

to prepare to deliver fire. The battery is extremely

vulnerable during this phase. Thus, the occupation must be rapid, orderly, and quiet. Occupations are enhanced by a well-established SOP,

training, and a well-prepared position.

Deliberate Occupation

On arrival at the position, vehicles move into the

position without halting or closing the interval

between vehicles. Vehicle ground guides lead their

assigned vehicle from the pickup point to the

appropriate location for unloading and/or parking.

Laying of Howitzers

The unit can deliver fire when howitzers are laid.

Various methods are available to meet the needs

of the situation. Detailed procedures for laying

are discussed in MCWP 3-16.3. Reciprocal

laying of aiming circles or howitzers can

overcome LOS problems and expedite laying.

Security

Each section must have a predetermined sector of

responsibility during the occupation. If the howitzer sections are dispersed over great distances,

each section becomes responsible for its own

defense until help arrives. As the unit settles into

position, the security and defensive plan of the

battery are formed.

Position Improvement

An order of work is established based on the

threat and the time that the unit is in position.

The commander may establish an order of work

as follows:

l Harden critical items of equipment.

l Prepare individual fighting positions.

l Establish security measures.

l Develop defensive plan.

l Prepare alternate position.

Hasty Occupation

In some situations, there may not be enough time

to prepare positions for occupation. Priority of

tasks are established to ensure the following:

l Selection of howitzer positions.

l Set up of aiming circles.

l Preparation of howitzer positions, to include placing panoramic telescope and marking stakes, and

recording initial deflections.

l Minimum essential internal wire communications.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 6-15 

The commander selects the position and designates the AoF. Gun guides select howitzer

positions. The commander guides the entire unit

into position. Vehicle ground guides then meet

their vehicle as it approaches their positions. The

AXO and battery gunnery sergeant conduct their

normal duties as time permits.

Howitzers are laid using the most expeditious

means. If wire communications are not available,

voice commands are relayed from the aiming

circle to the gun line. The situation may require

firing to commence before making tests and

adjustments. Firing data is determined using the

most expeditious means. The FDC/BOC initially

should be set up close to the gun line so that fire

commands can be relayed by voice.

As time allows, action is taken to organize and

improve the position. Any inaccuracies in laying

or boresighting are corrected. Communications

within the unit are improved and normal installations are established.

Night Occupation

Night occupation reduces the unit’s vulnerability to

detection during occupation. However, night

occupation must be smooth and orderly to avoid

chaos, damage and loss of equipment or injury to

personnel. Night occupation is slower than a

daylight occupation. Light and noise discipline must

be stressed. Night occupation is ideally conducted

following a daylight preparation, or following a

night preparation. Should daylight preparation be

impossible, night vision devices are vital.

Vehicle Ground Guides

Guides must know their routes and the order of

march. Guides should walk their routes carefully

before dark and at dusk, if possible, noting paces

and features to assist navigation. As each vehicle

approaches the pickup point and is recognized; a

threat vehicle may have infiltrated the column,

the guide leads the vehicle into the position.

Vehicle blackout marker lights should be turned

off. If the driver does not have night vision

goggles, the guide carries a flashlight with a

filtered lens. If the driver fails to see the guide/

light for some reason, he should halt immediately; i.e., the guide may have fallen down. When

the vehicle arrives at its designated position, the

guide signals the vehicle to halt. Talking should

be kept to a minimum.

If the guide does not have night vision goggles, he

must rely on his night vision skills. The use of

silhouettes on the skyline— e.g., a tall tree or the

tip of a mountain—can help the guide maintain his

orientation as he guides the vehicle into position.

Navigational markings may be emplaced at key

points; e.g., engineer tape, chemlights or a branch.

Unit SOP should establish a technique for vehicle

recognition. Example: A blink of a color-coded

flashlight by the assistant driver.

Lighting Devices

The advance party emplaces lighting devices on

marking stakes, aiming posts, and instruments

needed for laying; e.g., aiming circle. Unit SOP

should establish procedures to ensure the correct

reference light is sighted when using fire control

and laying instruments at night; e.g., blinking

lights in accordance with prearranged signals or

using color-coded lights. During laying, only the

aiming circle and the weapon being laid should

have lights on. Too many lights cause confusion

and destroy light discipline. At night, keep the

laying instrument sighted on one piece until it is

completely laid. The EOL is placed at sufficient

distance to eliminate the possibility of parallax in

the aiming circle. Parallax is the apparent

displacement or the difference in apparent direction of an object as seen from two different

points, not on a straight line with the object.

Loading and Unloading Equipment

Rapid displacements and night movements make it

imperative that uniform load plans are established.

The weapon position should be so organized that

each Marine knows where each item of equipment

is located at all times.
6-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Emergency Occupation (Hip Shoot)

An emergency occupation results when a call for

fire is received while the battery is making a tactical movement. The convoy leader (normally the

XO) must know his location exactly during the road

march and constantly select possible emergency

firing positions by map and visual reference.

When a call for fire is received, the FDO or operations chief authenticates, if necessary, and relays

the target call for fire target location to the XO (or

designated convoy leader) on appropriate net.

The XO signals the convoy; selects the firing

position and designates the AoF; passes the

coordinates and AoF to the FDC personnel; and

lays the unit in the following order of preference:

aiming point-deflection, grid azimuth, and howitzer back-lay methods.

The FDO computes initial data and announces all

fire commands. Communications within the

battery is by small-unit transceiver (if available)

or by voice relay. Aiming points are established

in the following precedence, if terrain permits:

distance aiming point, collimator, and aiming

posts. On completion of the mission, the unit

moves on or continues position improvement.

Local Security and Patrolling

Refer to chapter 4 of this publication.

Hasty Displacements

A hasty displacement is defined as an expeditious displacement by a unit due to an imminent

attack by the threat.

Sections displace with all gear except ammunition/dunnage that is left in place.

On command to hasty displace, advance party

personnel immediately report to the advance

party vehicle. Section chiefs ensure that all gear

and equipment are consolidated on or near the

vehicle for quick displacement. Section chiefs

also ensure their drivers immediately check their

vehicles and radios for proper operation.

Ammunition/dunnage are left on the deck for pickup by service elements.

The order of march for the advance party does

not change.

The order of march for the firing element is

dictated by particular gun positioning and direction of exit from the gun position.

The standard time limit for a hasty displacement

for the advance party is 4 minutes during daylight

and 6 minutes at night.

The standard time limit for a hasty displacement

for the firing battery element is 8 minutes during

daylight and 12 minutes at night.

Service elements have 30 minutes—day or night—to

enter into the new position with all ammunition/

dunnage.

Emergency Displacement

An emergency displacement is defined as the

urgent displacement of a unit while under attack.

Units must bring only mission-essential gear,

including howitzers with the equipment to

achieve firing capability, and personal equipment (782 gear, NBC gear, and T/O weapon).

Each section displaces to the established rally

point when ready. There is no order of march.

Advance party personnel remain with their

sections until they arrive at the rally point.

At the rally point, personnel and ammunition are

re-oriented, re-organized, and re-distributed. The

advance party assembles at the advance party truck.

The standard time limit for an emergency

displacement is 4 minutes during daylight and

6 minutes at night.
CHAPTER 7

FORCE ARTILLERY

Force artillery is not a new concept to the

Marine Corps. It existed until the late 1970s as

the field artillery group, as part of the force

troops element of the Marine Amphibious Force.

It belonged to Fleet Marine Force, Pacific, and

Fleet Marine Force, Atlantic, respectively.

Marine Corps force structure reviews from 1970

to the early 1980s gradually reduced the size of

the field artillery group and the force troops. The

remaining force troops were incorporated into a

division in 1978-1979 with no additional reduction in size. By 1989, all artillery assets were

consolidated in the GCE, leaving no organic GS

artillery or artillery headquarters to support the

MEF commander.

When the MEF emerged as the Marine Corps’

primary warfighter in the late 1980s, the lack of

force artillery became an issue. In 1996, I MEF

established the 14th Marine Artillery Regiment as

the force artillery for its major theater of war

operation plans. This action was taken to counter

I MEF’s widely recognized shortfall in artillery

(relative to threat artillery capabilities) and to

create the capability to C2 MEF-level “force”

artillery in operation plans requiring multiple

division maneuver elements. 

Mission

Force artillery provides the MEF with an artillery capability and a MEF-level artillery

headquarters to C2 all cannon/rocket artillery

units not assigned to the GCE. This provides the

MAGTF commander with all-weather, surfaceto-surface deep fires to support MEF deep

battlespace fire support requirements; fires to

reinforce the MEF close battle; and an effective

MEF-level counterfire capability.

Concept of Employment

Force artillery provides the MEF commander the

ability to directly influence the battle by providing all-weather, responsive fire support. The

MEF commander’s employment of the force

artillery is based on METT-T analysis. In many

cases, force artillery weapons and systems

capable of ranging the MEF battlespace will be

retained in GS of the MEF, though they may be

positioned within the division’s zone. Force artillery can augment the division’s indirect fire

capability by weighting the main effort, or

shaping the battlespace to set favorable conditions for future operations. Force artillery may

temporarily attach battalions to other artillery

organizations but normally supports the MEF

commander’s intent through standard and nonstandard tactical missions. 

Tasks

Force artillery provides the MEF commander the

means to effectively exercise C2, logistics, and

administrative functioning over all MEF-assigned

cannon/artillery units not dedicated to supporting

the GCE. This includes, but is not limited to, all

attached United States Army, allied, and coalition

indirect fire support assets, as well as survey,

met, and CBR teams and associated/dedicated

CSS, as required. Force artillery does not control

assets other than those that are organic or

attached to it. Division artillery assets remain

under the exclusive control of the division for use

within its zone. In addition to the tasks normally

associated with a Marine artillery regiment, force

artillery must do the following:

l Provide C2 of attached United States or coalition

artillery (cannon, rocket or target acquisition).
7-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Provide liaison to the MEF for FFCC information

flow; provide input/brief as required in MEF

updates and target boards; participate in the

planning effort in future operations and G-5 plans

operational planning teams; and to coordinate

logistics, intelligence, and personnel requirements.

l If possible, provide personnel augments to the

FFCC.

l Provide the MEF commander with the radar

employment plan that covers the MEF single

battle concept. Force artillery does not control

the organic GCE radars of the artillery

regiments, but coordinates the complete radar

employment plan in the MEF zone by covering

gaps in the division, joint, allied, and coalition

zones identified through a METT-T analysis.

This will enable the force artillery commander

to focus long-range radars on MEF high payoff

targets.

l Position the TPC for optimum counterfire

support functions and communication with the

force artillery’s FDC, FFCC, and the Marine

tactical air command center (TACC) or its extension agencies’ forward air controller (airborne)

(FAC[A]), strike coordination and reconnaissance (SCAR) or tactical air coordinator

(airborne) (TACC[A]).

l Coordinate target acquisition/collection management requirements with the MEF G-2.

l Establish connectivity with the GCE artillery

regiments, the aviation combat element (ACE),

the CSSE, and MEF FFCC to support the

counterfire fight, as required.

l Establish liaison teams with adjacent or attached

joint, allied, and coalition artillery units.

l Plan for and coordinate logistical support for all

force artillery attached units. 

Command Relationships 

The command relationship between the force

artillery and the MEF is specified in the operations plans. The force artillery commander

normally reports as operational control to the

MEF commander and may be designated as a

major subordinate command. The force artillery

will maintain organizational flexibility to facilitate future operations and continue to evaluate its

task organization, providing recommendations on

organization for combat to the MEF commander

based on the tactical situation. 

Force artillery and subordinate elements can

execute any of the four standard tactical missions

that could be assigned to any artillery unit.

Assignment of tactical missions will be based on

METT-T and artillery organization for combat. 

Liaison

Force artillery provides liaison to the MEF, to

division artillery forces that are part of the MEF

task organization and, when appropriate, to the

rear area operations group. Additional liaison may

be provided to artillery units adjacent to the MEF.

Normally, liaisons will be deployed capable of

communicating with the force artillery without

communications support from the unit to which

assigned. However, external communications

support may be required based on the mission.

Depending on the tactical mission, operational

tempo, and personnel requirements, the force artillery may task its organic battalions to provide all,

or any part of, their battalion liaison teams to

execute any force artillery tasking. This tasking

may include, but is not limited to, providing a

force artillery liaison team to a reinforced joint,

allied or coalition unit. The MEF force artillery

liaison activities ensure the following:

l Mutual cooperation and understanding between

commanders and staffs of different headquarters.

l Coordination on tactical matters to achieve

mutual purpose, support, and action.

l Coordinate and/or monitor execution of force

artillery missions.

l Monitor current status of force artillery units.

l Assist in the coordination of the counterfire

efforts of the MEF.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 7-3 

The MEF force artillery liaison team provides—

l Personnel to the MEF commander to augment

FFCC, future plans, and future operations.

l Liaison to G-sections, as required.

l Guidance to the MEF commander/FFCC on capabilities and limitations of force artillery.

Force Artillery Intelligence Section

The intelligence section of the force artillery will

play an important role in fusing the targeting data

produced by the TPC with the intelligence information/reports generated by MEF intelligence

assets. The primary tool for processing intelligence data is the intelligence analysis system,

under the supervision of the MEF G-2. 

The force artillery intelligence section will

coordinate closely with the MEF G-2 to ensure

the best possible exchange of intelligence and

targeting information. This includes coordinating

with the CBR officer and the TPC to plan and

control the best use of organic and attached radar

assets. Target information gathered from the TPC

is provided to the SCAR to update the MEF intelligence picture. The force artillery intelligence

section may provide personnel as required to the

MEF liaison team to facilitate information flow.

Target Acquisition

The force artillery has organic AN/TPQ-46A

radars and may have attached artillery target acquisition systems (AN/TPQ-46A or United States

Army AN/TPQ-37). Force artillery will position

its organic/attached weapons-locating radars and

artillery observation teams to best support the

target acquisition requirements of the MEF.

Depending on the situation, the CBR officer and

all TPC assets will either be located with the MEF

force artillery liaison team at the MEF or at the

force artillery COC. Force artillery will coordinate

the employment of all radars in the MEF zone to

include the establishment of radar zones and

queuing schedules. Once coordination is

completed, the force artillery CBR officer will

publish the MEF radar employment plan. 

Counterfire

MEF counterfire functions are controlled and

coordinated in the MEF FFCC. Primarily artillery, air, and EW units, supported by an

integrated intelligence system, conduct the

counterfire fight. The preferred method for

counterfire is a proactive approach involving

sound IPB and a thorough collection plan to

locate threat fire support assets prior to firing.

Reactive counterfire emphasizes speed during the

initial engagement through the employment of

dedicated sensor-to-shooter channels and preauthorized engagement criteria. Full integration

of the FDC, the TPC, and the intelligence

sections within the intelligence operations center

(IOC) is crucial to the timely planning and execution of the counterfire mission. The initial

engagement is intended to suppress the hostile

fire support system long enough for a more

decisive engagement to be developed and

executed. A counterfire liaison officer may be

established within the MEF FFCC to coordinate

the engagement of counterfire targets. 

Threat fire support assets located by force artillery will be reported to the SCAR. Targets that

meet the criteria for immediate attack as set

forth in the reactive attack guidance matrix will

be engaged by force artillery, passed to the

GCE to attack, passed through the quick fire

channel to the ACE TACC or to the MEF FFCC

for disposition. See MCWP 3-16.

Force artillery will establish a liaison element

within the MEF FFCC to facilitate information

flow. That liaison element may include personnel
7-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

designated to facilitate counterfire functions.

Dedicated communications links (quick-fire

channels) between the force artillery FDC and the

FFCC current fires and the TACC are essential.

Force artillery may provide a liaison to the MAW to

facilitate the employment of the quick-fire channel.

It may also receive a liaison team from the TACC.

The purpose of these liaison exchanges is to facilitate fire support coordination.

The counterfire execution plan will be developed/

validated daily. It consists of a counterfire analysis which defines/describes the counterfire threat

in the MEF AO; a counterfire collection plan

(description of sensors which cover the expected

counterfire target locations); and the counterfire

matrix. In general, one of the following counterfire scenarios will occur:

l If a counterfire target is located by division

assets and is within their zone, it is the division’s responsibility and they attack it. The division can request reinforcing fires, if required or

appropriate.

l If a counterfire target is located by force artillery

target acquisition assets and is located within a

division zone, that target is passed to the division

for engagement.

l If either division or force artillery assets locate

counterfire targets in an adjacent ground force

zone, they are passed to that ground force FSCC

through the MEF FFCC.

l If a division asset in the MEF zone locates a

counterfire target, either the ACE or the force

artillery passes that target to the FFCC for attack. 

l If force artillery assets in the MEF zone locate a

counterfire target and they are capable of engaging it, the force artillery liaison will coordinate the

attack with the MEF FFCC. If the force artillery is

not capable of engaging the target, it may be

passed to the ACE, via the quick-fire channel. 

Meteorological Support

All met operations for force artillery will be

conducted in accordance with MCWP 3-16.5,

Field Artillery Meteorology. In addition to

normal duties of providing met support to organic

and attached units of force artillery, the force

artillery met section will be responsible for

integrating or coordinating met support operations with the GCE artillery met sections.

Survey Support 

Survey operations for the force artillery are the

same as discussed in MCWP 3-16.7. The force

artillery survey section will be responsible for

providing survey support to all organic and

attached units of the force artillery. The force

artillery survey officer may be assigned responsibility for survey control with in the MEF AOR

and will integrate/coordinate survey support with

GCE artillery survey operations.

Communications

Force artillery responsibilities encompass the

entire MEF’s battlespace. Distances involved in

this area are well beyond those contemplated for

division artillery. The force artillery commander

will be required to communicate with his

organic or assigned battalions, liaison sections,

and supported GCE units. This may involve the

use of nonstandard equipment such as personal

computer-based software and Secret Internet

Protocol Router Network. The MEF is responsible for providing communications assets to

augment force artillery organic assets to accomplish this task.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 7-5 

Logistics 

Force artillery is the largest artillery regiment in

the Marine Corps and usually the largest artillery

regiment in the MEF force list. Logistics for

force artillery may differ from that required by a

traditional artillery regiment in two ways:

l First, force artillery may be required to support a

front of two or more divisions. Consequently,

the distances traveled to effect resupply of force

artillery units could be significantly greater than

those of their division counterparts.

l Secondly, force artillery is a wartime addition to

the MEF. The habitual relationships that exist

between combat and CSS units in the MEF do

not exist for the force artillery. Planners need to

carefully consider logistics requirements using

METT-T. For example, force artillery may have

attached assets that use different ammunition

(United States Army MLRS) or require different

types of support equipment not owned by the

MEF. This support must enable force artillery to

operate in a self-sustaining, self-contained fashion to avoid placing an additional logistical burden on the MEF it supports.
CHAPTER 8

ARTILLERY COMMUNICATIONS

General

Reliable communication is a basic requirement

for the maximum employment of artillery.

FMFM 6-18.1, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Marine Corps Fire Support System,

outlines procedures for configuring nets for data

transmission with automated systems.

Forms of Communications

The two original forms of communication—written and voice—have been augmented by automated systems with a third form of

communication—data. Data communications

increase the speed of communicating on the battlefield, transmitting large amounts of information while reducing signature and enhancing

survivability. Data communications require prior

integration to succeed in information processing

and dissemination.

Means of Communications

There are three primary means of communications: radio, wire, and messenger. Whenever possible, units should plan to use all means of

communication to provide redundancy. Proper

planning and unit SOPs should provide guidance

on when to employ primary, secondary, and tertiary means of communication; i.e., if primary is

data communications over a radio net, will a separate voice net be employed until data communication is established or under what contingencies

will voice be or not be used?

Radio

Single channel radio is the primary method of communications in artillery operations. Normally, it is

used between observers and artillery units. Single

channel communications can be secured and used for

transmitting voice and data communications.

Radio nets must be specified as voice or data. A

net cannot sustain both forms of communication.

However, procedures should exist for data nets to

use voice transmissions when establishing or reestablishing communications. Data radio nets have

a lesser range capability than voice nets. Properly

maintained and configured equipment and directional antennae help minimize this limitation.

Figures 8-1 through 8-4 (pages 8-6 through 8-9)

show fire support radio nets and net control,

guard, and monitor responsibilities. Figures 8-5

and 8-6 (page 8-10) show communication connectivity for regiments and DS battalions.

Wire

Wire is most often used to connect cells within a

COC and connect multiple automated terminals

within a cell. Where the tactical situation permits, wire provides a redundancy for some radio

nets. Often, an FSC may want a direct wire link

that does not pass through a switchboard (hotline)

to the supporting artillery FDC or the TPC. Wire

communications can be secured and used for both

voice and data communications.

Messenger

The use of messengers must be planned. They provide a secure, reliable means of communications.

If time permits, they may be the most effective

means for sending fire support plans and overlays.
8-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Communications System Planning

Artillery nets are established to conduct fire mission processing and fire support coordination as

efficiently as possible with the least amount of

assets. Radio communications allow artillery nets

to be monitored at appropriate levels to ensure

effective, timely, and accurate fire support. Considerations for planning include assets available,

number of nets required, number of stations per

net, digital systems, and information flow. When

the communications system incorporates digital

communications, the planner must ensure equipment compatibility at the various levels; e.g.,

between FOs, FDCs, TPCs. Subscribers must

configure their devices with the correct parameters as well as ensure messages/transmissions are

addressed to all appropriate elements. Another

consideration is the security of nets.

Security

Force protection entails communications security.

Communications that can be intercepted are a

lucrative source of intelligence to the threat. However, speed and accuracy of communications are

also critical to friendly operations, particularly in

artillery operations. There may be situations when

these requirements conflict; i.e., sufficient encryption devices to cover all nets coupled with a

requirement for rapid communications. In these

instances, security takes precedence on nets where

targeting and fire planning information is passed,

since the threat may intercept these communications and take appropriate counteraction. On the

other hand, speed and accuracy take precedence on

nets where immediate requests for fire are passed.

Even if these communications are intercepted,

there is seldom time for the threat to warn the personnel or units affected.

Communication Nets

Radio circuits employed by artillery units are

discussed in the following paragraphs. The net

composition depicted in this chapter is a common

composition. The influx of automated systems

requires consideration as to the nets that will be

digital or voice without increasing asset requirements. Because of threat electronic countermeasure

capabilities, communications equipment failures or

lack of radios or personnel, it will not always be

possible for COCs/FDCs to monitor the circuits

shown in figure 8-1, on page 8-6. The S-3 should

coordinate with the S-6 for establishing net structure

and net priorities. Then, when some circuits are lost

or become inoperable, the most important nets will

be retained and communications will be restored in

the order of the established priority.

Artillery Regiment Communication Nets

Division Command Net

This HF net provides a means for the division

commander to command and coordinate administrative and logistical activities of subordinate

units. Artillery stations include the following:

l Artillery regiment.

l Artillery battalion with a GS or GS-R tactical

mission.

l O/O artillery battalion with alternate regiment

CP mission.

Division Tactical Net

This VHF net provides a means for the division

commander to C2 major combat units. Examples

include changes to tactical mission assignments

and displacement reports. It may also be used as

an alternate to the division command net. Artillery stations are the same as above for the division command net.

Division Artillery Air Spot Net

This VHF net provides a means for aircrews to

adjust artillery fire. When the net is in use, the

artillery LNO monitors for targets in his unit’s

zone just as he does with COF nets. The FO may

use this net to coordinate with the aircrew for
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 8-3 

attack of targets in his company’s zone. Artillery

stations include the following:

l Artillery regiment, net control. For specific

missions, control may be passed to the FDC

conducting the mission (battalion or battery).

l Artillery battalion, as required.

l Firing battery, as required.

Division Fire Support Coordination Net 1

This VHF net provides a means for the division

FSC to coordinate voice fire support. Artillery

stations include the following:

l Artillery regiment.

l Artillery battalion with a GS or GS-R tactical

mission.

l O/O artillery battalion with alternate regiment

CP mission.

Division Fire Support Coordination Net 2

This VHF net provides a means for the division

FSC to coordinate digital fire support. Artillery

stations are the same as those for net 1.

Division Communication Coordination Net 

This VHF net provides a means for the G-6 to

coordinate, install, and restore communication

circuits with subordinate units. Artillery stations

are the same as those for net 1.

Division Intelligence Net 

This VHF net provides a means for the rapid collection and dissemination of intelligence information. Artillery stations are the same as those for

net 1.

Artillery Regiment Command Net 

This HF net provides a means for the artillery

regiment commander to command and coordinate administrative and logistical activities of

subordinate units. It may be used as an alternate

for fire direction and tactical orders. The division

FSCC may monitor, as required, principally as an

alternate net for communicating with the artillery

regiment should other nets become inoperative.

Artillery stations include the following:

l Artillery regiment, net control.

l Artillery battalions.

l Attached units.

Artillery Regiment Tactical Net 

This VHF net provides a means for the artillery

regiment commander to C2 subordinate units.

Examples of types of traffic include changes in

tactical mission assignments and reports of displacements. It may also be used as an alternate

fire direction and FSC net. Artillery stations are

the same as those for the command net.

Artillery Regiment Fire Direction Net 

This VHF net provides a means for the artillery

regiment to exercise tactical fire direction; i.e.,

transmitting orders, fire missions, fire plans, tactical information, and met data to battalions. Regiment fire direction is also the net used to collect,

exchange, and pass combat and target information. This net may be voice or digital. It may be

used by subordinate units to request R fires. The

artillery officer at the division FSCC may monitor to keep abreast of artillery fire planning and to

pass FSC traffic if no other net is available. Artillery stations include the following:

l Artillery regiment, net control.

l TPC via relay through the regiment FDC.

l Artillery battalions.

l O/O artillery battalion with alternate regiment

COC mission.

Artillery Regiment Survey/Met Net 

This VHF net provides a means to provide survey

information from survey teams and a means to
8-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

exchange met information and ballistic met information between artillery units. Artillery stations

include the following:

l Artillery regiment, net control.

l TPC via relay through the regiment FDC.

l Artillery battalions.

Artillery Regiment Radar Telling Net

This VHF net provides a means for the exchange of

radar intelligence information and requests for surveillance of threat counterfire weapons. It may also

be used for registration and adjustment of artillery

fire. Artillery stations include the following

l Artillery regiment, net control.

l TPC via relay through the regiment FDC.

l Artillery battalions, as required.

l Artillery batteries, as required.

Artillery Regiment Communication 

Coordination Net

This VHF net provides a means for the S-6 to

coordinate, install, and restore communication

circuits with subordinate units. Artillery stations

include the following:

l Artillery regiment, net control.

l Artillery battalions with DS tactical missions.

Artillery Battalion Communication Nets

Artillery Battalion Command Net

This VHF net provides a means for the artillery battalion commander to C2 subordinate units. It is principally used for administrative, logistic, and tactical

traffic not related to fire direction. The supported

regiment FSCC may monitor, as required, principally as an alternate net for communicating with the

DS battalion should other nets become inoperative.

Artillery stations include the following:

l Artillery battalion, net control.

l Firing batteries of the artillery battalion.

l Artillery battalions with an R mission.

Artillery Battalion Fire Direction Net

This VHF net may be voice or digital. When operating voice, this net provides a means for the artillery battalion to exercise tactical fire direction of

subordinate units. If tactical fire direction is decentralized, this net may be used by batteries to

request reinforcing fires. The artillery LNO at the

regiment FSCC (battalion FSCC as required) may

monitor to keep abreast of artillery fire planning

and significant artillery missions. In a digital environment, tactical fire direction is incorporated into

a COF, and battalion fire direction is used for

coordinating reinforcing fires. Artillery stations

include the following:

l Artillery battalion, net control.

l Firing batteries of the artillery battalion.

l Artillery battalions with an R mission.

Artillery Conduct of Fire Net

This VHF net provides a means for observers to

request and adjust artillery fire. The artillery

LNO at battalion FSCCs monitors/receives traffic on the net for FSC purposes. FOs and LNOs

may use the net to exchange targets and fire

planning information. If conducting battaliondirected operations, the battalion establishes as

many as three COF nets and acts as net control

on each. The artillery battalion may identify a

COF net for each maneuver battalion to facilitate continuity of fire support during battery displacements. The maneuver battalion (LNOs,

FOs) remains on the assigned COF net, and the

artillery battalion FDC receives all calls for fire.

It then designates which firing battery will provide fire support to the maneuver battalion. This

allows the artillery battalion to quickly mass on

larger targets, as well as manage the assets of

the battalion as a whole. If conducting autonomous operations, each battery FDC maintains a

COF net and acts as net control (each net is

monitored by the battalion FDC when present).

Autonomous operations are also conducted by

batteries attached to a BLT. When observers are

employing digital devices, one or more COF
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 8-5 

nets must be dedicated to digital communications. Artillery stations include the following:

l DS artillery battalion headquarters.

l Firing battery.

l Artillery LNO at battalion FSCC.

l FOs.

l Artillery LNO at regiment FSCC, as required.

l Artillery units with an R mission.

Artillery Battery Communication Nets

Artillery Battery Command Net 

This VHF net provides a means for the artillery

battery commander to command and coordinate

administrative and logistical matters. Artillery

stations include the following:

l Artillery battery headquarters.

l Subordinate elements, as required.

l Artillery battery convoy, as required.

Artillery Conduct of Fire Net 

See artillery battalion communication nets.

DS Artillery Battalion Communication Nets

Artillery battalions with a DS tactical mission are

required to monitor various maneuver unit communication nets. The following designated nets

must be monitored:

l Infantry regiment FSC net (VHF) (There may

be a separate digital radio net.).

l Infantry regiment command net (HF).

l Infantry regiment tactical net (VHF/HF).

l Infantry regiment intelligence net (VHF/HF).

l Infantry regiment communications coordination net (VHF/HF).

Alternate Uses of Nets

The nets described previously will normally

accommodate the communications requirements

for effective artillery operations. When used for

their stated purpose, circuits do not overload and

remain free for necessary communications. However, should some nets become unavailable

through heavy traffic, threat interference or

equipment failure, personnel should not hesitate

to use any available net to pass urgent traffic. The

number of nets, plus the availability of wire, provides flexible options for artillery personnel to

provide continuous communications.
8-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

.

ARTILLERY REGIMENT NETS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

LEGEND:

A = As Required

C = Net Control

M = Monitor

W = When Directed

X = Guard

D

I

V

C

M

D

D

I

V

T

A

C

D

I

V

A

R

T

Y

S

P

O

T

D

I

V

F

S

C

1

D

I

V

F

S

C

2

D

I

G

D

I

V

I

N

T

E

L

R

E

G

T

C

M

D

R

E

G

T

T

A

C

R

E

G

T

F

D

1

D

I

G

R

E

G

T

F

D

2

V

O

I

C

E

S

U

R

V

E

Y

/

M

E

T

R

A

D

A

R

T

E

L

L

I

N

G

D

I

G

D

I

V

C

O

M

M

C

O

O

R

D

R

E

G

T

C

O

M

M

C

O

O

R

D

EMISSION DESIGNATORS HF VHF VHF VHF VHF VHF HF VHF VHF VHF VHF VHF VHF VHF

RESTORATION PRIORITIES 06 04 14 01 02 08 07 05 03 11 09 10 12 13

Division FSCC C C A C C C X C

Artillery Regiment FDC X X A X X X C C C C X X X C

Artillery Regiment TPC C C

Artillery Regiment Commander X A X

Artillery Battalion Commanders X

Artillery Battalion DS W X X X X W X

Artillery Battalion GS W X X X X W

Artillery Battalion GS-R/R W X X X X W X

Radar X

MDS X

MLRS (if applicable) W

Remotely Piloted Vehicle (if applicable) W

Infantry Battalion FSCC W W

Figure 8-1. Example Artillery Regiment Guard Chart.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 8-7 

DIRECT SUPPORT 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

LEGEND:

A = As Required

C = Net Control

M = Monitor

W = When Directed

X = Guard

B

N

C

M

D

B

N

C

O

F

A

B

N

C

O

F

B

B

N

C

O

F

1

B

N

C

O

F

2

R

E

G

T

F

S

C

1

R

E

G

T

F

S

C

2

I

N

F

R

E

G

T

C

M

D

I

N

F

R

E

G

T

T

A

C

R

A

D

A

R

T

E

L

L

I

N

G

B

N

F

D

1

R

E

G

T

F

D

1

R

E

G

T

F

D

2

A

R

T

Y

R

E

G

T

T

A

C

A

R

T

Y

R

E

G

T

C

M

D

D

I

V

A

R

T

Y

S

P

O

T

B

N

C

O

M

M

C

O

O

R

D

EMISSION DESIGNATORS V

H

F

V

H

F

D

I

G

V

H

F

D

I

G

V

H

F

V

H

F

H

F

V

H

F

D

I

G

V

H

F

H

F

V

H

F

D

I

G

V

H

F

V

H

F

D

I

G

V

H

F

V

H

F

H

F

V

H

F

RESTORATION PRIORITIES 06 09 10 01 02 03 11 15 05 12 04 08 14 07 13 16 17

Artillery Battalion C C C C C X X X C C X X X X W C

Artillery Regiment C C C C C

Infantry Regiment C C C

Artillery Battalion Commander X A X

Artillery Battery Commander X

Battery 1 X M A X X

Battery 2 X M A X X

Battery 3 X M A X X

Battery 4 (if applicable) X M A X X

Infantry Regiment FSCC X X M

FO 1 X X

FO 2 X X

FO 3 X X

FO 4 X X

FO 5 X X

FO 6 X X

FO 7 X X

FO 8 X X

FO 9 X X

FO 10 (if applicable) X X

FO 11 (if applicable) X X

FO 12 (if applicable) X X

Radar (if attached) X X

Met A X

Survey X

LNO Battery 1 X X X X X

LNO Battery 2 X X X X X

LNO Battery 3 X X X X X

LNO Battery 4 (if applicable) X X X X X

Figure 8-2. Example Direct Support Artillery Battalion Guard Chart.
8-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

GENERAL SUPPORT 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

LEGEND:

A = As Required

C = Net Control

M = Monitor

W = When Directed

X = Guard

B

N

C

M

D

B

N

F

D

R

E

G

T

F

D

1

D

I

G

R

E

G

T

F

D

2

V

O

I

C

E

R

A

D

A

R

T

E

L

L

I

N

G

D

I

G

R

E

G

T

C

M

D

R

E

G

T

T

A

C

B

N

C

O

M

M

C

O

O

R

D

EMISSION DESIGNATORS V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

RESTORATION PRIORITIES 04 02 01 07 06 05 03 08

Artillery Battalion C C X X W X X C

Artillery Regiment C C C C C

Artillery Battalion Commander X A

Battery Commanders X

Battery 1 X W X

Battery 2 X W X

Battery 3 X W X

Battery 4 (if applicable) X W X

Radar W X

MDS X

Survey X

Figure 8-3. Example General Support Artillery Battalion Guard Chart.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 8-9 

GENERAL SUPPORT-REINFORCING 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

LEGEND:

A = As Required

C = Net Control

M = Monitor

W = When Directed

X = Guard

B

N

C

M

D

B

N

F

D

R

E

G

T

F

D

1

D

I

G

R

E

G

T

F

D

2

V

O

I

C

E

R

A

D

A

R

T

E

L

L

I

N

G

D

I

G

R

E

I

N

B

N

F

D

R

E

G

T

C

M

D

R

E

G

T

T

A

C

B

N

C

O

M

M

C

O

O

R

D

EMISSION DESIGNATORS V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

V

H

F

RESTORATION PRIORITIES 05 03 08 01 06 02 07 04 09

Artillery Battalion C C X X W X X X C

Artillery Regiment C C C C C

Rein Artillery Battalion X X C X X

Artillery Battalion Commander X A

Battery Commanders X

Battery 1 X W X

Battery 2 X W X

Battery 3 X W X

Battery 4 (if applicable) X W X

Radar W X

MDS X

Survey X

Figure 8-4. Example General Support-Reinforcing Artillery Battalion Guard Chart.
8-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Figure 8-5. Example Artillery Regiment Communication Structure.

Figure 8-6. Example Direct Support Artillery Battalion

Communications Structure.
CHAPTER 9

ARTILLERY TACTICAL LOGISTICS

SECTION I. FUNDAMENTALS

Background

Artillery units must provide responsive, effective,

and sustainable fires in a variety of operating

environments. Logistics is the lifeline that arms,

fuels, supplies, and maintains the artillery enabling

it to fulfill its mission. In the GCE, artillery will be a

demanding consumer of resources, particularly

ammunition and fuel. 

Logistics Principles 

Responsiveness, simplicity, flexibility, economy,

attainability, sustainability, and survivability guide

the planning, organization, and conduct of logistics.

A principle’s influence varies with each operation or

phase of operation. The artillery commander must

ensure these principles are applied to ensure the

availability of responsive, effective, and sustainable

artillery support. 

Artillery S-4 Duties

Commanders are responsible for their unit’s logistics. At the regiment and battalion levels, the S-4

assists the commander in planning, supervising, and

coordinating daily logistic functions. The S-4

coordinates with the S-3 to ensure support of operations and exercises staff cognizance over special

staff officers who manage specific commodity

areas. In the firing batteries, the XO normally

fulfills the responsibilities similar to the S-4.

During operations, critical tasks performed by the

S-4 include supervising the implementation of the

ammunition plan, maintaining the status of

ammunition stocks, recording and disseminating

critical information, coordinating transportation

requirements and availability, and supervising

management maintenance resources.

Supervising the Ammunition Plan

The S-3 develops the ammunition plan, to include

allocations for specific training events and subordinate units, and supervises its implementation. This

includes remaining abreast of the assault support

request (ASR), road net, ammunition issuance,

proposed operations, transportation availability,

supply point locations, and anticipated consumption. The S-4 recommends to the next higher

echelon (S-4 or G-4 as applicable) movement of

supply points farther forward when timely resupply

to the unit becomes difficult.

Maintaining Ammunition

The S-4 maintains an accurate inventory of available ammunition. The S-4 coordinates with the S-3

to maintain the organization’s ammunition status.

Recording and Disseminating Information

The S-4 collects and disseminates pertinent logistic

information. The information exchange should

involve subordinate, higher, adjacent, and supported

units’ S-4 and CSSE as required. 

Coordinating Transportation Requirements

The S-4 should be aware of the status of traffic

data and road networks through the use of engineer

reports, etc. The S-4 coordinates traffic schedules,

routes, and road priorities with higher, subordinate,
9-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

adjacent, and supported units and appropriate

movement control centers. The force commander’s

road priority determines allocation of road space to

subordinate artillery units. The S-4 provides traffic

data and transportation availability to the S-3. The

S-3 can publish movement graphics that show the

location of units during displacement or when

MSRs are congested. These graphs aid in establishing priorities based on the rate of march, time

length of the column, distance to be covered, and

tactical advantages expected (in cases of displacement). See figure 9-1.

Supervising Management

Maintenance Resources

The S-4 assists the commander in the allocation and

prioritization of maintenance within the unit.

Additionally, the S-4 coordinates the use of outside

maintenance resources.

Concept of Support and

Logistic Capabilities

Tactical logistics includes the organic unit capabilities and the CSS activities necessary to support

military operations. It involves the coordination of

functions required to sustain and move units,

personnel, equipment, and supplies.

As a part of the GCE, Marine artillery also has

organic logistic capability. Within the MAGTF,

the CSSE provides most of the non-organic

logistic support.

Figure 9-1. CSS Map Symbols.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-3 

Organic

Tactical Logistic Functions

Artillery units exercise each of the logistic

functions (supply, maintenance, transportation,

general engineering, health services, and

services) to some degree. They are also responsible for command functions, such as messing.

Each battalion possesses limited, organic logistic capabilities and is capable of independent

operations. Firing batteries normally rely on

their parent battalions for higher-level logistic

support when conducting battalion operations.

However, firing batteries also have a limited

number of organic mechanics, ammunition

technicians, and corpsmen, which may require

augmentation of other personnel as needs arise;

e.g., additional Marines and sailors of the type

listed or other types depending on METT-T.

When detached from their parent battalion,

batteries must rely on their organic capability

and the support provided by the gaining unit or

CSSE inherent in the MAGTF.

Messing

Ensuring adequate messing support to using units is

a command responsibility. The artillery regiment

and battalions have organic messing capabilities.

The food services officer, under the cognizance of

the S-4, supervises the food service’s section including the requisition, storage, and preparation of

meals. The artillery regiment may choose to consolidate its food service specialists with those of the

battalions to form a consolidated mess hall in garrison and/or a consolidated field mess when the entire

regiment is deployed. 

External Combat Service

Support Organizations

Artillery units obtain external CSS from various

MAGTF CSS organizations. The artillery S-4 must

be familiar with each CSS organization to effectively

use available resources. CSS units can be permanently organized or task-organized. Based on their

organizational structure, they may be single-function

or multi-function units. See MCWP 4-11, Tactical

Logistics, for further details on CSS organizations.

SECTION II. PLANNING

General

Each commander from the firing battery to the

regiment must know and apply logistic concepts

and principles in planning. Just as artillery planning

is conducted continuously and concurrently with

maneuver planning at all levels, logistic staff officers must focus on supporting a “single battle”

concept. MCWP 5-1, The Marine Corps Planning

Process, provides the sequence of planning.

MCWP 4-11 contains specific planning guidance.

MAGTF Artillery Officer

At the beginning of an operations planning phase, the

senior MAGTF artillery officer estimates overall

artillery requirements and determines the artillery’s

ability to provide effective, continuous support for

each proposed COA. Early, accurate identification of

logistic requirements is crucial to effective CSS. The

artillery unit prepares estimates of supportability and

artillery requirements. An estimate of artillery

requirements addresses the amount and type of artillery, ammunition, shipping, landing craft, aircraft,

and special equipment. Special training requirements

may also be identified. Combat planning data (MCO

8010.1E, Class V[W] Planning Factors for Fleet

Marine Force Combat Operations), METT-T

factors, and experience are used in estimating requirements. Requirements submitted by artillery

commanders are consolidated and analyzed, overall

requirements are refined, and final artillery requirements are presented to the force/MAGTF

commander. Continual modifications are made as

planning progresses. 
9-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Artillery Commander and Staff

The artillery commander prepares estimates, issues

guidance, establishes priorities, and allocates

resources as required. Staff officers determine

requirements and concerns from their functional

areas. Requirements are consolidated at the senior

artillery echelon and forwarded through the chain of

command. At a minimum, artillery logistic plans

must address the following:

l External support requirements.

l Basic load and corresponding unit load plans.

l Embarkation and debarkation requirements.

l The ammunition plan. 

l Methods of resupply.

l Organization of logistic resources; e.g., trains

or MCTs.

l Logistic communication links.

l The casualty treatment and evacuation plan.

l Anticipated problem areas.

l Security for trains and rear area facilities.

METT-T 

Mission

Requirements, priorities, allocations, and mobility

are affected by the mission. Certain mission types

will increase demands for specific items. A

movement to contact may place more emphasis on

petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) and mobility,

while a deliberate attack may increase ammunition

consumption rates. 

Enemy

An analysis of threat capabilities and composition

serves to identify logistic requirements and friendly

logistic vulnerabilities.

Terrain and Weather

Terrain (including the impact of weather) has multiple effects on logistics. Table 9-1 identifies selected

environmental impacts on CSS functions.

Troops and Support Available-Time Available

The number of firing units and personnel/equipment available to sustain them must be considered

in developing a logistic plan.

Rates of movement and frequency of displacements

impact the ability to provide forward CSS. Timetables must be scrutinized to ensure the logistic plan

provides the necessary support.

Evaluating Logistic Data

Supply, transportation, maintenance, and health

services affect the unit’s basic load and impact

planning data in developing estimates and the

logistics annex to the operation order. The information in the rest of this section is a guide. It

should be tailored to fit the needs of the specific

tactical situation.

By analyzing each logistic function, the artillery

staff develops its requirements and concept of

support to include an evaluation of logistic data that

centers on the unit’s basic load. The basic load is the

on-hand supplies required by a unit, the quantities of

supplies that must be carried by the unit and transported by the unit organic lift. Operational requirements, cargo capacity of unit vehicles, and methods

and means of resupply affect the composition of the

basic load and logistic functions. The artillery

commander may forward a recommendation

through appropriate command channels for consideration by higher headquarters for establishing the

basic load.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-5 

Table 9-1. Environmental Impacts on CSS

.

Environmental

Factors Supply Maintenance Transportation

General

Engineering

Health

Services

Urbanized Terrain Land lines of 

communications can 

be impeded

Maintenance areas 

available

Reduces movement Existing utilities 

available

Existing facilities 

available

Existing supplies available Reduces maintenance due 

to fewer displacements

Increases use of MHE due 

to dispersion of battery 

positions

Requires clearance 

of rubble

Increases expenditure of 

Class V (delay, VT fuzes)

Requires fortification 

of positions

Arctic/Cold 

Weather

Land lines of 

communications are few 

and extended

Increases maintenance 

time

Restricts ground mobility Increases use of 

hardened positions

Affects personnel

Reduces ammunitioncarrying capacityRequires frequent, regular 

warm-up of engines, 

radios, and batteries

Increases transportation 

needs due to battlefield size

Materiels handling 

difficult

Increases food intake

Increases use

of batteries

Maintenance areas critical 

and limited

Requires special cross 

country ability (snowplow or 

snowshoes)

Construction of 

barriers difficult in 

frozen ground

Sanitation difficult

Reduces effects of 

ammunition in snow

Requires daily tire 

pressure checks to 

prevent flat tires and

flat spots

Navigation difficult Requires explosives 

to loosen ice and dirt

Increases effects of 

ammunition on ice

Requires periodic 

relocation of vehicles to 

avoid flat spots

Fuel handling dangerous

Sustainment of 

Class I difficult

May require use of chains 

for wheeled vehicles

Requires supplementary 

rations

Limited potable water

Requires transport of ice 

blocks

Prepositioning and 

storage of materiel is key 

to sustainment

Desert Extended land lines of 

communications

Affects equipment Wheeled vehicle 

movement difficult with 

heavy loads (Class V, 

howitzers)

Increases use of 

hardened positions

Decreases personnel 

tolerance to heat and 

disease

Increases use of Class V 

(smoke, suppression, 

countermechanized fires)

Increases PM Increased mechanized/

motorized operation 

requires frequent 

displacement

Requires obstacles 

clearing

Evacuation difficult

Increases use of Class III 

(POL, tires, coolant, 

cleaning materials)

Increases on-site 

maintenance and repair to 

reduce evacuation

Restricts movement to 

mission-essential 

loads only

Sanitation difficult

Increases use of 

Class IX (electrical, 

accessories for coolant 

system, wheel and 

sprocket nuts, 

wedge bolts)

Navigation difficult

Increases water and 

battery requirements

Poor roads
9-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

The established basic load is expressed in terms

of day of supply (DOS) and day of ammunition

(DOA). At the unit level, these terms are

expressed in specific quantities. Unit vehicle load

plans are then built around the established basic

load. Basic loads may be transported as palletized

or nonpalletized loads.

Supply

Pre-calculated blocks of supplies can be allocated

from several sources. War Reserve Materiel Stocks

Field (a starter stock) includes landing force operational reserve material and prepositioned material in

maritime prepositioning ships. War Reserve

Materiel Stocks Inventory Control Point (a swing

stock) includes in-stores held at the Marine Corps

logistic bases and any war reserve stocks held by

other Services or integrated materiel manager.

Organic unit operating stocks is also a source.

These resources, as allocated by the MAGTF

commander, constitute the supplies available to

operational units. Supply is divided into 10 classes,

as shown in table 9-2, for planning, management,

and administrative purposes.

Table 9-1. Environmental Impacts on CSS - Continued.

Environmental

Factors Supply Maintenance Transportation

General

Engineering

Health

Services

Desert (Continued) Increase Class V 

consumption

Increases on-site repair to 

reduce evacuation

Potential for bottlenecks Evacuation difficult

Requires unit distribution Increases use of helicopter 

support Restricts communication

Chemical/Nuclear Hampers resupply due to 

unit dispersion and 

avoidance of 

contaminated areas

Decontamination of 

equipment difficult

Requires vehicles to transport NBC/decontamination 

equipment

Increases use of 

fortifications

Hampers prevention 

and treatment of 

casualties

Restricts supply to 

mission-essential 

items for short notice 

displacements

Affects personnel

Increases water requirement for decontamination

Reduces ammunitioncarrying capacity

Requires protective 

clothing, decontamination 

equipment, and special 

munitions

Jungle Lack of all-weather roads 

hampers re-supply

Increases requirement 

for PM

Trafficability difficult Increases need to 

establish and 

harden positions

Affects personnel

Increase Class V usage 

(reduces munitions 

effects)

Maintenance difficult Increases reliance on 

helicopter support

Requires obstacle

clearing support

Increases disease

Increase deterioration

of supplies

Requires on-site 

maintenance

Increases towing 

requirements

Evacuation difficult

Restricts loads to missionessential items onlyServiceability of 

winches essential

Requires preventative 

medicine and sanitation

Requires frequent air 

resupply and increases 

vulnerability of positions

POL replenishment 

difficult
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-7 

Class I

Sufficient rations per individual must be carried in

the artillery’s basic load to provide subsistence

through a ration cycle. One ration cycle, normally

24 hours, is designated as a DOS. The type of

rations depends on the tactical situation, commander’s guidance, and availability of messing

facilities. Table 9-3 provides planning data for transporting rations.

Water requirements depend on the tactical situation, personnel consumption, vehicle maintenance, decontamination, bath/shower/laundry

availability and frequency, and method of transport/resupply. Table 9-4 on page 9-8 provides data

for planning water requirements for personnel.

Class II

The basic load of Class II items depends on the

tactical situation, commander’s guidance, environment, and vehicle cargo space. Specific items,

volume, weight, and replenishment factors are

found in current tables of authorized material.

Table 9-2. Classes of Supply.

Class Description

I Subsistence: MRE, A and B rations, and water

II Clothing, individual equipment, tentage, organizational tool sets and kits, hand tools, and administrative and 

housekeeping supplies and equipment

II POL: petroleum fuels, lubricants, hydraulic and insulating oils, liquid and compressed gases, bulk chemical 

products, coolants, de-icing and anti-freeze compounds, and preservatives

IV Construction material: installed equipment and fortification, barrier, and bridging material

V(W) Ground ammunition: munitions containing explosives; chemical, nuclear, or radiological weapons; or any 

item that is propelled, placed, or dropped to inflict damage

VI Personal demand items: nonmilitary sales items

VII Major end items: end products ready for intended use

VIII Medical items

IX Repair parts: all repair parts, less Class VII, required for maintenance of equipment

X Nonmilitary programs: military support programs not included in Classes I through IX; e.g., agricultural, 

economic development

Table 9-3. Planning Data for Rations.

Ration Type

Content

(portion/packaging)

Weight (lbs)

per Unit

Volume (ft3)

per Unit

MRE 12 meals/case 20.60 0.88

Ration cold weather 6 rations/case 21.30 0.90

B 3 servings/ration 3.83 0.12

T (Tray Pack) 18 meals/module:

Breakfast

Dinner

33.00

45.00

1.66

1.66
9-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Class III

Class III consists of fuels and lubricants for vehicles

and equipment. Class III items are carried in tankers,

fuel pods, and mobile-loaded canned or drummed

fuel containers. The S-4 must apply experience and

the nature of the operation in calculating fuel

requirements. Table 9-5 contains notional planning

data for transporting drummed or canned fuels.

Table 9-6 provides notional planning data for daily

fuel usage rates. To determine an estimate, select

the statistical region approximating that of the area

of operations.

Table 9-4. Water Planning Data for Personnel.

Use

Gallons per individual per day

Hot Climate

Temperate 

Climate Cold Climate

Drinking13.0 1.5 2.0

Heat Treatment 0.2 0.0 0.0

Hygiene21.7 1.7 1.7

Food Prep 0.0 - 4.5 00 - 4.5 0.0 - 4.5

Waste (10%) 0.8 - 1.3 0.7 - 1.1 0.7 - 1.2

Decontamination37.0 7.0 7.0

1. Increase to 3.5 (hot) and 3.0 (temperate) for MOPP levels 3 and 4.

2. Personal hygiene (shaving, brushing teeth, washing hands, sponge bath).

3. Requirements depend on frequency, intensity, and location of attacks.

Table 9-5. Transportation Planning Data for Drummed Fuel.

Size

Diesel Gasoline Kerosene

ft3lbs ft3lbs ft3lbs

55-gallon drum 9.0 432 9.0 384 9.0 421

5-gallon can 0.8 46 0.8 41 0.8 45

Table 9-6. Estimates of Daily Fuel Usage Rates.

Equipment Type Alaska*

Panama 

Canal* CONUS* Europe* Korea*

Wheeled Vehicle 7 4 8 10 5

Generators 20 20 20 12 20

MHE 10 20 20 12 20

Stationary Equipment 10 10 10 12 10

* Hours of Usage
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-9 

Table 9-7 provides notional planning data for

consumption rates and capacities for various items of

equipment in the artillery inventory. Fuel requirement

estimates are determined by the following formula:

For example, an organization with a truck density of

20 5-ton vehicles operating in a Korean-type environment would have the following fuel requirement:

Water usage rates are contained in table 9-4. Other

figures were extracted from tables 9-6 and 9-7.

Class IV

Class IV includes materials for dunnage and preparing gun positions and other battery areas. Required

quantities depend on use and size of the position

area. Table 9-8 provides transportation planning

data for Class IV material.

Class IV planning determines the usage requirement

of sandbags and lumber. Approximately 500

sandbags are required to completely harden a 5-ton

truck. The number of sandbags required to prepare a

gun position depends on the size and degree of

position preparation. Lumber requirements are determined by converting the estimated lineal feet of

lumber into board feet using the following formula:

(# of vehicles/equipment) x (daily fuel usage rate) 

(consumption rate) = fuel requirement

(20 vehicles) x (5 hrs/day) x (5.3 gal/hr) =

530 gal/day

thickness (inches) x width (inches) x

length (inches)/12 = board feet

Table 9-7. Consumption Rates and Capacities for Vehicles/Equipment.

Vehicle/Equipment

Fuel Water*

Rate

(gal/hour)

Tank

(gal) Type

Radiator

(gal)

M923 11.5 70 Diesel 12

M998 1.7 25 Diesel 7

M936 13.0 139 Diesel 12

Mk923 MTVR Unknown 78 Diesel

Mk48 LVS Unknown 150 Diesel 27

MC4000 4.0 35 Diesel 6

3 kW GEN (MEP-16) 0.6 90 Diesel 11

M12 DECON 3.0 Gasoline 500

*Water usage rates are calculated using factors of 1.0 (hot and cold climates) and 0.5 (temperate climate).

Table 9-8. Class IV Transportation Planning Data.

Item NSN ft3 Weight (lbs)

Bag, sand (bale)* 8105-00-285-4744 2.1 10

Barbed wire, 350 ft spool 5660-00-512-3197 1.0 28

Post, fence, metal, 2 foot 5660-00-270-1588 3.0 24

Post, fence, metal, 5 foot 5660-00-270-1587 11.0 99

Barbed wire, concertina 5660-00-921-5516 4.4 62

* 200 bags per bale.
9-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Class V

The ammunition plan is developed as a result of

determining Class V requirements. It requires close

and continuous coordination between unit

commanders and operations and logistics officers at

all levels. The commander provides guidance and

establishes priorities for the ammunition plan.

Operations and logistics officers work together in

the planning and execution of the ammunition plan.

Based on the commander’s guidance, operations

officers identify the type, quantity, location/unit, and

required time/date of ammunition resupply. Operations officers must forecast required supplies to

allow sufficient time for logistics officers to

respond. Operations officers establish task organization in support of the logistic effort; e.g., the composition of trains. Logistics officers determine how to

fulfill identified requirements and arrange for their

distribution. Specific instructions must be established (through SOP, operation order or letter of

instruction) for requisition, procedure for issuance,

and methods of distribution. Ammunition distribution is normally the unit’s most cumbersome logistic effort. Developing an ammunition plan must

consider consumption requirements, replenishment

requirements, method of resupply, and ammunition

management measures.

Consumption Requirements

Consumption requirements of conventional and

special ammunition must be determined. The

commander tailors the combat planning rates

contained in MCO 8010.1E based on his experience and specific METT-T operational needs.

Planning data, based on MCO 8010.1E, has been

calculated for each type of unit/weapon and is

provided in appendix E.

Basic Allowance

Basic allowance (BA) refers to the initial distribution of a specified quantity of required ammunition

for units entering combat. BA size and composition

must meet anticipated unit combat needs until

resupply can be accomplished. Combat planning

rates may be modified to meet special requirements.

Basic Load

The quantity and type of ammunition carried by the

artillery units as the basic load must maximize artillery effectiveness and be tailored to support operational requirements. To position the greatest

quantity of ammunition forward, the commander

may develop a load of the types of ammunition that

will maximize effectiveness. This may result in a

basic load mostly of high usage ammunition. The

operation or phase of operation will impact

ammunition usage rates.

Ammunition-carrying capacities of artillery vehicles

are shown in table 9-9 on page 9-12. The basic load

of ammunition must be identified in the unit operation order. This provides data useful to the CSSE

and liaison officers at the supported unit’s FSCC.

The basic load is expressed as follows:

Replenishment Requirements

Ammunition supportability depends on the availability of ammunition in theater, transportation, and

time. The artillery commander must anticipate

replenishment requirements. Artillery units maintain

basic loads from floating dumps or landing force

supplies that are loaded for selective discharge.

These sources sustain the artillery unit until the

supply system is functioning ashore.

Basic Load = BA + # DOA (sustaining rate)
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-11 

Planning Ammunition Resupply

l Rate and quantity of consumption.

l Road network and distance from battery positions to the source of supply.

l Tactical situation.

l Available vehicles, aircraft, personnel and material handling equipment (MHE).

l Availability of external or organic resources. 

Ammunition Management Measures

Ammunition management requires careful planning

and coordination by the MAGTF, artillery, infantry,

and CSSE commanders and their staffs. 

The tactical commander establishes a controlled

supply rate (CSR) to govern maximum consumption of available supplies for a specified time or

situation. Units allowed to exceed their CSR

results in cutbacks for other units unless additional

CSR is obtained from a higher command.

Approval of CSR increases by a higher command

can be waived in emergencies.

Expenditure limits placed on the type of fires or

expenditure rates used during a particular phase of

the operation identify suitable levels and prevent

waste. The following are examples of limiting

ammunition expenditures and the responsible

command level:

l Harassing and interdiction fires (established at

MAGTF and division levels).

l Counterfires in conjunction with the establishment of attack guidance (established at

MAGTF and division levels).

l During a particular phase of the operation

(established at division and regiment levels).

l Preparation fires (established at any level

planning preparation fires).

l In suppression missions (established at any

level planning a suppression mission).

l Providing attack guidance to identify priority

and method of engagement by type, and prohibit

attack of certain types of targets (established at

all levels).

Maintaining an accurate ammunition status is

important in planning and establishing a responsive

ammunition resupply system. An artillery unit’s

accurate recordkeeping identifies shortages before

they become critical. Ammunition status reporting

aids in establishing resupply priorities and forecasting subsequent consumption. Each echelon’s

ammunition recordkeeping procedures must be

identified in planning if not contained in unit SOP.

Table 9-9. Ammunition-Carrying Capacities.

Vehicle Caliber Projectiles Propellants

M813/923 Prime Mover1155mm 48 48

M813/923 Ammunition Truck2155mm 96 336 (GB)

180 (WB)

120 (RB & M119)

M105A2 Ammunition Trailer 155mm 24 112 (GB)

60 (WB)

40 (RB & M119)

1. Combat loaded. May be reduced by safety restrictions (net explosive weight) and vehicle load plan.

2. M813/923 will be replaced by Mk923 MTVR. Mk923 has same bed dimensions.

NOTES: 

Based on pure loads and single-type items (e.g., GB propellant) on skid.

Based on cross-country capacities. Data may be reduced by road conditions and vehicle hardening requirements.

Based on high explosive projectiles.

Packing dimensions for ammunition contained in appendix E.
9-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

The AMREP is developed as a result of recordkeeping and assists in the maintenance of ammunition

status. It should be submitted frequently enough to

allow for operation and resupply decisions, and can

be used as a trigger in an automatic or push supply

system. The AMREP normally reports ammunition

on hand, deficiencies or excesses for basic loads,

and anticipated heavy expenditures.

Class VI

Unit personnel deploy with personal demand

items as prescribed by commanders at each

echelon. Replenishment of these items is

procured from the CSSE based on pre-established

planning requirements.

Class VII

Class VII’s basic load consists of a unit’s table

of equipment (T/E) items. During the development of load plans, nonessential T/E items may

be palletized.

Class VIII

Medical supplies are drawn from the CSSE.

Battalion and regiment aid stations are authorized medical allowance list (AMAL) blocks 635

(aid station equipment) and AMAL 636 (aid

station consumables).

Class IX

Depending on maintenance requirements, repair

parts are demand-supported. The S-4 coordinates

with the CSSE to ensure adequate stock of artillery

repair parts/kits for mission-essential items. Quick,

on-site repairs can be accomplished through preexpended bins; however, pre-expended bins are

limited to low-cost, high-usage items. 

Class X

This class of supply does not greatly affect

planning. Class X supplies are procured from the

CSSE when required.

Transportation

Embarkation, landing, and surface movement

must be planned in detail. Units load to permit

unloading according to the tactical plan. Access

to supplies and equipment aboard ship must be

ensured. Mobile loads must allow for immediate

operations upon landing. The tremendous amount

of supplies requiring transportation by artillery

units and the number of lengthy convoys during

displacement create a cumbersome logistic task.

Coordination of landing support, such as matting,

facilitates rapid off-loading and prevents

overcrowding of the beach area. The status of

road nets, weight limits of bridges, minefield

marking, traffic control, and route priorities must

be coordinated with higher headquarters and

appropriate transportation control centers when

planning transportation requirements.

Embarkation

The artillery unit embarkation officer provides

embarkation requirements to the GCE as early in

the planning phase as possible. The MAGTF II/

Logistics Automated Information System family

facilitates planning and execution of embarkation.

The artillery unit embarkation officer establishes the

necessary liaison; provides the GCE Marine airground task force (MAGTF) Deployment System II

(MDSS II) embarkation data; and coordinates

staging, material handling, shoring and dunnage,

working party, and security requirements based on

higher headquarters’ guidance. See JP 3-02.2, Joint

Doctrine for Amphibious Embarkation.

Organization for Embarkation

Artillery units may combine for embarkation or

embark as attachments (in the case of a BLT or

RLT) and divide into embarkation teams for each

ship. The embarkation team consists of troops,

equipment, and supplies embarked on a single

ship. Artillery weapons, prime movers, and their

crews embarked on the same ship for training and
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-13 

maintenance while underway. The following artillery personnel embark with their supported units:

l Fire support coordination personnel with the

supported unit.

l Liaison personnel with their assigned units.

l FO teams with their supported units.

Load Plans

Artillery build-up ashore (advance parties, batteries,

and battalion command echelons) must be considered. Load plans address the composition of the

reconnaissance party and provide for the establishment of survey control, communications, selecting

battery positions, beach exits, route guides, and

marking. The team embarkation officer prepares

load plans in coordination with the ship’s combat

cargo officer. Ship’s loading characteristics

pamphlets (SLCPs) identify detailed loading characteristics of assigned ships. An inspection is made of

stowage areas, holds, and decks to verify the data in

the SLCP. The ship’s CO approves the load plan

before loading starts and approves required changes.

Helicopter Movement

Helicopters provide a means of mobility for towed

weapons and a means of resupply for artillery units.

Their use may be limited by availability,

atmospheric conditions, and the threat. Successful

movement of artillery by helicopter depends on the

extent of coordination and reverse planning. The

supported unit’s air officer provides technical assistance. In addition to the concept of operations,

major considerations include the following:

l C2 and face-to-face coordination.

l Organization of the unit in relation to the

mission.

l Mobility of the unit once the helicopter lifts.

l Reconnaissance and selection of routes, loading areas, landing sites, and PAs.

l Preparation of helicopter employment assault

landing tables.

l Resupply, survey, and met requirements.

l Threat situation.

l Use of division reconnaissance teams to determine the ground threat in the PA.

Helicopter movement of artillery units is conducted

in four phases: 

l The planning phase begins with the issuance of a

warning order and continues through the

commencement of the movement. It encompasses

coordination with supported and supporting units,

reconnaissance and selection of position, fire

planning, and rehearsals if time permits. 

l The loading phase consists of ground movement to appropriate pick-up areas; preparing the

helicopter loading area; preparing troops, equipment, and supplies; and loading helicopters. 

l The movement phase is the actual move from

the loading area to the landing site. It begins

with the take-off of the first helicopter and

ends with the arrival of the last helicopter at

the landing site. 

l The occupation of position phase consists of

establishing a helicopter landing site by an

advanced artillery party, unloading personnel

and equipment, and occupying the position.

Appendix F contains detailed information on

planning, organizing, and executing heliborne

artillery raids.

Fixed-Wing Air Transport

Artillery units can be transported by fixed-wing

aircraft. Detailed and flexible plans are required

due to the different models of available aircraft,

weather, distance, staging, material handling,

dunnage, and shoring requirements.

Movement by Rail

Artillery units can be moved by rail. Planning

factors that govern rail movement include the

distance to be traveled, availability of railroad

facilities, and priorities established by the tactical situation. 
9-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Motor Transport

Motor transport assets provide artillery the organic

ability to move units to PAs, as well as a means for

resupply. An artillery operation’s demand for

motor transport is increased by the vast tonnage of

Class V(W) requirements, which necessitates

detailed planning and efficient loading for

maximum vehicle use.

Maintenance

To effectively plan maintenance support, the S-4

must know the availability of tools, test equipment,

publications, and mechanics; determine maintenance concept; establish MCTs; and establish

recovery and evacuation procedures.

Supply Support Planning

A review of activity usage data, experience, and

anticipated requirements—based on the geographical area of the operation—provides a guide for

planned maintenance requirements. Liaison with the

CSSE will ensure sufficient quantities of artilleryspecific items are stocked. 

Maintenance Contact Team 

An MCT is a temporary organization of organic

assets consisting of one or more mechanics/technicians formed to accommodate a specific task. An

MCT provides on-site maintenance or technical

assistance, and diagnostics and repair part identification. To ensure the MST arrives with the required

capability, the MCT informs the CSSE of parts,

tools, and technicians required. The decision to use

MCTs depends on the following:

l Equipment size, complexity, quantity, installation, and security classification.

l Distance from the maintenance area.

l Availability of qualified personnel and serviceable test equipment. 

l Transportation and travel time. 

Recovery and Evacuation Procedures

Artillery units have limited repair capabilities.

Recovery policies, maintenance repair time criteria,

and an evacuation policy must be established.

Maintenance repair time criteria guides decisions of

whether to attempt on-site repair or evacuate

damaged equipment.

Collection points should be identified to speed

evacuation. Collection points are designated points

on the battlefield, normally along routes of march,

at which inoperable equipment can be moved for

further evacuation/disposition. The artillery S-4

coordinates collection point locations with the

supported unit’s S-4 and CSSE.

Health Services

Providing rapid treatment and evacuation of personnel must be carefully planned. Unit medical personnel are responsible for establishing lines of

communication (LOC) with the GCE’s and CSSE’s

medical activities. Casualty evacuation plans must

consider the following:

l Means of transportation.

l Triage casualty evacuation priorities.

l Evacuation routes.

l Mass casualty handling procedures.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-15 

SECTION III. EXECUTION 

Battalion Logistic Organization

The battalion’s organization for support may be

decentralized, centralized or a combination of

both. This organization may change with the

tactical situation.

Decentralized Support

Within the battalion, batteries may be required to

maintain logistic capability using their organic

assets. Decentralized support affords the battery

commander maximum control and responsiveness;

however, it has the following disadvantages:

l Vulnerability results from larger PAs and

convoys.

l A signature effect may be produced by vehicles moving to and from the battery position.

l When logistic elements are replenishing, battery displacements may create difficulty in

reconstituting the battery.

Centralized Support

When centralized support is established, it must not

degrade the battery’s ability to displace. Personnel,

vehicles, and equipment may be centralized at the

battalion level to provide logistics to firing batteries. Generally, a battery contains only the essential

personnel, equipment, and supplies necessary to

support operational requirements. Trains are established to provide logistic support to a firing battery.

Centralization provides the battalion commander

increased logistic flexibility.

Distribution

The artillery battalion will generally use unit and

point distribution methods over the course of an

operation. The nature of the request, tactical situation, status of transportation assets, and volume of

supplies requested will affect the type of distribution

method used.

Unit Distribution

The supporting unit delivers the support to the

supported unit. The supported unit is responsible

for its internal distribution. This maintains the

tactical positioning of the battery and reduces

traffic flow. Vehicles stocked with POL and

ammunition stop at each position for resupply.

The battalion or GCE S-4 must coordinate with

the battery being serviced to ensure tactical

operations are not affected by movement to and

from the firing position.

Point Distribution

The supported unit leaves its position to pick up

requested support from the supporting unit area or

other centralized location. This can involve vehicles

leaving their tactical positions to enter an established RRP. An RRP is a pre-arranged or hastily

position set up to support highly mobile units. An

RRP request identifies the following:

l Unit requiring support.

l Class and quantity of the requirement.

l Type of support required; e.g., maintenance or

engineer.

l Desired date and time of resupply.

l Route of march (start point and end point by

grid) and link-up point.

l Coordinating instructions.

An RRP may be established to support a displacing

battery at a coordinated point along the unit’s established route of march. RRPs may be established to

service multiple batteries in succession. 
9-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Supply Systems

The supply system provides the materiel required

for operating forces to function. Continuous evaluation of supply levels must be made to determine

possible changes. The S-4 must be aware of the

unit’s basic load and anticipate the extent and

frequency of replenishment supply operations. 

Changes in supply requirements are affected by

projected tactical changes, troop/equipment

density, consumption rates, and transportation

availability.

Logistic summary reports, prepared by the S-4,

provide the means to maintain supply status.

Content and frequency are established by unit

SOPs. Resupply can be accomplished by using a

pull and push system.

Pull System

The using unit determines the need and forwards

specific requests through logistic communication

channels. The pull system will only provide those

supplies ordered by the consumer and does not

anticipate user needs.

Push System

The push system is an automatic resupply method.

Data obtained from monitoring consumption rates

are used to anticipate unit requirements. This system

pushes supplies forward without a request, relieving the forward units of the logistic burden and/or

potential shortage of supply. This allows the

supporting unit to synchronize replenishment

efforts. Care must be taken to avoid burdening the

user with excess supplies.

Organization of Logistic Trains

The train concept is a means of internally taskorganizing and employing organic logistic assets.

Trains are the link between the batteries and the

supporting CSSE. This allows CSS to be performed

as far forward as the tactical situation permits.

Trains may be fully mobile or movable depending

on the situation. The desired capabilities of the

trains will dictate the size and may require consolidating some battery and/or battalion vehicles.

Battalion Trains

Battalion trains may be centralized into one entity or

echeloned. Centralization places all the unit’s logistic assets under the direct control of the commander

under the cognizance of his logistics officer. It is

most appropriate in defensive, slow-moving or

static operations. Normally, battalion trains can be

echeloned into combat trains and field trains. See

table 9-10. This concept improves responsiveness,

flexibility, and survivability against air attack.

Combat Trains

Combat trains provide critical organic logistics in

forward areas. The key to combat trains is mobility.

Trains are intentionally kept light so they can travel

with supported forces. Combat trains usually

include rations, fuel, ammunition, and MCTs with

limited repair capability.

Field Trains 

Field trains consist of the remaining organic logistic elements located further to the rear. Trains may

or may not be mobile-loaded. They usually include

the mess section; the supply section (-); some

organic or attached motor transport; and a battalion

aid station (BAS).

Regiment Trains

Regiment trains consist of the logistic assets required

to sustain the regiment headquarters and any organic

or attached units under the direct control of the

regiment. The regiment commander may choose to

consolidate battalion field trains in one location for

security, control, and centralization of resources.

Critical logistics support to lower units should be

allocated to battalion trains, but noncritical support

can be consolidated at the regiment level.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-17 

Positioning Trains

The battalion S-4 selects train locations for logistic

operations in coordination with the S-3. The main

considerations for selecting a site are responsiveness

and survivability. Combat trains are often located

with the battalion CP. MCTs and task-organized

elements of the combat train can be dispatched to

provide support to the batteries. In general, trains

should be located as follows:

l On defensible terrain.

l In an area with enough space to permit dispersion.

l In an area that provides concealment.

l On firm ground to support heavy/continuous

vehicle traffic.

l Near a suitable helicopter landing.

l Close to MSRs.

l In an area that allows good communication.

Conducting Train Operations

Route Selection

The battalion S-4 selects the supply route for train

operations based on METT-T and the method of

distribution. The route extends forward to the

batteries or positions between their current

location and future PAs. Coordination with

adjacent combat, combat support, and CSS units

ensures movement of support assets. Alternate

routes should also be selected. The S-4 notifies the

S-3 of route selection.

Site Selection

The battalion S-4 determines a suitable location

for the RRP. The S-4 notifies the battery of the

location and time for resupply through the use

Table 9-10. Notional Composition of Battalion Trains.

Element Capability Quantity Vehicle/Equipment

Combat Train Supply

Class I 1 M923 w/M149

Class V * 6-8 M923 w/M105

3 Mk48 w/Mk17 or Mk14

1 MC-4000

POL ** 1 M923 w/Sixcon

Maintenance *** 1 M936

Medical 1 M1035

Other ****

Field Train Supply

Class V * As required

General 1 M923

Maintenance 1 M936

Medical (BAS) Aid Station

Administrative As Required

* Ammunition section accompanies the combat train as required. Vehicles 

represent those provided by the firing batteries and the headquarters 

battery. The ammunition section’s train may operate independently from 

the combat train.

** Augmentation of additional tankers from regiment may be required.

*** May include MCTs or recovery equipment.

  Engineer, landing support, NBC equipment, and personnel as required.
9-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

of an RRP response, which identifies the

following:

l Unit being supported.

l Site location.

l Date and time of support.

l Coordinating instructions (including quantities

if different from request).

The site selected should be on or near the battery’s

route of march. The site should not block the MSR.

The S-3 uses checkpoints to identify the intended

route and coordinates with the battery. The site

should have an identifiable entry and exit.

Repair and Replenishment Point Organization

The location of each activity must facilitate

movement of vehicles in an orderly flow. Timeconsuming functions; e.g., refueling or ammunition transfer, should be positioned to allow simultaneous completion within the same RRP. Figure 9-2

illustrates a typical RRP layout.

When the battery arrives at the RRP, designated

personnel dismount at the coordination point to

assist local security. Guides direct vehicles to their

respective stations, and forklifts move forward to

assist in resupply and ammunition loading.

The senior mechanic determines the vehicles to be

evacuated and if they will be retained by the train.

The unit must cross-deck equipment, supplies, and

personnel onto another vehicle or shuttle. 

Security

Security threats come from the air, bypassed threat

units, infiltrators, guerrillas, indirect fire weapons,

mines, and threat combat formations that have

broken through forward units. 

Regardless of military occupational speciality

(MOS), every Marine is an infantryman and is

expected to participate in establishing and maintaining security. Depending on the extent of the threat,

security personnel may be provided from the battalion and/or the supported unit.

Reinforcement plans are established with adjacent

or nearby units. Fire plans are prepared for the use

of supporting arms. LPs and OPs are established for

early warning and dissemination of threat information through intelligence channels. Because of

limited personnel, potential threats must be

addressed quickly to determine strength and direction of attack. 

Train Security

Conducting replenishment operations under the

cover of darkness, with special emphasis on light

and noise discipline and radio silence, reduces the

vulnerability of trains. Tactical convoy discipline

must be practiced at all times. Well-rehearsed,

immediate action drills for blocked and

unblocked ambushes and attacks are critical.

Personnel have individual weapons ready and are

assigned areas of observation, including air

observation. Crew-served weapons are positioned

to respond to attacks. Train personnel establish

all-around security during brief halts and in the

Figure 9-2. Replenishment and Repair

Point Layout.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-19 

rear area. During extended halts, all personnel

must undertake improved security measures.

Rear Area Security

Rear area security consists of passive defense

measures and early warning. CSS elements may

be collocated. Rear area security measures

include dispersion, camouflage, noise and light

discipline, cover and concealment, fortification,

obstacles, and barriers.

Refueling Operations

A key to the refueling effort is for each unit/driver

to refuel at every opportunity; e.g., during trips to

the rear area. Special attention must be given to

refueling ammunition-hauling vehicles. Coordination is essential to refuel these vehicles as they

routinely move to and from the ammunition supply

point (ASP). Fuel should be recovered from

disabled vehicles whenever possible. Packaged

grease and lubricants are obtained through normal

supply channels and distributed as required. Generally, refueling operations are carried out as follows:

l Vehicles alternate to a centrally located fuel

site.

l Fuel is provided by battalion, regiment, and/or

CSSE tankers.

l Vehicles refuel during RRP operations.

Ammunition Operations

Ammunition resupply is one of the most vital

logistic operation for an artillery unit. A properly

functioning Class V(W) support system provides

the correct type and quantity of ammunition at

the proper time and place. The system is tailored

to fit the needs of the unit and incorporates the

positioning of resources, maintenance of status,

and concept of support. The Class V(W) support

system adjusts to changes in the tactical situation, fire plan, and ammunition plan. Frequent

and continuous coordination between the

supported unit and CSSE is essential.

CSSE Responsibilities

The CSSE maintains ammunition stocks at various

locations and delivers ammunition to the supported

GCE. The artillery commander must make frequent,

accurate projections of ammunition requirements to

the GCE commander to allow time for repositioning

and prioritizing resupply efforts.

Ammunition operations transfer ammunition to

artillery resupply vehicles to support the periodic or

daily resupply needs of units. Successful ammunition operations require interface between the CSSE

and the artillery unit to supervise the timing of

deliveries and loading of vehicles with the proper

type of ammunition. Artillery units should provide

an individual knowledgeable in ammunition

handling; e.g., projectile/fuze combinations, to

function as an ammunition officer when interfacing

with the CSSE. Frequent coordination between the

artillery S-3 and S-4 and the ammunition officer

allows for responsive resupply of ammunition in the

required quantities and types.

Ammunition Company, Supply Battalion

The ammunition company is assigned the mission

of establishing ammunition dumps and operating

supply points for Class V supply. The company

provides detachments to DS and GS CSSEs for

ammunition operations.

The FSSG or detachments provide combat supply

and maintenance support for chemical weapons.

The supply battalion stocks special types of Class

V items and provides detachments specialized in

assisting supported units. Chemical weapons

require special consideration in combat operations, especially with respect to safety, security,

transportation, and handling. The supply battalion

performs all functions incident to the receipt,

storage, issue, and fielding of chemical material.
9-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Ammunition Supply Point

An ASP is a supply activity established by the

CSSE for receipt, storage, assembly, issue and/or

distribution; limited salvage; and surveillance of

Class V items. Supported ASPs are normally

assigned GS. A stock level is maintained at the ASP

with a specified quantity, but the level may vary

with operation requirements.

Artillery Battalion Responsibilities

Ammunition Vehicle Load Plans

Vehicle load plans are developed around the basic

load of ammunition, as this constitutes the greatest

transportation demand. Load plans are developed

for ease of access to supplies. The load plan facilitates replenishment of the gun sections and resupply of the vehicle itself. A vehicle is designed to

carry a single type and lot of ammunition, if possible. The basic load of ammunition may require units

to carry only mission-essential equipment. Nonessential equipment can be palletized and staged for

later use. In dynamic operations, the ammunition is

serviced from mobile-loaded vehicles for frequent

displacement. In static operations, there may be a

requirement to download ammunition in order to

free vehicles for replenishment.

Ammunition Train Composition

After load plans are developed, transportation assets

are designated in support of the resupply effort.

Designated vehicles form an ammunition train. 

Tailored Ammunition Packages

An ammunition package’s content is based on

experience, unit requirements, and flexibility. The

artillery commander uses ammunition packages

tailored to enhance artillery effectiveness to the

supported unit. Tailored ammunition packages

allow for greater quantities of high usage munitions

to be carried on ammunition vehicles. Low usage

ammunition; e.g., FASCAM, may be carried by a

designated battery or section. This allows other

units to adjust their basic load to carry greater

quantities of high usage ammunition.

Ammunition Resupply and Delivery

A basic principle for responsive ammunition

support is positioning supplies as far forward as

possible to reduce turnaround time. This is

achieved by establishing unit priority for delivery

and selecting the method of resupply based on the

tactical situation.

Ammunition may be delivered directly to battery

positions by the regiment, battalion or CSSE.

Distribution to batteries depends on the location,

configuration of the position, and the ability to

download ammunition. Helicopters can also

provide transportation. 

Exchanging loaded vehicles from the battalion

ammunition train with empty vehicles of a battery’s ammunition section reduces handling and

turnaround time for the train. Pre-configured

ammunition packages and vehicle load plans

facilitate this exchange. This technique is particularly adaptable to high usage munitions.

Pre-positioned Ammunition Stock

Ammunition is downloaded at batteries or battalions

as a means of pre-positioning ammunition in the

forward area. Based on anticipated requirements,

ammunition is moved forward during lulls. In

defensive operations, stockpiles in battery areas

support periods of increased expenditure such as

counter-mechanized fires. In offensive operations, a

series of stockpiles may be established in battery

positions, as well as future positions, to support

assault expenditures. If circumstances preclude the

expenditure of pre-positioned quantities, ammunition is reported as excess and then re-allocated.

Unit Ammunition Supply Points

Artillery units in forward areas may form unit

ASPs. The reduced turnaround time for resupply

offsets the required download of ammunition.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-21 

Ammunition is brought in by CSSE convoys,

helicopters, and/or artillery trains. Unit ASPs can

function from loaded vehicles and/or stockpiles on

the ground. Developing a plan for loading prime

movers and trailers in separate areas for simultaneous loading can save time. To control congestion,

the commander establishes unit priority for entering

the site and using MHE.

Ammunition Management

Ammunition management is a continuous process

performed by all units during a battle. Accurate

recordkeeping is a critical part of ammunition

management and must be practiced by all artillery units.

Weighting the Main Effort

Assigning priorities occurs by designating an

element to receive priority of fire or establishing a

priority to a particular type of fire; e.g., counterfire.

Identifying priorities for unit resupply that require

the availability of sufficient supply levels and the

time and means for distribution can also be used.

Unit Interaction

Interaction between supporting and supported staffs

must be emphasized. Unit commanders providing

fire support must be informed of possible plans that

require large quantities or special types of ammunition. Supporting commanders stay abreast of possible courses of action to coordinate support. 

Controlling Ammunition Issue

Maximum effort must be given to issuing ammunition by lot segregation. Issuance and distribution of

the minimum lots of projectiles, propellants, and

fuzes contribute to the gunnery solution and

maximize available carrying capacity. Recording

the ammunition lot includes condition, performance,

and accidents involving ammunition.

Gunnery and Weaponeering Application

Prudent fire support planning, fire planning, and

fire direction contribute to sustaining operations.

Sound fire direction techniques reduce the need

for survivability moves, increase ammunition

effectiveness, and reduce the logistical burden of

ammunition resupply.

Supply Rate Evaluation

RSR and ASR evaluation is a continual process.

The responsible unit forecasts expenditures so that

sufficient quantities, transportation, and time are

available to provide the required support.

Basic Load Evaluation

The basic load and its method of transportation may

change to meet the tactical situation.

Maintaining Technically Qualified Personnel

Qualified personnel must be maintained at various

command levels to assist in the planning and operation of Class V(W) support operations.

Supply Economy Enforcement

Restricting and controlling firing practices

conserves supplies and reduces the logistical burden

of ammunition resupply. Firing needs should be

determined, fire plans established, and target priorities set to control the need for resupply. 

Contingency Planning

The commander may set aside a portion of available

supplies for emergencies or to help support the

exploitation of an unexpected opportunity.

Maintenance Operations

A unit’s ability to sustain combat operations rests

on the ability to perform ongoing maintenance. An

effective maintenance program must incorporate

allocating of personnel and time, the availability of

repair parts and tools, and command emphasis at

all levels. Commanders ensure that equipment is

properly maintained by personnel under their

control. Commanders monitor maintenance
9-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

programs to ensure preventive maintenance (PM),

which minimizes failures and ensures the smooth

flow of repair parts and equipment for corrective

maintenance (CM) when failures occur.

Maintenance Support

Organizational maintenance is performed as far

forward as the tactical situation allows and keeps

the equipment in the hands of the user. The

commander establishes a maintenance program to

maximize assets. Battalion or regiment MCTs or

CSSE maintenance support teams (MSTs) may

perform or assist in on-site malfunction diagnoses,

adjustments, alignments, repair or replacement of

end items or major assemblies. Adequate stock of

repair parts is required to support the maintenance

effort. High usage parts should be held as far

forward as possible.

Preventive Maintenance 

The PM program includes systematic servicing and

inspection, correcting failure before damage occurs,

and proper equipment use. Early and thorough PM

prevents minor discrepancies from becoming major

problems requiring extensive repair. 

Corrective Maintenance 

When equipment becomes inoperable, it should

be repaired on-site at the lowest possible level.

Battery-level maintenance is limited to certain

organizational maintenance services and minor

repairs. The exact responsibility for repair of an

item of equipment is largely determined by the

type of equipment.

For vehicles, the S-4 will coordinate with the

battalion motor transport officer to dispatch an

MCT. Repairs will be made on-site, if possible. If

the repair requires intermediate level maintenance,

the MCT will request a CSSE MST via the S-4 to

repair the vehicle on site, if possible. If a vehicle

cannot be repaired, it is evacuated and repaired at

the battalion. If evacuation is hampered by lack of

time or capability, the vehicle may be moved to a

maintenance collection point along the supply

route where it is picked up by the CSSE.

Organizational maintenance of communicationselectronics equipment is performed by trained

technicians within the artillery unit. On-site

repair is preferred. 

Engineer equipment mechanics and electrical equipment repairmen are provided by the regiment.

Qualified maintenance personnel attached to the

using unit conduct second echelon maintenance or

an MCT is dispatched from the regiment engineer

section. The regiment engineer section is responsible for evacuating inoperable engineer equipment.

For ordnance equipment, the individual/crew,

battery armorers or artillery mechanics perform

weapon repair. If these individuals cannot repair

the weapon, a CSSE MST is requested for onsite weapon repair. If on-site repair is not feasible, the weapon is evacuated.

Maintenance Site Selection

Maintenance site selection is governed by the

following fixed, physical characteristics: terrain,

weather, tactical situation, unit size and mission,

and the mission’s maintenance requirements. 

The maintenance area must be large enough to

disperse equipment and maintenance activities.

The terrain should favor defense against air or

ground attack; facilitate local security; hard

stand for vehicles and equipment; and accessibility to road, water, and air routes for evacuation and resupply.

Access routes should avoid congested areas, be

convenient to maintenance facility users, and be

accessible to MSRs. Easy access to supported units

and evacuation of equipment are critical elements.

The site should be positioned to allow the maintenance activity to effectively perform its mission. It

should be located far enough from the supported
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 9-23 

combat elements to allow continuity of maintenance operations.

An attempt should be made to locate in close

proximity to other unit logistical elements to

enable common facilities and services.

Recovery and Salvage

Commanders are responsible for the recovery of

their disabled vehicles to make repairs and

prevent destruction or capture. Recovered

vehicles are inspected, repaired, and placed in

operation at the lowest level possible. If a vehicle

cannot be repaired, it is reported as disabled. The

report includes the location, number and type of

vehicles, and conditions. Battery collected

salvage materiel is evacuated to a battalion

collection point by vehicles making supply trips

to the rear. Battalions usually operate a collection point in the vicinity of their maintenance

area. Salvaged, excess, and damaged items

evacuated to the battalion are turned in for evacuation to CSSE. Vehicles that cannot be repaired

are removed from the traffic pattern. The location

and condition of these vehicles are reported to

higher headquarters through logistic channels.

Captured Materiel

Captured materiel is collected and evacuated under

S-2 supervision. Captured materiel is always

reported to the next higher headquarters where it

provides a source of intelligence information.

Equipment Destruction

The decision to destroy equipment is made only

on approval delegated by higher authority. When

ordered, destruction is accomplished quickly,

efficiently, and uniformly. Plans for destruction

should be prepared in advance and incorporated

into unit SOPs.

Cannibalization

Cannibalization is limited to the exchange of

serviceable/unserviceable parts between like

items of unserviceable equipment within the

same battery/battalion. Cannibalization is

performed only in specific conditions established

by the MAGTF commander.

Engineer Operations

Engineer operations include preparation/hardening of unit positions; utility support; and NBC

material handling and decontamination support.

Artillery units may receive support from several

sources, including the regiment engineer section,

division engineers, and/or the CSSE. 

Battery Position Preparation

The more preparation a position receives, the

longer the battery can remain in place; hence, its

fire support is more effective. Artillery

commanders establish work priorities based on an

analysis of threat capability. Position improvement is continuous. 

Vehicle Positions

Vehicle positions are prepared to protect essential

vehicles such as ammunition, supply, maintenance, communications, decontamination equipment, and refuelers. Positions are randomly

placed throughout the battery area. The vehicle

pit is designed with an opening on each end for

drive-in access/egress or with a rear wall having

only one entrance. The vehicle pit is deep enough

to position the top of the vehicle at least 1 foot

below the surrounding walls. Positions can be

deep-cut or constructed with a soil parapet to

reduce the pit’s depth. Camouflage netting is

placed across the position.

Weapon Emplacements

Weapon emplacements provide additional protection for prolonged occupation. For towed artillery, the emplacement should be constructed
9-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

using minimum excavation and a surrounding

parapet to achieve the desired level of protection.

The position may require constructing a firing

platform, usually of M8A1 matting. The position

should be as level as possible, allow for direct

fire capability, and permit rapid exit. Sighting

requirements (aiming circle or aiming posts, etc.)

of the weapon must be considered. The use of

overhead cover for the weapon is difficult to

provide without restricting the firing capability.

Emplacement dimensions vary with the weapon

type and the positioning of prime movers. See

table 9-11.

Ammunition Shelters

Ammunition shelters should be located and

constructed to protect ammunition against the

weather and threat fire. They should be large

enough to hold the desired quantity of ammunition close to the firing position. They can be

constructed in a weapon emplacement parapet. If

it is necessary to construct an ammunition shelter

above ground, particularly where there is a high

water level, a log crib built up with dirt is

suitable. Building defensive positions for

concealment is a command function, not a logistic function.

Table 9-11. Artillery Vehicle Position Dimensions.

Vehicle Type

Dimensions (ft)

Equipment

Hours ** 

Minimum 

Parapet

Length Width Depth * Thickness (ft)

M198 60 60 3 1.5 8

M813/923 Truck 38 14 5 1 3

w/M105 Trailer 50 12 5 1.5 3

11⁄4 - ton Truck 20 13 9 0.7 2

* Total depth includes any parapet height. For deep cuts, double the depth and construction time. All depths 

are approximate and will need adjustment for surrounding terrain.

** Divide construction time by .85 for rocky soil, hard soil or night conditions. Use of natural terrain features 

will reduce construction time.
CHAPTER 10

DEVELOPING THE ARTILLERY FIRE PLAN

SECTION I. ESSENTIAL FIRE SUPPORT TASKS

AND

ESSENTIAL FIELD ARTILLERY TASKS RELATIONSHIP

General

The artillery fire plan is a tab to the fire support

appendix of the supported unit’s OPORD. The

artillery fire plan is the artillery commander’s

tactical plan for employing the fires of all available supporting artillery. It is based on the

guidance and instructions from the fire support

appendix of the supported unit’s OPORD,

supplemented by verbal information received

from the liaison personnel in the FSCC.

The artillery fire plan ensures the most efficient

use of artillery support by providing coordinated

actions to carry out the decisions of the artillery

commander in support of maneuver elements.

The use of essential fire support tasks (EFSTs)

ties the artillery fire plan to the maneuver plan. It

is also used as a stand-alone document for artillery units in R, GS-R, and GS missions. The

operations officer of the supporting artillery unit

prepares the plan. Section IV is a sample artillery

fire plan. 

Essential Fire Support Tasks 

The FSC uses the specified or implied tasks identified during mission analysis, commander’s intent,

commander’s guidance pertaining to fire support,

high payoff targets, and scheme of maneuver for a

specific COA to identify specific fire support

tasks. The FSC must then assign each fire support

task to specific supporting arms agencies. These

tasks frame the role of supporting arms agencies in

the overall plan and serve to focus their efforts in

supporting the scheme of maneuver and the

supported commander’s intent.

Tasks should describe the intended fire support

effect by delaying, limiting, disrupting or destroying a specific threat function or capability to

support friendly maneuver.

Because timing of fires with maneuver is essential, the FSC must develop and articulate timing

of fires with relation to maneuver. This can be

event-driven (triggered by anticipated friendly or

threat actions) or at a particular time on a universal clock (preparation fires, SEAD, etc.). A

combination of both techniques may be used. 

Tasks should also be measurable so their success

or failure can be assessed and reasoned decisions

made for re-attack. To make the most efficient

use of fire support capabilities, these tasks must

contain a sufficient level of specificity for the

supporting arms agency to clearly understand its

role in supporting the scheme of maneuver.

See MCWP 3-16 for a detailed discussion on

development of fire support tasks as they relate

to artillery.

Essential Field Artillery Tasks 

The fire support tasks that the maneuver

commander identifies to be accomplished by artillery become essential field artillery tasks (EFATs)

for the supporting artillery unit. The artillery staff

planning process enables the FSC and staff to
10-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

ensure that the necessary support is provided in the

form of the right targets, attacked with the best

available munitions, at the correct time, and in

synchronization with the maneuver plan. Just as

fire support tasks use the task, purpose, method,

effect (TPME) methodology, EFATs use TPME to

ensure that the EFST is accomplished in support of

the maneuver plan. See figures 10-1 and 10-2.

The task describes the targeting objective fires must

achieve against a specific threat formation’s function

or capability. See MCWP 3-16. 

The purpose must clearly tie the EFAT to the fire

support task it supports. It is a statement of the

fire support task relative to maneuver.

The method is a concise statement of how the

artillery task will be accomplished to include

what must be done to complete the EFAT. This

entails describing priorities of fire and survey;

PAs and routes to them; AoFs; target numbers,

priority targets & FPFs; radar zones; triggers for

movement/survivability move criteria; and

FSCMs. These are referred to as priorities,

allocations and restrictions. 

Effects describes what success will look like. As

much as possible, quantify the effect as a measurable result. Describe the firing element’s

location; i.e., will the battery move after executing the task?

Figure 10-1. Essential Fire Support Tasks and Essential Field Artillery Tasks Relationship.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-3 

Task Purpose Method Effects

Mass 

Battalion

Same as 

the purpose 

addressed 

with the 

EFST.

Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than ____.

Target number is ______.

Number of rounds fired at target is ______.

Trigger to fire mission is _____________________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid ______ immediately upon completion of mission.

Ensure battery has current met.

Battery conducts mass pre-combat check.

Same as 

the effects 

addressed 

with the 

EFST.

Fire 

FASCAM

” Emplace FASCAM medium density (200 x 800).

Low angle, 8 RAAMS aim points, 4 ADAM aim points; use one howitzer/aim 

point technique.

Ensure RAAMS complete before firing ADAM.

Minefield requires 96 RAAMS (12/aim point) and 24 ADAM (6/aim point).

Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than _____.

Ammo section delivers 96 RAAMS and 24 ADAM to grid _____ not later than _____.

Trigger to fire FASCAM minefield is ____________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid _____ immediately upon completion of mission.

Ensure battery has current met.

Battery conducts FASCAM pre-combat checks.

”

Fire 

SADARM

” Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than _____.

Target number is ______.

Number of rounds fired at target is ______.

Trigger fire mission is _______________________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid _____ immediately upon completion of mission.

Ensure battery has current met.

Remind battery uses altitude correction.

Battery conducts SADARM pre-combat check.

”

Fire 

Copperhead

” Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than _____.

Target number is ______.

Number of rounds fired at target is ______.

Trigger to fire mission is _____________________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid _____ immediately upon completion of mission.

Verify pulse repetition frequency code with observer.

Verify Angle T; confirm observer location.

Verify gun target range check observer target range.

Battery conducts Copperhead pre-combat check.

”

Fire 

Illumination

” Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than _____.

Target number is ______.

Confirm 1 gun illumination, range spread, lateral spread or range and lateral spread.

Number of rounds fired at target is _____.

Trigger to fire mission is _____________________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid _____ immediately upon completion of mission.

Ensure battery has current met.

Confirm observer location.

Ensure the correct height of burst is used.

Battery conducts illumination pre-combat check.

”

Fire Smoke ” Batteries in place at grid _____ ready to fire not later than _____.

Target number is ______.

Length of smoke screen is ______.

Attitude of smoke screen is ______.

Wind direction is ______.

Consult appropriate Pasquill table and compute initial volley and sustaining rounds.

Compute aim points.

Number of rounds fired at target is ______.

Trigger to fire mission is _____________________________________________.

Conduct survivability move to grid _____ immediately upon completion of mission.

Ensure battery has most met.

Battery conducts smoke pre-combat check.

”

Figure 10-2. Example Essential Field Artillery Tasks.
10-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

SECTION II. THE MARINE CORPS PLANNING 

PROCESS AS IT APPLIES TO

THE ARTILLERY FIRE PLAN

General

The Marine Corps Planning Process (MCPP)

consists of six steps. Each depends on the inputs

from the previous step. See figure 10-3. Poor

staff planning performed early in the process will

escalate throughout the entire process and could

result in commanders determining inaccurate

COAs. The MCPP improves staff coordination

because of the natural framework of the process.

Figure 10-3. Steps in the Marine Corps

Planning Process.

Mission Analysis

The first step in the MCPP is mission analysis.

This step drives the entire MCPP and allows the

artillery commander to begin his commander’s

battlespace area evaluation (CBAE). Each of the

six steps in the MCPP can be best understood

from the perspective of inputs, process, and

outputs. Figure 10-4 depicts this perspective for

mission analysis. The artillery commander and

his staff begin their planning upon receipt of a

warning order from higher headquarters. Included

with this warning order should be their IPB, staff

estimates, and facts and assumptions. The artillery commander and his staff utilize this information as inputs into their planning process. 

Analyze Higher Headquarter’s Order

This is higher headquarters’ warning order. The

need for concurrent planning does not allow the

artillery staff to wait for the completed maneuver

order before they begin planning. Understanding

where the operation will occur and the type of

operation will allow the staff to begin the MCPP.

Conduct the Initial Intelligence Preparation

of the Battlespace

The cornerstone of the MCPP is the S-2’s IPB.

Each staff member depends on the S-2 to provide

an accurate estimation of how the threat will fight

before performing his portion of the MCPP for

the commander. The IPB process for maneuver

units is outlined in MCWP 2-12, MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis. 

Determine Specified, Implied, and

Essential Tasks

The concepts of specified and implied tasks are

the same as those used by the maneuver

regiment staff. Examples of specified tasks are:

position well-forward; move behind maneuver

task force; plan CFZ at breach site; preposition

smoke/RAP forward. EFATs for artillery units

are derived from the fire support tasks in the

maneuver fire plan.

Review Available Assets

The artillery commander and his staff must

examine additions to and deletions from the tactical situation, current task organization, support
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-5 

relationships, and status (capabilities and limitations) of all units. They consider the relationship

between specified and implied tasks and available

assets. From this they determine if they have the

assets to perform all specified and implied tasks. If

there are shortfalls, they identify additional

resources required for the mission’s success. The

staff must pay particular attention to deviations

from what the commander considers his normal

task organization. Some examples of assets that

may be considered are: radars, observers, reinforcing or GSR units to be included in a fire plan.

Determine Constraints

A higher artillery commander may place some

constraints on his subordinate commanders that

restrict their freedom of action. Constraints may

take the form of a requirement to do something;

e.g., maintain at least 25 percent of ICM or no

smoke or dud-producing munitions on the easternmost objective. The commander and his staff must

identify and understand these constraints, which are

normally found in the concept of operations or

coordinating instructions paragraphs from the

maneuver operation plan.

Identify Critical Facts and Assumptions

Facts are statements of known data. Assumptions

are suppositions concerning the current or future

situation that are assumed to be true in the absence

of facts. They take the place of necessary, but

unavailable, facts and fill the gaps in what the

commander and staff know about a situation. The

tests of validity and necessity are a technique to use.

Validity means the assumption is likely to be true.

Necessity is whether or not the assumption is essential for planning. If planning can continue without

the assumption, it is not necessary and should be

discarded. Whenever possible, assumptions are

cleared with the higher headquarters to ensure

Inputs Process Outputs

Commander’s orientation Analyze higher HQ warning order Initial IPB products

CBAE Conduct the initial IPB Restated mission

Commander’s initial guidance Determine specified, implied, and essential tasks Commander’s intent

Higher headquarters warning order or 

OPORD

Review available assets Commander’s guidance

Restraints Determine constraints Warning order

Higher headquarters IPB Identify critical facts and assumptions Specified tasks

Staff estimates Determine initial CCIRs Implied tasks

Facts and assumptions Determine initial reconnaissance annex Essential tasks

Plan use of available time Restraints

Write the restated mission Assumptions

Conduct a mission analysis briefing Initial staff estimates

Approve the restated mission analysis briefing

Develop the initial commander’s intent

Issue commander’s guidance

Issue warning order

Review facts and assumptions

Figure 10-4. Mission Analysis.
10-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

consistency with higher headquarters’ plan.

Assumptions are replaced with facts as soon as

possible. Assumptions should answer the following

four questions: Is it logical? Is it realistic? Is it

essential for planning to continue? Does it avoid

assuming away a threat capability? To determine

assumptions, planners should—

l List all appropriate assumptions received from

higher headquarters.

l State expected conditions over which the commander has no control but which are relevant

to the plan.

l List conditions that would invalidate the plan

or its concept of operations.

Determine Initial Commander’s Critical 

Information Requirements 

Commander’s critical information requirements

(CCIRs) identify information needed by the

commander to support his CBAE and to make

critical decisions, especially to determine/validate

courses of actions. See figure 10-5.

CCIRs should be limited to 10 items or less.

CCIRs are time-sensitive in that they drive

decisions at decision points (DPs). The key

question is, “What does the commander need to

know in a specific situation to make a particular

decision in a timely manner?” The staff

Figure 10-5. Commander’s Critical Information Requirements.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-7 

nominates information requirements (IRs) to

become CCIRs. CCIRs are situation-dependent

and specified by the commander for each operation. He must continuously review CCIRs

during the planning process and adjust them as

situations change.

CCIRs usually arise from the IPB and war

gaming. CCIRs are normally expressed as priority intelligence requirements (PIRs)—information about the threat; essential elements of

friendly information (EEFI)—information needed

to protect friendly forces from the threat’s information-gathering systems; and friendly forces

information requirements (FFIRs)—information

about the capabilities of his or adjacent units. The

staff should also attempt to identify the threat’s

center of gravity. Center of gravity—it is that

characteristic, capability or location from which

threat and friendly forces derive their freedom of

action, physical strength, or the will to fight.

Attacking the center of gravity is—or should

be—the focus of all operations.

Determine the Initial Reconnaissance Annex

Based on the initial IPB and CCIR, the staff,

primarily the S-2, identifies gaps in the intelligence available and determines an initial reconnaissance and surveillance plan to acquire

information, bring forward higher order survey,

position observers or send out advance parties.

The S-3 molds this into an initial reconnaissance

annex to launch assets as soon as possible to

begin their collection efforts. This initial reconnaissance annex should contain—

l The AO for reconniassance.

l Mission Statement.

l Reconnaissance objective.

l Line of departure/line of contact time.

l Routes to AO and passage of lines instructions.

l Fire support measures.

l Task organization.

l PIR and IR.

l Initial named areas of interest (NAIs).

l Communications and logistics support.

l MEDEVAC.

Plan Use of Available Time

The artillery commander and his staff refine their

initial plan for use of available time. They

compare the time needed to accomplish EFATs

to the maneuver time line to ensure mission

accomplishment is feasible in the allotted time.

They also compare the time line to the threat time

line developed during the IPB. The commander

and his staff specify when and where they will

conduct the briefings that result from the

planning process and when, where, and in what

form they will conduct rehearsals. The artillery

commander can optimize planning time by

sending additional warning orders as detailed

planning develops. This permits parallel planning

by subordinate units.

Write the Restated Mission

The purpose of artillery and EFATs is the foundation for mission statement development. Planners

should evaluate whether or not the purpose of artillery and EFATs is still valid before writing a

restated mission. A proper mission statement

answers the following questions—

l Who—The artillery units that will conduct the

operation.

l What—The type of operation or EFAT.

l When—The time the operation will start and

end.

l Where—The location of the battlespace or

area of operation the artillery must support.

l Why—The purpose of the operation.

The “who,” “what,” “when,” and “where” are

derived from the EFATs. The “why” is derived

from the purpose of the fire support task.
10-8 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Conduct a Mission Analysis Brief

The mission analysis briefing is not a unit readiness briefing, but staff officers must know the

status of subordinate and supporting units and brief

relevant information as it applies to the situation.

The staff should use standardized charts to

monitor/consolidate this data to give the

commander a quick snapshot of his unit. The

mission analysis briefing is given to the

commander and his staff. This is often the only

time the entire staff is present, and the only opportunity to ensure that all staff members are starting

from a common reference point. The briefing

focuses on relevant conclusions reached as a result

of the mission analysis. This helps the commander

and his staff develop a shared vision of the requirements for the upcoming operation. Time permitting, the staff briefs the commander on its mission

analysis using the same outline discussed previously. See figure 10-6 for an example mission

analysis briefing format. See figure 10-7 for a

mission analysis briefing checklist. The mission

analysis brief includes the following:

l Mission and commander’s intent of the headquarters two levels up.

l Mission, commander’s intent, concept of the

operation, and deception plan/objective of the

force.

l Review of commander’s initial guidance.

l Initial IPB products.

Figure 10-6. Example Mission Analysis Briefing Format.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-9 

l Specified, implied, and essential tasks.

l Constraints on the operation.

l Forces available.

l Hazards and their risk.

l Recommended initial CCIR.

l Recommended time lines.

l Recommended restated mission.

Develop the Initial Commander’s Intent

During mission analysis, the commander develops his intent for the operation. The artillery

commander’s intent should briefly address the

purpose of fires, the desired endstate, and the

methods (essential tasks that must be accomplished, guidance on movements and survivability, etc.) to be used to achieve the endstate. After

reviewing the mission analysis briefing and the

restated mission, he modifies his intent statement

as necessary.

The commander’s intent is a clear, concise statement of what the unit must perform to succeed

with respect to the threat, the terrain, and to the

desired endstate. It provides the link between the

mission and the concept of operations by stating

the key tasks that, along with the mission, are the

basis for subordinates to exercise initiative when

S-1 S-2

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

Current personnel status

Anticipated personnel status

Critical shortages

Personnel shortages

Forecasted losses

Forecasted issues

Issues

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

Prepare/refine artillery MCOO

Prepare threat situational template

Prepare event template (time available?)

Determine enemy order of battle

Maneuver forces

Develop enemy order of battle

Determine avenues of approach

Determine weather and its effects

Forecast

Light data/night vision goggle windows

Prepare threat courses of action

Most likely

Most dangerous

Prepare recommended CCIRs

Determine radar status

Issues

S-3

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

Division and regiment missions received

Regiment commander’s intent received

Fire support appendix of regiment order 

received

Regiment OPORD received

Field artillery organization for combat

identified

Identify key facts and assumptions

Identify specified tasks:

Essential fire support tasks

Tasks to subordinate units

Target list

Special munitions requirements?

r

r

r

r

r

Identify implied tasks:

Ranging requirements

Movement requirements

Passage of lines

Liaison requirements?

Special munitions requirements?

Identify essential tasks

Identify constraints:

Position restrictions

Movement restrictions

Observed versus unobserved fires

Special ROE requirements

Ammunition or CSR limitations

Required Controls?

Prepare order preparation timeline

S-4

r

r

r

r

r

r

Class I - Any specific problems

Class III

Fueler status - specific problems

Class II/IV - Specific problems

Class V - Critical shortages

Class VIII - Critical shortages

r

r

r

r

r

Slant report:

Current

Anticipated at LD

Reinforcing unit

Class IX - Critical shortages

MSRs

Host nation support

Issues

Figure 10-7. Mission Analysis Briefing Checklist.
10-10 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

opportunities arise or when the original concept

of operations no longer applies. Intent is normally

expressed in four or five sentences and is mandatory for all orders.

The mission and the commander’s intent must be

understood two echelons down. Key tasks are

those one or two tasks the maneuver commander

says the artillery must perform or conditions that

must be met to achieve the stated purpose of the

operation. Key tasks are not tied to a specific

COA, but identify what is fundamental to the

unit’s success. The commander’s intent does not

include the “method” by which the force will

achieve the desired endstate. The method is the

concept of operations. If purpose is addressed in

the intent statement, it does not restate the ‘why”

(purpose) of the mission statement.

The commander personally prepares his intent

statement and personally delivers it when possible, along with the order. Commanders from

battery level up prepare an intent statement for

each OPORD. The intent statement at any level

must support the intent of the next higher

commander. For any OPORD, there is only one

commander’s intent. Annexes (including appendixes, tabs, and enclosures) to the OPORD do

not contain an intent statement; they contain a

concept of support. For example, the Fire

Support Appendix (Appendix 19) to an OPORD

contains a concept of support, but not an intent

statement. The artillery fire plan issued to an

artillery battalion supporting a maneuver

regiment contains the intent statement of the

artillery battalion commander. The intent statement in an OPORD is after operations and

before concept of operations.

Issue the Commander’s Guidance

The commander’s guidance is essential for timely

COA development and analysis. By stating the

planning options he does or does not desire his

staff to consider, the commander can save staff

time and effort by allowing them to concentrate

on developing COAs that meet his intent.

Commander’s guidance may be written or oral,

but must focus on the essential tasks conducive to

mission accomplishement. The guidance emphasizes in broad terms when, where, and how he

intends to mass his fires to accomplish the

mission according to his higher headquarters

commander’s intent. It should include priorities

for all combat, CS, and CSSE and how they will

support his concept. The more detailed the

guidance, the more quickly his staff can complete

the plan, but this increases the risk of overlooking

or insufficiently examining things that might

affect mission execution. Commander’s guidance

should include—

l Specific artillery COA to consider or not consider, both friendly and threat, and the priority

for addressing them.

l Prioritized EFATs.

l CCIRs.

l Risk guidance.

l Mobility and countermobility guidance.

l Security measures to be implemented.

l The time plan.

l The type of rehearsal to conduct.

l Munitions mix.

l Reconnaissance guidance.

l Retransmission guidance and survey priorities.

l Any other information the commander wants

his staff to consider.

l Additional specific priorities for combat support and CSS.

l The type of order to issue.

Issue a Warning Order

Immediately upon the commander providing his

guidance, his staff submits to subordinate and

supporting units a warning order that contains, as

a minimum—

l Restated mission.

l Prioritized EFATs.

l CCIRs.

l Reconnaissance to be initiated by subordinate

units.

l Deception guidance.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-11 

l Specific priorities.

l Guidance on rehearsals.

l Commander’s intent.

l Unit’s AO (a sketch, an overlay or some other

description).

l Security measures.

l Mobility and countermobility guidance.

l Time plan.

Review Facts and Assumptions

During the rest of the MCPP, the commander and

his staff periodically review all available facts

and assumptions. New facts may alter requirements and analysis of the mission. Assumptions

may have become facts or may have become

invalid. Whenever the facts or assumptions

change, the commander and his staff must assess

the impact of these changes on the plan and make

necessary adjustments.

Upon completion of mission analysis, the second

warning order is issued to subordinate elements

See figure 10-8 for the orders process during

mission analysis.

The mission analysis activities outlined above

produce products that are vital inputs to all subsequent steps in the MCPP. The only required

outputs from mission analysis are the artillery

commander’s outputs of restated mission,

commander’s intent, and commander’s guidance. 

Figure 10-8. Orders Process for Mission Analysis.
10-12 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Course of Action Development

A COA is a broadly stated, potential solution to

an assigned mission. It must be suitable, feasible, acceptable, distinguishable (when multiple

COAs are developed) and complete. See figure

10-9. The process of developing a COA is

discussed in detail in MCWP 5-1, Marine Corps

Planning Process. 

The outputs from mission analysis (at a minimum

include a restated mission, commander’s intent,

and commander’s guidance) become the inputs for

COA development. A key tool for development of

the artillery fire plan is the integration of EFATs

and the maneuver commander’s guidance for fire

support (provided by the FSC) into the COA

development. COA development, like mission

analysis, requires the interaction of the entire staff.

Members bring their expertise and the information

developed during mission analysis to COA development. This information, with the addition of

commander’s intent and guidance, is the focal

point for development of COAs.

During COA development, planners will use

METT-T, threat versus friendly capabilities, and

EFATs to determine likely employment options

to support maneuver elements. Planners should

consider two fundamental questions—

l What do I do to support maneuver elements?

l How am I going to do it?

Answering the question of “how” is the essence

of COA development. The following techniques

assist the staff in developing COAs.

Intelligence Preparation of the

Battlespace 

The S-3 will always start COA development

with analyzing the S-2’s modified combined

obstacle overlay (MCOO). This overlay will be

placed under the maneuver operations graphics.

High payoff targets or critical target areas by

phase based on the high-payoff target list,

maneuver fire support plan, or by templating are

plotted. The FDO will provide the quantities of

the propellants available. Using the greatest

percentage of propellant/shell mix available, the

S-3 will determine optimal ranges to target that

will dictate range fans used to determine PAs.

This information is also given to the FSC so the

maneuver commander knows the predominant

ranges of his fire support assets.

Inputs Process Outputs

Artillery mission analysis brief IPB Commander’s designation of COAs to be wargamed

Commander’s additional guidance Array friendly forces Wargaming guidance

Essential artillery tasks Assess relative combat power Evaluation criteria

MCOO Refined center of gravity Supporting documents for each COA

Tentative maneuver plan Develop COA Staff estimates and additional information

Threat COAs COA refinements

Threat center of gravity COA validation

Artillery center of gravity COA graphics and narrative

Initial staff estimates Prepare COA briefing

Select/modify COAs

Develop CO’s wargaming 

guidance

Develop CO’s evaluation guidance

Figure 10-9. Course of Action Development.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-13 

Array Friendly Forces

The intelligence officer will receive a situation

template (SITEMP) from the supported unit. This

SITEMP will not address all the concerns of the

artillery and must be refined to focus on fire

support issues. The S-3 will use the SITEMP to

deconflict positioning of firing units and supporting units; e.g., radar. PAs are eliminated that are

on likely threat avenues of approach, objectives

or chemical strike areas. The operations officer

considers positioning units that will cause delivery problems for the threat. This may cause the

threat to execute high angle missions, which

facilitates friendly target acquisition capabilities.

Assess Relative Combat Power

By determining strengths and weaknesses of

threat and friendly artillery, the staff can determine what assets are required to accomplish

EFATs, what vulnerabilities exist, and how threat

artillery can influence friendly operations. The

commander seeks to protect his weaknesses while

exploiting the threat’s vulnerabilities.

Refine Center of Gravity Analysis

Based on EFATs, information determined in the

IPB process, and staff estimates, refined centers

of gravity and critical vulnerabilities are used to

formulate COAs. 

Develop Initial Courses of Action

Artillery COAs should be developed for each

maneuver COA. These artillery COAs should be

based on the EFATs derived from the EFSTs of

the maneuver order. If a COA does not accomplish these tasks, then the COA is not suitable for

further consideration. Within COA development,

the operations officer should also consider

FSCMs, radar zones, retransmission sites or any

other measures that will influence support to

maneuver elements.

Course of Action Graphic and Narrative

For each COA, graphics are created to portray

how the organization will accomplish the

mission. This includes FSCMs, PAs, range fans,

EFATs, and radar coverage. See figure 10-10.

Course of Action Criteria

Before briefing the COAs, the following

questions should be asked is the COA—

l Suitable?

l Feasible?

l Acceptable?

l Distinguishable?

l Complete?

Figure 10-10. Artillery Scheme of Maneuver.
10-14 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Prepare Course of Action Briefing

Once COAs are developed, they are briefed to the

artillery commander to confirm that his guidance

has been met. The briefing may include—

l Updated IPB.

l Possible threat COAs focusing on artillery.

l Restated mission of the artillery commander.

l Maneuver commander’s intent for fire support.

l COA statement and graphic.

l Rationale for COA.

l Considerations that may affect threat COAs.

l Deductions resulting from a relative combat

power analysis.

l Reasons units are arrayed on the graphic.

l Reason for selected control measures.

l Updated facts and assumptions.

Select/Modify Courses of Action

Commander Determines Courses of Action

to be Wargamed

The commander may give further guidance on

evaluation criteria that will focus the wargaming

effort and data collection efforts of the staff.

COA development activities produce outputs that

drive subsequent steps of MCPP. Required

outputs of COA development follow.

Courses of Action Designated by the

Commander to be Wargamed

Once the staff briefs the commander on the COA,

the commander will determine if they meet his

guidance and choose which ones, if any, that will

be wargamed further.

Commander’s Wargaming Guidance

The commander may decide to give further

guidance on the direction the staff will take the

wargaming. This is based upon additional

guidance received from higher or supported unit

or his own judgment.

Evaluation Criteria

Before evaluating the COA, the end state must be

understood to determine which COA best

supports the commander’s guidance and scheme

of maneuver. 

Supporting Documents for Each

Course of Action

Each COA should contain graphics and overlays. 

Staff Estimates and Additional Information

Special staff officers will help the primary staff

by analyzing the COAs based upon their areas of

expertise, indicating how they can best support

the operation. Every member of the staff must

determine force requirements for external

support, risks involved, and each COA’s strength

and weakness. 

Course of Action Wargaming

Wargaming is a detailed analysis of the COAs

prepared by the staff. It is an attempt to visualize

the flow of a battle. The process considers

friendly dispositions, strengths, and weaknesses;

threat assets and probable COAs (likely and most

dangerous); and characteristics of the AO. It

focuses the staff’s attention on each phase of the

operation in a logical sequence. Wargaming is the

most valuable step during the orders process and

should be allocated the most time. During this

period the commander and staff may change an

existing COA or develop a new COA after identifying unforeseen critical events, tasks, requirements, or problems. While wargaming COAs —

l Remain objective.

l Accurately record advantages and disadvantages.

l Continually assess feasibility, acceptability,

and suitability.

l Avoid premature conclusions.

l Avoid COA comparison.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-15 

From COA development outputs, the staff takes

important information to begin the wargaming

process. Information includes the COA chosen by

the commander to be war gamed, any additional

guidance the commander may have for wargaming,

and estimates and requirements that the staff has to

support the COAs. See figure 10-11. Responsibilities of the staff during wargaming are shown in

figure 10-12 on page 10-16. The wargaming

methodology follows a 10-step process.

Step 1: Consider the Commander’s Wargaming 

Guidance and Evaluation Criteria

The commander will assess the time available at

the conclusion of COA development. The

degree to which a COA achieves the EFATs

allows the commander to decide which COA is

optimal based on time, space, and resources

available. His evaluation criteria will address

specific issues/questions that the commander

wants his staff to determine during the conduct

of the war game, however the focus will be to

determine if the EFATs can be realistically

accomplished by the COA. The commander

should take into account the options and

capabilities of the threat commander and yet be

mindful of his own vulnerabilities when developing his war gaming guidance. 

Step 2: Gather the Tools

At the beginning of war gaming, the staff should

have the following information available:

l Approved mission statement.

l Commander’s intent and planning guidance.

l Maneuver commander’s intent for fires and

scheme of maneuver.

l Assumptions.

l Constraints and restraints, including ammuntion available and communication ranges.

l CCIRs.

l Maps covering the entire AO.

l Friendly force list.

l Threat order of battle.

l MCOO with weather and terrain analysis and

probable PAs.

l Current and projected threat situation overlays.

l Current and projected friendly situation overlays.

l Threat SITEMP for each COA.

l Threat event template.

Inputs Process Outputs

Commander’s designation of COAs 

to be wargamed

Consider commander’s guidance Wargamed COA with graphics

Wargaming guidance Gather tools List of critical events and 

decision points

Supporting documents for each COA List friendly forces Wargame products

Staff estimates and additional requirements List assumptions

List known critical events and 

decision points

Select wargame method

Select method to record and 

display results

Conduct wargame

Refine staff estimates and contributions

Prepare COA wargame brief

Figure 10-11. Course of Action Wargaming.
10-16 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

In addition, the staff should have the following

information from COA development:

l Assessment of relative combat power. Specifically, the threat’s indirect fire support assets

and counterfire ability.

l COAs.

l Graphics and narratives.

l Decision support matrix/template.

l War game rules.

l Recording tools (synchronization and COA

development matrices).

Step 3: List Friendly Force List

List all friendly forces arrayed on the battlefield. 

Step 4: List Assumptions

The staff reviews previous assumptions to determine if they are still valid or have changed. The

staff will have to brief the commander how

these assumptions influenced the outcome of the

war game.

Figure 10-12. Wargaming Responsibilities.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-17 

Step 5: List and Graphically Display Known 

Critical Events and Decision Points

From the IPB products developed during mission

analysis, a decision support template is used to

relate the event template with decision points that

are significant to the artillery unit. 

The event template overlays the operations

graphics to depict time phase lines (TPLs) on the

battlefield. The operations officer will list

EFATs, which may include massing missions,

special munitions missions, unit movement,

survey emplacement, etc. The decision support

template (DST) does not dictate decisions to the

operations officer but identifies critical events

and threat activities relative to time and location

that may require tactical decisions.

Step 6: Select the War Game Method

The four methods used are sequence of essential

tasks, avenue in depth, belt, and box. See MCWP

5-1 for a detailed discussion of each technique.

Step 7: Select Method to Record

and Display Results

One method for recording the results is the

synchronization matrix (see figure 10-13 on

page 10-18). It allows the staff to synchronize

the COA across time and space in relation to the

threat COA. An advantage of this method is that

it can be readily translated into a graphic

decision-making product. The first entry is time

or phase of the operation. The second entry is

the most likely threat action as determined by

the S-2. The third entry is the DP for the

friendly COA. The remainder of the matrix is

developed around selected functional areas or

major subordinate commands.

Step 8: Wargame the Battle

Wargame each EFAT. The intelligence officer

will discuss the timing of the battle off the TPL,

the operations officer addresses EFSTs, and the

FDO briefs mission execution times (time of

flight ([TOF], shift times, first round to last).

Wargame the fire plans to make sure they are

executable. The S-2 describes what the threat is

doing and their rate of march. The S-3 adds the type

of target, artillery impact area (front, rear, center of

formation), and the number of rounds and volleys

required. The FDO then states whether or not units

are laid on the target, who will fire, shift time

required, TOF, and total time. It is critical to use

honest times based on the unit’s level of experience

and not just standard Marine Corps Combat Readiness Evaluation System times. Using this information and the TPL, place a decision point (star) on the

operations graphics that represents the final time

that the artillery can attain its greatest effects upon

the threat located at that point. Decision points in

the forward battle area may not be observable by

organic assets. These decision points should correspond to a trigger point of the supported unit who is

watching the decision point. As the S-2 identifies

threat forces at or near decision points, the S-3/FDO

is alerted and expects calls for fire for the target tied

to the decision point. 

Use the DST to determine decision points for

other critical events such as unit movements,

special munitions missions, radar queing times,

logistics operations, etc.

Step 9: Refine Staff Estimates and Contributions

Once the war game is complete and the results

annotated, the staff refines their estimates and

contributions. Examples of contributions are

listed in figure 10-14 on page 10-19.
10-18 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Critical Event 

or Time

Friendly 

Action

Threat 

Reaction

Friendly 

Counteraction

Decision 

Point

Intelligence

NAI

TAI

Collect

Artillery

Operations

Move

Priority of Fires

Priority Target

Survey

Radar

Met

Subordinate Tasks and Purpose

Support

Operations

Mobility, Countermobility,

Survivability,

NBC

CSS

C2

Risk

External Coordination

Notes

Figure 10-13. Sample COA Synchronization Matrix.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-19 

Step 10: Prepare Course of Action

War Game Brief

Upon completion of the COA wargaming, the

staff briefs the commander on the advantages

and disadvantages of the COA and any

suggested modifications.

Once wargaming is complete and the staff briefs

the commander on the results, the staff then

takes, at a minimum, the wargamed COA and

graphics, list of critical events and decision

points, and information on the commander’s

evaluation criteria to be used in follow-on steps. 

Course of Action Comparison and Decision

Once wargaming is complete, each of the war

gamed COAs are compared against each other to

determine which COA will be chosen to execute.

The staff will use the COA graphics, critical

events and decision points, the commander’s

evaluation criteria, and other information, such as

staff estimates, to aid them in determining the

best course of action to choose. See figure 10-15

on page 10-20.

Course of Action Evaluation

During this phase, each COA is evaluated against

the commander’s evaluation criteria. Advantages

and disadvantages are discussed and recorded.

See figure 10-16 on page 10-20. This sample

matrix can assist the staff in making their recommendations for a particular COA.

Course of Action Comparison

The staff ranks each COA with respect to advantages and disadvantages in addition to evaluation

Figure 10-14. Staff Contributions to Wargaming.
10-20 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

criteria such as mission accomplishment, EFATs,

and battlespace functions. These ranks are totaled

and compared. This comparison gives the

commander the information that he needs to

make a sound decision. However, these rankings

may be more subjective than objective numbers

indicate. The commander and staff must examine

the matrix for sensitivity. For example, one

course of action may be determined to be the

“best,” however, it may not be supportable by

one of the battlespace functions (logistically,

communications, etc.). The commander must take

this into account and determine if additional

support is required or the COA must be adjusted

or thrown out. See figure 10-17. 

Commander’s Decision

The staff compiles the information from the

comparison matrices and then briefs the

commander. Upon selecting a COA, the

commander reviews the COA to determine if it

must be modified or combined with elements of

different COA to mitigate disadvantages. He

reviews the mission statement and may refine his

commander’s guidance. He then issues any

additional guidance on priorities for CSS (particularly for resources he needs to preserve his

freedom of action and to ensure continuous

service support).

Prepare Concept of Artillery Support

The staff prepares the framework for the orders

process. The concept of artillery support is a

general description of how the artillery will

support maneuver forces and a generic organization for combat. The concept of artillery support

normally includes graphics and a narrative.

Issue the Warning Order

Once the concept of artillery support is complete,

the commander will issue a warning order to

allow his subordinate commanders to perform

concurrent planning.

Once a course of action is chosen and the concept

of artillery support is completed, the staff will

Inputs Process Outputs

Wargamed COA

List of critical events and decision points

Information on commander’s evaluation criteria

COA evaluation

COA comparison

Commander’s decision

Prepare the concept of artillery support

Issue the warning order

Concept of operations

Refined commander’s intent

High pay-off target list

Specified type of rehearsal

Specified type of order

Figure 10-15. Course of Action Comparison and Decision.

COA Comparison

COA 1 COA 2 COA 3

Advantages RISK—Least risk COUNTERFIRE—

Simplicity

MISSION/TASKS—Best means of 

accomplishing essential artillery tasks

Disadvantages FIRES—Essential artillery 

tasks difficult to accomplish

C2—Difficult to control due 

to mobile plan

RISK—accepts most risk

Figure 10-16. Advantages and Disadvantages Matrix.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-21 

turn to completing the orders process using this

concept of artillery support, a refined

commander’s intent, high pay-off target list, and

additional information such as: updated IPB,

decision support tools, updated CCIRs, staff

estimates, synchronization matrix, and the

warning order. The commander will also determine the type of order written and his timeline

for rehearsals.

Orders Development

Based on the commander’s decision and final

guidance, the staff refines the COA and

completes the plan and prepares to issue the artillery fire plan. The COA statement and graphics

become the basis for the concept of artillery

support and the operations overlay. The concept

of artillery support is the commander’s clear

concise statement of where, when, and how he

intends to concentrate combat power to accomplish the EFATs from the supported units’ fire

support plan. Orders and plans must provide all

necessary information subordinates require for

execution, but without unnecessary constraints

that would inhibit subordinate initiative. Before

issuing the order, the commander reviews it to

ensure it meets his commander’s intent. See

figure 10-18.

Criteria COA 1 COA 2 COA 3

Intelligence 3 2 1

Force protection 2 1 3

Maneuver 2 1 3

Decisive action 3 2 1

Simplicity 3 2 1

Movement—number and length 2 3 1

Mission/fires—accomplish essential field artillery tasks 3 2 1

Counterfire 1 3 2

C2—retransmission critical 2 3 1

CSS supportability 3 2 1

Other 2 1 3

TOTAL 26 22 18

Figure 10-17. Comparison Matrix.

Inputs Process Outputs

Initial task organization

Mission statement

Commander’s intent

Concept of artillery support

Tasks

Preparation of order or plan based on:

Concept of artillery support

Staff estimates and other planning documents

Orders reconciliation

Orders crosswalk

Commander approves plan

The order or plan

Synchronization matrix

Decision support tools

Updated intelligence and IPB 

products

Figure 10-18. Orders Development.
10-22 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

The XO coordinates the staff to assist the operations officer in developing the order. The XO will

dictate, from guidance of the CO, the format of the

order, set and enforce timelines, and determine

which enclosures will be published and by which

staff section. See figure 10-19 for an example

format of the artillery fire plan brief.

Preparation of the Order or Plan

Situation

Expands upon higher or supported unit OPORD/

fire support appendix situation. Focus on fire

support issues and assets.

Figure 10-19. Example Format of the Artillery Fire Plan Brief.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-23 

l Threat forces: Address the number, type, and

capabilities of the threat fire support assets to

include expected number of air sorties. Describe

any ground or air threats to subordinate units.

Identify the threat center of gravity or critical vulnerabilities.

l Friendly forces: Contains the missions of

higher artillery HQ or supported maneuver

unit. Missions of adjacent and supporting are

also included. State the maneuver commander’s intent for fires if DS or the higher

artillery commander’s intent if GS or GS/R.

l Attachments and Detachments: If any,

describe when and how long this is effective

and for whom. 

l Assumptions: List any additional assumptions

not in higher or supported orders.

Mission

The mission statement is a concise statement of

what the artillery is to accomplish. If there are

any reinforcing units, include them in the mission

statement.

Execution

l Commander’s Intent: This is where the artillery commander briefly describes EFATs, what

he sees as the friendly and threat center of graviety, and his desired end state with respect to

the relationship among the force as a whole,

the threat, and terrain.

l Concept of artillery support: This is the commander’s visualization of artillery support for

the operation, by phase or EFAT, to the desired

end state. It is written in sufficient detail to

enable appropriate action by subordinate units in

the absence of more specific instructions. This

paragraph should tie in the concept of fires with

the supported unit’s scheme of maneuver.

l Organization for combat: This is a clear

statement of organization for combat and tactical missions assigned to subordinate units. “On

order” and “be prepared to” missions are

included in this paragraph.

l Tasks to subordinate units: These instructions detail specific tasks assigned to batteries,

including specific EFATs. Tasks should be

assigned by battery, reinforcing unit or phase.

l Coordinating instructions: As the last paragraph of the “execution’ paragraph, it includes

instructions and details that pertain to two or

more subordinate elements. Some of these

instructions may be developed into enclosures

to the artillery fire plan. This sub-paragraph

may address the following:

m Target acquisition.

m Liaison requirements.

m Survey.

m Schedules/programs of fire.

m Automated fire control.

m PIR.

m High-payoff target list.

m Ammunition restrictions.

m Attack guidance matrix.

m Antifratricide measures.

m NBC defense/MOPP level.

m Checkpoints.

m Met.

m Rehearsal times.

Administration

Times, location, and format of personnel accountability and strength reports are detailed.

Logistics

This paragraph describes how the artillery unit will

logistically support itself in the accomplishment of

the mission. Ammunition resupply, maintenance

procedures, location of field and combat trains,

deployment of the unit’s aid station. Procedures to

request logistics support is described.

This subparagraph lists the locations of unit CPs/

COCs, location of the commander, and succession

of both fire direction responsibility and command.
10-24 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Signal 

Includes the updated communications-electronics

operating instruction, wire plan, special signal

instructions, retransmission locations and priority,

and digital subscriber tables. This section will also

describe specified uses of pyrotechnics for signalling and the challenge and password. 

Orders Reconciliation

This internal process used by the staff ensures

that the basic order and all enclosures are

complete and in agreement. It identifies discrepancies or gaps that the staff must correct. In

particular, the staff compares the commander’s

intent, mission, and CCIRs against the concept of

artillery support and supporting concepts.

Orders Crosswalk

The staff compares the order with the orders of

higher, adjacent, and supported commanders.

This helps achieve unity of effort and ensure that

the higher commander’s intent is met.

Commander’s Approval of Order or Plan

The final action taken is the approval of the order

by the commander. The actual output of this

process is the operations order or plan that will be

executed. Along with the order is all the supporting documentation such as overlays, matrices,

and enclosures.

Transition

Transition ensures the successful shift from

planning to execution. It is meant to enhance the

situational awareness of those who will execute

the order, maintains the intent of the concept of

artillery support, promotes unity of effort, and

generates tempo. Transition is a continual process

that requires a free flow of information between

the commander, staff, and subordinate elements

by all means available. The basis for the transition is the approved operations order or plan,

along with products of continuing staff action

such as updated IPB or synchronization matrices.

See figure 10-20.

Orders Brief

The transition begins with issuing the order

(written, matrix or verbal, depending on time

available) to subordinate commanders. 

Rehearsals

Confirmation Brief

Routinely performed by subordinate commanders immediately after receiving any instructions,

such as OPORD, fragmentary order, etc. Subordinate commanders brief the higher commander on

their understanding of the commander’s intent,

their specific tasks and purpose, and intrarelationship of all units in the plan. 

Inputs Process Outputs

The order or plan Orders brief Subordinate commanders:

Synchronization matrix Rehearsals • Ready to execute

Decision support tools • Prepared for future operations

Updated intelligence and IPB products

Information on future operations

Any outstanding issues

Figure 10-20. Transition.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-25 

Back Brief

The back brief is normally conducted throughout

the planning process. This rehearsal allows the

commander to clarify his intent early in the subordinates’ planning process, identify problems in the

concept of artillery support, and understand how

subordinates plan on accomplishing the mission.

Combined Arms Rehearsals

This rehearsal is normally conducted by the

maneuver unit’s headquarters after subordinate

units have issued their OPORDs. It ensures that

maneuver and fire support units are synchronized to achieve the mission and intent of the

higher commander.

Support Rehearsals

Separate battlespace functions will conduct

rehearsals throughout the planning process.

Examples of these rehearsals are the communications or fire support rehearsal.

Battle Drill or Standing Operating

Procedure Rehearsal

A battle drill or SOP rehearsal ensures that all

participants understand a technique or a specific

set of procedures.

By issuing the order and conducting rehearsals,

the commander can feel a measure of assurance

that his subordinates are ready to execute the plan

and are prepared for future operations.

SECTION III. ARTILLERY AND THE

INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF

THE BATTLESPACE PROCESS

General

The artillery S-2 should receive initial IPB

products from the supported or higher unit’s G-2/

S-2. This IPB should expand and focus toward

the mobility and survivability of the artillery unit.

IPB is the process of understanding the

battlespace, the threat, and options available. It

consists of an analysis of the terrain, weather,

threat doctrine, and threat actions. The purpose is

to aid in the early determination of the threat’s

most probable course of action.

IPB is a systematic and continuous process of

analyzing the threat, weather, and terrain. The

IPB process integrates threat doctrine with

weather and terrain to determine how the weather

and terrain will influence the threat’s fight. The

IPB process consists of four functions:

l Define the battlespace.

l Determine battlespace effects—terrain and

weather.

l Evaluate the threat—threat evaluation.

l Determine threat COAs—threat integration.

The MCOO is an in-depth study of the

battlespace incorporating terrain and weather.

The MCOO graphically depicts the first two

components of the IPB process (battlespace

evaluation, terrain and weather analysis) on one

overlay that can be initiated prior to combat and

then refined once deployed to the AO. Before

beginning the MCOO, the S-2 must establish the

criteria for the MCOO. The criteria on which the

artillery S-2 must focus are those that affect the

use of artillery and fire support, such as—

l Site to crest.

l Intervening crests.

l Howitzer cant.

l Range to target.

l Soil composition.

l Intervisibility lines.

l Mobility corridors.

l Avenues of approach.
10-26 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Pre-Battle Preparation 

The S-2 must focus on studying the doctrine of the

likely threats his unit will face in battle, then building order of battle (OOB) databases on those units.

The S-2 has many resources available to build his

threat data base and obtain an understanding of

how the threat fights. The artillery S-2’s OOB

studies must focus on threat maneuver force

doctrine; threat artillery doctrine and capabilities;

and threat air defense artillery doctrine.

Threat Maneuver Force Doctrine

l Numbers of vehicles and weapons by type

(light versus heavy).

l Formations used.

l Movement rates: day, night, security zone,

MBA, prebattle, battle, etc.

Threat Artillery Doctrine and Capabilities

l Weapon types.

l Number of tubes per battalion.

l Capabilities of each system: ammunition mix,

ranges, rates of fire.

l Dispositions: deployment distances between

firing units in relation to maneuver missions of

each echelon, location and amount of any specific artillery groupings.

l Counterfire capability and response time.

l EW threat to friendly counterfire radars: detection capability, jamming capability. 

l Types of fire by maneuver phase: What type of

indirect fires will the threat conduct during

each maneuver phase of the battle.

Threat Air Defense Artillery Doctrine

l Numbers by echelon.

l Disposition: deployment on the battlefield.

l Capabilities.

l Air phases of support.

These are the minimum information requirements. The S-2 must continuously research

potential threat forces to build, maintain, and

refine threat OOB database.

Terrain

From the artillery perspective, the S-2 identifies

severely restricted, restricted, and unrestricted

terrain. He marks severely restricted terrain on an

overlay with crosshatch marks and restricted

terrain with single-hatch marks. Artillery units

must identify terrain that affects firing as well as

mobility. Severely restricted terrain for artillery

causes extreme difficulty for weapon emplacement and firing. Restricted terrain hinders

emplacement and firing to a lesser degree and

probably requires a detailed reconnaissance effort

to locate suitable positions. During the orders

brief, the S-2 addresses possible problem areas if

artillery must occupy questionable PAs. To determine severely restricted, restricted, and

unrestricted areas, the artillery S-2 analyzes the

following factors.

Elevations

Identify the elevations in the battlespace that

may cause problems for firing units. The fire

direction officer can assist the S-2 in determining these problem areas. The S-2 must discuss

with the FDO, given positioning of firing units

in relation to terrain, what elevations will cause

site-to-crest, intervening crest, and vertical

interval problems. PAs that will reduce XO’s

minimum quadrant evaluation problems should

be identified, thus eliminating the need to

recompute fire missions for high angle due to

site-to-crest problems.

Slope

Possible slopes in the battlespace that may cause

cant problems for firing units should be identified.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-27 

Approximately 5 degrees (90 mils) is the

maximum allowable cant for all series howitzers

and MLRS launchers. Terrain that causes a cant of

90 mils or more is severely restricted for artillery. 

The most reliable information on slope is reconnaissance; however, topographical maps are also

important sources. To determine the slope of an

area from a map, divide the contour interval by

the horizontal distance between the contour lines

and multiply by 100. The purpose is not for the

S-2 to conduct a time-intensive map study to

determine the slope for all possible PAs; rather,

the S-2 can use this analysis to identify areas

where units may encounter cant problems. Once

identified, these areas are classified as restricted

until verified by actual ground reconnaissance.

With this information, the S-2 can assist the S-3

in directing firing batteries to conduct reconnaissance of areas with possible cant problems.

On the “Source” compact disk is a Terrabase

program. This program can be used to study

terrain of an area by simply inputting a grid to a

possible PA; it will allow the operator to traverse

6400 mils to analyze the terrain.

Soil Composition

Identify areas of possible poor soil composition

that may cause problems for towed howitzers.

For example, very rocky, sandy or boggy areas

may cause mobility, emplacement or displacement problems. There is often information about

soils (or evidence to their characteristics) on

maps and in reports concerning climate and

geography. For instance, orchards are usually

planted in well-drained, sandy soils; agricultural

fields in low areas become wet and boggy during

periods of rain.

As with slope determination, ground reconnaissance is the best and only method to verify the

actual suitability of areas to support howitzers.

However, the S-2 can assist the S-3 by identifying

areas with soil composition that may require

reconnaissance prior to occupation. Once these

areas are identified, they are classified as restricted

until verified by actual ground reconnaissance.

Mobility Problems

Areas that will cause mobility problems for artillery and channelize threat movements should be

highlighted. The higher maneuver headquarters’

IPB product will probably already have identified most of the terrain that is severely restricted

and restricted for mobility. See figure 10-21 on

page 10-28. 

Intervisibility Lines

On the same overlay, areas that deny visibility

between opposing forces are graphically depicted

by drawing intervisibility lines where the terrain

dictates. An intervisibility line is an area on the

battlefield beyond which opposing forces cannot

observe. Examples are ridge lines, wadi systems,

fingers or forested areas. Intervisibility lines will

become particularly important in identifying PAs

that are hidden from threat avenues of approach.

Aerial and satellite imagery, if available, are

useful to the S-2 in further analyzing the terrain.

See figure 10-22 on page 10-28.

Avenues of Approach

Using standard symbols graphically depicts the

ground and air avenues of approach on the

MCOO. During construction of these avenues of

approach, the artillery S-2 refines the higher

headquarters’ IPB products to depict regiment

and battalion sized avenues of approach that can

affect artillery movement and positioning plans.
10-28 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Figure 10-21. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay with Restricted

and Severely Restricted Terrain Marked.

Figure 10-22. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay

with Intervisibility Lines Identified.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-29 

The S-2 begins by depicting all threat mobility

corridors of platoon size and above that can affect

the artillery’s AO. The S-2 focuses his effort

down to threat platoon level because of the

danger a threat platoon poses to artillery units.

One tank passing through or near an artillery PA

can easily destroy a firing battery. If the MCOO

becomes too busy and unreadable because of too

many platoon-sized mobility corridors, then go

one level higher. Lastly, the mobility corridors

are combined into their appropriate battalion and

regiment avenues of approach. During this

process, the S-2 must depict the avenues of

approach through the artillery’s battlespace.

During COA development, the S-3 selects possible PAs away from the threat mobility corridors

and avenues of approach. If the situation dictates

that the S-3 must position some units on these

threat air or ground avenues of approach, then the

S-2 must ensure he briefs the affected battery

commanders on the threat they may face. This

provides the battery commander with critical

information he uses during his own planning. See

figure 10-23.

Key and Decisive Terrain

On the same MCOO overlay, key terrain is

marked with a “K” in a circle. Exactly what

constitutes key terrain is situationally-dependent.

During COA development, the S-3 will avoid

positioning batteries in these areas because this is

where the close in fight will likely take place. 

Position Areas

The S-2 evaluates the battlespace and templates all

possible battery-size PAs given the considerations

Figure 10-23. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay Depicting Mobility Corridors,

Avenues of Approach, Key Terrain, and Possible Position Areas.
10-30 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

identified in the preceding paragraphs. All PAs are

templated for use during current and future operations. The S-2 can then provide a product to the S-3

that can greatly assist him in choosing appropriate

battery PAs during COA development. This works

well during operations when the staff has limited

planning time. 

This process helps to avoid the S-3 conducting his

limited terrain analysis and drawing battery “goose

eggs” on the operations overlay without reference

to the elements the S-2 considers. Without a

process such as this, S-3s tend to choose PAs

based only on considerations of range and threat

avenues of approach. 

The Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay 

and Course of Action Development

The S-2’s MCOO allows the S-3 to quickly focus

on the best terrain for battery positions. The S-2

must ensure the MCOO is readily available to the

S-3 so he can begin COA development through

analyzing the MCOO. 

The process of choosing battery PAs begins with

the S-3 hanging the MCOO on the operations

map and placing the operations overlay over it.

Then, based on the maneuver FSC’s guidance,

the S-3 determines critical targets, by phase.

Based on available ammunition, the S-3 and FDO

determine the predominant gun-target planning

range under standard conditions. This information, passed through the FSC, also provides the

maneuver commander with an accurate planning

range for his direct support artillery. 

Once a correct planning range is determined, the

S-3 draws a range fan starting from the critical

target area backwards to the proposed PAs. All

PAs on the MCOO that are inside this range fan

are identified as optimal PAs for engaging the

target area. Any PAs outside of the range fan are

considered less than optimal. During this

process, the FDO refines the planning ranges for

existing conditions, in particular addressing

issues of powder temperatures, gun above or

below target, met, and average MVVs (if

known). See figure 10-24.

Once the S-3 identifies the optimal PAs for each

target area, by phase, he copies them onto the

operations overlay, and gives the MCOO back to

the S-2. If the S-3 must use some of the less-thanoptimal PAs, he does so understanding the

constraints of those PAs. The FDO looks at each

PA and identifies any technical fire delivery

issues (site-to-crest, intervening crests, traverse

limits, etc.) that must be resolved. When any of

these issues are identified, the FDO shoots dry

fire missions in the computer using data from the

PA to determine if the concerns are valid. If the

S-3 directs occupation of any of these PAs, the

battalion FDO specifically addresses these

concerns with the battery FDO. 

Situation Templating

The artillery S-2 will normally receive a SITEMP

from the supported infantry unit. This SITEMP,

however, does not address the concerns of the

artillery and must be refined to focus on fire

support issues. At a minimum, the artillery S-2

must develop two SITEMPs: the most probable

threat COA, and the most dangerous threat COA.

Threat Artillery

Threat artillery locations are graphically depicted

down to battery level, which will affect artillery.

This is performed by analyzing the artillery range

capabilities of the threat artillery battalions and

determining the approximate location of each

battalion given its doctrinal mission. Once the S-2

determines the approximate location of each

battalion, he situationally templates each battery

location given the constraints of terrain and opposing forces. Once the S-2 has templated the battalion locations, he then templates the artillery range

fans for each weapon system; e.g., 2S1, 2S-3, 2S5

or BM21.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-31 

Threat Maneuver Forces

Formations of threat maneuver forces are graphically depicted at each point where the artillery

will mass or fire special munitions missions. This

is particularly important for the artillery staff

because the FSC must understand the type of

target that best supports the maneuver

commander’s fire support guidance; e.g., group,

series or linear target. The FSC must also advise

the maneuver commander on the engagement

criteria to use against each formation, disposition,

and purpose (neutralization, suppression or

destruction). An accurate SITEMP assists in

making these critical decisions.

Threat Avenues of Approach and Objectives

The threat’s avenues of approach and objectives

are graphically depicted. The S-2 predicts the

avenues of approach the threat will use based on

information from the formations he templated for

each phase of battle. Threat objectives are

predicted from the S-2’s knowledge of threat

doctrine. This is important when continuing COA

development so the S-3 does not position batteries on avenues of approach and objectives.

Threat Chemical Strikes

The artillery NBC defense officer becomes

involved in templating the threat’s possible persistent and nonpersistent strikes, and can advise on

burst radius and downwind hazard effects. The S-3

must avoid positioning batteries in likely chemical

strike and downwind hazard areas.

Rear Area Threats

The rear area insertion sites that the threat

airborne/air assault units may infiltrate are

templated. If possible, NAIs are nominated on

these sites for artillery to watch. Since it may be

difficult to avoid these areas, covering them with

reconnaissance and surveillance (R&S) may be

the best available option. This will impact on the

execution and support of rear area operations. 

Figure 10-24. Overlay Depicting Critical Targets and Range Fans.
10-32 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Integrating the Situation Template into Course 

of Action Development and Wargaming

When the SITEMP is completed, the S-3 overlays

it on the operations map and deconflicts positioning of firing units. The S-3 ensures that PAs are

not on avenues of approach, regiment objectives or

templated chemical strikes. Because it is very

difficult to position out of range of the threat’s

artillery, the S-3 considers positioning units in

areas that will cause artillery delivery problems for

the threat; e.g., site-to-crest, intervening crest, and

traverse limit problems. This should force the

threat to execute high angle missions, which facilitates friendly target acquisition capabilities or to

reposition. As the staff conducts this process, PAs

that do not meet the above criteria are eliminated.

With the remaining PAs, the S-3 can develop

various COAs to support the commander. The staff

wargames each COA against each threat SITEMP

to determine the best COA. 

Event Templating

The event template graphically depicts the events

and timing of the upcoming battle. If artillery

attempts to fight the battle without an event

template it risks being forced to execute more

events than are possible and thus may fail to

accomplish the commander’s guidance for fire

support. The infantry regiment S-2 will normally

provide the artillery battalion with the regiment’s

event templating that focuses on the regiment/

division fight. The artillery battalion S-2 must

refine this product to focus on fire support issues.

The primary concern is the difference in the time

increments used. The regiment generally fights in

terms of tens of minutes and hours and therefore

uses timelines in these increments. The artillery

battalion’s fight is executed in terms of minutes

and seconds and, therefore, requires a timeline

expressed accordingly.

Regiment Named Areas of Interest

and Target Area of Interest

All of the infantry regiment and battalion NAIs are

copied onto the artillery battalion event template.

Artillery LNOs at the infantry battalions must

ensure they relay their maneuver battalion’s NAIs

to the artillery S-2. The artillery battalion receives

threat location information from maneuver

elements reporting on these NAIs. The artillery

battalion can then incorporate these NAIs to

trigger artillery battalion events.

The S-2 draws artillery battalion NAIs identified

while developing the SITEMP. These NAIs are

developed to attempt to confirm or deny possible

threat COAs and are executed as part of the artillery battalion’s R&S plan. An artillery battalion’s R&S plan consists of artillery battalion

NAIs that firing units, survey teams, CSSEs, etc.,

will watch during the execution of their primary

mission. The focus of these NAIs is to prevent

the artillery battalion from being surprised by

threat actions such as a rear area airborne insertion, guerilla activity or unexpected attacks along

flanks or avenues of approach.

Time Phase Lines 

The S-2 develops TPLs that clearly depict the

pace of the fire support battle through all phases

of the fight. The artillery’s success or failure is

determined in terms of minutes and seconds so

the S-2 must use TPLs in these terms. Time

increments of minutes and seconds works best;

e.g., 1:10,1:20,1:30.

There are two types of TPLs: friendly offensive

operations (blue lines) and threat offensive operations (red lines). Thus, if friendly units are

conducting a defense, the S-2 uses red TPLs to

time the threat offense. If friendly forces plan a

counterattack, the S-2 uses blue TPLs to time this.
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-33 

The S-2 determines the threat doctrinal

movement rates using input from higher

headquarter’s intelligence estimates, and from the

home station database he has built and refined.

These doctrinal rates are now further refined

based on METT-T. 

For friendly defensive operations, the first TPL is

drawn at the threat’s assembly area or where

friendly assets will first detect threat movement.

Drawing TPLs throughout the AO continues

using selected time increments. A TPL is placed

at every location where the threat’s movement

rate is significantly altered; e.g., entering and

exiting a minefield.

For friendly offensive operations, the S-2 develops TPLs for friendly attacking forces and threat

counterattack forces in the same manner

described. Friendly movement rates are obtained

from the OPORD, unit SOPs, and the infantry

battalion FSCs/artillery LNOs. 

The artillery battalion uses these TPLs to understand the timing of the battle as it is occurring. This

is particularly important when developing triggers/

DPs for unit movements, releasing reconnaissance

assets, and conducting CSS operations. The TPLs

will help identify lulls in the battle and times when

the artillery battalion can plan on not needing all

firing units available. Performed correctly, it will

become very clear when the best time is to move

batteries and/or conduct other operations. 

The S-2’s can get a good basis for analysis from

maneuver rehearsals as they cover the execution

of the battle by phase. The artillery S-2 should

talk with the maneuver S-2 and agree on the rates

of march by phase so all fire supporters are

basing triggers on the same TPLs. This requires

the artillery battalion S-2 to attend or be represented at these rehearsals. 

Radar Zones

The S-2 incorporates proposed radar zones onto

the event template. The FSC and the artillery

staff will both generate proposed events and

areas that require coverage by specific radar

zones. Based on the capability of the attached

radar or the number of zones allocated, the artillery battalion staff finalizes the number, type,

location, queuing assets, and/or time for all

approved radar zones. 

The TPLs on the event template will assist the S-2

in determining a proactive queuing schedule to

cover critical events such as friendly breaching

operations or when the threat is conducting a

particular phase of its artillery fire plan. The TPLs

will also assist in determining triggers to implement or cancel planned radar zones.

Whether or not the artillery battalion has radar

attached, radar zones should be shown on the event

template. If the artillery battalion has a radar

attached, the S-2 will complete a radar deployment

order using the zones from the event template. If the

artillery battalion does not have a radar attached, the

S-2 will nominate the zones on his event template to

the artillery regiment for coverage.

Decision Support Template

The DST relates the details of the event template

to DPs that are of significance to artillery. It does

not dictate decisions to the S-3, but rather identifies critical events and threat activities relative to

time and location that may require tactical

decisions. The DST provides a structured basis for

using experience and judgment to reduce battlefield uncertainties. The following should occur:

l Overlay the event template on the operations

graphic to depict TPLs on the battlefield. The S3 then lists the critical fire support tasks for the

battalion. These may be battalion mass missions, special munitions missions, unit movements, reconnaissance, survey operations, etc.

l Wargame each critical fire support task, in

order, with the S-2 talking timing of the battle

from his TPLs, the S-3 talking critical fire

support tasks, and the FDO talking honest

mission execution times.
10-34 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

One of the best uses of the DST for artillery is to

ensure that the artillery can execute the infantry

fire plans. To wargame the fire plans, the S-2

discusses the threat’s COA and its rate of march,

while the S-3 discusses the type of target, where

the artillery is to impact (front, center, or rear of

formation) and the number of rounds and volleys

required. The FDO then states whether or not the

artillery is laid on the target, who will fire the

mission, shift time required, time of flight, and

total time to execute the mission. It is critical that

these are honest times based on the unit’s current

personnel and equipment status, and level of

training. With this information, the target area in

time is backed off using the TPLs, and a DP

(star) is placed on the operations graphic. This

star represents the point where artillery can

achieve its greatest effects on the threat. 

The DPs established by artillery in the forward

battle area usually do not have artillery assets to

watch them. These DPs should correspond to a

trigger point of an infantry battalion or regimental

observer. The S-3 uses these DPs as he tracks the

battle to help him make critical decisions. As the

S-2 identifies threat forces at or near the DPs, the

S-3/FDO is alerted and expects a call for fire for

the target tied to the DP. This is how the S-3 anticipates the battle to ensure artillery is prepared to

fire all required missions. In addition, if the artillery LNOs at the infantry regiments and battalions

have an understanding of the mission execution

times the artillery battalion is capable of, and they

are coordinating their fire plans between headquarters, then the artillery battalion DST will merely

verify that the fire plans are executable.

Another use of the artillery DST is to determine

DPs for other critical fire support events such as

battery movements, special munitions missions,

radar queuing times, CSS operations, etc. In the

same manner as described above, the S-3 and the

staff wargame the battle determining where to

place DPs which will trigger critical events. For

example, the S-3 could establish a DP to que the

radar to observe a breaching operation when the

lead elements of the breach force report their

location at a certain point.

Once completed, each DP is graphically depicted

on the operations overlay. This will assist in

focusing the S-3 on critical events during the

battle. Time permitting, the staff may develop an

execution matrix that addresses tasks each unit

must execute. See figure 10-25. Figure 10-26 on

page 10-36 shows fire planning using the MCPP. 
Artillery Operations __________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-35 

H - 0:30 H Hour H + 0:30 H + 0:45 H + 1:00 H + 1:20

Threat 

Situation

Lead 

mechanized 

rifle battalions 

enter passes

Mechanized rifle 

battalions in 

column exit 

passes at 

obstacle

Mechanized rifle 

battalions in prebattle formation

Lead 

mechanized rifle 

battalions in 

battle formation; 

trail mechanized 

rifle battalion 

enters passes

Lead 

mechanized rifle 

battalions in 

CO’s online; trail 

mechanized rifle 

battalion exits 

passes

Mechanized 

rifle battalions in

engagement 

areas; platoons 

online

NAI/DP NAI/DP 1 DP 2 DP 3 NAI 3 DPs 4-5 NAI 3

Maneuver Battle position 

set

Reconnaissance 

complete; 

CAS on station

Tows engage Engage each 

viper and snake

A Btry Laid on AB0001 Firing AB0001 Shift/laid on AB0003 Firing AB0003 Laid on AB0004 

or AB0005

Shift to AB0003 

preparation to 

march order

B Btry Laid on AB0001 Firing AB0001 Shift/laid on AB0003 Firing AB0003 Laid on AB0004 

or AB0005

Shift to AB0003 

preparation to 

march order

C Btry Laid on AB0001

2 guns 

Copperhead 

AB0006

Firing AB0001,

2 guns 

Copperhead/

verify priority of 

fires

Shift/laid on AB0003 Firing AB0003 Laid on AB0004 

or AB0005

Shift to AB0003 

preparation to 

march order

COC Retransmission 

operational

Jump COC 

moves

Trains Jump aid 

station forward

Combat trains 

move to 

alternate 

position

Figure 10-25. Decision Support Template and Execution Matrix.
10-36 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-37 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

SECTION IV. SAMPLE ARTILLERY

FIRE PLAN

CLASSIFICATION

Copy no. _ of _copies

ISSUING HEADQUARTERS

PLACE OF ISSUE

Date/time group 

TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C

(Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation

Provide appropriate details of the general situation with a focus on 

artillery support.

2. (U) Mission

Example–Attack in Zone: 1/10 (DS) and 5/10 (R) provide close fires in 

support of the 2d Marines attack in zone not later than 100400NOV00 

to destroy the threat forces in order to reestablish the FLOT along 

PL Blue.

Example–Movement to Contact: 1/10 (DS) and 5/10 (R) provide close 

fires in support of the 2d Marines movement to contact in zone not later 

than 100400NOV00 to destroy the 49th Tank Brigade’s stay behind 

forces. On order, 2d Marines will establish crossing sites for the 

passage of 8th Marines along PL Red.

3. (U) Execution

a. (U) Commander’s Intent (artillery battalion commander)

b. (U) Concept of Artillery Support. This is a detailed statement of the 

artillery commander’s vision of artillery support. It details what the 

artillery is going to do to support maneuver elements and meet the maneuver 

commander’s intent.
10-38 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

c. (U) Organization for Combat. Details the organization and tactical 

missions by phase (include organic and reinforcing artillery and anticipated 

O/O missions).

d. (U) Tasks to Subordinate Units. Include tasks by unit by phase and 

include EFAT tasked to specific batteries.

e. (U) Coordinating Instructions. Includes instructions and details for 

coordination for two or more subordinate elements. These instructions may 

be included as enclosures to the order. If enclosures are used, then include 

only those items of generic interest. The following is a list of coordinating 

instructions that should be addressed:

l Target acquisition.

l Survey/met.

l Automated fire control (AFATDS/IFSAS/ BCS).

l High-payoff target list.

l Attack guidance matrix.

l NBC defense.

l Liaison requirements.

l PIRs.

l Ammunition restrictions.

l FSCMs.

l Rehearsals.

4. (U) Administration and Logistics

Refer to Annex D (Logistics), Annex P (Combat Service Support), and/

or administrative/logistic orders. Identify ammunition availability, 

allocations, and ammunition management measures.
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-39 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

5. (U) Command and Signal

Identify command relationships as required, signal information, and 

command post information; e.g., location of artillery headquarters 

afloat and initial positions ashore.

a. (U) Command Relationships. As required.

b. (U) Signal

c. (U) Command Posts

ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

/s/ 

ENCLOSURES:

1 Artillery Target List

2 Artillery Synchronization Matrix

3 Artillery Target Overlay

4 Schedule of Fire

5 Observation/Target Acquisition Plan

6 Survey/Met Plan
10-40 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 1 (Artillery Target List) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX

C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

1st Mar, 1st MARDIV Target List WorksheetOPORD _________ For use of this form see FM 6-20-40; Proponent agency is TRADOC070620ZFEB00 SHEET____ of ____ Line

No

Target

No

a

Description

b

Location

c

Altitude

d

Attitude

e

Size Source/

Accuracy

h

Remarks

i

Length

f

Width

g

1 AC0001

120 mm

Mortar Plt 499377

2 AC0002 Rifle Company 516325 DPICM3 AC0003 Rifle Platoon 5542964 AC0004 OP 570281

VT 50%,

WP 50%

5 AC0005 MG Position 5662606 AC0006

Trail

Intersection 572247 CP 11

7 AC0007 Comm Site 489254

Radius

400

8 AC0008

Road

Intersection 493250 2400 400

9 AC0009 AOA 512245

10 AC0010

Trail

Intersection 525231 CP 28

DATUM: WGS-84
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-41 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 2 (Artillery Synchronization Matrix) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19

(Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

Phase I Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

Phases LD to Obj Penny Obj Nickel Obj Dime Obj Quarter

Threat Cntr-Btry threat-Med Cntr-Btry threat-Med Cntr-Btry threat-High

MV

R

1/7 (SE) Rte April to clear Obj 

Sixpence

Mvmt to Contact along Rte 

April to PL Quiver

Atk to seize Obj Ring Defend Obj Ring

2/7 (ME) Mvmt to Contact Rte 

Julie to clear Obj Penny

Along Rte Julie, Atk to seize 

Obj Nickel

1st LAR Fwd Pass. of lines. 

Helo Co to SBF 1 Become 

Regt reserve

FSCMs CFL PL Quiver % PL Archer PL Diamond

FSCL PL Ruby 

Event Trigger Event Trigger Event Trigger Event Trigger

Btry

1

Move 1. PA 9 AoF 1. N/A

1600 2. %

2. PA 32

AoF 100

2. R3P vic CP 2. EOM

56 AD2003

1. PA 33 AoF 1. R3P

complete

Essential

Task

1. Mass Bn 1. 1/7 at

(AID): PL

Btry 2 - AD Orange

2001

1. Fire Smoke 1. 2/7

- AD 2003 clears

Obj

Dime

1. Mass Bn 1. En.

(A3D): Btry Crosses

2 - AD 2007 PL

Arrow

Btry

K

Move 1. PA 10 1. N/A

AoF 1600

3. PA 28 AoF 3. EOM

1500 AD0014

Essential

Task

1. Mass Bn 1. 1/7 at

(AID): PL

Btry 3 - AD Orange

2002

1. Fire CPHD 1. A/1/7

AD0003,2 acquires

Rds 2. 1/7

2. Fire Smk crosses

20 min - PL

AD0014 Quiver

1. Mass Bn 1. En. 

(A3D): Btry crosses

2 - AD 2007 PL

Arrow

COC Move to PA 32 when K

FIRECAP

Survey Pri: L, K Pri to A/1/7/ OP, Vic

435427, K, L

Pri: K, L

Radar N/A

Field Trains/LOC AA Red/PA 1 Move to PA 37 when Bn

clear PL Bow

Ammo/POL R3): Btry 1

Class I, V, IX vic CP 56

R3P: Btry K

Class I, V, IX vic CP 56

BAS Colocated with Field

Trains/LOC
10-42 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 3 (Artillery Target Overlay) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire

Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE: Map 

The overlay contains artillery targets, FSCMs, and unit boundaries.
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-43 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 4 (Schedule of Fire) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to

ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)
10-44 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target Acquisition) to TAB B (Artillery Fire

Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation

Order (Number) (U)

(U) REFERENCE: Map

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation

This paragraph should include the friendly situation, supported units, 

and other target acquisition assets in sector. Include specific threat and 

friendly assessments that form a basis for threat assessments required 

on the radar deployment order.

2. (U) Mission

This paragraph should be a clear, concise statement of the target 

acquisition mission.

3. (U) Execution

This paragraph contains the subparagraphs described below.

a. (U) Concept of Operation. This subparagraph gives the commander’s 

concept for target acquisition. This should include identification of designated 

cueing agents and general cueing guidance. This guidance may include 

general instructions for offensive and defensive phases of the operation. 

Specific cueing guidance is listed in the coordination subparagraph.

b. (U) Processing. This subparagraph is used to denote target processing 

flow. This targeting information flow describes the relationship between the 

unit that acquires the target and the headquarters controlling the radar. This 

subparagraph does not represent the actual communications nets used but 

shows the destination flow of targeting information. This subparagraph 

should list all field artillery target acquisition assets and headquarters 

controlling them. The following are examples of the types of information 

that may be included in the processing subparagraph—

(1) (U) AN/TPQ-46A section reports targets to the supported artillery 

battalion COC.

(2) (U) AN/TPQ-37 section reports targets to the division or MEF 

targeting cell.
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-45 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

(3) (U) Aerial fire support observer reports targets to the controlling 

headquarters COC.

(4) (U) DS battalions report targeting data to the regiment COC.

(5) (U) Any violations of CFZ or CFFZs will be sent directly from the 

radar to the associated artillery battalion.

c. (U) Visual Observation. This subparagraph includes ground and air 

observation. Ground observation is covered in Enclosure 1 to the target 

acquisition tab, which is the consolidated visibility diagram. Air observation 

should include UAV assets attached or in support of the operation.

d. (U) Radar. This subparagraph deals with the missions and C2 relationships 

assigned to the fire finder radars. Radars may be attached to artillery battalion 

headquarters or higher artillery headquarters. The attached radar assumes the 

mission of the supported unit; e.g., DS or GS.

(1) (U) An example mission for an AN/TPQ-46A Team might be 

as follows:

(U) AN/TPQ-46A Team 1, HQ Btry 10th Mar; Mission: 

Attached to 1st Bn 10th Mar. (DS). (See radar deployment order, 

Exhibit 3.)

a. (U) Coordination. This subparagraph covers information that is not 

addressed in the unit SOP. As a minimum, it should contain the following:

(1) (U) The requirement for the supported DS battalion to report its 

radar locations and sectors of search to the regiment TPC.

(2) (U) Cueing guidance assigned.

(3) (U) Common sensor boundary. Fire finder radars sharing or having 

overlapping search sectors need to be identified. Consideration must then 

be given to establishing a CSB. A CSB is indicated by a series of grid 

coordinates to define its location.

(4) (U) Coordination for communications nets and relays, if required.

(5) (U) Additional coordination for met, survey and security, if required.

4. (U) Service Support. This paragraph lists additional service support 

requirements as required. It may refer to the service support annex.
10-46 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

5. (U) Command and Signal. This paragraph lists required information as 

necessary. It may refer to the fire support appendix.

EXHIBITS:

1. Consolidated Visibility Diagram

2. Consolidated Capabilities Overlay

3. Radar Deployment Order
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-47 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

EXHIBIT 1 (Visibility Diagram) to ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target

Acquisition) To Tab B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to

ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)

Information Included: Map Radar Grid

Series Primary Az

Created by Left Az

Unit Right Az

DTG Alt Az

Weather Left Limit

Right Limit

Fire Finder Position Analysis System (FFPAS) located with the radar officer will

produce a visibility diagram and is recommended.
10-48 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

EXHIBIT 2 (Capabilities Overlay) to ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target

Acquisition) To Tab B (Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire

Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order (Number) (U)
Artillery Operations___________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-49 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

EXHIBIT 3 (Radar Deployment Order) to ENCLOSURE 5 (Observation/Target Acquisition) To Tab B

(Artillery Fire Plan) to APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order

(Number) (U)

RADAR DEPLOYMENT ORDER

For use of this form, see FM 6-121. The proponent agency is TRADOC.

SECTION MISSION

MISSION PRIMARY ALTERNATE

SEARCH SECTOR

Left Edge Right Edge Min Range Max Range

Primary Azimuth Mils Mils Meters Meters

Alternate Azimuth Mils Mils Meters Meters

EW THREAT ASSESMENT

EW Threat (Yes or No) Affecting Friendly Assets (Yes or No) Type of Threat (Air or Ground)

Note: Use the Fire Finder survivability flowchart in FM 6-121 to determine emission limits.

CUEING AGENTS (CALL SIGN AND DESIGNATION) IN PRIORITY

REPORTING CHANNELS

ZONE DATA

Type and 

Number

Description 

and/or

Command 

Priority Grid Coordinates of Zone Corner Points

DA Form 5957-R, Sep 1990
10-50 _________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENCLOSURE 6 (Survey/Met Plan) to TAB B (Artillery Fire Plan) to

APPENDIX 19 (Fire Support) to ANNEX C (Operations) to Operation Order

(Number) (U)

This enclosure provides information on survey and meteorology operations.

Requirements and methods of dissemination are addressed. Support

requirements to other units/agencies; e.g., radar beacon teams, are identified.

(U) REFERENCE:

(U) TIME ZONE:

1. (U) Situation. This paragraph consists of the units who will have an affect on 

the survey plan.

l Threat. Intelligence and information on the threat that may affect survey 

operations (routes, weapons, etc.)

l Friendly. The friendly (higher, lower, and adjacent units) situation as it 

affects survey and met operations.

l Attachments and detachments. Units who can provide support to survey 

operations (security, maintenance, other survey teams).

2. (U) Mission. This is a clear, concise statement of the task to be performed by 

the survey and met section. It should answer who, what, where, when, why.

3. (U) Execution. This paragraph consists of several subparagraphs that answer 

the how.

l Concept of operations. This subparagraph describes the survey and 

meteorological methods to be used.

l Specific instruction to each party. These subparagraphs contain specific 

instructions each team requires to accomplish its portion of the mission.

This information includes survey control to be used by the teams, general 

locations (six-digit grids) for required control, frequency and location of met 

reports, and information that deviates from SOPs. These instruction should 

be in concert with the EFATs. 

l Coordinating instructions. Information required by two or more parties.
Artillery Operations _________________________________________________________________________________________ 10-51 

Page number

CLASSIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

4. (U) Administration and Logistics. This paragraph contains the necessary 

information to ensure CSS is adequate for the mission. Information on 

reporting, classes of supply, handling of prisoners, and location of the aid station

will be addressed.

5. (U) Command and Signal. Addresses the location of the survey officer/chief, 

frequencies, call signs, casualty evacuation procedures, and communications 

between survey/met teams. 
CHAPTER 11

SPECIAL OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENTS

Terrain, weather, the nature of an operation or a combination can create a need for special techniques,

tactics, training, and equipment. Special operational environments are cold weather, mountain, desert,

jungle, riverine, river crossing, expeditionary, helicopterborne, urban, artillery raid, and fire base.

Cold Weather

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Because unit density 

is usually low, 

attachment of 

artillery may be 

required.

Movement of wheeled 

vehicles restricted and slow. 

Artillery is nearly road bound.

Chains required for prime 

movers. Consider using 

wreckers.

Heavy vehicles move with 

difficulty in deep snow or 

muskeg.

A large battlefield requires 

movement. Navigation is 

difficult.

Air movement affected by ice/ 

fog. Movement by helicopter 

makes large signature. 

CSS to artillery positions by 

helicopter may be difficult.

Positions selected for tactical 

utility, protection from the 

elements, and ease of CSS. 

Firing positions may be on 

or near roads, in farm yards, 

etc. Positions will often 

have limited space. Old 

positions can be used as 

supplementary positions or 

for ammunition storage.

Two methods of snow 

clearing positions are 

racetrack and driveway 

methods.

Positions require increased 

time for preparation. 

Dunnage may be required.

Ahkios (man-portable sleds) 

can move equipment and 

ammunition in position.

Ammunition effects are reduced 

by snow, increased by ice. 

HE/Q and ICM ineffective in 

deep snow. HE/Q can start 

avalanches. MTSQ fuzes are 

effective. Chemical agents are 

adversely affected. WP particles may become buried in 

snow and cause hazard to 

friendly troops.

Cold affects weapons. Rates of 

fire are reduced until weapons 

have warmed. Ammunition 

preparation is slow. Range 

correction factor of ± 100m per 

1,000m is uncommon.

Survey is difficult. Survey 

control points and markers 

become obscured. Survey 

parties need equipment for 

over-the-snow travel.

Radar operations are 

hampered by extreme cold.

Firing platform stability is a 

problem in deep snow.

Ensure positions are away from 

possible avalanche-prone 

areas.

FASCAM may settle in deep 

snow and reduce effectiveness.

Projectile plugs should be left 

in place or fuzes immediately 

mated with projectiles to 

prevent condensation, ice or 

snow in the fuze well.

Hardening of positions is 

difficult. Construction of 

barriers, parapets, etc., on 

frozen ground may require 

explosives.

Engineers may be attached

to artillery for snow clearing, 

hardening of positions, and 

fortifications.

Track plans must be 

strictly enforced to prevent 

compromise of position by 

tracks in snow.

DS and attached artillery may 

be located adjacent to or 

within perimeter of infantry.

Concentrations of shelters 

make unit vulnerable to 

attack.

Camouflage discipline must 

be strictly enforced.

Communications primarily 

by radio. Wire use restricted 

to existing trails and roads. 

Wire may be laid by aircraft. Wire must be kept in 

warm place until laid.

Due to decreased mobility, 

communications security 

and electronics security 

have added importance.

Artillery commander must 

ensure supported unit 

aware of limitations of 

artillery in cold.
11-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Mountain

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Terrain often requires 

multiple maneuver 

columns; attached 

artillery may be 

required.

Movement of vehicles slow 

and restricted to roads and 

improved trails, which are 

usually scarce. Winding 

roads and steep slopes 

create difficulty for towed 

weapons.

Self-propelled artillery 

traction difficult when road is 

rocky or icy. Can be 

overcome by grousers 

(cleats) on the tracks.

Potential for bottlenecks. 

Artillery needs route 

precedence.

Helicopter movement may be 

restricted by altitude limitations.

Positions will usually be 

scarce and access limited. 

Artillery must be prepared to 

fire from roads.

High altitude lowers load 

capacity of vehicles.

High angle fire often required 

because of masks of positions 

and for defilade fire.

Observed fires and frequent 

corrections for nonstandard 

conditions are required. 

Consider check rounds. 

Massed fires are less effective 

because of enemy dispersion. 

However, chokepoints and 

passes are ideal targets.

Counterfire is particularly 

effective due to high angle fire. 

Positions can be predicted 

because of few available 

positions.

Rocky ground enhances 

lethality of HE; airbursts 

effective on reverse slopes; 

ICM, smoke, and illumination 

fires difficult to adjust and 

maintain due to winds.

All-around security is critical 

because of terrain.

Decentralized in the attack; 

centralized in the defense.

Radio communications often

degraded; use of radio 

relays required.

Antennae must be carefully 

sited and masked.

Wire laying restricted to 

roads. Cross-country wire 

difficult to lay and maintain.

Desert

Wide dispersion of 

forces may require 

attachment of 

artillery.

Desert battles 

tend to be 

centralized.

Wheeled vehicle movement 

difficult with heavy loads. 

Roads are normally poor.

Displacements will usually be 

frequent because of fluidity of 

battlefield. Units should carry 

mission-essential loads.

Movements should occur 

during periods of reduced 

visibility when possible. Day 

movement causes dust 

signature.

Helicopter operations difficult 

due to dust.

RSOP and survey must 

be continuous. Often, air 

reconnaissance is used.

Terrain gun positioning is 

widely used to take 

advantage of terrain.

Consider potential changes in 

weather when selecting 

positions.

Navigation difficult.

Use caution in operating in 

wadis, particularly if 

rainstorms are likely.

HE/Q and delay, ICM, and 

FASCAM smothered by deep 

sands. Airbursts, smoke, 

illumination, and Copperhead 

are very effective.

Long-range fires and 

obscuration and screening

fires can be expected.

Rapid changes in weather 

require frequent changes in 

corrections for nonstandard 

conditions.

Radars highly effective.

Most targets will be hardened.

Survey control points are few 

and far between. Astronomic 

observation and resection may 

be required.

Soft sand causes problems in 

firing of weapons.

Plan for increased consumption 

rate of ammunition.

Security takes on added 

importance.

Artillery vulnerability is 

increased by firing signature 

and openness of terrain.

Positions must be 

well-dispersed, hardened, 

and camouflaged.

Deception should be 

practiced, but is difficult.

Radio communications 

generally excellent, but 

vulnerable to EW and 

damage by sand, heat, etc.

Wire is easy to install in 

most areas.

For short ranges, visual and 

sound signals may be used.

Some areas may have dead 

spots.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 11-3 

Jungle

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Communications 

may necessitate 

decentralized control.

Supported units 

often conduct 

decentralized or 

independent 

operations.

Limited trafficability for 

wheeled and tracked vehicles 

on few existing roads. Loads 

must be kept light.

Air movement essential.

Mutually-supporting positions 

should be selected when 

possible.

Positions are usually scarce 

and may be inaccessible by 

road. Thus, air resupply will 

be required.

Positions may have to be 

cleared.

Positions are normally 

compact for control and 

security.

Positions for radars usually 

limited.

Air reconnaissance and aerial 

photographs useful.

Positions are often hampered 

by soft terrain. Engineer 

support or dunnage may be 

required.

Distance between march 

elements are reduced and 

other security measures 

intensified because of 

limited visibility and natural 

obstacles. Flank security is a 

continuing requirement. 

Thorough RSOP essential.

Firing platforms may be 

required for stability in swampy 

areas.

6400-mil firing capability may be 

required.

Canopy of jungle affects 

ammunition effectiveness and 

functioning. HE delay needed to 

penetrate canopy.

Radars have reduced range 

and accuracy.

Danger close may be frequent.

High angle fires are common.

Survey control slow and must 

be established when feasible.

Humidity may degrade range.

Ammunition must be protected 

from moisture.

Unobserved or predicted fires 

are often used. Adjustment by 

sound and the use of creeping 

fires are common.

HE/Q can be used in low tree 

canopy or grassland, often 

producing a splintering effect.

All around security and 

hardened positions must be 

established.

Positions in thick vegetation 

areas increase vulnerability to 

ground attack.

Integrated security plans are 

established.

Radio communications are 

restricted by line of sight, 

dense vegetation, 

and adverse weather 

conditions. Range of radios 

is usually reduced by as 

much as 40 percent.

Antennae siting are critical. 

Field expedient and 

directional antennae are 

used. Antennae may have 

to be elevated to achieve 

line of sight.

Wire laying restricted to 

roads. Wire can be laid by 

helicopter.

Riverine

Widely dispersed 

force may require 

attached artillery.

Quantity and caliber 

of artillery may be 

limited by lack of 

positions and water 

transport assets.

Movement primarily by 

landing craft and helicopter.

Artillery may have to be 

positioned in hostile area 

before attack begins.

Tidal conditions and water 

level may affect movement.

Buoy markers should be 

placed on howitzers and 

prime movers to help 

recovery in event of sinking.

Naval radar aboard escort 

watercraft can be used for 

position location.

Batteries must be prepared for 

direct fire for self-defense.

Fires without observation may 

be inaccurate because of lack 

of survey control and valid met 

data.

If afloat, FDCs are generally 

semi-permanent on separate 

landing craft.

Fires can be delivered from the 

LCM-8 or barges while 

anchored to the bank.

Additional forces for the 

security of prepositioned 

artillery.

Position areas may be small 

and in insecure areas. Cover 

and concealment may be 

limited.

Naval element gunboats and 

assault support patrol boats 

provide boat security.

CAS, close-in fire support, 

and supporting artillery are 

requested for route security 

as required.
11-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Riverine (Continued)

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Position locations for 

barge- and boat-mounted 

artillery should have—

l Steep banks below 

surface.

l Wide streams to front and 

rear to reduce danger from 

ground attack.

l Limited avenues of 

approach over land.

l Areas that minimize 

anchorage problems.

River Crossing

Artillery is organized 

for combat 

consistent with type 

of crossing to be 

conducted (hasty or 

deliberate) and 

intended mission 

after crossing. 

When practical, 

centralized control is 

desired.

In the defense, 

artillery may be 

attached to security 

forces deployed 

across river.

Most artillery will cross the 

river when continuous fire 

support can be delivered from 

the far bank.

DS artillery displaces when 

first phase objectives are 

seized and positions are 

available for artillery.

Some artillery may be airlifted 

to reduce congestion at the 

crossing site.

In the assault, final positions 

are moved into at the last 

possible moment under 

cover of darkness. Positions 

should be well forward 

and in depth to range 

beyond the bridgehead line. 

Positioning should facilitate 

rapid crossing. RSOP is 

accomplished by map. There 

is little flexibility in selecting 

initial positions.

GS and GS-R units may 

provide close supporting fires 

as DS and reinforcing move.

Before, during, and 

after crossing, artillery may 

deliver illumination, smoke, and 

deception fires. Fires can be 

used to screen noise of 

crossing.

In the defense, fires may be 

planned on probable crossing 

sites, fires to canalize the 

enemy and stall his attack 

astride the river, and to support 

a counterattack. Fires are 

delivered in depth.

When supporting force 

crosses river, local security 

becomes critical.

May be complicated when 

elements are on both sides 

of the river.

Expeditionary Operations

Because artillery

is dispersed 

among available 

naval shipping, 

decentralization is 

required. As artillery 

lands, centralization 

is re-established as 

dictated by the 

situation.

Artillery should land and 

begin operations as soon as 

conditions permit. Artillery 

RSOP parties are usually 

brought ashore in the early 

stages of the landing, with 

artillery units landed as 

on-call serials.

Initial position areas 

are planned from map 

reconnaissance, and if 

possible by air. RSOP 

parties will be larger in the 

initial phase of the operation 

than in other operations.

Survey control must be 

established ashore.

Tactical and technical fire 

direction must be decentralized 

initially to allow for flexibility.

Be prepared for inter-service 

call for fire.

Artillery may be positioned on 

offshore islands to support 

assault.

Survey should be pushed 

ashore early.

Artillery vulnerable while on 

the beach. Units must move 

across the beach as rapidly 

as possible.

Senior artillery commander 

is usually an embarkation 

unit commander.

Communications while 

afloat and during ship-toshore depend on ship 

communications plans. 

Radio is usually the primary 

means. Most artillery traffic 

will be on LF/artillery 

command/FD and artillery 

command nets.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 11-5 

Expeditionary Operations (Continued)

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Beach trafficability may be a 

problem. Matting and partially 

deflated tires may be used. 

Vehicles must be prepared for 

fording.

Artillery may be landed by 

landing craft or helicopter.

Landing plan must permit 

artillery to land in formation 

with adequate personnel/

equipment to support the fire 

support plan and scheme of 

maneuver.

Helicopterborne

Decentralized 

operations may be 

required to support 

small task forces.

Mutual support between 

artillery units is desirable.

6400-mil firing capability.

Reconnaissance may be 

limited to air, with the battery 

commanders conducting 

reconnaissance during the 

assault with elements of the 

supported force.

Battery formations often 

dictated by the terrain of the 

LZ. Ammunition should be 

placed close to howitzers on 

occupation.

Positions should have area 

for LZ.

Reconnaissance and HST 

teams may be available for 

terminal guidance of aircraft.

Position loads to reduce fly 

over of battery consistent with 

wind direction.

Individual piece corrections may 

be required.

All-around security required.

Make use of defilade and 

natural obstacles.

Close liaison between 

artillery and helicopter units 

required.

Primary means of 

communications is radio.

Wire restricted to 

installations within LZ 

and rear areas.

Urban

Centralized control 

during initial phases; 

decentralized control 

during later phases 

to support semiindependent action of 

small units.

Movement during night or 

periods of reduced visibility 

when possible.

Few displacements, often by 

platoon or section.

Select positions that minimize 

masking, provide several 

routes of escape, and afford 

as much cover and concealment as possible. Use of 

existing structures (garages, 

office buildings, highway 

overpasses) is recommended.

RSOP parties should be 

well armed, as they may 

have to clear areas to be 

occupied. Extensive route 

reconnaissance is required.

Both direct and indirect fires are 

delivered for supported units.

Destruction of fortifications may 

require assault fire techniques.

High angle fire may be required.

Need for accurate met and 

survey increases, as most 

targets are point targets.

Lasers and precision guided 

munitions permit destruction of 

targets with minimum rubble of 

adjacent buildings. But 

tall buildings may hamper 

laser use.

Batteries must be prepared for 

hasty survey techniques.

Fortification of position. Radio communications 

impaired by buildings.

Wire can usually be run 

overhead.

Make use of civilian 

communications.

More use of messengers 

and prearranged audio and 

visual signals.
11-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Urban (Continued)

ORGANIZATION 

FOR COMBAT MOVEMENT/POSITIONING DELIVERY OF FIRE SECURITY C3

Special techniques for 

emplacing howitzers, such as 

spades against a curb when 

the ground is not suitable for 

emplacement, may be 

required. Explosives may 

be required to soften 

emplacement of howitzers.

Target acquisition devices 

somewhat degraded. 

Emplace radars to cover likely 

areas of enemy indirect fire 

weapon employment. Avoid 

placing radars in the midst of 

an urban area because of 

masking.

ICM and VT effects reduced by 

structures, although they are 

effective against personnel 

on rooftops and top floors. 

HE/CP used for penetration 

effects. Illumination, chemical 

incendiary ammunition, and 

smoke are effective.

Ammunition expenditures will 

be heavy.

Magnetic instruments are 

impaired.

Artillery Raid

Extremely 

decentralized.

Battery moves rapidly into 

position by air or ground 

means. The position may be 

across the FEBA.

Only bare necessities are 

taken.

The number of howitzers 

taken forward depends on the 

target analysis, effects 

required, and aircraft 

availability (if airlifted).

Raid is extremely short; used to 

deliver fire on a HVT.

A mixture of HE, WP, and ICM 

provides excellent effects for a 

raid. FASCAM and DPICM are 

also useful.

Firing data can be precomputed.

Fire the highest charge 

possible to increase standoff 

range.

Security elements 

accompany raid. Attack 

helicopters may provide 

cover.

Detailed planning, surprise, 

and speed are key factors in 

execution. 

Effective SOP is essential.

Fire Base

Generally 

centralized.

Positions should be in an 

open field, possibly on a 

hilltop, so unit can clear kill 

zones, have interlocking fields 

of fire, and maximize grazing 

fire.

Howitzers should be no 

more than 50m apart and 

preferably in star formation

for 6400-mil capability and 

defense of position.

The firing position should 

allow for a pickup and/or 

LZ.

High angle fires may be 

required.

Indirect fire data should be 

determined to cover dead space 

and avenues of approach to the 

fire base and to target likely 

enemy mortar positions and/or 

assembly areas around the fire 

base.

XO's minimum quadrant 

elevation should be determined 

for eight sectors of fire.

Units may have to provide their 

own perimeter illumination. If 

using a star formation, the 

center howitzer can perform this 

mission while other howitzers 

are engaging in direct fire.

Infantry support may be 

available for defense of the fire 

base.

Patrols should extend to the 

range of enemy mortars.

Cover is a primary concern.

A strong defensive perimeter 

is essential.

A small-arms cache should be 

placed in the center of the 

battery in case the position is 

overrun.

Engineer support should be 

obtained to harden individual 

howitzer firing positions. As a 

minimum, each position 

should have—

l Covered ammunition 

racks.

l A personnel bunker.

l Direct fire sector with 

a fighting trench.

l Two covered ready racks.

Fire bases should be 

mutually supporting.

If possible, firing batteries 

should target dead space 

around positions with "killer 

junior." This is in addition to 

grenade launcher/ automatic 

grenade launcher based 

indirect fire that can be 

delivered by cannon and 

noncannon batteries.

Use wire extensively; bury 

at least 12 inches.
APPENDIX A. ADVANCED FIELD ARTILLERY

TACTICAL DATA SYSTEM

Development

AFATDS allows the MCFSS stations to transition

to a single software system that will eventually

replace existing systems.

AFATDS is one of five systems that compose the

Army Tactical Command and Control System

(ATCCS). AFATDS, the only jointly developed

system, provides fire support planning and execution software.

With further software development, currently

fielded devices will be compatible with AFATDS

via variable message format protocol. When

AFATDS fielding is complete, all IFSAS and tactical fire devices will be replaced. All artillery

technical fire direction for cannon and rocket

systems will be computed by AFATDS.

AFATDS software is developed as a fire support

tool. The computer is provided with detailed

guidance derived from the staff planning process

and the D3A targeting methodology. This

guidance provides AFATDS with “rules” to use

during processing of fire support missions. 

Through this process, the commander and staff

determine the appropriate responses during the

period of staff planning. These decisions are

executed rapidly by AFATDS during intense activity that characterizes modern maneuver warfighting. Failure to provide adequate preplanned

guidance will prevent the system from executing

according to commander’s intent.

Guidance Management

Incoming fire missions and fire plan targets are

validated by guidance entered at each fire support

and fire direction echelon. For rapid and efficient

attack of targets and fire plan scheduling, this

guidance data must be managed.

The following guidance windows must be

maintained to manage the fire support system: 

l Target selection standards.

l HVT list.

l Target management matrix.

l Mission prioritization.

l System tasks.

l Fire support attack parameters.

l Munitions restrictions.

The responsibility for creating and disseminating

guidance is an intrinsic element of command and

thus resides with the force commander.

Before establishing the landing force ashore, the

MAGTF FFC receives guidance from the amphibious force commander. This guidance is transmitted to the supporting arms coordination center,

subordinate FSCCs, and fire support assets

controlled by the MAGTF FFCC.

After establishing the landing force ashore, the

GCE FSCC modifies guidance in accordance with

the commander, landing force and GCE

commander’s intent, orders, and verbal direction.

This guidance is transmitted to the SACC (afloat)

and subordinate FSCCs, FDCs, and fire support

assets. Changes to guidance should not be disseminated between echelons as each echelon optimizes
A-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

its guidance based on its mission and role.

AFATDS performs functions based on its established echelon (regiment or battalion) and role

(FSCC, FDC or other).

Fire Mission Processing

Fire mission processing is a key function of the fire

support system. AFATDS uses commander’s

guidance, task organization, and received mission

information to select the appropriate fire support

asset, and to route the fire mission to the appropriate operational facility (OPFAC). Processing

through multiple OPFACs is usually required to

move the mission from the requester to the shooter.

Processing and route may be transparent to some of

the OPFACs depending on intervention criteria.

Intervention Criteria

AFATDS can use database information to

automatically process, coordinate, and possibly

deny fire missions without operator intervention.

Intervention points allow operators to stop

automatic processing under given conditions to

review and alter. Intervention criteria are

comprised of a set of rules that govern the interruption of the automatic fire mission process. An

unlimited number of intervention rules can be

established, however, development and use of

intervention points can significantly decrease

responsiveness. Each rule is built around the

following categories of mission information:

l Battle area.

l Attack option.

l Mission precedence.

l Target type.

l Filters.

l Analysis result.

These six criteria may be set in any combination to create a single rule. Multiple rules may

be constructed.

Default Setup

When the database is initially constructed, a single

default rule is incorporated that causes all fire

missions to be subject to intervention. Deleting

this rule causes all fire missions to process

automatically. Missions assigned for attack by

Army Tactical Missile Systems are automatically

displayed for operator intervention without regard

to operator-established intervention criteria.

Tracking Fire Missions

When a fire mission is processed without any

intervention, each OPFAC can maintain situational

awareness of active missions as described below.

Active fire missions can be displayed on an overlay,

causing any received fire mission— regardless of

intervention criteria—to appear on the screen as a

bold target symbol. The operator can ascertain

information about the target by clicking the symbol

that appears.

All fire missions received are placed in the active

target list until the missions end by receipt of a

mission-fired report. The operator can display

mission information at any time for any target.

Each method allows the operator to display the

target status window that shows all fire mission

messages received or transmitted for the mission in

question. The status of the mission can also be

requested or traced to obtain the status of the

mission at every station involved.

Fire requests and fire orders may be printed

when they are received and/or transmitted. This

is accomplished by making entries in the configure printing setup. This function is accessed by
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ A-3 

selecting alerts and messages, messages, and

configure printing setup.

Operational Facility Intervention

The following centers are recommended for employment of intervention criteria.

Battalion Fire Support Coordination Center

l Denied missions.

l Air and NSFS missions if these assets are available to the battalion FSCC.

Regiment Fire Support Coordination Center

l Denied missions.

l Any other rules dictated by the FSC.

l Air and naval surface fire support (NSFS) missions if these assets are available to the regiment FSCC.

Division Fire Support Coordination Center

l Denied missions.

l All fire missions in the rear operations area.

l All fire missions in the deep operations area.

l All air missions.

Battalion Fire Direction Center

All fire missions.

Regiment Fire Direction Center

All fire missions.

Attack Analysis

During attack analysis, AFATDS considers

various parameters of a given fire mission; e.g.,

mission type, observer request or target location;

the guidance that is in effect; the allocated attack

units available; FSCMs; and attack option ranking

criteria to develop attack options to achieve defeat

criteria of the target. The three levels of attack

analysis in AFATDS are fire support system, unit,

and detailed.

Fire Support System

System attack analysis allows an FSCC to perform

attack analysis only to the level of detail needed to

select a fire support system and transmit the

mission to the appropriate agency for further

processing. When performing fire support system

attack analysis, no detailed information (locations

of firing units, munitions status, etc.) is required.

To use fire support system attack analysis

correctly, the fire support attack parameters

window must be filled out. Generally, this level of

attack analysis will be used only at the higher level

FSCCs, such as the FFCC.

Unit

Unit attack analysis allows an OPFAC to conduct

more detailed attack analysis using “rollup” unit

information. This level of attack analysis would

normally be used in higher level artillery FDCs/

field artillery CPs. Fire units directly supporting

or commanded by the OPFAC performing the

analysis are analyzed using unit data (location,

munitions capabilities, operational status, etc.) to

determine if they can attack the target. Firing

units with an intermediate FDC between them

and the OPFAC are not analyzed in detail. They

are analyzed using the “rollup” data contained in

the unit subordinate information window. For

unit attack analysis to be used correctly, the

status for subordinate units must have been transmitted to the OPFAC.
A-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Detailed

Detailed attack analysis allows an OPFAC to

determine and evaluate all individual fire units

(as well as collective groupings of fire units for

massing) against a given target. It uses all unit

data (munitions, operational status, location, etc.)

to determine a solution for the target. This

method is available for all OPFACs, but is generally used at the lower echelon; e.g., regiment and

below, FDCs, and FSCCs.

Fire Mission Routing

Fire missions are routed through OPFACs to

select the optimum fire support asset, provide a

conduit for coordination, and increase situational

awareness. Routing of the mission depends on the

source; however, the central hub of fire support is

the FSCC.

Options

AFATDS classifies a selected fire support asset as

a capable engagement option into four categories:

l Green—the asset is a capable option and no

coordination is required.

l Yellow—the asset is a capable option but coordination is required.

l Red—attack options exist but there are restrictions that prevent that asset from being capable

of firing the mission.

l Black—no attack options exist for that FS system; i.e., the unit does not have any firing units

in support.

By opening the attack options window from the

menu bar of the mission window, the restrictions

of a red option are shown. A series of icons

(ammunition, range, achievable effects, etc.) will

show if each passed or failed.

Battalion Fire Support Coordination Center

Fire missions requested by an artillery or mortar

observer are transmitted to the battalion FSCC.

The observer unit information must indicate to the

battalion FSCC that the observer reports to the

command and supported unit (command unit

identification [ID] and supported unit ID in the

general unit information window for the observer).

The battalion FSCC normally possesses only

organic mortars to engage the target. Regardless,

the battalion FSCC computer will consider only

those fire support assets that are commanded by or

support the battalion FSCC. If the mission is

recommended for denial or processing to an air or

NSFS asset, the mission appears in the intervention window and remains there until the operator

takes action. If the battalion’s organic mortars

cannot adequately service the target, then artillery,

air, and NSFS may be selected. (Selection occurs

when air and NSFS are held at a higher FSCC.)

These missions are transmitted to the regiment

FSCC because the battalion FSCC has entered the

regiment FSCC name in the fields of the system

attack parameters window as the agency to route

missions. The mission may be resolved in many

ways as described in the following paragraphs.

Coordination Requests

Coordination requests are transmitted to the

agencies responsible for violated boundaries or

FSCMs. The transmitting computer will wait

until the mission is approved to transmit the fire

request to the regiment FSCC.

Mission Denied

The mission may be denied either by failures of

guidance or denial from an agency from which
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ A-5 

coordination was requested. The operator at the

battalion FSCC may reprocess the mission.

Missions Not Requiring Coordination

Missions are transmitted to the regiment FSCC.

Missions Requiring Coordination

with Electronic Warfare Assets

Missions requiring coordination with EW assets

(as indicated by guidance) will transmit a request

for coordination to the intelligence and EW

agency listed in the mission routing info window.

Denial or approval will process the mission as if

coordination from another FSCC was required.

No Solution

If AFATDS is unable to determine a solution, it

recommends “Denied, no capable option.” The

operator can select “unsupportable” causing the

mission to be transmitted to the regiment FSCC

(the battalion’s support unit ID) for reevaluation

of fire support engagement.

Override

The operator can override AFATDS’ solution and

transmit any solution to any station. Overriding

and transmitting a red option does not allow the

automatic routing of FO commands.

Regiment Fire Support Coordination Center

The regiment FSCC processes the mission and

intervenes only on denied missions. The mission

may not be assigned to the same asset as

predicted by the battalion FSCC if the guidance

at the regiment differs from those at the battalion. The mission may be—

l Transmitted to any fire support asset that

the regiment FSCC commands. If additional

coordination is required, requests are routed

before transmitting the mission to the fire support asset.

l Determined unsupportable. The operator can

then transmit the mission—due to supported

unit ID—to the division FSCC.

l Overridden. The operator can override the

computer solution and transmit any solution to

any station.

Battalion Fire Direction Center

The battalion FDC processes the mission to subordinate battery FDCs. The battalion FDC will

perform detailed attack analysis due to software

default. Fire missions will never be denied at the

battalion FDC. Though several options may be

available, the battalion FDC will select one of the

following solutions:

l The fire mission can be passed to the firing

units selected by AFATDS.

l The fire mission can be transmitted to any subordinate or reinforcing unit regardless of the

option AFATDS selected.

l The mission can be returned to the regiment

FSCC as “unsupportable.” This option should not

be required if the regiment FSCC is in detailed

attack analysis. However, if “unsupportable” is

selected, the mission is returned to the regiment

FSCC, reprocessed, and most likely transmitted to

the division FSCC as “unsupportable.” This is

AFTADS’ method of “request for reinforcing

fires.” Since the fire mission may be received

again by the battalion FDC as part of a massed

fire mission solution from the regiment FDC, any

mission returned to the regiment FDC as “unsupportable” is immediately manually deleted from

the active fire target list by the battalion FDC.

Division Fire Support Coordination Center

The division FSCC processes fire missions

received but seldom intervenes. NSFS missions

are printed and handed off to the representative of

this asset (unless automated communications are

available to these units). Artillery missions are
A-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

passed to the regiment FDC for processing. Air

missions are transmitted to the DASC. 

Regiment Fire Direction Center

The regiment FDC processes received fire

missions using detailed attack analysis. Fire orders

are passed to subordinate battalion FDCs. If the

mission is unsupportable, it is returned as an

“unsupportable” mission to the division FSCC.

The regiment FDC does not deny the mission.

Radar Fire Mission and the

Target Processing Center

Radars held in GS are controlled by the TPC. The

TPC will process all fire missions to the regiment

FDC by clicking “unsupportable.” Since the TPC

is commanded by the regiment FDC, missions are

automatically passed there.

All radar fire missions require coordination since

they will plot in the zone of a maneuver unit. Coordination is normally effected by coordination requests

automatically generated at the regiment FDC, not at

the TPC. “Unsupportable” missions do not require

coordination until an attack option is determined. 

Radars in DS of a battalion are directly linked

to that FDC. Command and support relationships of these radars are changed to reflect this,

and the fire missions transmitted are processed

by the battalion FDC in the same fashion as

fire missions received by an FO.
APPENDIX B

ARTILLERY WEAPONS AND MUNITIONS

Separate-Loading Ammunition

Separate-loading ammunition is issued as four

separate components: primer, propellant, projectile, and fuze. Components are unpacked, prepared

for firing, and loaded into the weapon in three

portions: the projectile with fuze, the propellant,

and the primer. 

155 Millimeter Shell-Fuze Combinations

High Explosive Shell (M107), Point Detonating 

Fuze (M557 and M739)

This bursting-type projectile is filled with trinitrotoluene (TNT) or composition B. It produces

fragmentation and blast over a wide area on

impact. Optimum effectiveness is gained by using

the lowest charge without causing excessive

dispersion. M557 fuzes are subject to premature

detonation by heavy rain or hail. This combination

is used against standing personnel, unarmored

vehicles, and light material. It is particularly effective in high angle fire. Effectiveness is reduced on

dug-in personnel, on uneven ground, and against

buildings or earthworks.

High Explosive Shell, Delay Fuze

This function is obtained by rotating a set screw on

the point detonating (PD) fuze to cause a .05 second

delay in detonation after impact. This shell-fuze

combination penetrates overhead cover or obtains

airburst by ricochet. The highest practical charge is

used for ricochet effect. High explosive (HE) delay

is effective against unarmored vehicles, earth and

log fortifications, some masonry and concrete

targets, personnel in light frame structures, lightly

covered emplacements, and dense woods. It is not

effective against heavy masonry or concrete.

High Explosive Shell, Proximity Fuze

(M728 and M732)

The variable time (VT) fuze has a nonadjustable,

radio-activated HOB of 7 meters above the target.

The fuze functions when it receives the reflection

of a self-transmitted radio signal. A wet or marshy

target area causes a greater reflection and increases

the HOB. The increased angle of fall results in the

fuze functioning closer to the ground. When the

target is close to friendly troops, the lowest practical charge for a large angle of fall is used. This

shell-fuze combination is useful where an airburst

is desired without the need to adjust the HOB. It is

particularly useful when engaging targets at longrange, at night, and for high angle fire. Light

foliage has little effect on the VT fuze, but heavy

foliage will cause it to function early.

High Explosive Shell, Mechanical Time Super 

Quick Fuze (M564, M577, and M582)

This fuze contains a graduated time mechanism

set before firing to activate at a predetermined

time interval. The HOB is normally set to activate

20 meters above the target or on impact. However,

the HOB will usually require adjustment. It is

unreliable in high angle fire because of a large

probable error (PE) in HOB. The highest practical

charge is used to minimize the HOB error. M564

fuzes are subject to premature detonation by heavy

rain or hail. This shell-fuze combination is effective against exposed personnel or personnel in

uncovered trenches or fighting positions.
B-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

High Explosive Shell, Delay (Concrete 

Piercing) Fuze (MK399 Mod 1 Series)

This fuze can be set for PD or delay. In PD mode,

the fuze functions as a standard supercargo fuze. In

the delay mode, it penetrates for 4 to 9 milliseconds

before functioning. This combination is used

against urban targets to reduce rubble.

White Phosphorus Shell (M110 Series)

This burster-type projectile is filled with white

phosphorus (WP). On detonation, WP is expelled

over a limited area. It is usually fuzed with PD

fuzes M557 or M739. However, it can be fuzed

with mechanical time (MT) fuzes M564 or M582

to produce an airburst. WP is used for marking,

screening, obscuring, and incendiary effects. It is

effective against vehicles, POL storage areas, etc. 

Smoke Shells (M116 Series and M825)

Smoke shells are an expelling charge type projectile that contain canisters filled with a pyrotechnic smoke mixture. When an MT fuze (M564 or

M577) activates, these canisters expel from the

rear of the projectile, producing smoke for 60 to

90 seconds. The projectile usually requires

adjustment. The smoke has a greater screening

effect than WP, but requires more time to build

up. The hexachloroethane (artillery smoke) (HC)

smoke projectile is being replaced with the M825

improved smoke round. The M825 uses felt

wedges impregnated with WP for rapid dissemination and provides 5 to 10 minutes of smoke. An

MT fuze activates a charge causing base ejection

and ignition of the WP felt wedges in a large

area. As unburned WP can cause a hazard to

friendly forces, caution must be exercised when

operating in these areas.

Illuminating Shell (M485)

Illumination is an expelling charge-type projectile

that contains an illuminant canister and parachute

assembly. When the MT fuze functions (M564 or

M577), the canister/parachute assembly expels

from the base of the projectile, and the illuminant

suspends from the parachute providing 1,000,000

candle power of battlefield illumination.

Improved Conventional Munitions

(M449 and M483A1)

This expelling charge-type projectile contains

submunitions (grenades). When an MT fuze (M564

or M577) or an electronic time fuze (M762)

functions, the grenades eject over the target area.

The two types of ICM are antipersonnel improved

conventional munition (APICM) and dual purpose

improved conventional munition (DPICM).

APICM contains 60 grenades. When the grenade

strikes the target, it hurls a ball-like grenade 5 to

6 feet into the air, where it detonates and scatters

over the target area. APICM has maximum effectiveness against troops in the open. Some effect

can be gained on troops in fighting positions.

DPICM contains 88 dual-purpose armor defeating and antipersonnel grenades. When the projectile detonates, an HE shaped-charge grenade

suspended from a ribbon streamer expels. On

impact, a shaped-charge jet expels downward

through the body of the grenade, while the rest of

the grenade bursts outward producing fragmentation. The jet penetrates approximately 2.75 inches

of homogenous armor plate. DPICMs are effective against vehicles such as armored personnel

carriers and trucks. Minimal effects are produced

against hard materiel targets.

The effects pattern of ICM is generally uniform

and circular. Pattern size varies with the caliber,

characteristics of the target area, and the HOB.

Six 155-millimeter howitzers can deliver an

effects pattern of 150 meters in radius. The

HOB may require adjustment. Deep snow (over

6 inches) can reduce the effects by more than

50 percent. All ICM grenades are subject to

duds. At the optimum HOB, the dud rate is

normally less than 2 percent; on some types of

terrain, it may be as high as 15 percent. ICM

are more effective than HE on area personnel
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ B-3 

targets because a greater area is uniformly

covered with a greater density of fragmentation.

Caution should be exercised when firing

DPICMs in trees because the ribbon streamers

hang in the trees, creating obstacles to friendly

troops moving in the area.

High Explosive, Rocket-Assisted

Projectile (M549 Series)

Rocket-assisted projectiles (RAPs) have high

fragmentation steel cases filled with composition B or TNT. An integral rocket motor is

positioned on the rear that functions along the

trajectory, increasing the range of the projectile.

RAP accuracy is reduced at longer ranges due to

the uneven burn of the rocket motor. However,

the RAP will produce more fragmentation over

a larger area than the standard HE projectile.

The RAP can be fuzed with PD fuze (M557 or

M739), MT fuze (M582 series), VT (M732A2)

or electronic time fuze (M767). This combination is used on targets similar to those for the

HE shell M107.

Cannon-Launched Guided Projectile

(or Copperhead)

The cannon-launched guided projectile (CLGP)

(or Copperhead) is an antitank round that can

home in on its target after being fired. It is

employed in indirect fire to destroy or neutralize

moving and stationary hard point targets such as

armor, mechanized vehicles or field fortifications. Targets must be designated during the

latter phase of the terminal portion of the trajectory for at least 13 seconds by a ground or

airborne laser that provides reflective laser

energy for terminal homing.

Family of Scatterable Mines (M731 [S],

M692 [L]), M741 [S], and M718 [L])

FASCAM refers to expelling charge projectiles

used to deliver antitank or antipersonnel mines.

FASCAM includes area denial artillery munitions

(ADAM) and remote antiarmor mine system

(RAAMS). These projectiles are fuzed with a

mechanical time super quick fuze (M577) or an

electronic fuze (M762).

ADAM projectiles are antipersonnel projectiles

that contain submunitions to deny the threat use

of certain areas for a short period. Upon fuze

function, the ADAM ejects 36 submunitions per

projectile over the target area. After each submunition comes to rest on the ground, seven sensor

trip lines will deploy up to 20 feet from each

mine. Disturbing the trip line activates the kill

mechanism and projects upward. At approximately 2 to 8 feet above the ground, the kill

mechanism detonates, projecting approximately

600 steel fragments in all directions. If the mine

has not detonated or functioned within the factory

set time—48 hours (long) or 4 hours (short)—it

will automatically self-destruct and clear the area. 

RAAMS projectiles are antitank projectiles that

contain submunitions to deny or delay access to a

particular area for a specific period. Each projectile

contains nine mines that expel into the target area.

Mines scatter over an area and become armed

within seconds after landing. Metallic objects,

such as tanks, self-propelled vehicles or other type

units, passing over the mines will activate them

and damage or destroy equipment. These mines

also have self-destruct mechanisms. Mines that

have an antidisturbance firing mechanism are

randomly scattered through the group to reduce

tampering. When firing a shell-mix of ADAMS and

RAAMS, the RAAMS is fired first to prevent the

premature detonation of ADAMS.

Propellants

M3 Series Propelling Charge (Green Bag)

Green bag propellant is used to fire charges 1

through 5. The M3 series contains M3 and

M3A1 propellants.
B-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

M4 Series Propelling Charge (White Bag)

White bag propellant is used to fire charges 3

through 7. The M4 series contains M4A1 and

M4A2 propellants.

M119 Series Propelling Charge

M119A1 is a propelling charge designated as charge

8 and extends the range of the 155-millimeter howitzers using the M795 HE projectile. The propelling

charge is a single-increment white bag charge.

M119A1 has a donut-shaped flash reducer at the

forward end that precludes non-ignition of the rocket

motor of the RAP. 

M119A2 is a charge 7 red bag propellant. The

propelling charge is a single increment red

bag charge.

M203 Series Propelling Charge

The M203 and M203A1 are the super charge 8 that

supplement the standard M3, M4, and M119 series

charges and provide extended range. The M203 is a

single increment red bag charge. The M203A1 is a

single increment stick propellant charge in a

cardboard sleeve. Both charges are used interchangeably to fire RAP, M795, M864 base-burn

dual purpose improved conventional munition

(BBDPICM) or M825A1.

Ammunition Field Storage

The four greatest hazards to ammunition in the

battery area are weather, threat fire, improper

handling, and careless smokers. Regardless of how

ammunition is stored, these hazards must be

considered. See MCWP 3-16.3.

Procedures for Burning Powder

l Select a burning site at least 200 meters from

grass, loose debris, personnel, and equipment.

l Arrange a row of increments in a single layer

not more than 12 inches wide oriented in the

direction of the wind.

l Lay a train of combustible material about

15 feet long, perpendicular to and at the

downwind end of the row of charge increments. Light this train at the end farthest

from the increments.

l When burning powder in a tactical environment, ensure the burning does not compromise

the camouflage and concealment effort.

Ammunition Under Development

Several munitions are under development for artillery weapons systems. This following infromation

focuses on those relevant to the 155-millimeter

towed howitzer systems (XM777 and M198).

M795, High Explosive Projectile

The M795 is a 155-millimeter HE projectile. It

will be employed against the same target array

as the M107 HE projectile and achieve a range

of 22.5 kilometers. It will be used to determine

registration corrections for expeditious computation of range, deflection, and fuze setting

corrections for other members of the M483

family of projectiles.

Extended Range M795

The extended range M795 possesses similar ballistic characteristics as the M864 BBDPICM projectile and will have a greater lethality at extended

ranges than the M549 HE rocket assisted projectile. When fired with zone 5, modular artillery

charge system (MACS), it will achieve a range of

37 kilometers (threshold) to 40 kilometers (objective). This projectile will determine registration

corrections for expeditious computation of range,

deflection, and fuze setting corrections for use

with the M864 BBDPICM projectile.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ B-5 

XM982 Extended Range Munitions

The XM982 extended range projectile will

replace the M864 BBDPICM projectile and will

provide 155-millimeter howitzers with an

extended range, fratricide reducing, accuracyenhancing capability to the FMF. The XM982

concept combines drag reduction from the M864

BBDPICM projectile and glide technology from

the M712 Copperhead projectile. The three

variants of the XM982 are the DPICM, sense and

destroy armor munition (SADARM), and Unitary

Warhead. Each has a GPS/inertial navigation

system self-location system, is compatible with

the multioption fuze for artillery, and will be

inductively set via the portable inductive artillery

fuze setter (PIAFS).

Sense and Destroy Armor Munition

The SADARM is a base-ejecting projectile that

carries two submunitions. When ejected, these

submunitions detect armored vehicles or equipment and detonate an explosively formed penetrator to penetrate the top of the target. SADARM is

ballistically similar to the M483A1 and will determine registration corrections for expeditious

computation of range, deflection, and fuze setting

corrections for use with the M483A1. SADARM

will be capable of a 28 to 37 kilometer range from

a 39 caliber cannon and maintain an effectiveness

equal to or greater than that of the M864

BBDPICM projectile.

M782 Multioption Fuze for Artillery

The MOFA fuze is compatible with all 155-millimeter HE family projectiles. It may function as a

proximity, time, PD or delay fuze. It consists of an

electronic countermeasure hardened design and

will be set inductively via the PIAFS. 

Portable Inductive Artillery Fuze Setter

PIAFS will initially be a battery-powered, hand

held device capable of electronically setting the

M762, M767, and MOFA fuzes. This will

increase accuracy and rates of fire, reduce human

errors, and shorten artillery response time.

Ultimately the PIAFS is envisioned to become

incorporated into the pre-planned program

improvement (P3I) system of the XM777 howitzer by transferring fuze information directly from

the technical solution derived by the P3I mission

manager to the fuze.

Modular Artillery Charge System

MACS consists of two solid propellant charges

(M231 and M232) that will be compatible with all

155-millimeter artillery systems. The M232 is

designed solely for the United States Army’s

Crusader Self-Propelled howitzer. Charge errors

will be reduced due to each charge being identical; i.e., rather than verifying the correct number of

increments and the correct charges, only the

correct number of increments has to be verified.

MACS will also reduce logistical requirements

because of its reduced volume and weight

compared to the M3A1 green bag and M4A2

white bag series of propellants.

Miscellaneous

Tables B-1 through B-4 are not prescriptive; they

are planning examples.
B-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table B-1. Fuzes.

Table B-2. Characteristics of Selected Artillery Weapons.

Type Current DODIC Replacement DODIC Future

Concrete Piercing Delay

Concrete Piercing Nondelay

M78A1

M78A1

N330

N331

None

None

NA

NA

Mk 300 Mod 1

DODIC 659

Point Detonating Super Quick or Delay

Super Quick or Delay

M557

M572

N335

N331

M739

M739

N340

N340

Multioption Fuze for Artillery

” ” ” ”

Mechanical Time M565 N248 M577* N285 M762

Mechanical Time Super Quick M564 N278 M582* N286 M767, Multioption Fuze for 

Artillery

Variable Time M728 N463 M732 N464 Multioption Fuze for Artillery

NOTE: Fuze DODAC = 1390 plus DODIC number as shown above.

*M577 and M582 can be set for mechanical time or super quick action. There is not a point detonating backup on these fuzes.

Weapon XM777 M198 M109A3/A41 M109A5/A61

Weight (pounds) 9,000 16,000 53,940 64,000 

Time to Emplace (minutes) 3 or less 4 0.5 0

Transport Capability

 Ground

MTVR, 

5-ton 5-ton Self-propelled Self-propelled

 Helicopter

V-22, CH-53E, 

CH-53D CH-53E No

 Fixed-Wing Transport All All C-5A

Maximum Rate of Fire

Per Tube (rounds per minute) 5-8 4 4

Sustained Rate of Fire

Per Tube (rounds per minute) 2

2

2

2

1 4

High Explosive

 Effective Casualty Radius (1 round) 50m 50m 50m 50m

 Weight of Projectile (fuzed) (pounds) 954 954

954954

Traverse (mils) 64003

64003

6400 6400

Maximum Speed (miles per hour)

 Towing - Cross Country 24 kph 5 NA NA

 Towing - Secondary Roads 56 kph 25-30 NA NA

 Towing - Improved Roads 88 kph 45 NA NA

 Self-Propelled Speed NA NA 35 38

Cruising Range (miles) NA NA 220 185

1 US Army units with these systems may be attached or placed under operational control to Marine units.

2

Two rounds per minute or as determined by thermal warning device.

3

6400 mils traverse using speed shift; 400 mils left/right without speed shift.

4

95 pounds for M107 Family; 103.5 pounds for M483 Family; 137.6 pounds for Copperhead.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ B-7 

Table B-3. Projectiles and Propelling Charges (M198/M109A5/A6).

Propelling Charges

PROJECTILES DODAC

M3

SERIES

M4

SERIES

M119

SERIES M203

MAXIMUM

RANGE 

(METERS)

FUZE

ACTIONS

M107 HE 1320-D544 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Concrete piercing, 

point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick, variable 

time, electronic time

M549A1 RAP 1320-D579 No Yes, but 

zone 7 only

Yes, but not 

M119

Yes 30,000 Point detonating, 

electronic time 

M449A1 ICM 1320-D562 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Mechanical time, 

electronic time, 

mechanical time 

super quick

M485 Illum 1320-D505 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes, but 

degraded 

reliability

No 18,100 Mechanical time, 

electronic time, 

mechanical time 

super quick

M483A1 DPICM 1320-D563 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time, 

electronic time, 

mechanical time 

super quick

M864 BB DPICM 1320-D864 No Yes Yes Yes 28,180 (M198)

27,740 

(M109A5/A6)

Mechanical time 

super quick, M577, 

electronic time

M692 ADAM-L 1320-D501 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M731 ADAM-S 1320-D502 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M116A1 HC 1320-D506 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M110A1 WP 1320-D550 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick

M795 HE 1320-D529 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes Yes 22,500 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick (M732 

variable time only)

M825 Smoke 1320-D528 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M718 RAAMS-L 1320-D503 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M741 RAAMS-S 1320-D509 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time, 

electronic time

M804 Practice 1320-D513 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 18,100 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick, (variable 

time M732 only), 

electronic time
B-8 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table B-4. Projectiles and Propelling Charges (M109A2/A3/A4).

Propelling Charges

PROJECTILES DODAC

M3

SERIES

M4

SERIES

M119

SERIES M203

MAXIMUM

RANGE

(METERS)

FUZE

ACTIONS

M107 HE 1320-D544 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes No 18,100 Concrete piercing, 

point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick, 

variable time

M549A1 RAP 1320-D579 No Yes, but zone 7 

only

Yes, but not 

M119

Yes 23,500 Point detonating

M449A1 ICM 1320-D562 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes No 18,100 Mechanical time

M485 Illum 1320-D505 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes, but 

degraded 

reliability

No 17,500 Mechanical time

M483A1 DPICM 1320-D563 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,500 Mechanical time

M864 BB DPICM 1320-D864 No Yes Yes Yes 22,000 Mechanical time 

super quick M577

M692 ADAM-L 1320-D501 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time

M731 ADAM-S 1320-D502 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time

M116A1 HC 1320-D506 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes No 18,100 Mechanical time

M110A1 WP 1320-D550 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes No 18,100 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick

M795 HE 1320-D529 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes Yes 22,500 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick (M732 

variable time only)

M825 Smoke 1320-D528 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,500 Mechanical time

M718 RAAMS-L 1320-D503 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time

M741 RAAMS-S 1320-D509 Yes, but not 

zone 1 or 2

Yes Yes No 17,740 Mechanical time

M804 Practice 1320-D513 Yes, but not 

zone 1

Yes Yes No 18,100 Point detonating, 

mechanical time 

super quick (variable 

time M732 only)
APPENDIX C

PASSAGE OF COMMAND AND CONTROL

WATCH OFFICER’S CHECKLIST

PASSAGE OF COMMAND AND CONTROL WATCH OFFICER’S CHECKLIST

Commander’s Intent 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Organization for Combat

UNIT TACTICAL MISSION

Recent Significant Events 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Scheme of Maneuver 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Frag Order In Effect ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Active Fire Missions

TARGET # OBSERVER FIRE ORDER STATUS

Observer Locations

OBS LOCATION OBS LOCATION OBS LOCATION

Unit Locations

UNIT LOCATION
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ C-3 

H-Hour _________________________________________________ L-Hour ____________________________________________________

MOPP Level: 0 1 2 3 4

Fire Caps

UNIT LOCATION AOL

WEAPON 

STRENGTH DTG (ESTABLISHED)/OPORD

Scheduled Fires

TYPE UNIT DTG

GROUP

SERIES

PLANS
C-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Fire Support Coordinating Measures

TYPE IN EFFECT AND DESCRIPTION

FSCL

CFL

RFA(s)

NFA(s)

RFL(s)

FEBA
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ C-5 

Changes to Attack Guidance 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Future Plans

Movements 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Frag/Warning Orders 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Other 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Employment of CBR, Met, and Survey

CBR 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Met 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Survey 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Last Target Number _____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Anticipated Changes (Commander’s Intent) 

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX D

REPORTS

Title: Fire Capabilities (FIRECAP) Report

Purpose: To report artillery battery in position and ready to fire or to report a change 

in the number of weapons available.

Occasion: When the battery is ready to fire or when a change occurs in the number of 

weapons functioning.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report FIRECAP

Line A Unit (call sign)

Line B Grid (encoded)

Line C Azimuth of fire (in mils and encoded)

Line D Number of weapons (encoded)

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure D-1. Fire Capabilities Report (FIRECAP).

Title: Displacement Report (DISREP)

Purpose: To report displacement of artillery battery.

Occasion: When unit displaces; i.e., can no longer fire.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report DISREP

Line A Unit

Line B Time

Line C Destination

Line D Number of weapons

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure D-2. Displacement Report (DISREP).

Title: Command Post Report (CPREP)

Purpose: To report the time of opening and closing of the CP and the location of the 

new CP.

Occasion: When a CP is opened and closed.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report CPREP

Line A Unit (call sign)

Line B Location (encoded)

Line C Date-time group CP established

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure D-3. Command Post Report (CPREP).
D-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Title: Movement Order Report

Purpose: To report route and location information.

Occasion: When a unit moves.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report Movement Order

Line A Grid to occupy*

Line B Azimuth of fire*

Line C Displace NET NLT

Line D Occupy NET NLT

Line E Route of march*

Line F Method of march 

Line G Remarks

*Encrypt if transmitted in the clear.

Figure D-4. Movement Order Report.

Title: Situation Report

Purpose: To provide information to other units.

Occasion: As the tactical situation requires.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report SITREP

Line A Unit (call sign)

Line B DTG

Line C Location*

Line D Number of weapons

Line E Number of weapons up

Line F Number of rounds fired since last SITREP.

Line G Significant events

Line H Problems

Line I Remarks

*Encrypt if transmitted in the clear.

Figure D-5. Situation Report (SITREP).

Title: Rapid Request

Purpose: To provide units with a means to submit a rapid request.

Occasion: When a unit has a rapid request.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report Rapid Request

Line A From (call sign)

Line B To (call sign)

Line C DTG

Line D Grid location*

Line E Priority (urgent, priority, routine)

Line F Support required and remarks

Line G Point of contact

*Encrypt if transmitted in the clear.

Figure D-6. Rapid Request.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ D-3 

(1) SECTION: (2) LOCATION:

(3) SEARCH ZONES LEFT RIGHT MIN MAX

(a) PRIMARY (1) (2) (3) (4)

(b) ALTERNATE (1) (2) (3) (4)

(4) EMISSION LIMITS (a) TIME (b) TGTS

(5) CUEING AGENCY (a) (b) (c)

(By call sign, in order of 

priority) (d) (e) (f)

(6) REPORTING CHANNELS (a) (b)

(7) STATUS (a) UP: (b) DOWN: (c) MOVING:

(8) ZONES/GRID POINTS

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(a)

(b)

Figure D-7. Radar Report.

Title: FLASHREP/SPOTREP/TAREP and Follow-Up Reports

Purpose: Target reports (TAREPs) are used to pass target data.

Occasion. When potential target is discovered or after attack of significant target or 

target on target list.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Type of Report SPOTREP

Line A Precedence: Flash/Immediate/Priority/Routine

Line B Reporting Unit

Time: 

DTG of Report

DTG of Incident

Line C Reference: Original SPOTREP DTG or Target Number

Line D

Line E

Location: 

Enemy

Friendly

Line F

Incident Description:

Target Description

Vulnerability

Accuracy of Location (In Meters)

Size, Shape, and Orientation (In Meters and Mils)

Associated/Equipment or Units

Line G Action Taken:

Line H

Friendly Casualties:

KIA

WIA

MIA

Line I

Enemy Casualties:

KIA

EPW

Line J Enemy Weapons/Equipment/Documents Captured

Line K

Friendly Weapons/Equipment Damaged/Destroyed 

Lost

Line L Remarks

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.The group of digits must always be preceded by the 

block of two capitals designating the 100km square; e.g., LB6448. When reporting 

attack or target or result of attack, include lines C2 (DTG of incident) and E1 (location 

of enemy). Intelligence agencies need this information.

Figure D-8. SPOTREP.
D-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Title: Shelling Report (SHELLREP)

Purpose:To report bombing, shelling or mortaring by the enemy.

Occasion: Submitted as soon as possible after incident.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Line A Unit of origin

Line B Position of observer

Line C Direction in mils

Line D Time from

Line E Time to

Line F Area bombed, shelled or mortared

Line G Number and nature of guns; i.e., mortars, rockets

Line H Nature of fire

Line I Number, type, and caliber of weapons

Line J Time of flash to bang

Line K Damage

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure D-9. Shelling Report (SHELLREP).

Title: Size, Activity, Location, Unit, Time and Equipment (SALUTE) Report.

Purpose: To provide combat reporting.

Occasion: As required.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Line A Size

Line B Activities

Line C Location

Line D Unit

Line E Time

Line F Equipment

Line G Remarks, source, evaluation, etc.

Line H ATG

NOTE: Use only applicable lines.

Figure D-10. Size, Activity, Location, Unit, Time, 

and Equipment (SALUTE) Report.

Title: Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC)

Purpose: To request medical evacuation.

Occasion: As required.

ELEMENT INFORMATION

Line A Emergency, priority, routine*

Line B Requesting unit (call sign)

Line C Pick up coordinate

Line D Number requesting MEDEVAC**

Line E Airborne medical assistance required

Line F LZ secure/not secure

Line G Best approach directions

Line H LZ markings

Line I LZ frequency and call sign

* Emergency—life or death threatening.

 Priority—serious injury, life not immediately threatened.

Routine—minor injuries or dead.

**Include number of WIA, KIA, and sick.

Figure D-11. Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Report.
APPENDIX E

LOGISTICS PLANNING DATA

Table E-1. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment, Personnel.

E1-E5 E6-E9 W1-W4 O1-O3 O4-O6 Totals

USMC 284 51 9 12 9 365

USN 5 2 0 0 3 10

Totals 289 53 9 12 12 375

Table E-2. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment, Selected Major Equipment.

Item

Authorized

Quantities

Embarkation Data

Cargo Capacity for

Authorized Quantity

Ft2Lbs Ft3

* Gals Lbs

Mk48 Truck, Logistics Vehicle System 5 12,920 2,065,000 125,000

Mk48 Truck, LVS Wrecker 1 2,584 53,700

M923 Truck, Cargo, 5-ton 57 11,856 1,304,046 26,904 570,000

M936, Truck, Wrecker, 5-ton 2 470 76,932

M105A1 Trailer, 11⁄2-ton 25 2,400 66,750 3,555** 75,000

M149 Trailer, Water 2 202 5,060 800

M998 Truck, Utility 45 4,770 227,700 3,983 112,500

AN/MRC 145 Radio Set 9 954 46,800

AN/MRC 142 Radio Set 4 424 20,800

AN/MRC 138 Radio Set 9 954 46,800

JOM-1 Steam Cleaner 2 70 2,200

M101A1 Trailer 15 1,140 20,250 2,595 22,500

M1305 Truck, Ambulance 1 106 5,361

AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar 5 795 28,125

* Cargo capacity under bows. 

**Cargo capacity to top of side racks. 
E-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-3. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Regiment, Class V Small Arms Combat Planning Rates.

DODIC/Description Basic Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

A059/5.56mm Ball 99,050 3,771 1,119 1,734 1,084 2,796 1,100

A061/5.56mm Tracer 2,830 1,843 311 467 257 1,184 281

A064/5.56mm 4&1 Linked 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A131/7.62mm 4&1 Linked 10,400 440 74 911 119 673 100

A363/9mm 2,700 91 71 78 73 85 72

A518/.50 Cal SLAP 4&1 Linked 2,000 154 85 34 57 94 69

A576/.50 Cal 4&1 Linked 4,000 1,765 974 386 647 1,080 787

B504/40mm Green Star Parachute 8 11 1 11 1 11 1

B505/40mm Red Star Parachute 8 11 1 11 1 11 1

B506/40mm Red Smoke 7 6 1 6 1 6 1

B508/40mm Green Smoke 13 6 1 6 1 6 1

B509/40mm Yellow Smoke 7 6 1 6 1 6 1

B535/40mm White Star Parachute 52 13 1 13 1 13 1

B542/40mm LKD 2,880 353 177 196 165 275 170

B546/40mm HEDP 468 29 30 25 31 27 30

G881/Gren Fragmentation 75 20 14 19 17 19 16

G900/Gren Incendiary 4 1 1 1 1 1 1

G940/Gren Green Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G945/Gren Yellow Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G950/Gren Red Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G930/Gren HC Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G960/Gren Violet Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

L603/Sig Red Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L307/Sig White Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L311/Sig Red Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L312/Sig White Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L314/Sig Green Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L323/Sig Smk Ground RP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L324/Sig Smk Ground GP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L495/Flare Trip 8 2 1 1 2 1 2

NOTE: Rounds have been rounded up to the nearest whole figure. Ammunition figures based on the following numbers of weapons per battery: M-16 283, 

M9 90, M-240G 13, M-2 10, Mk-19 10, and M203 26.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ E-3 

Table E-4. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, Personnel.

E1-E5 E6-E9 W1-W4 O1-O3 O4-O5 Totals

USMC 137 30 5 12 6 190

USN 3 1 0 5 0 9

Totals 140 31 5 17 6 199

Table E-5. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, Selected Major Equipment.

Items

Authorized

Quantities

Embarkation Data

Cargo Capacity for

Authorized Quantity

Ft2Lbs Ft3

* Gals Lbs

Mk48 Truck, Logistics Vehicle System 2 3,834 50,600

Mk14 Trailer 6 4,002 96,000 150,000

M923 Truck, Cargo, 5-ton 10 2,080 228,780 4,550 100,000

M936, Truck, Wrecker, 5-ton 2 470 76,932

M105A1 Trailer, 11⁄2-ton 4 384 10,680 1,112 12,000

M101A3, Trailer 12 912 16,200 2,076 18,000

M149 Trailer, Water 2 202 5,060 800

M998 Truck, Utility 18 1,908 91,080 1,422** 45,000

AN/MRC 145 Radio Set 6 636 31,200

AN/MRC 138 Radio Set 5 530 26,750

JOM-1 Steam Cleaner 2 70 2,200

M1305 Truck, Ambulance 1 106 5,361

MC 4000 Forklift 2 227 16,000

* Cargo capacity under bows.

**Cargo capacity to top of side racks.
E-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-6. Headquarters Battery, Artillery Battalion, Class V Small Arms

Combat Planning Rates Composite Threat.

DODIC/Description Basic Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

A059/5.56mm Ball 45,850 1,745 518 803 502 1,294 509

A061/5.56mm Tracer 1,310 853 144 217 119 548 131

A064/5.56mm 4&1 Linked 6,400 1,942 441 214 371 1,105 402

A131/7.62mm 4&1 Linked 3,200 136 23 281 37 207 31

A363/9mm 1,800 61 48 53 49 57 48

A518/.50 Cal SLAP 4&1 Linked 800 62 34 14 23 38 28

A576/.50 Cal 4&1 Linked 1,600 706 390 155 259 432 315

B504/40mm Green Star Parachute 3 5 1 4 1 4 1

B505/40mm Red Star Parachute 3 5 1 4 1 4 1

B506/40mm Red Smoke 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

B508/40mm Green Smoke 5 2 1 2 1 2 1

B509/40mm Yellow Smoke 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

B535/40mm White Star Parachute 20 5 1 5 1 5 1

B542/40mm Linked 1,152 142 71 79 66 110 68

B546/40mm HEDP 180 11 12 10 12 11 12

G881/Gren Fragmentation 75 11 8 10 9 11 9

G900/Gren Incendiary 4 1 1 1 1 1 1

G940/Gren Green Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G945/Gren Yellow Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G950/Gren Red Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G930/Gren HC Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G960/Gren Violet Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

L603/Sig Red Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L307/Sig White Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L311/Sig Red Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L312/Sig White Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L314/Sig Green Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L323/Sig Smk Ground RP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L324/Sig Smk Ground GP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L495/Flare Trip 8 2 1 1 2 1 2

NOTE: Rounds have been rounded up to the nearest whole figure.

Ammunition figures based on the following numbers of weapons per battery: M-16 131, M9 60, M-240G 4, M-2 4, Mk-19 4, SAW 8, and M203 10.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ E-5 

Table E-7. M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Personnel.

E1-E5 E6-E9 O1-O3 Totals

USMC 123 13 8 144

USN 3 0 0 3

Totals 126 13 8 147

Table E-8. M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Selected Major Equipment.

Items

Authorized

Quantities

Embarkation Data Cargo Capacity for Authorized Quantity

Ft2Lbs Ft3

* Gals Lbs

M923 Truck, Cargo, 5-ton 16 3,328 366,048 7,280 160,000

M101A3, Trailer 5 380 67,500 865 7,500

M105A1 Trailer, 11⁄2-ton 8 768 21,360 2,224 24,000

M149 Trailer, Water 1 101 2,530 400

M998 HMMWV 5 528 25,300 395** 25,000

M1043 HMMWV (Armored) 3 318 17,931 14,500

AN/MRC 145 Radio Set 4 424 20,800

MC 4000 Forklift 1 114 8,000

M198 Medium Towed Howitzer 6 1,197 93,600

* Cargo capacity under bows.

**Cargo capacity to top of side racks.
E-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-9. M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Class V Small Arms Combat Planning Rates.

DODIC/Description

Basic 

Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

A059/5.56mm Ball 40,950 1,559 463 717 448 1,156 455

A061/5.56mm Tracer 1,170 762 129 193 106 490 117

A064/5.56mm 4&1 Linked 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A131/7.62mm 4&1 Linked 3,200 136 23 281 37 207 31

A363/9mm 900 31 24 27 25 29 24

A518/.50 Cal SLAP 4&1 Linked 800 62 34 14 23 38 28

A576/.50 Cal 4&1 Linked 1,600 706 390 155 259 432 315

B504/40mm Green Star Parachute 3 5 1 4 1 4 1

B505/40mm Red Star Parachute 3 5 1 4 1 4 1

B506/40mm Red Smoke 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

B508/40mm Green Smoke 5 2 1 2 1 2 1

B509/40mm Yellow Smoke 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

B535/40mm White Star Parachute 20 5 1 5 1 5 1

B542/40mm HEDP LKD 1,152 142 71 79 66 110 68

B546/40mm HEDP 180 11 12 10 12 11 12

G881/Gren Fragmentation 75 8 6 8 7 8 6

G900/Gren Incendiary 4 1 1 1 1 1 1

G940/Gren Green Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G945/Gren Yellow Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G950/Gren Red Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G930/Gren HC Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

G960/Gren Violet Smoke 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

L603/Sig Red Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L307/Sig White Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L311/Sig Red Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L312/Sig White Star Parachute 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L314/Sig Green Star Cluster 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L323/Sig Smk Ground RP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L324/Sig Smk Ground GP 9 1 1 1 1 1 1

L495/Flare Trip 8 2 1 1 2 1 2

NOTE: Rounds have been rounded up to the nearest whole figure.

Ammunition figures based on the following numbers of weapons per battery: M-16 117, M9 30, M-240G 4, M-2 4, Mk-19 4, SAW 6, and M203 10.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ E-7 

Table E-10. M-198 Battery (6-Gun), Class V Artillery Ammunition Combat Planning Rates.

DODIC/Description Basic Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

D501/Proj ADAM-L 5 2 1 3 2 3 1

D502/Proj ADAM-S 9 11 2 6 3 8 2

D505/Proj ILLUM M485A2 5 3 1 2 1 3 1

D510/Proj COPPERHEAD 1 2 1 1 1 1 1

D514/Proj RAAMS-S 4 6 3 7 2 6 2

D515/Proj RAAMS-L 2 1 2 1 3 1 3

D528/Proj SMOKE M825 36 4 2 4 2 4 2

D544/Proj HE 198 78 20 44 15 60 17

D550/Proj WP 12 10 3 9 2 9 2

D563/Proj DPICM 190 19 4 37 3 29 4

D579/Proj HE RAP 78 78 20 44 15 60 17

D864/Proj DPICM BB 137 19 4 37 3 29 4

Projectile Subtotals 677 233 63 195 52 213 56

D532/Prop M203 RB 243 107 26 89 20 98 22

D533/Prop M119A1/A2 122 35 10 30 8 32 9

D540/Prop M3A1 GB 64 19 5 16 5 18 5

D541/Prop M4A2 WB 313 89 24 75 20 82 21

Propellant Subtotals 742 250 65 210 53 230 57

N289/Fz ET M762* 404 65 18 99 16 83 17

N290/Fz ET M767** 35 27 7 17 5 22 6

N291/Fz VT M732A2*** 50 20 5 11 4 15 5

N340/Fz PD M739**** 218 127 32 72 24 99 27

N569/Fz CP Mk 399-1 4 2 1 1 1 2 1

Fuze Subtotals 711 241 63 200 50 221 56

N523/Primer M82 740 249 63 208 50 228 56

NOTE: Rounds and weights have been rounded up to the nearest whole figure.

*N285/Fz MTSQ M577 may be substituted.

**N286/Fz MTSQ M582 or N278/Fz MTSQ M564 may be substituted.

***N264/Fz VT M732 may be substituted in deep-well projectiles.

****N335/Fz PD M557 or N311/Fz PD M572 may be substituted. 
E-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-11. Artillery Battalion, Personnel.

USMC

E1-E5 E6-E9 W1-W4 O1-O3 O4-O5 Totals

507 69 5 36 6 623

USN 12 1 0 5 0 18

Totals 519 70 5 41 6 641

Table E-12. Artillery Battalion, Selected Major Equipment.

Items

Authorized

Quantities

Embarkation Data

Cargo Capacity for

Authorized Quantity

Ft2Lbs Ft3

* Gals Lbs

M923 Truck, Cargo, 5-ton 58 12,064 1,326,924 26,390 580,000

M936, Truck, Wrecker, 5-ton 2 470 76,932

M105A1 Trailer, 11⁄2-ton 28 2,688 74,760 7,784 84,000

M101A3, Trailer 27 2,052 36,450 4,671 40,500

M149 Trailer, Water 5 505 12,650 2,000

M998 Truck, Utility 33 3,485 166,980 2,607** 165,000

M1043 HMMWV (Armored) 9 954 53,793

AN/MRC 145 Radio Set 18 1,908 93,600

AN/MRC 138 Radio Set 5 530 26,750

JOM-1 Steam Cleaner 2 70 2,200

M1305 Truck, Ambulance 1 106 5,361

MC 4000 Forklift 5 570 40,000

M198 Medium Towed Howitzer 18 3,591 280,800

* Cargo capacity under bows.

**Cargo capacity to top of side racks.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ E-9 

Table E-13. Artillery Battalion, Class V Small Arms Combat Planning Rates.

DODIC/Description Basic Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

A059/5.56mm Ball 168,700 6,422 1,906 2,952 1,845 4,761 1,873

A061/5.56mm Tracer 4,820 3,138 530 796 437 2,017 479

A064/5.56mm 4&1 Linked 6,400 1,942 441 214 371 1,105 402

A131/7.62mm 4&1 Linked 12,800 541 91 1,121 147 828 123

A363/9mm 4,500 151 118 120 131 141 120

A576/.50 Cal 4&1 Linked 6,400 2,823 1,558 617 1,035 1,728 1,258

A518/.50 Cal SLAP 4&1 Linked 3,200 246 136 54 90 151 110

B504/40mm Green Star Parachute 12 17 1 16 1 16 1

B505/40mm Red Star Parachute 12 17 1 16 1 16 1

B506/40mm Red Smoke 10 8 1 8 2 8 1

B508/40mm Green Smoke 20 8 1 8 2 8 1

B509/40mm Yellow Smoke 10 8 1 8 2 8 1

B535/40mm White Star Parachute 80 20 1 20 1 20 1

B542/40mm Linked 4,608 565 284 314 264 440 272

B546/40mm HEDP 720 44 45 39 47 42 46

G881/Gren Fragmentation 300 33 24 32 29 33 27

G900/Gren Incendiary 16 1 1 1 1 1 1

G940/Gren Green Smoke 48 4 2 4 2 4 2

G945/Gren Yellow Smoke 48 2 1 4 2 3 1

G950/Gren Red Smoke 48 5 2 5 2 5 2

G930/Gren HC Smoke 48 2 1 2 1 2 1

G960/Gren Violet Smoke 48 7 3 5 2 6 2

L603/Sig Red Star Cluster 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L307/Sig White Star Cluster 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L311/Sig Red Star Parachute 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L312/Sig White Star Parachute 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L314/Sig Green Star Cluster 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L323/Sig Smk Ground RP 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L324/Sig Smk Ground GP 36 1 1 1 1 1 1

L495/Flare Trip 128 3 9 3 8 3 8

NOTE: Rounds have been rounded up to the nearest whole figure.

Ammunition figures based on the following numbers of weapons: M-16 482, M9 150, M-240G 16, M-2 16, Mk-19 16, and SAW 26.
E-10 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-14. Artillery Battalion, Class V Artillery Ammunition Combat Planning Rates.

DODIC/Description Basic Allowance

Armor Heavy Infantry Heavy Composite

Assault Sustained Assault Sustained Assault Sustained

D501/Proj ADAM-L 14 5 2 8 4 7 3

D502/Proj ADAM-S 27 32 4 18 8 24 6

D505/Proj ILLUM M485A2 13 8 3 5 3 7 3

D510/Proj COPPERHEAD 2 4 1 2 1 3 1

D514/Proj RAAMS-S 11 16 9 19 5 17 6

D515/Proj RAAMS-L 6 1 6 3 7 2 7

D528/Proj SMOKE M825 108 12 6 11 5 11 6

D544/Proj HE 593 232 58 131 44 180 49

D550/Proj WP 36 29 7 25 6 27 6

D563/Proj DPICM 569 57 12 111 9 85 10

D579/Proj HE RAP 234 232 58 49 131 180 49

D864/Proj DPICM BB 410 57 12 111 9 85 10

Projectile Subtotals 2,023 685 178 575 145 628 156

D532/Prop M203 RB 729 319 77 267 58 292 66

D533/Prop M119A1/A2 364 105 28 88 23 96 25

D540/Prop M3A1 GB 190 57 15 48 13 53 13

D541/Prop M4A2 WB 937 267 70 223 58 244 63

Propellant Subtotals 2,220 748 190 626 152 685 167

N289/Fz ET M762* 1,211 194 53 296 47 247 50

N290/Fz ET M767** 104 80 20 51 15 65 17

N291/Fz VT M732A2*** 149 58 15 33 11 45 13

N340/Fz PD M739**** 654 379 94 216 71 295 80

N569/Fz CP Mk 399-1 12 5 2 3 1 4 1

Fuze Subtotals 2,130 716 184 599 145 656 161

N523/Primer M82 2,219 747 189 624 150 684 165

NOTE: Rounds and weights have been rounded up the nearest whole figure.

*N285/Fz MTSQ M577 may be substituted.

**N286/Fz MTSQ M582 or N278/Fz MTSQ M564 may be substituted.

***N264/Fz VT M732 may be substituted in deep-well projectiles.

****N335/Fz PD M557 or N311/Fz PD M572 may be substituted.
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ E-11 

Table E-15. Ammunition Packing Dimensions, Artillery Ammunition.

Projectiles

DODIC Nomenclature

# of 

Rounds Weight (lbs) Dimensions (in) Cube (ft3)

D501 ADAM-L (M692) 8 887 39 3/8 x 14 1/2 x 29 9.7

D502 ADAM-S (M731) 8 887 39 3/8 x 14 1/2 x 29 9.7

D505 ILLUM M485A2 8 783 27 1/8 x 13 5/8 x 32 6.8

D510 COPPERHEAD (M712) 6 1,358 61 x 33 x 27 1/2 32

D514 RAAMS-S (M741) 8 882 39 3/8 x 14 5/8 x 29 1/8 9.7

D515 RAAMS-L (M718A1) 8 882 39 3/8 x 14 5/8 x 29 1/8 9.7

D528 SMOKE, WP (M825A1) 8 874 39 3/8 x 14 1/2 x 29 9.7

D544 HE (M107) 8 798 27 1/8 x 13 5/8 x 32 6.8

D550 SMOKE, WP (M110A2) 8 829 27 1/8 x 13 5/8 x 32 6.8

D563 DPICM (M483A1) 8 874 39 3/8 x 14 1/2 x 29 9.7

D579 HE, RAP (M549A1) 8 816 38 3/4 x 14 5/8 x 29 1/8 9.5

D864 DPICM, BB (M864) 8 870 39 3/8 x 14 1/2 x 29 9.7

Propellants

DODIC Nomenclature

# of 

Rounds Weight (lbs) Dimensions (in) Cube (ft3)

D532 M203 RB 1 56

D533 M119A1/A2 1 45

D540 M3A1 GB 2 29

D541 M4A2 WB 1 27

Fuzes

DODIC Nomenclature

# of 

Rounds Weight (lbs) Dimensions (in) Cube (ft3)

N289 Fz ET M762 16 47 14.62 x 13.90 x 8.56 1.0

N290 Fz ET M767 16 47 14.62 x 13.90 x 8.56 1.0

N291 Fz VT M732A2 16 47 14.62 x 13.90 x 8.56 1.0

N340 Fz PD M739 16 47 14.62 x 13.90 x 8.56 1.0

N569 Fz CP Mk 399-1 16 47 14.62 x 13.90 x 8.56 1.0

Primers

DODIC Nomenclature

# of 

Rounds Weight (lbs) Dimensions (in) Cube (ft3)

N523 Primer M82 400 34 17.38 x 11.5 x 8.12 0.9
E-12 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table E-16. Ammunition Packing Dimensions, Small Arms.

DODIC/Description

Package Data

Rounds Ft3Lbs

A064/5.56mm 4&1 Linked 1,600 1.2 47

A063/5.56mm Tracer 1,640 1.0 67

A071/5.56mm Ball 1,680 1.0 70

A131/7.62mm 4&1 Linked 800 .8 75

A363/9mm Ball 2,400 3.9 72

A518/.50 Cal SLAP 4&1 Linked 220 1.3 86

A576/.50 Cal 4&1 Linked 220 1.3 86

B504/40mm Green Star Parachute 44 1.0 48

B505/40mm Red Star Parachute 44 1.0 48

B506/40mm Red Smoke 44 1.0 57

B508/40mm Green Smoke 44 1.0 57

D509/40mm Yellow Smoke 44 1.0 57

B535/40mm White Star Parachute 44 1.0 57

B546/40mm HEDP 72 1.6 53

B542/40mm Linked 72 1.4 125

G881/Gren Fragmentation 30 1.4 51

G900/Gren Incendiary 16 0.8 47

G930/Gren HC Smoke 16 0.8 42

G940/Gren Green Smoke 16 0.8 34

G945/Gren Yellow Smoke 16 0.8 34

G950/Gren Red Smoke 16 0.8 42

G960/Gren Violet Smoke 16 0.8 34

L306/Sig Red Star Cluster 36 1.6 56

L307/Sig White Star Cluster 36 1.6 56

L311/Sig Red Star Parachute 36 1.4 67

L312/Sig White Star Parachute 36 1.4 67

L314/Sig Green Star Cluster 36 1.5 56

L323/Sig Smk Ground RP 36 1.5 56

L324/Sig Smk Ground GP 36 1.5 56

L495/Flare Trip 32 1.8 47
APPENDIX F

HELIBORNE ARTILLERY RAIDS

General

Heliborne artillery raids require unique planning

considerations and preparation. This appendix

outlines general tactics, techniques, and procedures to conduct heliborne artillery raids. See

also FMFM 7-32, Raid Operations.

Tables F-1 through F-7 and figures F-1 through

F-6 are detailed guides for an artillery raid force.

They are not prescriptive; they are planning

examples. See pages F-10 through F-20.

Characteristics

An artillery raid is the movement of an artillery

unit (or portion of that unit) to a designated

firing position to attack an HPT with artillery

fires followed by the immediate withdrawal to a

safe location.

The artillery raid is a unique operation because

the firing position is usually beyond the beachhead or FLOT. Due to the limited protection at

these locations, speed and surprise are essential.

The intent is to rapidly insert an artillery force

and swiftly deliver artillery fire on single or

multiple targets. This must be done using the

minimum amount of equipment and personnel to

accomplish the mission. Planning should allow

for the force to withdraw immediately upon

completion of the fire mission. These characteristics will govern the planning and execution

phases of the operation.

Command and Control

The senior maneuver commander assigns an artillery raid to an artillery battery or battalion. The

raid force consists of five elements: command,

support, assault, security, and observer. The

senior artillery commander assigned the raid

mission is the raid force commander (RFC). The

mission commander is assigned from the supporting helicopter squadron. Open and direct communications between the RFC and mission

commander during planning are imperative for

the raid to succeed.

Mission Profile

Commanders and staffs must understand the

purpose of the raid as soon as the mission is

assigned, i.e., upon receipt of the warning order.

They must also understand the risk involved and

the possible loss of key personnel and equipment. This understanding is extremely important

as it will guide many of the decisions during

planning. The following six missions may be

assigned to the artillery raid force:

l Destroy. To permanently render a target combat ineffective. This mission is best accomplished with an FO equipped with a laser and

accurate locating device.

l Neutralize. Temporarily render threat personnel or material operationally ineffective. This

mission is best accomplished with an FO.
F-2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

l Suppress. Preventing threat personnel, weapons or equipment from engaging friendly forces

usually associated with a specified amount of

time.

l Harass. Confusing, disorganizing or degrading

threat forces.

l Deceive. Deceiving the threat as to the true

intent of friendly units.

l Interdict. Preventing the threat from using an

area, route or point.

Security Levels

Based on the threat at the firing position, one of

the three following security levels will be used:

l Security Level I—negligible threat to friendly

forces.

l Security Level II—squad-size threat units or

smaller threatening raid site.

l Security Level III—threat units larger than a

squad-size threatening raid site.

Raid Force Elements

Based on the situation, the RFC determines the

final force composition. Composition depends on

helicopter availability and the helicopter embarkation plan.

The CE and support elements are the advance

party. During security level II and III operations,

the security element precedes the advance party

into the firing position.

The command element provides C2 for the raid

force and maintains communications with the

MEU or ground element.

The support element provides fire direction, lays

the howitzers, lays wire (if required), and provides

helicopter transport support of howitzers.

The assault element provides gun crews, howitzers, and ammunition.

The security element provides local security for

the raid force, including sweeping the raid

position and establishing perimeter defense.

The observer element observes fires on the target

and reports BDA to the controlling FDC. This

element can include FO teams, reconnaissance

teams, aircraft, etc. Not all fires are required to be

observed. The type of observer, if employed, is

situationally-dependent. 

Mission Planning Steps

To execute a raid successfully, planning must be

detailed. However, there will be occasions when

the time available between the warning order and

L-hour will be compressed. Planning will be

considerably shorter. Rehearsals are vital tools

whenever METT-T permits. Many considerations must be addressed. These include, but are

not limited to, the following:

l Target. The nature of the target will dictate the

number of weapons, amount of ammunition,

type of observer, etc. 

l Number of Weapons. The optimum number

of howitzers for a raid is four. This number

may vary depending on the nature of the target

and helicopter support available.

l Ammunition. Based on the nature of the

target, required ammunition will be determined

via munitions effects tables or attack guidance

criteria. 

l Aircraft. The M198 can be transported externally by the CH-53E or Army assets. A fourgun raid requires four CH-53Es to lift the guns,

ammunition, and gun crews. Ideally, there are

also two CH-46s for the advance party. Additional aircraft may include attack helicopter

escorts for ingress and egress protection and to

assist the security element as it deploys into the

LZ. A UH-1N may be necessary to serve in a

C3 capacity as well. 

l XM 777. The XM 777 will provide commanders with more flexibility due to its light weight

and P3I. The XM 777 will be transportable by

the CH-53E, CH-53D, and V-22.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ F-3 

Landing Zone Selection 

The artillery unit recommends the LZ location,

but helicopter units advise on LZ suitability.

During shipboard operations, the flight deck is

the LZ. Flight deck control is provided by the

ship. HST training and assistance may be

requested from the landing support element of the

CSSE. The artillery unit provides instructions to

the transporting unit on the LZ’s location, disposition of lifting equipment, and weight of the

load. During small-scale operations, communications and terminal guidance may be provided by

the artillery unit. LZ selection and planning

factors include LZ size, accessibility, surface

conditions, navigational aids, suitable terrain, and

the threat.

Usually, the longest effective standoff range is

desired. This distance will depend on ammunition

type (propelling charge or projectile). LZ site

studies will be conducted, if time permits. It is

important that the altitude of the target be considered. (A target with a high above gun altitude will

decrease the maximum range of the weapon

system.) At a minimum, an alternate and primary

LZ will be planned. Deception sites will be

planned to further deceive the threat of the true

intent of the mission.

The LZ should accommodate simultaneous insertion of all helicopters with howitzers in the wave

with the most serials.

Natural cover and concealment should be present,

but not so prohibitive as to present a restrictive

XO’s minimum quadrant elevation.

A nearby area must be designated to stage

helicopters during the mission. The situation will

dictate if the staging area will be airborne or in a

nearby LZ. The staging area should be out of

threat reach to minimize potential threat engagement. The area should offer covered and

concealed air routes into and out of the LZ.

LZ soil composition should be appropriate to

accommodate firing high propellant charges.

Surface materials must be stable to prevent debris

from clogging engines. Loss of visibility, possible

personnel injury or damage to the helicopter from

flying objects must be considered, as well as trafficability for vehicle, troop, and logistic mobility.

Grass and vegetation from newly mowed fields

can clog engine intakes. Loose dirt and sand can

damage engines and rotor blades, cause temporary loss of visibility, and is a safety hazard for

the aircrew and lifted troops.

Snow is not recommended as an LZ surface

without prior reconnaissance. It may restrict

visibility, the underlying surface may be unsatisfactory, snow may be too deep for landing, and

surface unevenness may be obscured by drifts.

Dry grasslands represent a fire hazard when

exposed to hot exhaust gases.

Flooded rice fields that are mire and water of greater

depth than is anticipated hinder troop movement.

Obstacles in the LZ must be evaluated. Tall grass

or brush that appears relatively smooth from the

air can conceal humps, boulders or terrain faults

that can damage or tip a landing helicopter. The

LZ should be free of debris, stumps, rocks, holes,

and trenches that exceed 10 inches in height or

depth. Brush, if over 3 feet high, is usually considered restrictive to landing helicopters because of

damage to fuselage and tail rotors.

The nature of approaches to and exits from the LZ

must also be evaluated. It is undesirable to establish LZs in locations that require vertical ascent or

descent by the helicopters. To permit the most

effective use of helicopters, approaches to and

exits from LZs must be clear of communications

wire, trees, powerlines, and other vertical obstacles, particularly when conducting mass landings.

Required LZ site is directly associated with the

height of obstructions surrounding the LZ and

number of helicopters to be landed at one time.
F-4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

To accurately assess these considerations,

accurate intelligence must be available. If intelligence data is not available, it must be arranged

immediately before planning can be completed.

Landing Zone Marking 

How to mark personnel and equipment (howitzer/

ammunition) insertion and extraction points will

be discussed with the pilots during the initial

mission brief to eliminate confusion in the LZ. If

this does not happen, an HLZ brief can inform

the pilots how the LZ is being marked. 

If the LZ is not easily identifiable from the air,

navigational aids should be used to vector aircraft

to desired locations. Navigational aids include

panel markers, strobe lights, smoke grenades, and

radios. Reconnaissance teams and HST personnel,

through the use of electronic or visual means, can

aid in terminal guidance and control of helicopters. An easily identifiable point of reference (a

marking T) should be established to direct aircraft

to specific points in the pick-up and/or LZ.

Daytime Operations

Smoke can draw the pilot’s eyes onto the zone

and demonstrate wind speed/direction. It can also

mark a specific point to insert and extract personnel or equipment.

Air panels may be used to depict the AoF in

addition to a backup for smoke. Caution should

be exercised when emplacing air panels so they

are not disrupted from rotor wash.

Nightime Operations

Infrared/red chem lights are the most visible to

pilots wearing night vision goggles, and can be

used in the same ways as smoke and air panels.

Infrared strobes are extremely useful for marking

during low visibility. Techniques for employing

strobes in an LZ are:

l Strobe on muzzle brake.

l Strobe 20 to 40 meters forward of howitzer on

deck.

Howitzers

Howitzers desire to hover, land, and take off

facing into the wind. When possible, an LZ is

chosen to best accommodate the howitzers, insertion/extraction points, and the wind. Howitzers

should face into the wind.

Ample room should be available to the right of

the howitzer for the personnel extraction point so

personnel are away from the tail rotor when

embarking. If room is not available to the right of

the howitzer, ample room should be to the rear of

the howitzer.

The gun section should wait next to the howitzer

for the helicopter to land at the personnel extraction point. This reduces unnecessary movement

in the LZ and provides additional maneuvering

for the helicopter.

The LZ slope must also be considered and

tempered against the wind speed and direction at

the LZ. The slope must not exceed 8 degrees

where the helicopter is intended to land for risk

of tipping or insufficient rotor clearance. The

slope must not exceed 5 degrees where the howitzer is intended to be positioned as this prevents

the howitzer from firing.

Helicopter Support Team 

HST personnel must be actively involved in the

raid brief and rehearsals. Considerations for
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ F-5 

augmentees to gun crews, security forces, etc.,

must be addressed.

Firing Data

Firing data for all howitzers will be precomputed using BUCS-R if possible. All available

information affecting ballistic computations will

be inputted before the raid. Data will be

computed from each LZ using the lowest charge

to limit any site-to-crest problems. Data will be

given to the section chiefs in advance and will

be based on a map spot grid unless survey

control is established.

Go/No-Go Criteria

Certain criteria must be established before the

mission starts and to aid in deciding if the

mission should continue under duress. These

criteria serve solely as guides with the mission

commander having final deciding authority. Use

the following techniques when determining go/

no-go criteria:

l If both advance party helicopters are lost.

l If the raid element loses more than 50 percent

of its howitzers/ammunition.

l If the minimum number of helicopters required

to conduct the mission is unavailable.

l Loss of communications with the mission commander.

Duties of Key Personnel

Raid Force Commander

l Determine viability of raid.

l Direct the mission planning process.

l Select firing positions maintaining dispersion

between howitzers.

l Ensure the advance party is in the correct LZ.

l Determine the OS and FDC and howitzer locations upon arrival at the LZ.

l Ensure the LZ is secure.

l Supervise the smooth operation of all aspects

of the raid.

l Supervise LZ marking.

l Ensure accountability upon extraction of personnel and equipment.

Executive Officer/Platoon Commander

l Inspect artillery raid personnel, equipment, and

ammunition.

l Ensure communications are maintained with the

RFC and the helicopter mission commander.

l Set up and orient the aiming circle.

l Lay the howitzers.

l Assist in hasty survey, met data, and computing

data as required.

Battery Gunnery Sergeant

l Emplace the local security force.

l Ensure accountability of personnel and equipment.

l Ensure rapid emplacement of howitzers.

l Ensure preparation for rapid extraction.

Operations Chief

l Supervise FDC planning and ensure all BUCS-R

have pre-computed data loaded.

l Set up GPS at aiming circle if survey team is

unavailable.

l Collect data for technical fire direction and

supervise fire controlman computations.

l If time permits, input data in back up computer

system.

l Set up chart and check firing data.

l Supervise issuing of fire commands.

l Ensure all maps, records, and FDC equipment

are extracted.
F-6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Section Chiefs

l Ensure all personnel and equipment are ready

(inspect gear and personnel thoroughly before

the raid).

l Ensure rapid offload of ammunition and gun.

l Begin ammunition preparation before receiving fire commands.

l Supervise the rapid emplacement, firing, and

extraction of the howitzer.

l Maintain communications with the RFC.

l Be prepared to assume security mission on

order.

l Ensure recovery of all personnel and equipment upon extraction.

Fire Controlman

l Input all preplanned data in all BUCS-R before

departing for the raid.

l Prepare charts and records of fire before raid

departure.

l Prepare computer checklist and be prepared to

enter data upon arrival at firing position.

l Maintain records of fire.

l Send fire commands to howitzers once approved

by operations chief.

l Be prepared to receive subsequent corrections.

l Extract all records and equipment.

Radio Operator

l Establish preplanned communications as quickly

as possible and as close to the FDC as terrain and

helicopter routes will allow.

l Establish communications with the following

priorities:

m Observers, as required.

m Helicopters.

m Higher headquarters.

m Simultaneous master station, as required.

l Pass all necessary information to the FDC and

the RFC.

l Maintain communications until directed.

l Recover all communications equipment and

material, including messages and notes, upon

extraction.

Gun Guides

l Set up panel markers/chem lights as briefed to

mark location for the assault element.

l Establish communications with aiming circle/

FDC.

l Record initial deflection.

l Act as a legman under guidance of HST leader,

as required.

l Help provide local security until howitzers

arrive.

l Announce initial deflection to gunner.

l Assist in emplacing, firing, and march ordering

of howitzer.

l Ensure all howitzer equipment is extracted.

Security Element

l Receive briefing on layout of LZ/firing position

before the raid.

l Upon landing, conduct sweep of area.

l Establish perimeter security.

l Report security status as directed to the RFC.

Corpsman

l Have medical equipment necessary for raid

mission.

l Upon landing, stay with FDC.

l Respond to any calls for medical attention.

Survey Personnel (If Required)

l Determine firing point location.

l Establish direction.

HST Leader

l Provide all required personnel and equipment

to quickly guide helicopters onto marked howitzer positions, and recover howitzer at the end

of the mission.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ F-7 

l Inspect howitzers and ammunition slings

before departure. Report findings to the artillery raid commander.

l Assist gun guides in marking howitzer positions.

l Assist in rapid insertion of howitzers.

l Upon the order to march order, inspect howitzer loads and slings and assist in preparing for

extraction.

l Guide helicopters in and supervise the reattaching of howitzers.

Execution Sequence

Insertion (Security Element/Advance Party)

The security element/advance party arrives at the

firing position, secures the site, and establishes

perimeter defense. It performs the following:

l Conducts hasty survey to establish firing position location and direction, as required.

l Establishes communications with observers, the

MEU or ground element, as directed.

l Positions the aiming circle and prepares the

gun position for howitzers.

l Computes firing data if not previously computed.

l Prepares for arrival of the assault element.

Actions in Firing Position

The observer element, if required, reports to the

controlling FDC. The assault element arrives at

the raid site and positions and prepares ammunition once it arrives at the firing position. It then

lays the howitzers; conducts and completes

firing; and prepares the howitzers for extraction.

Extraction

All elements prepare for extraction by collecting

all refuse from the raid site, and prepare to retrograde. Elements extract in the following sequence:

l Assault element.

l Advance party.

l Observer element.

l Security element.

All elements conduct a mission debrief.

Survey Operations

Battalion survey support may not be available

unless a PADS is used via a UH-1. If PADS is

unavailable, the firing battery must use expedient

means to determine direction, location, and

height. Direction is the most important element of

survey. Every available means will be used to

determine an accurate direction. An error in

direction is magnified over distance; an error in

location is constant.

Determining Direction (in Preferred Order)

The PADS contains a gyroscope that will provide

azimuths to +/- 0.4 PE.

The BUCS-R hasty astro program enables the

battery to determine direction to various accuracies depending on the type of instrument. If the

firing battery has attached a battalion surveyor

with a T-2E theodolite, the accuracy of an

astronomic observation with this instrument is

+/- 0.3 mils. If the firing battery is using an

M2A2 aiming circle, the accuracy of an astronomic observation is +/- 2.0 mils. To perform

an astronomic observation, one of the known

celestial bodies—the sun or one of 73 survey

stars—must be visible from the OS. Inclement

weather, heavy overcast conditions or smoke

may negate this method.

The north-finding module is the gyroscope used

with the modular universal laser equipment and

target location designation handoff system. The

north finding module can be placed into a

survey mode that will provide an accurate direction to +/- 2.0 mils.

A declinated M2A2 aiming circle could be used

as a last resort if the instrument was declinated
F-8 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

within 40 kilometers of the firing position. A

declinated aiming circle will provide a direction

to an accuracy of +/- 10.0 mils. 

The declination constant of an aiming circle may

be affected by the strong magnetic field generated by the helicopter’s rotors.

Determining Location

The PLGR with valid crypto variable keys loaded

and verified provides a location to an accuracy of

10 meters circular error probable (CEP). The

PLGR is a hand held unit but cannot provide

accurate direction.

The PADS in a UH-1 will provide location using

10 minute zero-velocity updates to an accuracy of

7 meters CEP between 0 to 65 degrees latitude

north or south and 10 meters CEP between 65 to

75 degrees latitude north or south. The advantage of the PADS is that it provides accurate

direction, location, and height. However, the

PADS/UH-1 must be landed at the OS and the

EOL to establish positioning and orientation.

After determining an accurate direction, a hasty

three-point resection can be performed by using

the BUCS-R, BCS or graphic resection. The

accuracy of a three-point resection depends on

the accuracy of the location of the visible known

points and the angle-measuring instrument available. The accuracy of a three-point resection is

seldom better than 50 meter CEP.

A map spot is the least preferred method of determining location. The accuracy of a map spot

depends on prominent terrain features available,

map accuracy, and the proficiency of the individual performing the map spot. All other means of

determining location will be exhausted before

resorting to this method.

Determining Height (in Preferred Order)

The PADS will provide an accurate height to

3 meters PE. The PADS is more accurate than

the PLGR in location and height. However,

the required logistical support and the fact

that it must be positioned on the OS relegates

this system to the second preferred method.

After determining an accurate direction, a hasty

three-point resection can be performed and the

coordinates used to derive a height from the map.

The map spot method is only used as a last resort

after all other means have been exhausted.

Organization for Movement

Organization of the artillery unit for movement is

an integral part of planning for immediate

employment upon landing. The artillery unit may

be organized into three echelons: assault, resupply or follow-up, and rear.

Assault Echelon

Composition of the assault echelon varies with

the assigned mission, available aircraft, and

duration of the operation. Notionally, the assault

echelon is composed of the advanced party and a

howitzer section. Generally, the assault echelon

consists of the battery elements essential to the

control or delivery of immediate support. Organization of the advanced party depends on the

battery’s composition and the time available for

occupation. An advance party is normally led by

the battery commander and consists of enough

personnel to initiate observation, communications, and survey. The advance party guides the

battery into position. If possible, the advance

party should contain a forklift.

Resupply or Follow-up Echelon

The resupply or follow-up echelon consists of

combat support personnel, supplies, and equipment to sustain the assault echelon until linkup or

extraction. Personnel, supplies, and equipment

are transported to the assault echelon by air or

surface means.
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ F-9 

Rear Echelon

The rear echelon includes all personnel, supplies,

and equipment not included in the assault and

resupply echelons. The rear echelon supports the

assault and resupply echelons by providing

administrative, maintenance, and supply support

in the rear area.

Loading

Loading artillery for movement may commence

during the planning phase and continue through

the movement phase. Internal and external loads

transport artillery personnel, vehicles, equipment, and supplies. Piggyback loads permit the

howitzer and ammunition to be moved by one

helicopter. Establishing loads requires flexibility

in planning the operation, loading of supplies and

equipment, and conducting the operation.

Aircraft Load Data

The proposed load must be within the allowable

cargo load limit of a particular aircraft. The artillery unit obtains the allowable cargo lift from the

helicopter unit. 

Pickup/Landing Zone Organization

The artillery unit is responsible for pickup/LZ

organization. Preparing the pickup zone includes

rigging loads, positioning marking devices,

positioning equipment for rapid pickup, and

controlling incoming aircraft. Initial load preparation should begin at least 2 hours before the first

aircraft arrives. Artillery personnel inspect loads

for completeness and compactness. Loose articles

should be secured by artillery personnel; e.g.,

tents within 50 to 75 meters of the landing site or

along the approach path should be lowered and

secured. The battery retains its firing capability as

long as possible. In organizing the pickup/LZ, the

artillery unit will perform the following:

l Reduce air-to-ground transmissions required

for coordination.

l Position loads to reduce flights over the battery, particularly resupply flights.

l Position loads so the aircraft can approach the

LZ into the wind.

l Facilitate rapid orientation of passengers debarking from the aircraft by using clock direction

with reference to the helicopter’s nose.

Terminal Control

Terminal control and responsibility are established in the planning phase. Normally, the HST

provides helicopter control. In the absence of HST,

the artillery unit controls incoming aircraft in the

pickup zone. The unit provides threat situation,

wind direction and velocity, surface conditions,

landing direction, and clearance information to the

flight. Landing site azimuth, field elevation,

landing information, and other information may

also be provided, when available.

Movement

Final coordination and briefings are completed

before lift-off of the advance party. Confirmation

is made on the exact location of the LZ, radio

frequencies, call signs, flight route, order of

march, and number of sorties. The interval

between the arrival and departure of helicopters

depends on the plan of maneuver, conditions in

the LZ, and number of helicopters the LZ will

accommodate. Ideally, the advance party should

have enough time on the ground to prepare the

site while the battery awaits the order to move

forward. However, in fast-moving situations, the
F-10 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

advance party may be followed by the remainder

of the assault echelon by as little as 5 minutes.

Movement Control

Helicopter control is established through radio

transmissions or a color-code system. Radio

control is slow and requires numerous transmissions to complete a landing. The color-code

system conspicuously displays a colored marker

on the ground to identify the LZ. Each load is

then assigned a color that is conspicuously

displayed on the load. The ground guide in the

LZ wears an air-ground recognition vest or uses

an air-ground recognition panel the same color as

the assigned load. The pilot knows the color of

his load before reaching the LZ. En route, the

pilot notifies the terminal controller of the load’s

color and proceeds directly to the marked site or

to the appropriate ground guide.

To instruct the pilot, ground guides use arm-andhand signals and wear a colored vest during

daylight operations; at night, ground guides use

colored lights or illuminated batons. The reference

point used to guide helicopters is the color-coded

load or panel marker. The helicopter crew chief

can guide the helicopter to its pickup or release

point. The crew chief observes the load or the

panel marker through the helicopter hook hatch

and directs the pilot to the pickup or release point

via the helicopter intercom.

Occupation of Position

During the planning phase of a battery operation,

the battery commander tentatively selects the

location of key installations, plans the organization of the prospective LZ, and coordinates

procedures for control of aircraft during the

occupation. Immediately after the advance party

arrives in the LZ, the battery commander designates battery center and positions the T-marker.

Howitzers are released as near their firing

positions as possible. A guide for each howitzer

section clears the immediate position area of any

loose debris and obstacles, prepares the position

to receive equipment, and displays a marking

device of the same color as that assigned to his

section. Once the battery is on the ground,

standard firing battery procedures are followed.

Table F-1. Notional Artillery Battery Lift (Advanced Party).

Unit Echelon Lift # Load Composition1

M198 Battery

(6 guns)

Advanced Party 1 Personnel:

 Battery Commander

 FDC, Comm, Terminal Controllers

Advanced Party 2 Personnel:

 Gun Guides, Security

Equipment:

 MC-4000 Forklift

Howitzer Section 3-8 Personnel:

 Gun Section

Equipment:

 M198 and Ammunition2

Resupply Echelon Remainder of battery (personnel, equipment, and supplies) may be 

transported by helicopter or link up by ground means.

NOTE: The assault echelon is composed of the advanced party and howitzer section.

1. The actual load composition depends on the type of helicopter and lift capability.

2. Quantity of ammunition varies with the net type, helicopter lift capability, and type of ammunition and packaging.
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ F-11 

Table F-4. Example Artillery Raid Ammunition Requirements.

The type and amount of small arms is based on the security level required. The type and amount of artillery ammunition is based on lift availability, 

munitions effects tables, and/or attack guidance.

Table F-2. Helicopter Life Capacity

Planning Guidance.

Helicopter Lift Capacity (lbs)*

CH-53D

CH-53E

13,000

30,000

* Based on standard day conditions (15 degrees C, sea level, no wind or 

humidity) and 1 hour and 45 minutes of fuel onboard.

Table F-3. Cargo Net Capacity Planning Guidance.

Net

Cargo Volume

ft3lbs

A-22 Bag 66 2,500

5,000 Net 125 5,000

10,000 Net 380 10,000

Small Arms

DODIC NOMENCLATURE ROUNDS PER WEAPON

A363 9mm ball 30

A071 5.56 ball 180

A131 7.62 linked ball 400

A576 .50 cal ball 200

B546 40mm HEDP 10

G881 M67 frag grenade 2 per man

G900 thermite grenade 2 per section chief

M198/LW 155 155mm Ammunition

DODIC NOMENCLATURE ROUNDS PER HOWITZER

D563 shell DPICM 16

N286 M577 fuze MTSQ 16

N523 M82 primer 16

D541/D533 propellant charge (GB/WB) 16

Command Element (same for all security levels)

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

1 1stLt XO/Plt Cmdr 0802 9mm

2 Sgt RTO 2531 M16A2 1

3 Cpl/LCpl RTO 2531 M-203 1

Support Element (same for all security levels)

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

4 SSgt operations chief 0848 9mm

5 Sgt artillery mechanic M16A2

6 Cpl fire controlman 0844 M16A2 1

7 Cpl HST 0481 M16A2 1

8 LCpl HST 0481 M-203 1

9 HM3 corpsman 8404 9mm

10 Cpl/Pvt wireman 2512 M16A2 3

11 Sgt survey 0843 M16A2 1,3

12 LCpl/Pvt survey 0843 M16A2 1,3
F-12 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table F-5. Example Artillery Raid Task Organization.

Assault Element (same for all security levels)

Gun Number - One

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

13 SSgt/Sgt Section Chief 0811 9mm

14 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M-203 1

15 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

16 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

17 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

18 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

19 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

20 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

21 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

Gun Number - Two

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

22 SSgt/Sgt Section Chief 0811 9mm

23 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M-203 1

24 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

25 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

26 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

27 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

28 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

29 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

30 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1

Gun Number – Three

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

31 SSgt/Sgt Section Chief 0811 9mm

32 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M-203 1,2

33 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

34 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

35 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

36 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

37 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

38 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

39 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

Gun Number – Four

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

40 SSgt/Sgt Section Chief 0811 9mm

41 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M-203 1,2

42 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

43 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

44 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

45 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

46 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

47 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

48 Cpl/Pvt Gun Crewman 0811 M16A2 1,2

Security Level I

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

49 Cpl M240G Team Leader 0811 M16A2

50 LCpl/Pvt M240G Gunner 0811 M240G
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ F-13 

Table F-5. Example Artillery Raid Task Organization (Continued).

Table F- 6. Helicopter Lift Requirement Matrix.

Security Level II. In addition to line numbers 49 and 50, the following personnel will be included:

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

51 SSgt Security Chief 0811 9mm

52 Sgt Assistant Security Chief 0811 M16A2

53 Cpl M240G Team Leader 0811 M16A2

54 LCpl/Pvt M240G Gunner 0811 M240G

55 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

56 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

57 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M-203

58 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

59 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

60 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M-203

61 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

62 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

Security Level III. In addition to line numbers 49 through 62, the following personnel will be included:

LINE # RANK BILLET MOS WEAPON NOTE

63 1Lt/2Lt OIC Security 0802 9mm

64 Sgt Assistant Security Chief 0811 M16A2

65 Sgt M-2 Team Leader 0811 M16A2

66 Cpl M-2 Gunner 0811 M-2/9mm

67 Cpl/Pvt M-2 Assistant Gunner 0811 M16A2

68 Cpl/Pvt M-2 Ammo Man 0811 M16A2

69 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

70 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M-203

71 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

72 Cpl/Pvt Security Man 0811 M16A2

NOTES:

1. May act as part of security element.

2. Will not participate in raid unless more than two howitzers are required.

3. As required.

The CH-53D and V-22 may be used in place of the CH-53E when operating with the LW 155.

Howitzers Security Levels CH-46E CH-53E UH-1N AH-1W V-22

1 M198 I 2 1 1 2

II 3 1 1 2

III 4 1 1 2

2 M198 I 2 2 1 2

II 3 2 1 2

III 3 2 1 2

3 M198 I 3 3 1 2

II 3 3 1 2

III 4 3 1 2

4 M198 I 3 4 1 2

II 4 4 1 2

III 4 4 1 2

NOTES: 

1. CH-53D/E may be used in place of CH-46’s.

 2. UH-1N and AH-1W helicopters will be used for command and control, communications retransmission, aerial observation, escort, fire support or PADS, as required.
F-14 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Table F-7. Example Helicopter Wave and Serial Assignment Table.

This table provides helicopter embarkation guidance for personnel, howitzers, and ammunition in support of helicopterborne artillery raids. It is intended 

as an initial planning guide with exact assignments depending on mission and threat. The wave number describes the order of arrival in zone. The helo 

number is the number of the helicopter the howitzer/ammunition/personnel will embark on. The remarks column describes the duty of the embarked 

elements. The gun crew may act as the security element to alleviate the number of personnel and air support necessary for the mission.

Two Howitzers, Security Level I

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

4-12 Support 1 1 Advance Party

49-50 Security 1 1 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 1 2 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 1 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

Two Howitzers, Security Level II

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

1-3 Command 2 2 Advance Party

4-12 Support 2 2 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

Two Howitzers, Security Level III

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

4-12 Support 1 2 Advance Party

63-72 Security 1 3 Secures Position

13-21 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

Three Howitzers, Security Level I

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

4-12 Support 1 1 Advance Party

49-50 Security 1 1 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 2 2 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

31-39 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

Three Howitzers, Security Level II

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

4-12 Support 1 2 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

31-39 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ F-15 

Table F-7. Example Helicopter Wave and Serial Assignment Table (Continued).

Three Howitzers, Security Level III

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

1-3 Command 1 2 Advance Party

4-12 Support 1 2 Advance Party

63-72 Security 1 3 Secures Position

13-21 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

22-30 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

31-39 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer

Four Howitzers, Security Level I

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

4-12 Support 1 1 Advance Party

49-50 Security 1 1 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 2 2 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

22-30 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

31-39 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

40-48 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

Four Howitzers, Security Level II

LINE # ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

1-3 Command 1 2 Advance Party

4-12 Support 1 2 Advance Party

13-21 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

22-30 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

31-39 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

40-48 Assault 2 6 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howtizer*

Four Howitzers, Security Level III

LINE# ELEMENT WAVE # HELO # REMARKS

1-3 Command 1 1 Advance Party

49-62 Security 1 1 Secures Position

4-12 Support 1 2 Advance Party

63-72 Security 1 2 Secures Position

13-21 Assault 2 3 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

22-30 Assault 2 4 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

31-39 Assault 2 5 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

40-48 Assault 2 6 Gun Crew, Ammo Pallet(s), Howitzer*

* It may be necessary to divide this wave into two separate waves if the LZ does not support the simultaneous insertion of four howitzers.
F-16 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Figure F-1. Example Raid Execution Checklist.

# Event/Situation RPT NET From To Codeword

Planned

Time Lines

Actual

Time Lines Remarks

1 Helo’s launched

2 Advance party in LZ

3 LZ secured

4 Howitzers in LZ

5 Fire capable

6 Fire mission complete

7 Emergency extract

8 MEDEVAC

9 Force ready for extraction

10 All forces extracted

11 All forces recovered

12 Abort

13 Using alternate LZ/FP

14 Threat contact

15

16

17

18

19

20
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ F-17 

ACCURATE TARGET LOCATION

o Source

o Accuracy

o Observer

o ACCURATE BATTERY LOCATION

o METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION

o WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION DATA

o COMPUTATIONAL PROCEDURES

o WEATHER

o Astro

o Illumination

TERRAIN

o Soil

o Vegetation (firing point and target)

THREAT CAPABILITIES

o Counter fire

o AAAM

o EW

o Reaction force

TARGET

o Dimensions

o Composition

o Posture

INDIGENOUS POPULATION

o Proximity to firing point

o Proximity to target

IMAGERY

o Photos

o Tamp/Togo

o Autocads

Figure F-2. Example Planning Considerations Checklist.
F-18 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Hasty Survey Kits Quantity

BUCS-R with survey chip 1

BUCS-R with REV 1 chip 1

Map 1

Pizza cutter (GTA 6-5-1) 1

3-point resection device 1

Antistatic bag for BUCS-R 1

Hasty astro preplanned data:

 Rough data to celestial bodies

 Scaled data to DAP

 Scaled declination constant

 Satellite data

XO’S handbook 1

Applicable TFT 1

Calculator 1

8-inch protractor 1

Plotting scale 1

Map case 1

Clipboards 1

Pencil/pen 2

FDC Bag

Chart board 1

Chart paper, scaled 1

RDP 1

Pizza cutter (GTA 6-5-1) 1

Target grid 1

Chart bag 1

Map 1

FDC Brief Case

Brief Case 1

Applicable TFT(s) 1

Applicable addendum(s) 1

Applicable GFT(s) 1

Applicable GST(s) 1

BUCS-R with REV 1 chip 1

Plotting pins 1 Box

Plotting scale 1

8-inch protractor 1

6H pencil 2

4H pencil 2

2H pencil 2

Blue pencil 2

Antistatic bag for BUCS-R 1

Map 1

Clipboards 1

Record of fire 1 Pad

Figure F-3. Example Raid Equipment List.
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ F-19 

Gun Guide Kit Quantity

Lensatic compass 1

Hammer 1

Stakes and tape 1 Set

Panel markers with stakes As directed

Chem lights As directed

Infrared strobes As directed

Pantel stake 1

Note pad 1

Pencil/pen 2

Raid HST Kit

Grounding rod 1

LZ marking light 1

Gloves, leatherman workman’s 1 Pair

Orange vests 1

Goggles 1

Cone flashlight 2 

Chem lights As directed

Infrared strobes As directed

Raid Mechanics Tool Bag

Tool bag 1

Flat top screwdrivers 2

Adjustable wrench 2

Box wrenches 1 Set

Brush, cleaning 1

Figure F-3. Example Raid Equipment List (Continued).
F-20 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

Figure F-6. Example Howitzer Pick-Up Point 

Lighting.

Line Information Remarks

1 Mission number

2

Location 

COOR/RAD/DME)

3 Unit call sign

4 Frequency Primary

UHF ____/FM 

____

Secondary

UHF ____/FM 

____

5 LZ marking

6 Wind direction/velocity

7 Elevation/size

8 Obstacles

9

Friendly position

(direction/distance)

10

Threat position

(direction/distance)

11

Last fire received

(time/type)

12 Direction of fire/distance

13

Clearance to fire

(direction/distance)

14

Approach/retirement 

(recommended)

15 Personnel/equipment

16 Other

Figure F-4. Helicopter Landing Zone

Brief.

Figure F-5. Example Artillery Raid Landing 
APPENDIX G

GLOSSARY

Section I. Abbreviations and Acronyms

AAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .avenues of approach

ACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aviation combat element

ADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air defense artillery

ACON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . administrative control

ADAM . . . . . . . . . area denial artillery munitions

ADAM-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area denial artillery

munitions-long duration

ADAM-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area denial artillery

munitions-short duration

AFATDS. . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Field Artillery

Tactical Data System

AFSC . . . . . . . . assistant fire support coordinator

ALOC . . . . . . . . . . . . administrative and logistics

operation center

AMAL. . . . . . . authorized medical allowance list

AMREP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ammunition report

AO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .area of operations

AoF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . azimuth of fire

AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area of responsibility

APICM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . antipersonnel improved

conventional munition

arty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .artillery

ASP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ammunition supply point

ASR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assault report request

ATCCS . . . . . . . . . Army Tactical Command and

Control System

ATI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . artillery target intelligence

ATIZ . . . . . . . . . .artillery target intelligence zone

AXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assistant executive officer

BA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . basic allowance

BAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battalion aid station

BB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . basebleed

BBDPICM . . . . . . . . . . . base-burn dual purpose

improved conventional

munition

BCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery computer system

BDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battle damage assessment

BLT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battalion landing team

BMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Boevaya Mashina Pekhota

bn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battalion

BOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery operations center

Btry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery

BUCS-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . backup computer

system-replacement

C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .command and control

C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .command, control, and

communications

cpl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . corporal

CAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . close air support

CBAE . . . . . . . . . . commander’s battlespace area

evaluation

CBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . counterbattery radar

CCIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . commander’s critical

information requirement

CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .commander

CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command element

CEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circular error probable

CFFZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . call for fire zone

CFL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinated fire line

CFZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . critical friendly zone

CG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . commanding general

CLGP . . . . . . cannon-launched guided projectile

CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . corrective maintenance

CO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . commanding officer

COA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . course of action

COC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat operations center

COF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . conduct of fire

comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . communications

CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command post

CPREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command post report

CSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . common sensor boundary

CSMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . close station march order

CSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .controlled supply rate

CSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . combat service support

CSSD . . . . . . combat service support detachment

CSSE. . . . . . . . . .combat service support element

CZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .censor zone

D3A. . . . . . . . . decide, detect, deliver, and assess

DASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct air support center

dig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . digital

DISREP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displacement report

DOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . day of ammunition

DOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Department of Defense
G-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

DODAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . Department of Defense

activity code

DODIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Department of Defense

identification code

DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . day of supply

DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .decision point

DPICM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .dual purpose improved

conventional munition

DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct support

DST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decision support template

DTED . . . . . . . . . . . .digital terrain elevation data

DTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . date-time group

DVST . . . . . . . . . . digital voice secure telephone

EEFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . essential elements of

 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .friendly information

EFAT . . . . . . . . . . . . essential field artillery task

EFST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .essential fire support task

EOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . end of orienting line

EPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enemy prisoner of war

EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .electronic warfare

FAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .forward air controller

FAC (A) . . . . . . forward air controller (airborne)

FASCAM . . . . . . . . . family of scatterable mines

FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .facsimile

FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fire direction

FDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire direction center

FDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fire direction officer

FEBA . . . . . . . . . . forward edge of the batle area

FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . force fires coordinator

FFCC. . . . . . . . . . . force fires coordination center

FFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire for effect

FFIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . friendly forces information

requirement

FFPAS. . . . Fire Finder Position Analysis System

FIRECAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fire capability report

FIREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . firing report

FLASHREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flash report

FLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . .forward line of own troops

FMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fleet Marine Force

FMFM. . . . . . . . . . . . Fleet Marine Force manual

FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward observer

FPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .final protective fire

FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire protective line

FSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support coordinator

FSCC. . . . . . . . . .fire support coordination center

FSCL. . . . . . . . . . . .fire support coordination line

FSCM . . . . . . . fire support coordinating measure

FSSG. . . . . . . . . . . . . force service support group

FSO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire support officer

FTSO. . . . . . . . . . . . . fire tactical systems officer

FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .forward

GCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ground combat element

GDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gun display unit

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . global positioning system

GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .general support

GS-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . general support-reinforcing

GySgt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gunnery sergeant

HA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hide area

HC. . . . . . . . . hexachloroethane (artillery smoke)

HE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive

HE/Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive/ fuze quick

HF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high frequency

HMMWV . . . . . . . . . high-mobility multipurpose

wheeled vehicle

HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . height of burst

how . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . howitzer

HPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .high-payoff target

HQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . headquarters

HST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helicopter support team

HVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-value target

ICM. . . . . . . . . improved conventional munitions

ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . identification

IFSAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .initial fire support

automated system

illum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . illumination

IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . .intelligence operations center

IPB . . . . . . . . . . . . intelligence preparation of the

battlespace

IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . information requirement

KIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . killed in action

KOCOA . . . . . . . . . .key terrain; observation and

fields of fire; cover and concealment;

obstacles; avenues of approach

kph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometers per hour

LAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . low altitude air defense

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local area network

LAR . . . . . . . . . . . .light armored reconnaissance

LCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lightweight computer unit

LD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line of departure

LNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liaison officer

LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lines of communications

LOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line of sight

LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . listening post

LZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .landing zone
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ G-3 

m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter 

MACS . . . . . . . . .modular artillery charge system

MAGTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine air-ground

task force

MAP . . . . . . . . . . .mission, ammunition, position

MAPS . . . . . . . . . . Modular Azimuth Positioning

System

MAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine aircraft wing

MBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main battle area

MCFSS . . . . . Marine Corps Fire Support System

MCOO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modified combined

obstacle overlay

MCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance contact team

MCDP . . . . . . Marine Corps doctrinal publication

MCPP . . . . . . . . .Marine Corps Planning Process

MCWP . . .Marine Corps warfighting publication

MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . meteorological data system

MDSS II . . . . . . . . . Marine air-ground task force

(MAGTF) Deployment

System II

MEB . . . . . . . . . . .Marine Expeditionary Brigade

MEF . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine Expeditionary Force

met . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meteorology

METT-T . . .mission, enemy, terrain and weather,

troops and support availabletime available

MEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine Expeditionary Unit

MHE . . . . . . . . . . . . material handling equipment

MOFA. . . . . . . . . . . multioption fuze for artillery

MLRS . . . . . . . . . . multiple launch rocket system

mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .millimeter

MMS . . . . . . . . metereological measuring system

MOPP . . . . . . . . . . . . mission-oriented protective

posture

MORTREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mortar report

MOS . . . . . . . . . . military occupational specialty

MPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mean point of impact

MRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .meals ready to eat

MRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multiple rocket launcher

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .main supply route

MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance support team

MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical time

MTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .message to observer

MV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . muzzle velocity

MVV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . muzzle velocity variance

NAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . named area of interest

NBC . . . . . . . . .nuclear, biological, and chemical

NCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .noncommissioned officer

NGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . naval gunfire

NGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . national geodetic survey

NIMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .National Imagery and

Mapping Agency

NSFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .naval surface fire support

OL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orienting line

O/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on-order

OOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .order of battle

OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . observation post

OPFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operational facility

OPORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation order

OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orienting station

P3I. . . . . . . . . pre-planned program improvement

PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . position area

PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . position and azimuth

determining system

PCFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .priority in calls for fire

PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point detonating

PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . principal direction of fires

PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .probable error

PeD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . probable error in deflection

PeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .probable error in range

PIAFS . . . . portable inductive artillery fuze setter

PIBAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pilot balloon

PIR . . . . . . . . . . priority intelligence requirement

PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patrol leader

PLGR . . . . . . . . . . . .precision lightweight global

positioning system receiver

PLRS. . . . . . . . position location reporting system

PM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . preventive maintenance

POL. . . . . . . . . . . . petroleum, oils, and lubricants

pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .position

pvt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . private

QE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quadrant elevation

R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reinforcing

RAAMS . . . . . . . .remote antiarmor mine system

RAAMS-L . . . . . . . . . . . .remote antiarmor mine

system-long duration

RAAMS-S. . . . . . . . . . . . .remote antiarmor mine

system-short duration

RAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rocket assisted projectile

regt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . regiment

rein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .reinforced

RFC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . raid force commander

RLT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .regimental landing team

ROE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rules of engagement

RRP. . . . . . . . . . . .repair and replenishment point
G-4 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

R&S . . . . . . . . . reconnaissance and surveillance

RSOP . . . . . . . . . . reconnaissance, selection, and

occupation of position

RSTA . . . . . . . reconnaissance, surveillance, and

target acquisition

SADARM . . . . sense and destroy armor munition

SALUTE . . . . . . . . . .size, activity, location, unit,

time, and equipment

SCAR . . . strike coordination and reconnaissance

SCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . survey control point

SCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .single-channel radio

SEAD . . . . . . .suppression of enemy air defenses

sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . second

SHELREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shelling report

SIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . survey information center

SITEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .situation template

SITMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . situation map

SLCP. . . . .ships loading characteristics pamphlet

SMK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .smoke

SOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . special operations capable

SOP . . . . . . . . . . . . .standing operating procedure

SPEARR . . . . . . . . . . security, position, establish

communications, azimuth of fire,

record, reconnaissance

SPOTREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spot report

TACC . . . . . .Marine tactical air command center

TACC(A) . . . . tactical air coordinator (airborne)

TAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target area of interest

TAREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target report

TBMCS. . . . . . . . . . . . theater battle management

core system

TCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tactical combat operations

T/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table of equipment

tgt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target

TIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target intelligence officer

TLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target location error

TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . technical manual

TNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .trinitrotoluene

T/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table of organization

TOF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time of flight

TOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time on target

TPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target processing center

TPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . timed phase line

TPME . . . . . . . . . . . task, purpose, method, effect

TVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .target value analysis

UAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .unmanned aerial vehicle

UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ultrahigh frequency

USMC. . . . . . . . . . . .United States Marine Corps

USMCR . . . . . . . . . .United States Marine Corps

Reserve

USN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . United States Navy

UTM . . . . . . . . . . . .universal transverse mercator

VA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vertical angle

VE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . velocity error

VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . very high frequency

VT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .variable time

WIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...wounded in action

WP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . white phosphorus

XO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .executive officer
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ G-5 

Section II. Definitions

acquire—1. When applied to acquisition radars,

the process of detecting the presence and location

of a target in sufficient detail to permit identification. 2. When applied to tracking radars, the proccess of positioning a radar beam so that a target is

in that beam to permit the effective employment of

weapons. See also target acquisition.

adjust fire—In artillery and naval gunfire support: 1. An order or request to initiate an adjustment of fire. 2. A method of control transmitted in

the call for fire by the observer or spotter to indicate that he will control the adjustment. (JP 1-02)

adjustment of fire—Process used in artillery and

naval gunfire to obtain correct bearing, range, and

height of burst (if time fuzes are used) when engaging a target by observed fire See also spot. (JP 1-02)

administrative control—Direction or exercise of

authority over subordinate or other organizations

in respect to administration and support, including organization of Service forces, control of

resources and equipment, personnel management, unit logistics, individual and unit training,

readiness, mobilization, demobilization, discipline, and other matters not included in the operational missions of the subordinate or other

organizations Also called ADCON. (JP 1-02)

advance party—A group of unit representatives

dispatched to a planned new position in advance

of the main body to prepare the position for the

arrival of the unit and its equipment.

aiming circle—An optical instrument used to

orient the tube of an indirect fire weapon in a

desired direction. This instrument can measure

both the horizontal and vertical angles.

aiming post—A striped rod used in pairs as a

close-in aiming point.

air defense—All defensive measures designed to

destroy attacking enemy aircraft or missiles in the

Earth’s envelope of atmosphere, or to nullify or

reduce the effectiveness of such attack. (JP 1-02)

alternate position—The position given to a

weapon, unit, or individual to be occupied when

the primary position becomes untenable or unsuitable for carrying out the mission. The alternate

position is located so that the unit can continue the

mission it had when in its primary position.

ammunition—See munition.

ammunition report—A report used to maintain

an accurate ammunition status of firing units.

angle T—In artillery and naval gunfire support,

the angle formed by the intersection of the guntarget line and the observer-target line. (JP 1-02)

area fire—A volume of fire delivered in a prescribed area, generally for neutralization effects.

area of operations—An operational area defined

by the joint force commander for land and naval

forces. Areas of operation do not typically encompass the entire operational area of the joint force

commander, but should be large enough for component commanders to accomplish their missions

and protect their forces. Also called AO. (JP 1-02)

area of responsibility—1. The geographical area

associated with a combatant command within

which a combatant commander has authority to

plan and conduct operations. 2. In naval usage, a

predefined area of enemy terrain for which supporting ships are responsible for covering by fire

on known targets or targets of opportunity and by

observation. Also called AOR. (JP 1-02)

area target—A target consisting of an area

rather than a single point. (JP 1-02)

artillery fire plan—A part of the operation plan

of the supported unit or force which contains the

necessary information and instructions pertaining to the employment of artillery. The fire plan

consists of three parts: the basic document, the

target list, and schedules of fires.

artillery groupment—Temporary formations

used when one unit must exercise greater control
G-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

over another unit and is inherent in a reinforcing

mission. When a suitable artillery headquarters is

unavailable, an artillery battalion or battery may

be attached to another of like size to form an

artillery groupment.

artillery preparation—Artillery fire delivered

before an attack to destroy, neutralize, or suppress the enemy’s defense and to disrupt communications and disorganize the enemy’s defense.

The preparation is planned by a direct support

field artillery battalion or higher echelon in coordination with the ground commander. It is an

intense volume of fire delivered in accordance

with a time schedule. The fires normally commence prior to H-hour and may extend beyond it.

They may start at a prescribed time or be held on

call. The duration of the preparation is influenced by factors such as the fire support needs of

the entire force, number of targets and firing

assets, and available ammunition. (FM 101-5-1/

MCRP 5-12A)

artillery target intelligence zone—An area in

enemy territory that the maneuver commander

wants to monitor closely. Weapon locations in

this zone will be reported immediately. Their priority is exceeded only by targets in a critical

friendly zone or a call-for-fire zone.

assault fire—1. That fire delivered by attacking

troops as they close with the enemy. 2. In artillery, extremely accurate, short-range destruction

fire at point targets. (JP 1-02) 

assign—1. To place units or personnel in an

organization where such placement is relatively

permanent, and/or where such organization controls and administers the units or personnel for

the primary function, or greater portion of the

functions, of the unit or personnel. 2. To detail

individuals to specific duties or functions where

such duties or functions are primary and/or relatively permanent See also attach. (JP 1-02)

attach—1. The placement of units or personnel

in an organization where such placement is relatively temporary. 2. The detailing of individuals

to specific functions where such functions are

secondary or relatively temporary, e.g., attached

for quarters and rations; attached for flying duty

See also assign. (JP 1-02)

at my command—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, the command used when it is desired to

control the exact time of delivery of fire. (JP 1-02)

aviation combat element—The core element of

a Marine air ground-task force (MAGTF) that is

task-organized to conduct aviation operations.

The aviation combat element (ACE) provides all

or a portion of the six functions of Marine aviation necessary to accomplish the MAGTF’s mission. These functions are antiair warfare,

offensive air support, assault support, electronic

warfare, air reconnaissance, and control of aircraft and missiles. The ACE is usually composed

of an aviation unit headquarters and various other

aviation units or their detachments. It can vary in

size from a small aviation detachment of specifically required aircraft to one or more Marine aircraft wings. The ACE itself is not a formal

command. Also called ACE. (JP 1-02) 

azimuth of fire—The direction, expressed in

mils, that a battery is laid (oriented) on when it

occupies a position.

backup computer system—A hand-held computer used as the primary backup to the battery

computer system. 

barrage fire—Fire which is designed to fill a

volume of space or area rather than aimed specifically at a given target. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

base-ejection shell—A type of projectile that

ejects its payload from the base, such as the

improved conventional munition projectile.
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ G-7 

basic load—The quantity of supplies required to

be on hand within, and which can be moved by, a

unit or formation. It is expressed according to the

wartime organization of the unit or formation and

maintained at the prescribed levels. (JP 1-02)

basic load of ammunition—The amount of

ammunition a unit is authorized to maintain to

initiate combat and sustain itself until resupplied.

battery center—A point on the ground, the coordinates of which are used as a reference indicating the location of the battery in the production of

firing data. Also called chart location of the battery. (JP 1-02)

battery computer system—An automated data

processing system located in the firing battery.

Consists of three major components: lightweight

computer unit, power distribution unit, and 1 to 12

gun display units. Used to compute accurate firing

data and as a digital communications interface.

battery operations center—A facility established to serve as an alternate fire direction center and as the battery command post.

blood agent—A chemical compound, including

the cyanide group, that affects bodily functions

by preventing the normal utilization of oxygen by

body tissues. (JP 1-02)

boresighting—The process by which the optical

axes of the weapon sights are aligned parallel to

the axis of the cannon tube. The primary methods of boresighting are the distant aiming point,

the testing target, or standard angle. Boresight is

verified with the M140/M139 alignment device.

caliber—1. The diameter of the bore of a

weapon; obtained in rifled weapons by measuring

between opposite lands. 2. Diameter of a projectile. 3. Unit of measure used to express the length

of the bore of a weapon. The number of calibers

is determined by dividing the length of the bore

of the weapon (from breech face of the tube to

the muzzle) by the diameter of its bore.

call for fire—A request for fire containing data

necessary for obtaining the required fire on a target. (JP 1-02)

call-for-fire zone—An area in enemy territory

that the maneuver commander considers

extremely important to neutralize fires from by

immediate counterfire. (FM 6-121)

cancel—In artillery and naval gunfire support,

the term, “cancel,” when coupled with a previous

order, other than an order for a quantity or type of

ammunition, rescinds that order. (JP 1-02)

cancel check firing—The order to rescind check

firing. (JP 1-02)

cannot observe—A type of fire control which

indicates that the observer or spotter will be

unable to adjust fire, but believes a target exists at

the given location and is of sufficient importance

to justify firing upon it without adjustment or

observation. (JP 1-02)

cease fire—A command given to air defense

artillery units to refrain from firing on, but to

continue to track, an airborne object Missiles

already in flight will be permitted to continue to

intercept. (JP 1-02)

cease loading—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, the command used during firing of two

or more rounds to indicate the suspension of

inserting rounds into the weapon. (JP 1-02)

centers of gravity—Those characteristics, capabilities, or localities from which a military force

derives its freedom of action, physical strength,

or will to fight. (JP 1-02)

centigray—A unit of absorbed dose of radiation

(one centigray equals one rad). The term centigray (1/100 of a gray) (one gray equals 100 rads)

has replaced the term rad and is the equivalent of

one rad. Also called a cGy.
G-8 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

charge—1. The amount of propellant required

for a fixed, semi-fixed, or separate loading projectile, round or shell It may also refer to the

quantity of explosive filling contained in a bomb,

mine or the like. 2. In combat engineering, a

quantity of explosive, prepared for demolition

purposes. (JP 1-02)

check firing—In artillery and naval gunfire support, a command to cause a temporary halt in firing. (JP 1-02)

checkpoint—1. A predetermined point on the

surface of the Earth used as a means of controlling movement, a registration target for fire

adjustment, or reference for location. 2. Center of

impact; a burst center. 3. Geographical location

on land or water above which the position of an

aircraft in flight may be determined by observation or by electrical means. 4. A place where military police check vehicular or pedestrian traffic

in order to enforce circulation control measures

and other laws, orders, and regulations. (JP 1-02)

chemical agent—A chemical substance which is

intended for use in military operations to kill,

seriously injure, or incapacitate personnel

through its physiological effects. The term

excludes riot control agents, herbicides, smoke,

and flame. 

chemical defense—The methods, plans and procedures involved in establishing and executing

defensive measures against attack utilizing chemical agents. See also NBC defense. (JP 1-02)

chemical dose—The amount of chemical agent,

expressed in milligrams, that is taken or absorbed

by the body. (JP 1-02)

circular error probable—An indicator of the

delivery accuracy of a weapon system, used as a

factor in determining probable damage to a target It is the radius of a circle within which half of

a missile’s projectiles are expected to fall. Also

called CEP. (JP 1-02)

close column—A convoy in which vehicles

move at intervals of less than 100 meters.

close support—That action of the supporting

force against targets or objectives which are sufficiently near the supported force as to require

detailed integration or coordination of the supporting action with the fire, movement, or other

actions of the supported force. See also direct

support; general support; mutual support; support. (JP 1-02)

close supporting fire—Fire placed on enemy

troops, weapons, or positions which, because of

their proximity, present the most immediate and

serious threat to the supported unit. See also supporting fire. (JP 1-02)

collective call sign—Any call sign which represents two or more facilities, commands, authorities, or units. The collective call sign for any of

these includes the commander thereof and all

subordinate commanders therein. See also call

sign. (JP 1-02)

collocation—The physical placement of two or

more detachments, units, organizations, or facilities at a specifically defined location. (JP 1-02)

combat power—The total means of destructive

and/or disruptive force which a military unit/formation can apply against the opponent at a given

time. (JP 1-02)

combat service support—The essential capabilities, functions, activities, and tasks necessary to

sustain all elements of operating forces in theater

at all levels of war. Within the national and theater logistic systems, it includes but is not limited to that support rendered by service forces in

ensuring the aspects of supply, maintenance,

transportation, health services, and other services

required by aviation and ground combat troops to

permit those units to accomplish their missions in

combat. Combat service support encompasses

those activities at all levels of war that produce

sustainment to all operating forces on the battlefield. (JP 1-02) Also called CSS.

combat service support element—The core element of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF)

that is task-organized to provide the combat service
Artillery Operations ____________________________________________________________________________________________ G-9 

support necessary to accomplish the MAGTF mission. The combat service support element varies in

size from a small detachment to one or more force

service support groups. It provides supply, maintenance, transportation, general engineering, health services, and a variety of other services to the MAGTF.

The combat service support element itself is not a

formal command. Also called CSSE. (JP 1-02) 

command—1. The authority that a commander in

the Armed Forces lawfully exercises over subordinates by virtue of rank or assignment. Command

includes the authority and responsibility for effectively using available resources and for planning

the employment of, organizing, directing, coordinating, and controlling military forces for the

accomplishment of assigned missions. It also

includes responsibility for health, welfare, morale,

and discipline of assigned personnel. 2. An order

given by a commander; that is, the will of the commander expressed for the purpose of bringing

about a particular action. 3. A unit or units, an

organization, or an area under the command of one

individual. (JP 1-02)

command and control—The exercise of authority and direction by a properly designated commander over assigned and attached forces in the

accomplishment of the mission. Command and

control functions are performed through an

arrangement of personnel, equipment, communications, facilities, and procedures employed by a

commander in planning, directing, coordinating,

and controlling forces and operations in the

accomplishment of the mission. Also called C2.

(JP 1-02)

command and control system—The facilities,

equipment, communications, procedures, and personnel essential to a commander for planning,

directing, and controlling operations of assigned

forces pursuant to the missions assigned. (JP 1-02)

command element—The core headquarters element of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF).

The command element is composed of the commander, general or executive and special staff sections, headquarters section, and requisite

communications support, intelligence, and reconnaissance forces necessary to accomplish the

MAGTF mission. The command element provides command and control, intelligence, and other

support essential for effective planning and execution of operations by the other elements of the

MAGTF. The command element varies in size and

composition. Also called CE. (JP 1-02) 

commander’s estimate of the situation—A logical process of reasoning by which a commander

considers all the circumstances affecting the military situation and arrives at a decision as to a

course of action to be taken to accomplish the mission. A commander’s estimate which considers a

military situation so far in the future as to require

major assumptions is called a commander’s longrange estimate of the situation. (JP 1-02)

command post—A unit’s or subunit’s headquarters where the commander and the staff perform

their activities. In combat, a unit’s or subunit’s

headquarters is often divided into echelons; the

echelon in which the unit or subunit commander

is located or from which such commander operates is called a command post. Also called CP.

(JP 1-02)

command post report—A report used to report

the time of opening and closing of the command

post and the location of the new command post.

common control (artillery)—Horizontal and

vertical map or chart location of points in the target area and position area, tied in with the horizontal and vertical control in use by two or more

units. May be established by firing, survey, or

combination of both, or by assumption. (JP 1-02) 

common grid—A common grid is the sum of all

components of relative survey, as well as the geodetic system, coordinate system, and the projection/grid system of the operational area. Through

these components all fire support and targeting

assets are oriented the same, to prescribed accuracies, with respect to azimuth, position, and elevation. (JP 1-02)
G-10 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

common sensory boundary—A line established

by the division artillery or field artillery brigade

that divides target acquisition areas of search into

close and deep areas for the AN/TPQ-36 and AN/

TPQ-37 respectively. This boundary is established to prevent target duplication and maximize range capabilities of the radars.

complete round—A term applied to an assemblage

of explosive and nonexplosive components designed

to perform a specific function at the time and under

the conditions desired. Examples of complete rounds

of ammunition are: a. separate loading, consisting of

a primer, propelling charge and, except for blank

ammunition, a projectile and a fuze; b. fixed or semifixed, consisting of a primer, propelling charge, cartridge case, a projectile and, except when solid

projectiles are used, a fuze; c. bomb, consisting of all

component parts required to drop and function the

bomb once; d. missile, consisting of a complete warhead section and a missile body with its associated

components and propellants; and e. rocket, consisting of all components necessary to function.(JP 1-

02)

concentrated fire—Fire from a number of weapons directed at a single point or small area In

Marine artillery, the term massed fire is synonymous with concentrated fire.

concept of operations—A verbal or graphic

statement, in broad outline, of a commander’s

assumptions or intent in regard to an operation or

series of operations. The concept of operations

frequently is embodied in campaign plans and

operation plans; in the latter case, particularly

when the plans cover a series of connected operations to be carried out simultaneously or in succession. The concept is designed to give an

overall picture of the operation. It is included primarily for additional clarity of purpose. (JP 1-02)

contingent zone of fire—An area within which a

designated ground unit or fire support ship may

be called upon to deliver fire. See also zone of

fire. (JP 1-02)

continuity of operations—The degree or state of

being continuous in the conduct of functions,

tasks, or duties necessary to accomplish a military action or mission in carrying out the national

military strategy. It includes the functions and

duties of the commander, as well as the supporting functions and duties performed by the staff

and others acting under the authority and direction of the commander.

continuous fire—1. Fire conducted at a normal

rate without interruption for application of adjustment corrections or for other causes. 2. In field

artillery and naval gunfire support, loading and

firing at a specified rate or as rapidly as possible

consistent with accuracy within the prescribed

rate of fire for the weapon. Firing will continue

until terminated by the command “end of mission” or temporarily suspended by the command

“cease loading” or “check firing.” (JP 1-02)

continuous illumination fire—A type of fire in

which illuminating projectiles are fired at specified time intervals to provide uninterrupted lighting on the target or specified area. (JP 1-02)

control—1. Authority which may be less than

full command exercised by a commander over

part of the activities of subordinate or other organizations. 2. In mapping, charting, and photogrammetry, a collective term for a system of

marks or objects on the Earth or on a map or a

photograph, whose positions or elevations, or

both, have been or will be determined. 3. Physical or psychological pressures exerted with the

intent to assure that an agent or group will

respond as directed. 4. An indicator governing

the distribution and use of documents, information, or material. Such indicators are the subject

of intelligence community agreement and are

specifically defined in appropriate regulations.

See also administrative control; operational control; tactical control. (JP 1-02)
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-11 

converged sheaf—The lateral distribution of fire

of two or more pieces so that the planes of fire

intersect at a given point. See also open sheaf;

parallel sheaf; special sheaf. (JP 1-02)

convoy—1. A number of merchant ships or naval

auxiliaries, or both, usually escorted by warships

and/or aircraft, or a single merchant ship or naval

auxiliary under surface escort, assembled and

organized for the purpose of passage together. 2. A

group of vehicles organized for the purpose of

control and orderly movement with or without

escort protection. (JP 1-02) 

counterbattery fire—Fire delivered for the purpose of destroying or neutralizing indirect fire

weapon systems. (JP 1-02)

counterfire—Fire intended to destroy or neutralize enemy weapons (DOD only) Includes counterbattery, counterbombardment, and countermortar

fire. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

counterfire reference grid—A series of 5-kilometer squares covering a zone of action used to

rapidly orient target acquisition assets and firing

units to a target area.

counterintelligence—Information gathered and

activities conducted to protect against espionage,

other intelligence activities, sabotage, or assassinations conducted by or on behalf of foreign governments or elements thereof, foreign organizations,

or foreign persons, or international terrorist activities. Also called CI. (JP 1-02)

countermechanized fire—Fire delivered against

active enemy mechanized units.

countermortar fire—Fire especially directed

against enemy mortars.

counterpreparation fire—Intensive prearranged

fire delivered when the imminence of the enemy

attack is discovered. (DOD only) It is designed to:

break up enemy formations; disorganize the

enemy’s systems of command, communications,

and observation; decrease the effectiveness of

artillery preparation; and impair the enemy’s

offensive spirit. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

course of action—1. A plan that would accomplish, or is related to, the accomplishment of a mission. 2. The scheme adopted to accomplish a task

or mission. It is a product of the Joint Operation

Planning and Execution System concept development phase. The supported commander will

include a recommended course of action in the

commander’s estimate. The recommended course

of action will include the concept of operations,

evaluation of supportability estimates of supporting organizations, and an integrated time-phased

data base of combat, combat support, and combat

service support forces and sustainment. Refinement of this data base will be contingent on the

time available for course of action development.

When approved, the course of action becomes the

basis for the development of an operation plan or

operation order. Also called COA. (JP 1-02)

covering fire—1. Fire used to protect troops

when they are within range of enemy small arms.

2. In amphibious usage, fire delivered prior to the

landing to cover preparatory operations such as

underwater demolition or minesweeping. See also

fire. (JP 1-02)

crater analysis—Process by which the direction

to an artillery or mortar unit is determined from

analysis of the shell crater. Additionally, shell

fragments are collected to determine the type of

shell that caused the crater.

crest—A terrain feature of such altitude that it

restricts fire or observation in an area beyond,

resulting in dead space, or limiting the minimum

elevation, or both. (JP 1-02)

critical friendly zone—An area in which are

located friendly units or units that the maneuver

commander designates as critical. 

cueing—External actions or inputs that cause a

surveillance or target acquisition device to turn

on and search a suspect area.
G-12 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

damage assessment—1. The determination of the

effect of attacks on targets (DOD only) 2. A determination of the effect of a compromise of classified information on national security. (JP 1-02) 

danger close—In artillery and naval gunfire support, information in a call for fire to indicate that

friendly forces are within 600 meters of the target.

dead space—1. An area within the maximum

range of a weapon, radar, or observer, which cannot be covered by fire or observation from a particular position because of intervening obstacles,

the nature of the ground, or the characteristics of

the trajectory, or the limitations of the pointing

capabilities of the weapons. 2. An area or zone

which is within range of a radio transmitter, but

in which a signal is not received. 3. The volume

of space above and around a gun or guided missile system into which it cannot fire because of

mechanical or electronic limitations. (JP 1-02)

deep supporting fire—Fire directed on objectives not in the immediate vicinity of our forces,

for neutralizing and destroying enemy reserves

and weapons, and interfering with enemy command, supply, communications, and observations.

See also close supporting fire; direct supporting

fire; supporting fire. (JP 1-02)

deliberate occupation—The occupation of a

position by a unit that has been fully prepared for

occupation by the advance party; for example,

howitzer positions have been selected and initial

deflections provided to the gun guides.

destruction—A type of adjustment for destroying a given target. (JP 1-02)

destruction fire—Fire delivered for the sole purpose of destroying material objects. See also fire.

(JP 1-02)

destruction fire mission—In artillery, fire delivered for the purpose of destroying a point target.

See also fire. (JP 1-02)

detachment—1. A part of a unit separated from

its main organization for duty elsewhere. 2. A

temporary military or naval unit formed from

other units or parts of units. (JP 1-02)

direct air support center—The principal air

control agency of the US Marine air command

and control system responsible for the direction

and control of air operations directly supporting

the ground combat element It processes and coordinates requests for immediate air support and

coordinates air missions requiring integration

with ground forces and other supporting arms. It

normally collocates with the senior fire support

coordination center within the ground combat

element and is subordinate to the tactical air command center. Also called DASC. (JP 1-02)

direct fire—Gunfire delivered on a target, using

the target itself as a point of aim for either the

gun or the director. (JP 1-02)

direct support—A mission requiring a force to

support another specific force and authorizing it

to answer directly the supported force’s request

for assistance. See also close support; general

support; mutual support; support. (JP 1-02)

direct support artillery—Artillery whose primary task is to provide fire requested by the supported unit. (JP 1-02)

direct supporting fire—Fire delivered in support of part of a force, as opposed to general supporting fire which is delivered in support of the

force as a whole. See also close supporting fire;

deep supporting fire; supporting fire. (JP 1-02)

dispersion—1. A scattered pattern of hits around

the mean point of impact of bombs and projectiles

dropped or fired under identical conditions. 2. In

antiaircraft gunnery, the scattering of shots in

range and deflection about the mean point of

explosion. 3. The spreading or separating of

troops, materiel, establishments, or activities

which are usually concentrated in limited areas to

reduce vulnerability. 4. In chemical and biological

operations, the dissemination of agents in liquid or

aerosol form. 5. In airdrop operations, the scatter

of personnel and/or cargo on the drop zone. 6. In

naval control of shipping, the reberthing of a ship
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-13 

in the periphery of the port area or in the vicinity

of the port for its own protection in order to minimize the risk of damage from attack. (JP 1-02) 

displacement—1. The act of leaving a position

before occupying another. 2. The undesired

movement of a sight caused by traversing the

tube or by the shock of firing.

displacement report—A report used to report the

displacement of a firing battery or element. The

DISREP is submitted when the unit can no longer

fire from its present position due to displacement.

distant aiming point—An aiming point at least

1,500 meters from the pieces.

distributed fire—Fire so dispersed as to

engage most effectively an area target. See also

fire. (JP 1-02)

distribution of fire—The pattern of bursts in the

target area; the sheaf.

doctrine—Fundamental principles by which the

military forces or elements thereof guide their

actions in support of national objectives. It is

authoritative but requires judgment in application. (JP 1-02) 

dud—Explosive munition which has not been

armed as intended or which has failed to explode

after being armed. (JP 1-02) 

electronic line of sight—A straight, unobstructed

path from the transmit antenna of an emitter to

either a reflecting object or a receive antenna.

emergency mission—Mission occupying a position, from the march, in response to a call for fire,

without prior reconnaissance or preparation of the

position. See also hip shoot. 

end of mission—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, an order given to terminate firing on a

specific target. (JP 1-02)

end of orienting line—A point on the orienting

line marked by any sharply defined permanent or

semipermanent object such as a steeple, flag-pole,

or stake It should be visible during darkness.

explosive ordnance—All munitions containing

explosives, nuclear fission or fusion materials, and

biological and chemical agents. This includes

bombs and warheads; guided and ballistic missiles;

artillery, mortar, rocket, and small arms ammunition; all mines, torpedoes, and depth charges; demolition charges; pyrotechnics; clusters and dispensers;

cartridge and propellant actuated devices; electroexplosive devices; clandestine and improvised

explosive devices; and all similar or related items or

components explosive in nature. (JP 1-02)

field storage location—A controlled, limitedaccess area in which a unit having custody of

nuclear weapons stores them. Its primary purpose is to prevent unauthorized and uncontrolled

access to the weapons.

final protective fire—An immediately available prearranged barrier of fire designed to impede enemy

movement across defensive lines or areas. (JP 1-02)

fire—1. The command given to discharge a

weapon(s). 2. To detonate the main explosive

charge by means of a firing system. See also barrage fire; close supporting fire; concentrated fire;

counterfire; counterpreparation fire; covering

fire; deep supporting fire; destruction fire; direct

fire; direct supporting fire; distributed fire; grazing fire; harassing fire; indirect fire; interdiction

fire; neutralization fire; observed fire; radar fire;

registration fire; scheduled fire; searching fire;

supporting fire; suppressive fire; unobserved fire;

zone fire. (JP 1-02)

fire capabilities chart—A chart, usually in the

form of an overlay, showing the areas which can

be reached by the fire of the bulk of the weapons

of a unit. (JP 1-02)
G-14 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

fire capability report—A report providing the

firing status of an artillery battery or element.

The report is made when a unit occupies a new

firing position and is ready to fire, or when a

change occurs in the number of weapons available (e.g., a gun out of action due to enemy

action or a mechanical malfunction).

fire control—The control of all operations in

connection with the application of fire on a target. (JP 1-02)

fire control alignment tests—Tests performed

to determine if the on-carriage fire control equipment, the gunner’s quadrant, and the alignment

device are in correct adjustment

fire control radar—Radar used to provide target information inputs to a weapon fire control

system. (JP 1-02)

fire control system—A group of interrelated fire

control equipment and/or instruments designed for

use with a weapon or group of weapons. (JP 1-02)

fire direction center—That element of a command post, consisting of gunnery and communication personnel and equipment, by means of

which the commander exercises fire direction

and/or fire control. The fire direction center

receives target intelligence and requests for fire,

and translates them into appropriate fire direction. (JP 1-02)

fire for effect—1. Fire which is delivered after

the mean point of impact or burst is within the

desired distance of the target or adjusting/ranging point. 2. Term in a call for fire to indicate the

adjustment/ranging is satisfactory and fire for

effect is desired. (JP 1-02)

fire mission—1. Specific assignment given to a

fire unit as part of a definite plan. 2. Order used

to alert the weapon/battery area and indicate that

the message following is a call for fire. (JP 1-02)

fire planning—The planning conducted by

each supporting arm agency in response to the

supported commander’s fire support plan.

Establishing essential tasks and a scheme of

fires, scheduling of fires, provisions for attacking targets of opportunity, positioning of firing

elements and observers, communications, combat service support, and computation of firing

data (as applicable) are some of the aspects

involved in fire planning.

firepower—1. The amount of fire which may be

delivered by a position, unit, or weapon system.

2. Ability to deliver fire. (JP 1-02)

fire support coordination center—A single

location in which are centralized communications facilities and personnel incident to the coordination of all forms of fire support. (JP 1-02)

fire support coordinator—The officer in charge

of the fire support coordination center. He is the

direct representative of the commander, landing

force for the planning and coordination of all

available fire support.

fire support plan—The fire support plan is a tactical plan prepared by the FSC, containing the

necessary information for the employment of fire

support in the operation. It consists of the concept

of fires, essential fire support tasks (EFST), and

the scheme of fires.

firing chart—Map, photo map, or grid sheet

showing the relative horizontal and vertical positions of batteries, base points, base point lines,

check points, targets, and other details needed in

preparing firing data. (JP 1-02)

firing point—That point in the firing circuit

where the device employed to initiate the detonation of the charges is located. (JP 1-02)

firing position—A specific location occupied or

to be occupied by the firing battery or element.

formations—Weapons emplacement in a position area as selected by the battery commander.

forward air controller (airborne)—A specifically trained and qualified aviation officer who

exercises control from the air of aircraft engaged in

close air support of ground troops. The forward air
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-15 

controller (airborne) is normally an airborne extension of the tactical air control party. Also called

FAC(A). (JP 1-02)

forward line of own troops—A line which indicates the most forward positions of friendly forces

in any kind of military operation at a specific time.

The forward line of own troops normally identifies the forward location of covering and screening forces. Also called FLOT. (JP 1-02)

forward observer—An observer operating with

front line troops and trained to adjust ground or

naval gunfire and pass back battlefield information. In the absence of a forward air controller,

the observer may control close air support strikes.

(JP 1-02)

general support—That support which is given to

the supported force as a whole and not to any particular subdivision thereof. See also close support; direct support; support. (JP 1-02)

general support artillery—Artillery which executes the fire directed by the commander of the

unit to which it organically belongs or is

attached. It fires in support of the operation as a

whole rather than in support of a specific subordinate unit. (JP 1-02) 

general support-reinforcing—A tactical artillery mission. General support-reinforcing artillery has the mission of supporting the force as a

whole and of providing reinforcing fires for

another artillery unit. (JP 1-02)

grazing fire—Fire approximately parallel to the

ground where the center of the cone of fire does

not rise above one meter from the ground. See

also fire. (JP 1-02)

ground combat element—The core element of a

Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF) that is

task-organized to conduct ground operations. It is

usually constructed around an infantry organization but can vary in size from a small ground unit

of any type, to one or more Marine divisions that

can be independently maneuvered under the

direction of the MAGTF commander. The ground

combat element itself is not a formal command.

Also called GCE. (JP 1-02) 

gun—1. A cannon with relatively long barrel,

operating with relatively low angle of fire, and

having a high muzzle velocity. 2. A cannon with

tube length 30 calibers or more. See also howitzer. (JP 1-02)

gun carriage—A mobile or fixed support for a

gun It sometimes includes the elevating and traversing mechanisms.

gun-target line—An imaginary straight line

from gun to target. (JP 1-02)

hang fire—A malfunction that causes an undesired delay in the functioning of a firing system.

(JP 1-02)

harassing fire—Fire designed to disturb the rest

of the enemy troops, to curtail movement, and, by

threat of losses, to lower morale. See also fire.

(JP 1-02)

hasty defense—A defense normally organized

while in contact with the enemy or when contact

is imminent and time available for the organization is limited. It is characterized by improvement

of the natural defensive strength of the terrain by

utilization of foxholes, emplacements, and obstacles. (JP 1-02)

hasty occupation—The occupation of a position

that has not been fully prepared for occupation by

the advance party.

hasty survey—Techniques used to establish

rapid and sufficiently accurate direction and/or

position data through simplified procedures and

with cannon battery table of equipment and

equipment.

high angle fire—Fire delivered at angles of elevation greater than the elevation that corresponds

to the maximum range of the gun and ammunition concerned; fire, the range of which decreases

as the angle of elevation is increased. (JP 1-02)
G-16 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

high-payoff target—A target whose loss to the

enemy will significantly contribute to the success of the friendly course of action. High-payoff

targets are those high-value targets, identified

through wargaming, which must be acquired and

successfully attacked for the success of the

friendly commander’s mission. Also called HPT.

(JP 1-02)

high-value target—A target the enemy commander requires for the successful completion of

the mission. The loss of high-value targets would

be expected to seriously degrade important enemy

functions throughout the friendly commander’s

area of interest. Also called HVT. (JP 1-02)

hip shoot—Occupying a position from a convoy

without prior reconnaissance and firing from this

position in response to a call for fire. 

howitzer—1. A cannon which combines certain

characteristics of guns and mortars. The howitzer

delivers projectiles with medium velocities, either

by low or high trajectories. 2. Normally a cannon

with a tube length of 20 to 30 calibers; however,

the tube length can exceed 30 calibers and still be

considered a howitzer when the high angle fire

zoning solution permits range overlap between

charges. See also gun. (JP 1-02)

illumination fire—Fire designed to illuminate an

area. Illumination fire is used to observe enemy

operations and movements, to adjust observed

fire during hours of darkness, and to provide

assistance to friendly night operations.

immediate counterfire—The attack of the

enemy’s indirect fire systems that are inflicting

heavy damage on friendly forces.

indirect fire—Fire delivered on a target that is

not itself used as a point of aim for the weapons

or the director. (JP 1-02)

infiltration—1. The movement through or into

an area or territory occupied by either friendly or

enemy troops or organizations. The movement is

made, either by small groups or by individuals, at

extended or irregular intervals. When used in

connection with the enemy, it infers that contact

is avoided. 2. In intelligence usage, placing an

agent or other person in a target area in hostile

territory. Usually involves crossing a frontier or

other guarded line. Methods of infiltration are:

black (clandestine); grey (through legal crossing

point but under false documentation); white

(legal). (JP 1-02)

intelligence preparation of the battlespace—

An analytical methodology employed to reduce

uncertainties concerning the enemy, environment,

and terrain for all types of operations. Intelligence preparation of the battlespace builds an

extensive data base for each potential area in

which a unit may be required to operate. The data

base is then analyzed in detail to determine the

impact of the enemy, environment, and terrain on

operations and presents it in graphic form. Intelligence preparation of the battlespace is a continuing process. Also called IPB. (JP 1-02)

interdiction fire—Fire placed on an area or point

to prevent the enemy from using the area or

point. (NATO, AAP-6)

Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual-Special

Operations—A publication providing a single,

comprehensive source of information covering

weapon effectiveness, selection, and requirements for special operations munitions In addition, the closely related fields of weapon

characteristics and effects, target characteristics,

and target vulnerability are treated in limited

detail required by the mission planner. Although

emphasis is placed on weapons that are currently

in the inventory, information is also included for

some weapons not immediately available but projected for the near future. Also called JMEM-SO.

killing zone—An area in which a commander

plans to force the enemy to concentrate so as to

destroy him with conventional weapons or the tactical employment of nuclear weapons. (JP 1-02)

laid—A weapon is laid when the axis of the tube

is accurately aimed in a predetermined direction.
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-17 

laser range finder—A device which uses laser

energy for determining the distance from the

device to a place or object. (JP 1-02)

lateral spread—A technique used to place the

mean point of impact of two or more units 100

meters apart on a line perpendicular to the guntarget line. (JP 1-02)

laying—The process of orienting a weapon for

direction.

list of targets—A tabulation of confirmed or suspect targets maintained by any echelon for informational and fire support planning purposes. See

also target list. (JP 1-02)

lot—Specifically, a quantity of material all of which

was manufactured under identical conditions and

assigned an identifying lot number. (JP 1-02)

low angle fire—Fire delivered at angles of elevation below the elevation that corresponds to the

maximum range of the gun and ammunition concerned. (JP 1-02)

Marine air-ground task force—The Marine

Corps principal organization for all missions

across the range of military operations, composed of forces task-organized under a single

commander capable of responding rapidly to a

contingency anywhere in the world. The types of

forces in the Marine air-ground task force

(MAGTF) are functionally grouped into four core

elements: a command element, an aviation combat element, a ground combat element, and a

combat service support element. The four core

elements are categories of forces, not formal

commands. The basic structure of the MAGTF

never varies, though the number, size, and type of

Marine Corps units comprising each of its four

elements will always be mission dependent. The

flexibility of the organizational structure allows

for one or more subordinate MAGTFs to be

assigned. Also called MAGTF. See also aviation

combat element; combat service support element; command element; ground combat element; Marine expeditionary force; Marine

expeditionary force (forward); Marine expeditionary unit; special purpose Marine air-ground

task force; task force. (JP 1-02) 

main battle area—That portion of the battlefield

in which the decisive battle is fought to defeat the

enemy. For any particular command, the main battle area extends rearward from the forward edge of

the battle area to the rear boundary of the command’s subordinate units. (JP 1-02)

maneuver—1. A movement to place ships or aircraft in a position of advantage over the enemy. 2. A

tactical exercise carried out at sea, in the air, on the

ground, or on a map in imitation of war. 3. The

operation of a ship, aircraft, or vehicle, to cause it to

perform desired movements. 4. Employment of

forces on the battlefield through movement in combination with fire, or fire potential, to achieve a

position of advantage in respect to the enemy in

order to accomplish the mission. (JP 1-02)

mark—In artillery and naval gunfire support, to

call for fire on a specified location in order to orient the observer/spotter, to indicate targets, or to

report the instant of optimum light on the target

produced by illumination shells. In naval operations, to use a maritime unit to maintain an immediate offensive or obstructive capability against a

specified target. 

marking fire—Fire placed on a target for the

purpose of identification. (JP 1-02)

mass—1. The concentration of combat power.

2. The military formation in which units are

spaced at less than the normal distances and

intervals. (JP 1-02)

maximum rate of fire—The rate of fire that a

weapon can continue for a short period without

seriously overheating.

meteorological data—Meteorological facts pertaining to the atmosphere, such as wind, temperature, air density, and other phenomena which

affect military operations. (JP 1-02)

mil—A unit of measurement for angles. There

are 6400 mils in a complete circle.
G-18 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

misfire—1. Failure to fire or explode properly.

2. Failure of a primer or the propelling charge of

a round or projectile to function wholly or in

part. (JP 1-02)

mission—1. The task, together with the purpose,

that clearly indicates the action to be taken and

the reason therefore. 2. In common usage, especially when applied to lower military units, a duty

assigned to an individual or unit; a task. 3. The

dispatching of one or more aircraft to accomplish

one particular task. (JP 1-02)

mission-essential materiel—1. That materiel

which is authorized and available to combat,

combat support, combat service support, and

combat readiness training forces to accomplish

their assigned missions. 2. For the purpose of sizing organic industrial facilities, that Service-designated materiel authorized to combat, combat

support, combat service support, and combat

readiness training forces and activities, including

Reserve and National Guard activities, which is

required to support approved emergency and/or

war plans, and where the materiel is used to: a.

destroy the enemy or his capacity to continue

war; b. provide battlefield protection of personnel; c. communicate under war conditions; d.

detect, locate, or maintain surveillance over the

enemy; e. provide combat transportation and support of men and materiel; and f. support training

functions, but is suitable for employment under

emergency plans to meet purposes enumerated

above. (JP 1-02) 

Multiple Launch Rocket System—The Multiple

Launch Rocket System is a highly mobile, rapidfire, surface-to-surface, free-flight rocket and

guided missile system It is designed to complement cannon artillery; to attack the enemy deep;

and to strike at counterfire, air defense, and highpayoff targets. Also called MLRS.

munition—A complete device charged with

explosives, propellants, pyrotechnics, initiating

composition, or nuclear, biological, or chemical

material for use in military operations, including

demolitions. Certain suitably modified munitions

can be used for training, ceremonial or nonoperational purposes. Also called ammunition (Note:

In common usage, “munitions” (plural) can be

military weapons, ammunition, and equipment)

See also explosive ordnance. (JP 1-02)

muzzle velocity—The velocity of a projectile

with respect to the muzzle at the instant the projectile leaves the weapon. (JP 1-02)

naval surface fire support—Fire provided by

Navy surface gun, missile, and electronic warfare systems in support of a unit or units tasked

with achieving the commander’s objectives. Also

called NSFS. (JP 1-02)

NBC defense—Defensive measures that enable

friendly forces to survive, fight, and win against

enemy use of nuclear, biological, or chemical

(NBC) weapons and agents. US forces apply

NBC defensive measures before and during integrated warfare. In integrated warfare, opposing

forces employ nonconventional weapons along

with conventional weapons (NBC weapons are

nonconventional). (JP1-02)

nerve agent—A potentially lethal chemical agent

which interferes with the transmission of nerve

impulses. (JP 1-02)

net call sign—A call sign which represents all

stations within a net. (JP 1-02) 

neutralization fire—Fire which is delivered to

render the target ineffective or unusable. See also

fire. (JP 1-02)

neutralize—As pertains to military operations, to

render ineffective or unusable. (JP 1-02)

objective—The physical object of the action

taken; e.g., a definite tactical feature, the seizure

and/or holding of which is essential to the commander’s plan. See also target. (JP 1-02)

objective area—A defined geographical area

within which is located an objective to be captured or reached by the military forces. This area

is defined by competent authority for purposes of

command and control. (JP 1-02)
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-19 

obscuration fire—Fire delivered to suppress the

enemy by obscuring his view of the battlefield.

observed fire—Fire for which the point of

impact or burst can be seen by an observer. The

fire can be controlled and adjusted on the basis of

observation. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

observer-target line—An imaginary straight line

from the observer/spotter to the target. (JP 1-02)

on-call—1. A term used to signify that a prearranged concentration, air strike, or final protective fire may be called for. 2. Preplanned,

identified force or materiel requirements without

designated time-phase and destination information. Such requirements will be called forward

upon order of competent authority. See also call

for fire. (JP 1-02)

on-call target—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, a planned target other than a scheduled target on which fire is delivered when

requested. (JP 1-02)

open column—A convoy in which vehicles

move at intervals of 100 meters.

open sheaf—The lateral distribution of the fire of

two or more pieces so that adjoining points of

impact or points of burst are separated by the

maximum effective width of burst of the type

shell being used. See also converged sheaf; parallel sheaf; special sheaf. (JP 1-02)

operational control—Transferable command

authority that may be exercised by commanders at

any echelon at or below the level of combatant

command. Operational control is inherent in combatant command (command authority). Operational control may be delegated and is the

authority to perform those functions of command

over subordinate forces involving organizing and

employing commands and forces, assigning tasks,

designating objectives, and giving authoritative

direction necessary to accomplish the mission.

Operational control includes authoritative direction

over all aspects of military operations and joint

training necessary to accomplish missions

assigned to the command. Operational control

should be exercised through the commanders of

subordinate organizations. Normally this authority

is exercised through subordinate joint force commanders and Service and/or functional component

commanders. Operational control normally provides full authority to organize commands and

forces and to employ those forces as the commander in operational control considers necessary

to accomplish assigned missions. Operational control does not, in and of itself, include authoritative

direction for logistics or matters of administration,

discipline, internal organization, or unit training.

Also called OPCON. (JP 1-02) 

operations center—The facility or location on

an installation, base, or facility used by the commander to command, control, and coordinate all

crisis activities. (JP 1-02)

order of battle—The identification, strength,

command structure, and disposition of the personnel, units, and equipment of any military

force. (JP 1-02)

ordnance—Explosives, chemicals, pyrotechnics,

and similar stores, e.g., bombs, guns and ammunition, flares, smoke, napalm. (JP 1-02)

organic—Assigned to and forming an essential

part of a military organization. Organic parts of a

unit are those listed in its table of organization for

the Army, Air Force, and Marine Corps, and are

assigned to the administrative organizations of

the operating forces for the Navy. (JP 1-02)

organization for combat—A process which

places an artillery unit within an organization

(i.e., establishes a command relationship) and

assigns the unit a tactical mission.

orienting angle—A horizontal clockwise angle

from the line of fire to the orienting line. (JP 1-02)

orienting line—A line of known direction in the

battery area that serves as a basis for laying the

battery for direction. The azimuth of the orienting

line is the direction from the orienting station to a

designated end of the orienting line.
G-20 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

orienting station—A point established on the

ground which has directional control. The aiming circle is set up over this point to lay the

pieces by the orienting angle method.

overlay—A printing or drawing on a transparent or

semi-transparent medium at the same scale as a

map, chart, etc., to show details not appearing or

requiring special emphasis on the original. (JP 1-02)

parallel sheaf—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, a sheaf in which the planes (lines) of fire

of all pieces are parallel. See also converged

sheaf; open sheaf; special sheaf. (JP 1-02)

planned target—In artillery and naval gunfire support, a target on which fire is prearranged. (JP 1-02)

point target—1. A target of such small dimension

that it requires the accurate placement of ordnance

in order to neutralize or destroy it. 2. nuclear—A

target in which the ratio of radius of damage to target radius is equal to or greater than five.

position area—An area that is occupied, or to be

occupied, by an artillery unit with its elements

disposed to provide artillery support. Position

areas do not constitute a rigid restrictive area for

the artillery unit. They should be considered only

as guides to be followed as closely as the mission, terrain, and tactical situation permit.

prearranged fire—Fire that is formally planned

and executed against targets or target areas of

known location. Such fire is usually planned well

in advance and is executed at a predetermined

time or during a predetermined period of time.

See also fire; on-call. (JP 1-02)

precision fire—Fire used for registration and for

attack and destruction of point targets.

predicted fire—Fire that is delivered without

adjustment. (JP 1-02)

primary position—The position from which a

battery intends to perform its assigned mission.

priority of fire—Guidance to a fire support planner to organize and employ fire support means in

accordance with the relative importance of the

maneuver unit’s missions.

priority target—A target that firing units lay on

while not engaged in a fire mission. It is designated as critical by a maneuver commander on

the basis of type, location, or time sensitivity.

Generally, one battery will be laid on each priority target (as with a final protective fire).

projectile—An object projected by an applied

exterior force and continuing in motion by virtue

of its own inertia, as a bullet, shell, or grenade.

Also applied to rockets and to guided missiles.

(JP 1-02)

quadrant elevation—The angle between the

horizontal plane and the axis of the bore when the

weapon is laid. (DOD only) It is the algebraic

sum of the elevation, angle of site, and complementary angle of site. (JP 1-02)

radar—A radio detection device that provides

information on range, azimuth and/or elevation

of objects.

radar fire—Gunfire aimed at a target which is

tracked by radar. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

radar report—A report used by the artillery to

control and coordinate the use of the radars of the

counterbattery radar platoon. The report is used

by the counterbattery radar platoon and the controlling artillery unit.

radiation dose—The total amount of ionizing

radiation absorbed by material or tissues,

expressed in centigrays. (DOD only) The term

radiation dose is often used in the sense of the

exposure dose expressed in roentgens, which is a

measure of the total amount of ionization that the

quantity of radiation could produce in air. This

could be distinguished from the absorbed dose,

also given in rads, which represents the energy

absorbed from the radiation per gram of specified body tissue. Further, the biological dose, in

rems, is a measure of the biological effectiveness

of the radiation exposure. (JP 1-02)
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-21 

radiation dose rate—The radiation dose (dosage) absorbed per unit of time. (DOD only) A

radiation dose rate can be set at some particular

unit of time (e.g., H + 1 hour) and would be

called H + 1 radiation dose rate. (JP 1-02)

radiation exposure state—The condition of a

unit, or exceptionally an individual, deduced

from the cumulative whole body radiation dose(s)

received. It is expressed as a symbol which indicates the potential for future operations and the

degree of risk if exposed to additional nuclear

radiation. (JP 1-02)

radiation intensity—The radiation dose rate at a

given time and place. It may be used, coupled

with a figure, to denote the radiation intensity

used at a given number of hours after a nuclear

burst, e.g., RI-3 is the radiation intensity 3 hours

after the time of burst. (JP 1-02)

radiation scattering—The diversion of radiation (thermal, electromagnetic, or nuclear) from

its original path as a result of interaction or collisions with atoms, molecules, or larger particles in

the atmosphere or other media between the

source of the radiation (e.g., a nuclear explosion)

and a point at some distance away. As a result of

scattering, radiation (especially gamma rays and

neutrons) will be received at such a point from

many directions instead of only from the direction of the source. (JP 1-02)

radiation sickness—An illness resulting from

excessive exposure to ionizing radiation. The earliest symptoms are nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea, which may be followed by loss of hair,

hemorrhage, inflammation of the mouth and

throat, and general loss of energy. (JP 1-02)

radioactive decay—The decrease in the radiation intensity of any radioactive material with

respect to time. (JP 1-02)

raid—An operation, usually small scale,

involving a swift penetration of hostile territory to secure information, confuse the enemy,

or to destroy installations It ends with a

planned withdrawal upon completion of the

assigned mission. (JP 1-02)

rally point—A feature identifiable on the ground

and on a map used for assembly and recovery of

vehicles and personnel following an enemy

attack. (JP 1-02)

rate of fire—The number of rounds fired per

weapon per minute. (JP 1-02)

ready—The term used to indicate that a

weapon(s) is loaded, aimed, and prepared to fire.

(JP 1-02)

rear area—For any particular command, the area

extending forward from its rear boundary to the

rear of the area assigned to the next lower level of

command. This area is provided primarily for the

performance of support functions. (JP 1-02) 

reconnaissance by fire—A method of reconnaissance in which fire is placed on a suspected

enemy position to cause the enemy to disclose a

presence by movement or return of fire. (JP 1-02)

reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of

position—A procedure used by artillery units to

assist the rapid and orderly movement of the

artillery unit from a position area, assembly

area, or a march column into a position from

which it can deliver the fire support required to

accomplish its mission.

record as target—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, the order used to denote that the target is

to be recorded for future engagement or reference. (JP 1-02)

registration—The adjustment of fire to determine firing data corrections. (JP 1-02)

registration fire—Fire delivered to obtain accurate data for subsequent effective engagement of

targets. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

registration point—Terrain feature or other designated point on which fire is adjusted for the purpose

of obtaining corrections to firing data. (JP 1-02)
G-22 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

reinforcing—In artillery usage, tactical mission

in which one artillery unit augments the fire of

another artillery unit. (JP 1-02)

release point (road)—A well-defined point on a

route at which the elements composing a column

return under the authority of their respective

commanders, each one of these elements continuing its movement towards its own appropriate

destination. (JP 1-02)

repeat—In artillery and naval gunfire support, an

order or request to fire again the same number of

rounds with the same method of fire. (JP 1-02) 

rounds complete—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, the term used to report that the number

of rounds specified in fire for effect have been

fired. See also shot. (JP 1-02)

rules of engagement—Directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United

States forces will initiate and/or continue combat

engagement with other forces encountered. Also

called ROE. (JP 1-02)

scheduled fire—A type of prearranged fire executed at a predetermined time. (JP 1-02)

scheduled target—In artillery and naval gunfire

support, a planned target on which fire is to be

delivered at a specific time. (JP 1-02)

schedule of fire—Groups of fires or series of

fires fired in a definite sequence according to a

definite program. The time of starting the schedule may be ON CALL. For identification purposes, schedules may be referred to by a code

name or other designation. (JP 1-02)

schedule of targets—In artillery and naval gunfire support, individual targets, groups or series

of targets to be fired on, in a definite sequence

according to a definite program. (JP 1-02)

scheme of maneuver—The tactical plan to be

executed by a force in order to seize assigned

objectives. (JP 1-02)

screening fire—Fire delivered to mask friendly

maneuver elements and to conceal the nature of

their operations.

searching fire—Fire distributed in depth by successive changes in the elevation of a gun. See

also fire. (JP 1-02)

sector—1. An area designated by boundaries

within which a unit operates, and for which it is

responsible. 2. One of the subdivisions of a

coastal frontier. (JP 1-02)

sector of fire—A defined area which is required to

be covered by the fire of individual or crew served

weapons or the weapons of a unit. (JP 1-02)

security area—The forward of the three echelons of a defensive sector. It is the area forward

of the forward edge of the battle area out to the

forward positions initially assigned to the security

forces. The ground combat element commander

may extend the lateral boundaries of subordinate

units forward of the forward edge of the battle

area, giving them responsibility for the security

area within the sector to the forward limit of their

boundaries, or he may assign a security force to

operate across the entire ground combat element

frontage. (MCRP 5-12C)

self-propelled weapon—A weapon that has its

cannon permanently installed on a full tracked

vehicle which provides its own automotive

power.

semi-fixed ammunition—Ammunition in which

the cartridge case is not permanently attached to

the projectile. See also munition. (JP 1-02)

sensor—An equipment which detects, and may

indicate, and/or record objects and activities by

means of energy or particles emitted, reflected, or

modified by objects. (JP 1-02)

separate loading ammunition—(JP 1-02)

Ammunition in which the projectile and charge

are loaded into a gun separately. See also munition. (JP 1-02)
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-23 

serial—1. An element or a group of elements

within a series which is given a numerical or

alphabetical designation for convenience in planning, scheduling, and control (DOD only) 2. Any

number of aircraft under one commander, usually conveying one air-transportable unit or subunit to the same objective. (JP 1-02)

shear—In artillery and naval gunfire support,

planned planes (lines) of fire that produce a

desired pattern of bursts with rounds fired by two

or more weapons.

shelling report—Any report of enemy shelling

containing information on caliber, direction, time,

density and area shelled. (JP 1-02)

shifting fire—Fire delivered at constant range at

varying deflections; used to cover the width of a

target that is too great to be covered by an open

sheaf. (JP 1-02)

shot—In artillery and naval gunfire support, a

report that indicates a gun, or guns, have been

fired. See also rounds complete. (JP 1-02)

situation map—A map showing the tactical or

the administrative situation at a particular time.

(JP 1-02) 

situation report—A report giving the situation

in the area of a reporting unit or formation. Also

called SITREP. (JP 1-02)

slant range—The line of sight distance between

two points, not at the same level relative to a specific datum. (JP 1-02)

special ammunition supply point—A mobile

supply point where special ammunition is stored

and issued to delivery units. (JP 1-02)

special sheaf—In artillery and naval gunfire support, any sheaf other than parallel, converged, or

open. (JP 1-02)

special staff—All staff officers having duties at

a headquarters and not included in the general

(coordinating) staff group or in the personal

staff group. The special staff includes certain

technical specialists and heads of services, e.g.,

quartermaster officer, antiaircraft officer, transportation officer, etc. (JP 1-02) 

splash—1. In artillery and naval gunfire support,

word transmitted to an observer or spotter five seconds before the estimated time of the impact of a

salvo or round. 2. In air interception, target destruction verified by visual or radar means. (JP 1-02)

spot—1. To determine by observation, deviations of ordnance from the target for the purpose

of supplying necessary information for the adjustment of fire. 2. To place in a proper location

(DOD only) 3. An approved shipboard helicopter

landing site. See also ordnance. (JP 1-02)

start point—A well-defined point on a route at

which a movement of vehicles begins to be under

the control of the commander of this movement.

The first vehicle of a convoy crosses the start

point at a specified time.

submunition—Any munition that, to perform its

task, separates from a parent munition. (JP 1-02)

supplementary position—A position selected

for accomplishment of a specific mission other

than the primary mission.

support—1. The action of a force which aids,

protects, complements, or sustains another force

in accordance with a directive requiring such

action. 2. A unit which helps another unit in battle Aviation, artillery, or naval gunfire may be

used as a support for infantry. 3. A part of any

unit held back at the beginning of an attack as a

reserve. 4. An element of a command which

assists, protects, or supplies other forces in combat. (JP 1-02) 

supported commander—The commander having primary responsibility for all aspects of a task

assigned by the Joint Strategic Capabilities Plan or

other joint operation planning authority. In the

context of joint operation planning, this term refers

to the commander who prepares operation plans or

operation orders in response to requirements of the

Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. (JP 1-02)
G-24 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

supporting artillery—Artillery which executes

fire missions in support of a specific unit, usually

infantry, but remains under the command of the

next higher artillery commander. (JP 1-02)

supporting commander—A commander who

provides augmentation forces or other support to

a supported commander or who develops a supporting plan Includes the designated combatant

commands and Defense agencies as appropriate. (JP 1-02) 

supporting fire—Fire delivered by supporting

units to assist or protect a unit in combat. See

also close supporting fire; deep supporting fire;

direct supporting fire. (JP 1-02) 

suppression—Temporary or transient degradation by an opposing force of the performance of a

weapons system below the level needed to fulfill

its mission objectives. (JP 1-02)

suppression mission—A mission to suppress an

actual or suspected weapons system for the purpose of degrading its performance below the

level needed to fulfill its mission objectives at a

specific time for a specified duration. (JP 1-02) 

suppression of enemy air defenses—That activity which neutralizes, destroys, or temporarily

degrades surface-based enemy air defenses by

destructive and/or disruptive means. Also called

SEAD. (JP 1-02)

suppressive fire—(JP 1-02) Fires on or about a

weapons system to degrade its performance

below the level needed to fulfill its mission

objectives, during the conduct of the fire mission. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

survey control point—A survey station used to

coordinate survey control. (JP 1-02)

survey information center—A place where survey data are collected, correlated, and made

available to subordinate units. (JP 1-02)

survivability move—A displacement for the purpose

of increasing the artillery unit’s chance of survival.

suspected target—A possible target that requires

further correlation or additional information

before it is considered a target.

sustained rate of fire—Actual rate of fire that

a weapon can continue to deliver for an indefinite length of time without seriously overheating. (JP 1-02)

sweeping fire—A method of fire where weapons fire a constant quadrant elevation with several deflections in direct relation to the direction

of fire.

tactical air command center—The principal US

Marine Corps air command and control agency

from which air operations and air defense warning functions are directed. It is the senior agency

of the US Marine air command and control system which serves as the operational command

post of the aviation combat element commander.

It provides the facility from which the aviation

combat element commander and his battle staff

plan, supervise, coordinate, and execute all current and future air operations in support of the

Marine air-ground task force. The tactical air

command center can provide integration, coordination, and direction of joint and combined air

operations. Also called Marine TACC. (JP 1-02)

tactical control—Command authority over

assigned or attached forces or commands, or military capability or forces made available for tasking, that is limited to the detailed and, usually,

local direction and control of movements or

maneuvers necessary to accomplish missions or

tasks assigned. Tactical control is inherent in

operational control. Tactical control may be delegated to, and exercised at any level at or below

the level of combatant command. Also called

TACON. (JP 1-02) 

tactical fire direction—The control of one or

more units in the selection of targets to attack,

designation of the unit or units to fire, selection

of the method of attack, and selection of the most

suitable ammunition for the mission.
Artillery Operations ___________________________________________________________________________________________ G-25 

tactical map—A large-scale map used for tactical and administrative purposes. (JP 1-02)

tactical march—The movement of a unit or an element under actual or simulated combat conditions.

tactical mission—Defines the fire support responsibility of an artillery unit, normally a battalion, to

a supported unit or to another artillery unit.

tactics—1. The employment of units in combat.

2. The ordered arrangement and maneuver of

units in relation to each other and/or to the enemy

in order to use their full potentialities. (JP 1-02)

target—1. A geographical area, complex, or

installation planned for capture or destruction

by military forces. 2. In intelligence usage, a

country, area, installation, agency, or person

against which intelligence operations are

directed. 3. An area designated and numbered

for future firing 4. In gunfire support usage, an

impact burst which hits the target. See also

objective area. (JP 1-02)

target acquisition—The detection, identification, and location of a target in sufficient detail to

permit the effective employment of weapons. See

also target analysis. (JP 1-02)

target analysis—An examination of potential

targets to determine military importance, priority

of attack, and weapons required to obtain a

desired level of damage or casualties. See also

target acquisition. (JP 1-02)

target category—Those categories used to facilitate the processing of target data, particularly the

maintenance of counterfire target files.

targeting—1. The process of selecting targets

and matching the appropriate response to them,

taking account of operational requirements and

capabilities. 2. The analysis of enemy situations

relative to the commander’s mission, objectives,

and capabilities at the commander’s disposal, to

identify and nominate specific vulnerabilities

that, if exploited, will accomplish the commander’s purpose through delaying, disrupting,

disabling, or destroying enemy forces or

resources critical to the enemy. (JP 1-02) 

target list—The listing of targets maintained and

promulgated by the senior echelon of command;

it contains those targets that are to be engaged by

supporting arms, as distinguished from a “list of

targets” that may be maintained by any echelon

as confirmed, suspected, or possible targets for

informational and planning purposes. See also list

of targets. (JP 1-02)

target of opportunity—1. A target visible to a

surface or air sensor or observer, which is within

range of available weapons and against which fire

has not been scheduled or requested. 2. nuclear—

A nuclear target observed or detected after an

operation begins that has not been previously considered, analyzed or planned for a nuclear strike.

Generally fleeting in nature, it should be attacked

as soon as possible within the time limitations

imposed for coordination and warning of friendly

troops and aircraft. (JP 1-02)

target overlay—A transparent sheet which,

when superimposed on a particular chart, map,

drawing, tracing or other representation, depicts

target locations and designations. The target

overlay may also show boundaries between

maneuver elements, objectives and friendly forward dispositions.

target prediction—Predicting a target’s existence and location by analyzing available combat

information and intelligence.

target selection standards—Criteria established

by the G-2/S-2 of the supported unit to determine

if data is a target or a suspected target. The standards are based on the enemy’s demonstrated use

of deception and the susceptibility of our collective

systems to such deception. The artillery S-2 makes

recommendations on the establishment.

target value analysis—A method for providing a

systematic determination of which target out of

the entire target array should be attacked for the

greatest tactical benefit.
G-26 __________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

technical fire direction—The conversion of requests

for fire to appropriate firing data and fire commands.

terrain march—An off-road movement.

time of flight—In artillery and naval gunfire support, the time in seconds from the instant a

weapon is fired, launched, or released from the

delivery vehicle or weapons system to the instant

it strikes or detonates. (JP 1-02)

time on target—1. Time at which aircraft are

scheduled to attack/photograph the target. 2. The

actual time at which aircraft attack/photograph the

target. 3. The time at which a nuclear detonation is

planned at a specified desired ground zero. (JP 1-02)

towed weapon—A weapon which must be

moved by an external prime mover, such as a

truck or a tractor. The weapon is detached from

the prime mover for firing.

trig list—A list published by certain Army units

which includes essential information of accurately located survey points. (JP 1-02)

unmanned aerial vehicle—A powered, aerial

vehicle that does not carry a human operator,

uses aerodynamic forces to provide vehicle lift,

can fly autonomously or be piloted remotely, can

be expendable or recoverable, and can carry a

lethal or nonlethal payload. Ballistic or semiballistic vehicles, cruise missiles, and artillery projectiles are not considered unmanned aerial

vehicles. Also called UAV.

unobserved fire—Fire for which the points of impact

or burst are not observed. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

zone and sweep fire—A method of fire which

combines zone fire and sweeping fire, and is valuable in attacking large, regular-shaped targets.

zone fire—Artillery or mortar fires that are delivered in a constant direction at several quadrant

elevations. See also fire. (JP 1-02)

zone of action—A tactical subdivision of a larger

area, the responsibility for which is assigned to a

tactical unit; generally applied to offensive

action. See also sector. (JP 1-02)

zone of fire—An area into which a designated

ground unit or fire support ship delivers, or is

prepared to deliver, fire support. Fire may or may

not be observed. See also contingent zone of fire.

(JP 1-02)
APPENDIX H

REFERENCES AND RELATED PUBLICATIONS

Joint Publications (JPs)

1-02 Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms

3-02.2 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Embarkation

3-09 Doctrine for Joint Fire Support

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDPs)

1 Warfighting

1-0 Marine Corps Operations

1-1 Strategy

1-2 Campaigning

1-3 Tactics

2 Intelligence

3 Expeditionary Operations

4 Logistics

5 Planning

6 Command and Control

Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWPs)

2-12 MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis

3-1 Ground Combat Operations

3-11.3 Scouting and Patrolling

3-16 Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Support Element

3-16.3 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery

3-16.4 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery

3-16.5 Field Artillery Meteorology

3-16.6 Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter, and Controller

3-16.7 Marine Artillery Survey

3-17.1 River-Crossing Operations

3-22.2 Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD)

3-23 Offensive Air Support (OAS)

3-23.1 Close Air Support

3-23.2 Deep Air Support

3-24 Assault Support

3-25.3 Marine Air Command and Control System Handbook

3-25.4 Marine Tactical Air Command Center Handbook

3-25.5 Direct Air Support Center Handbook

3-25.4 Doctrine for Navy/Marine Joint Riverine Operations

3-35.5 Jungle Operations

3-35.6 Desert Operations
H-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

3-37 MAGTF Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations 

3-37.1 Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals

3-37.2 NBC Protection

3-37.3 Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Decontamination

4-11 Tactical Level Logistics

5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process

Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)

3-16A Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process

3-16B The Joint Targeting Process and Procedures for Time-Critical Targets

3-16.1C Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Multiple Launch Rocket

System (MLRS) Operations

3-16.5A Meteorology Tables

3-16.6A Multi-Service Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower (J-Fires)

3-16.7A Army Ephemeris

3-37A Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Field Handbook

3-37B Field Behavior for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Agents

3-37.2A Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance

4-11.3E Vol-1 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Basic Operations and Equipment

4-11.3E Vol-2 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Rigging Procedures

5-12A Operational Terms and Graphics

Fleet Marine Force Manuals (FMFMs)

6-18.1 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Marine Corps Fire Support System

6-21 Tactical Fundamentals of Helicopterborne Operations

7-32 Raid Operations

Marine Corps Order (MCO)

8010.1E Class V(W) Planning Factors for Fleet Marine Combat Operations Force

Army Field Manuals (FMs)

6-121 Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery

Target Acquisition

10-500-53 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging Ammunition

10-527 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging of 155-MM Howitzer

11-1 Multi-Service Procedures for the Single-Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

24-18 Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ H-3 

Websites

General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library home page—

http://155.217.58.58/atdls.htm

Marine Corps Combat Development Command, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.mccdc.usmc.mil

Combined Arms Center, Ft. Leavenworth, KS home page—

http://leav-www.army.mil/

Expeditionary Warfare Training Group, Pacific (EWTGPAC) home page—

http://www.ewtgpac.navy.mil/

Federation of American Scientist (FAS) Military Analysis Network home page—

http://fas.org/man/

Fort Sill, OK home page—

http://sill-www.army.mil/index.htm

Jane’s Defence Weekly—

http://jdw.janes.com/

Joint Development Training Center (JDTC) home page—

http://www.jdtc.eustis.army.mil/

Joint Electronic Library Homepage—

http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/

Marine Corps Doctrine Division, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/

Marine Corps Doctrine Links—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/links.htm

Naval Warfare Development Command (NWDC) home page—

http://www.nwdc.navy.mil/

U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command home page—

http:///www-tradoc.army.mil/
APPENDIX H

REFERENCES AND RELATED PUBLICATIONS

Joint Publications (JPs)

1-02 Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms

3-02.2 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Embarkation

3-09 Doctrine for Joint Fire Support

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDPs)

1 Warfighting

1-0 Marine Corps Operations

1-1 Strategy

1-2 Campaigning

1-3 Tactics

2 Intelligence

3 Expeditionary Operations

4 Logistics

5 Planning

6 Command and Control

Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWPs)

2-12 MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis

3-1 Ground Combat Operations

3-11.3 Scouting and Patrolling

3-16 Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Support Element

3-16.3 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery

3-16.4 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery

3-16.5 Field Artillery Meteorology

3-16.6 Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter, and Controller

3-16.7 Marine Artillery Survey

3-17.1 River-Crossing Operations

3-22.2 Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD)

3-23 Offensive Air Support (OAS)

3-23.1 Close Air Support

3-23.2 Deep Air Support

3-24 Assault Support

3-25.3 Marine Air Command and Control System Handbook

3-25.4 Marine Tactical Air Command Center Handbook

3-25.5 Direct Air Support Center Handbook

3-25.4 Doctrine for Navy/Marine Joint Riverine Operations

3-35.5 Jungle Operations

3-35.6 Desert Operations
H-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

3-37 MAGTF Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations 

3-37.1 Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals

3-37.2 NBC Protection

3-37.3 Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Decontamination

4-11 Tactical Level Logistics

5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process

Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)

3-16A Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process

3-16B The Joint Targeting Process and Procedures for Time-Critical Targets

3-16.1C Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Multiple Launch Rocket

System (MLRS) Operations

3-16.5A Meteorology Tables

3-16.6A Multi-Service Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower (J-Fires)

3-16.7A Army Ephemeris

3-37A Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Field Handbook

3-37B Field Behavior for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Agents

3-37.2A Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance

4-11.3E Vol-1 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Basic Operations and Equipment

4-11.3E Vol-2 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Rigging Procedures

5-12A Operational Terms and Graphics

Fleet Marine Force Manuals (FMFMs)

6-18.1 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Marine Corps Fire Support System

6-21 Tactical Fundamentals of Helicopterborne Operations

7-32 Raid Operations

Marine Corps Order (MCO)

8010.1E Class V(W) Planning Factors for Fleet Marine Combat Operations Force

Army Field Manuals (FMs)

6-121 Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery

Target Acquisition

10-500-53 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging Ammunition

10-527 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging of 155-MM Howitzer

11-1 Multi-Service Procedures for the Single-Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

24-18 Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ H-3 

Websites

General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library home page—

http://155.217.58.58/atdls.htm

Marine Corps Combat Development Command, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.mccdc.usmc.mil

Combined Arms Center, Ft. Leavenworth, KS home page—

http://leav-www.army.mil/

Expeditionary Warfare Training Group, Pacific (EWTGPAC) home page—

http://www.ewtgpac.navy.mil/

Federation of American Scientist (FAS) Military Analysis Network home page—

http://fas.org/man/

Fort Sill, OK home page—

http://sill-www.army.mil/index.htm

Jane’s Defence Weekly—

http://jdw.janes.com/

Joint Development Training Center (JDTC) home page—

http://www.jdtc.eustis.army.mil/

Joint Electronic Library Homepage—

http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/

Marine Corps Doctrine Division, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/

Marine Corps Doctrine Links—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/links.htm

Naval Warfare Development Command (NWDC) home page—

http://www.nwdc.navy.mil/

U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command home page—

http:///www-tradoc.army.mil/
APPENDIX H

REFERENCES AND RELATED PUBLICATIONS

Joint Publications (JPs)

1-02 Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms

3-02.2 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Embarkation

3-09 Doctrine for Joint Fire Support

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDPs)

1 Warfighting

1-0 Marine Corps Operations

1-1 Strategy

1-2 Campaigning

1-3 Tactics

2 Intelligence

3 Expeditionary Operations

4 Logistics

5 Planning

6 Command and Control

Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWPs)

2-12 MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis

3-1 Ground Combat Operations

3-11.3 Scouting and Patrolling

3-16 Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Support Element

3-16.3 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery

3-16.4 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery

3-16.5 Field Artillery Meteorology

3-16.6 Supporting Arms Observer, Spotter, and Controller

3-16.7 Marine Artillery Survey

3-17.1 River-Crossing Operations

3-22.2 Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD)

3-23 Offensive Air Support (OAS)

3-23.1 Close Air Support

3-23.2 Deep Air Support

3-24 Assault Support

3-25.3 Marine Air Command and Control System Handbook

3-25.4 Marine Tactical Air Command Center Handbook

3-25.5 Direct Air Support Center Handbook

3-25.4 Doctrine for Navy/Marine Joint Riverine Operations

3-35.5 Jungle Operations

3-35.6 Desert Operations
H-2 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-16.1

3-37 MAGTF Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations 

3-37.1 Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals

3-37.2 NBC Protection

3-37.3 Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Decontamination

4-11 Tactical Level Logistics

5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process

Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)

3-16A Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process

3-16B The Joint Targeting Process and Procedures for Time-Critical Targets

3-16.1C Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Multiple Launch Rocket

System (MLRS) Operations

3-16.5A Meteorology Tables

3-16.6A Multi-Service Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower (J-Fires)

3-16.7A Army Ephemeris

3-37A Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Field Handbook

3-37B Field Behavior for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Agents

3-37.2A Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance

4-11.3E Vol-1 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Basic Operations and Equipment

4-11.3E Vol-2 Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Rigging Procedures

5-12A Operational Terms and Graphics

Fleet Marine Force Manuals (FMFMs)

6-18.1 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Marine Corps Fire Support System

6-21 Tactical Fundamentals of Helicopterborne Operations

7-32 Raid Operations

Marine Corps Order (MCO)

8010.1E Class V(W) Planning Factors for Fleet Marine Combat Operations Force

Army Field Manuals (FMs)

6-121 Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery

Target Acquisition

10-500-53 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging Ammunition

10-527 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment: Rigging of 155-MM Howitzer

11-1 Multi-Service Procedures for the Single-Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

24-18 Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques
Artillery Operations _____________________________________________________________________________________________ H-3 

Websites

General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library home page—

http://155.217.58.58/atdls.htm

Marine Corps Combat Development Command, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.mccdc.usmc.mil

Combined Arms Center, Ft. Leavenworth, KS home page—

http://leav-www.army.mil/

Expeditionary Warfare Training Group, Pacific (EWTGPAC) home page—

http://www.ewtgpac.navy.mil/

Federation of American Scientist (FAS) Military Analysis Network home page—

http://fas.org/man/

Fort Sill, OK home page—

http://sill-www.army.mil/index.htm

Jane’s Defence Weekly—

http://jdw.janes.com/

Joint Development Training Center (JDTC) home page—

http://www.jdtc.eustis.army.mil/

Joint Electronic Library Homepage—

http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/

Marine Corps Doctrine Division, Quantico, VA home page—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/

Marine Corps Doctrine Links—

http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/links.htm

Naval Warfare Development Command (NWDC) home page—

http://www.nwdc.navy.mil/

U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command home page—

http:///www-tradoc.army.mil/